PM I II III Manual

OBS0LETE
PanelMate Series
Product Manual
Printed in the USA
P/N 01-00136-00
3T3_
Eaton IDT, Inc., 1992

All rights reserved
Eaton IDT, Inc. has prepared this manual for use by Eaton IDT personnel and customers. The information
contained within is the property of Eaton IDT and shall not be reproduced in whole or part without written
approval from Eaton IDT.
The material in this manual is for informational purposes only and is subject to change without notice.
Eaton IDT, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.
The following are trademarks of Eaton IDT, Inc. and are not to be reproduced nor used in any fashion
without written approval from Eaton IDT.
PanelMate
TouchPanel'
IBM-PC, IBM-XT are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
MODBUS is a trademark of Modicon, Incorporated.
Series Six and Series Six Plus are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation.
Any reference to trademark and/or copyrighted material is unintentional.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1. PanelMate Overview ....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1
Benefits ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2
Product Description ................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1
1.2.2
Enhancements .......................................................................................................................... 1-3

Hardware .................................................................................................................................. 1-5
1.2.3
Configuration Mode ............................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.4
Special Features of Configuration Mode ............................................................................. 1-7
1.2.5
1.2.6
Template Mode ....................................................................................................................... 1-8

Graphics Mode ....................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.2.7
Run Mode.................................................................................................................................
1.2.8
Improving Operator Performance .......................................................................................... 1-13
1-11
Chapter 2. Assembly and Installation .............................................................................................. 2-1

2.1
Unpacking ....................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.2
Installation Guidelines ................................................................................................................................2-3

2.2.1
Environmental Considerations ............................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Wiring Considerations ............................................................................................................. 2-4
Assembly for Desktop Configuration .......................................................................................................2-4

2.3.1
Place the Main Video Unit on a Desktop ............................................................................2-5
2.3.2
Configuration Keyboard to Main Video Unit ...................................................................... 2-5
2.3.3
2.3.4
Connect Power ......................................................................................................................... 2-5

Clear Memory ......................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.3.5
Check System Health ............................................................................................................. 2-7
2.3.6
2.3.7
Set the Real-Time Clock ......................................................................................................... 2-7

Monitor Adjustments ............................................................................................................... 2-7
Installation in an Industrial Enclosure ...................................................................................................... 2-8

2.4.1
Check System Health ................................................................................................................ 2-8
2.4.2
Load PanelMate with Your System Configuration ............................................................. 2-8
2.4.3
Install PanelMate in Enclosure ............................................................................................... 2-8
2.4.4
Connect TouchPanel to Main Video Unit ............................................................................ 2-9
2.4.5
Turn Keyswitch to Run Mode and Plug in All Cables ....................................................... 2-10
2.4.6
Connect Power ........................................................................................................................... 2-10
Connect Printer to PanelMate ................................................................................................................... 2-11

2.5.1
Parallel Printer Interface ......................................................................................................... 2-11
2.5.2
Serial Printer Interface ............................................................................................................ 2-12
Fault Relay ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
2.7 Audio Feedback Kit ............................................................................................................................................ 2-13

2.8
TouchPanelShelf .......................................................................................................................................... 2-13
.te Series
Table of Contents
2.9 Panel Mount Adaptor Kit ..................................................................................................................................2-15

2.10 Rack Mount Adaptor Kit..................................................................................................................................2-18
2.11 Remote Connection for Configuration Keyboard .......................................................................................2-21
2.12 The Acceleratl/On Interface ..........................................................................................................................2-22
2.12.1
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................2-22
2.12.2
Installation ..................................................................................................................................2-22
2.13 Dual Serial Port Board ....................................................................................................................................2-24

2.13.1
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................2-24
2.13.2
Installation ..................................................................................................................................2-24
Chapter 3. Directory Editor ............................................................................................................... -1

3.1
Before You Start Configuring Pages .........................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Entering the Configuration Mode ...................................................................................................................3-1

3.3
Functions of the Directory Editor ..............................................................................................................3-2

3.3.1
Place Titles on Pages ...............................................................................................................3-3
3.3.2
Access the Page Editor ............................................................................................................3-3
3.3.3
Edit Existing Titles .................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.4
Reordering Pages .....................................................................................................................3-4
3.3.5
Delete an Entire Page ..............................................................................................................3-4
3.3.6
Copy an Entire Page ................................................................................................................3-4
3.3.7
Check Available Memory ........................................................................................................3-4
3.3.8
Return to the Main Menu ........................................................................................................3-4
Chapter 4. Page Editor .................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1
Configuring PanelMate ...............................................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Page Layout ..........................................................................................................................................................42

4.3 Page Editor in Template Mode ........................................................................................................................4-3
4.3.1
Add a Template ........................................................................................................................4-3
4.3.2
Edit a Template Definition ..................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.3
Move Templates ........................................................................................................................4-4
4.3.4
Copy Templates ........................................................................................................................44
4.3.5
Delete Templates ...................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.3.6
Copy Templates from Another Page ..................................................................................... 4-5
4.3.7
Save a Page ................................................................................................................................ 4-5
4.3.8
Check Available Memory ........................................................................................................ 4-5
4.3.9
Access the Graphics Mode .................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.10
Exit the Page Editor ................................................................................................................. 4-6
4.4 Page Editor in Graphics Mode ........................................................................................................................ 4-6
4.5
11
4.4.1
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.4.2
ISA Symbol Set (PanelMate II/III) ....................................................................................... 47
4.4.3
Graphics Mode Page Editing ................................................................................................. 4-7
Character Editor ........................................................................................................................................... 49
PanelMate Series
Table of Contents
4.5.2
Edit ......................................................................................................................... 4-9

Select Font ............................................................................................................. 4-9
4.5.3
Copy Character ...................................................................................................... 4-9
4.5.1
4.6
4 .7
4.8
4.5.4
Help ....................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.5.5
Show Fonts ............................................................................................................. 4-10
4.5.6
Restore ................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.5.7
Save Font ................................................................................................................ 4-10
Symbol Editor ........................................................................................................................ 4 - 1 1

Window Mode ............................................................................................................................. 4-14
Parameters Editing Functions .................................................................................................. 4 - 1 5
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.9
Parameters Editing .................................................................................................. 4 - 1 5

Direct Editing Functions .......................................................................................... 4 - 1 5
Example Page ............................................................................................................................... 4 - 1 6

4.9.1
4.9.2
Exploring the Example Page ..................................................................................... 4-17

Configuring the Example Page ................................................................................. 4 - 1 9
Chapter 5. Indicator Template and Graphic Element Editors ............................................................ 5-1

5.1
Functions of Indicator Templates ............................................................................................. 5 - 1
5 .1.1
Defining Indicator Templates .................................................................................. 5 - 1
5.1.2
Editing Existing Templates ...................................................................................... 5 - 6
5.1.3
Exit the Indicator Template Editor ......................................................................... 5 - 6
5.2
Gathering Information for Configuration .................................................................................. 5 - 6
5.3
Functions of Graphic Elements (PanelMate II/III) ...................................................................... 5 - 8
5.3.2
Device Name .......................................................................................................... 5-8

Symbol Definition Table ......................................................................................... 5-8
5.3.3
Control Button Definition Table ............................................................................. 5 - 1 1
5.3.4
Editing Existing Elements ....................................................................................... 5 - 1 1
5.3.5
Exit the Graphic Element Editor ............................................................................. 5 - 1 1
5.3.1
5.4
Gathering Information for Configuration .................................................................................. 5 - 1 1
Chapter 6. Readout Template and Readout Element Editors ............................................................ 6-1

6.1
Functions of Readout Templates ............................................................................................. 6-1
6 .1.1
Defining Readout Templates ................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2
Editing Existing Templates ...................................................................................... 6 - 6
6.1.3
Exit the Readout Template Editor .......................................................................... 6 - 6
6.2
Gathering Information for Configuration .................................................................................. 6-6
6.3
Functions of Readout Elements (PanelMate Il/III) ..................................................................... 6-8
6.3.2
Readout Length ...................................................................................................... 6-8

Character Size ......................................................................................................... 6-8
6.3.3
Direction ................................................................................................................. 6-8
6.3.4
Value Expression ..................................................................................................... 6-8
6.3.1
PanelMate Series
iii
Table of Contents
6.4
6.3.5
High Alarm Expression ........................................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.6
Low Alarm Expression ............................................................................................................ 6-9
6.3.7
Deadband Range ..................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.8
Alarm Acknowledgment .......................................................................................................... 6-10
6.3.9
Control Type ............................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.3.10
Numeric Control Definition ..................................................................................................... 6-10
6.3.11
Control Indicator Position ........................................................................................................ 6-10
6.3.12
Control Indicator Display ........................................................................................................ 6-10
6.3.13
Control Button Definition Table ............................................................................................. 6-11
6.3.14
Editing Existing Elements ........................................................................................................ 6-11
6.3.15
Exit the Readout Template Editor ......................................................................................... 6-11
Gathering Information for Configuration ................................................................................................. 6-11
Chapter 7. Bar Template and Bar Element Editors ........................................................................................... 7-1

7.1
7.1.1
Defining Bar Templates ........................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2
Editing Existing Templates ...................................................................................................... 7-6
7.1.3
Exit the Bar Template Editor .................................................................................................. 7-6
7.2
Gathering Information for Configuration ................................................................................................. 7-7
7.3
Functions of Bar Elements (PanelMate II/III) ........................................................................................ 7-9
7.4
iv
Functions of Bar Templates ........................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.3.1
Bar Direction .............................................................................................................................. 7-9
7.3.2
Bar Height and Width ............................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.3
Bar and Erase Colors .............................................................................................................. 7-9
7.3.4
Device Name ............................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.3.5
Maximum Calibration ............................................................................................................... 7-10
7.3.6
Minimum Calibration ................................................................................................................ 7-10
7.3.7
Value Expression ........................................................................................................................7-10
7.3.8
High Alarm Expression ............................................................................................................ 7-10
7.3.9
Low Alarm Expression ............................................................................................................. 7-10
7.3.10
Deadband Range .......................................................................................................................7-11
7.3.11
Alarm Acknowledgment ...........................................................................................................7-11
7.3.12
Control Type ...............................................................................................................................7-11
7.3.13
Numeric Control Definition .....................................................................................................7-12
7.3.14
Control Indicator Position ........................................................................................................7-12
7.3.15
Control Indicator Display ........................................................................................................7-12
7.3.16
Control Button Definition Table .............................................................................................7-13
7.3.17
Editing Existing Elements ........................................................................................................7-13
7.3.18
Exit the Bar Element Editor ....................................................................................................7-13
Gathering Information for Configuration .................................................................................................7-13
PanelMate Series
Table of Contents
Chapter 8. Display Template and Message Element Editors .............................................................

8.1
8-1
Functions of Display Templates ................................................................................................8-1

8.1.1
Defining Display Templates .....................................................................................8-1
8.1.2
Editing Existing Templates ......................................................................................8-5
8.1.3
Exit the Display Template Editor .............................................................................8-5
8.2
Gathering Information for Configuration ..................................................................................8-5
8.3
Functions of the Message Element (PanelMate II/III) .......................................................... 8-8
8.4
8.3.1
Message Length ...................................................................................................
8-8
8.3.2
Direction .............................................................................................................. 8-8
8.3.3
Message Expression .............................................................................................
8-9
8.3.4
Global Messages ...................................................................................................
8-9
8.3.5
Test Message .......................................................................................................
8-9
8.3.6
Control Indicator Position ...................................................................................... 8-9
8.3.7
Control Indicator Display ....................................................................................... 8-9
8.3.8
Control Button Definition Table ............................................................................. 8-10
8.3.9
Message Library ..................................................................................................
8.3.10
Register References Within Messages .................................................................... 8-11
8.3.11
Clock and Calendar Access .................................................................................... 8-15
8.3.12
Editing Existing Elements ....................................................................................... 8-15
8.3.13
Exit the Message Element Editor ............................................................................ 8-15
8-10
Gathering Information for Configuration .................................................................................. 8-15
Chapter 9. Defining System Parameters ......................................................................................... 9-1

9.1
System Utilities Menu .............................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2 Define PLC Name and Port Parameters ......................................................................................... 9-2
9.3
9.4
9.2.1
Port Parameter Table ............................................................................................ 9-2
9.2.2
Format for Generic Protocol .................................................................................. 9-5
9.2.3
PLC Name Table ...............................................................................................
9-6
9.2.4
Default PLC Name ...............................................................................................
9-7
9.2.5
Screen Scan Delay .................................................................................................
9-8
9.2.6
Alarm Scan Delay ................................................................................................
9-8
9.2.7
Message Scan Delay ..............................................................................................
9-8
Remote I/O Configuration ......................................................................................................9-9

9.3.1
Active Rack Table ................................................................................................. 9-9
9.3.2
Active Block Transfer Table ................................................................................... 9-10
Define System Parameters ....................................................................................................... 9-11

9.4.1
9.4.2
Audio Output ......................................................................................................... 9-11

Redefine Fonts (PanelMate II/III) ........................................................................... 9-12
9.4.3
Fault Relay ............................................................................................................. 9-12
9.4.4
Host Display Window (PanelMate III) ..................................................................... 9-13
9.4.5
Immediate Automatic PLC Page Change ................................................................. 9-13
PanelMate Series
Table of Contents
9.5
9.4.6
9.4.7
Page Status Line Display .........................................................................................................9-13
9.4.8
Set Time and Date ....................................................................................................................9-14
9.4.9
Startup Page Number ..............................................................................................................9-14
9.4.10
Screen Blanking Inactivity Period ..........................................................................................9-15
9.4.11
Automatic Cancel Inactivity Period ......................................................................................9-15
9.4.12
Control Bit Reset Delay ...........................................................................................................9-15
9.4.13
Remote Alarm Acknowledge Bit ...........................................................................................9-16
9.4.14
Remote Silence Alarm Horn Bit ...........................................................................................9-16
9.4.15
Remote Enable Fault Relay Bit .............................................................................................9-17
9.4.16
Page Change Register ..............................................................................................................9-17
9.4.17
Reset Clock Bit ..........................................................................................................................9-18
Retry Delay ...............................................................................................................................9-14
System Online Labels ...................................................................................................................................9-19

9.5.1
Screen One....................................................................................................................................9-20
9.5.2
Screen Two ..................................................................................................................................9-21
9.5.3
Screen Three ...............................................................................................................................9-21
9.5.4
Screen Four .................................................................................................................................9-22
Chapter 10. Documentation, Memory and System Health Utilities ....................................................... 10-1
10.1
10.2
10.3
System Utilities Menu ................................................................................................................................. 10-1

Print Documentation ................................................................................................................................... 10-2
Transfer Memory ......................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.3.1
10.3.2
10.3.3
10.3.4
10.3.5
10.4
10.5
Accessing the Transfer Memory Utility ................................................................................10-3

Memory Transfers Using a BackPac ....................................................................................10-3
Memory Transfer Using EPROM Reader on 2900 Series ..................................................10-4
Memory Transfer Using EPROM on the 2800 Series .......................................................10-5
Memory Transfers Using the IBM PC .................................................................................10-6
Check System Health .................................................................................................................................. 10-7

10.4.1
10.4.2
Display Test ................................................................................................................................ 10-7

Configuration Keyboard Test ..................................................................................................10-8
10.4.3
Membrane Keypads Test .........................................................................................................10-8
10.4.4
Tone Relay, Battery Test ......................................................................................................... 10-8
Clear Memory .............................................................................................................................................. 10-9
Chapter 11. Run Mode .....................................................................................................................11-1

11.1 Power-Up Sequence in Run Mode ............................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.1
Run Normal Power-Up Diagnostics ...................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.2
Load System Configuration ..................................................................................................... 11-3
11.1.3
Energize the Fault Relay ......................................................................................................... 11-3
11.1.4
Initialize All Control Button Bit References ....................................................................... 11-3
11.2 Entering Run Mode .......................................................................................................................................... 11-3
vi
PanelMate Series
vi
PanelMate Series
Table of Contents
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
Test in Run Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 11-3

Run Mode Operations .............................................................................................................................. 11-3
11.4.1
System Overview .....................................................................................................................
11-4
11.4.2
11.4.3
Default Control Button Labels .............................................................................................. 11-5

Call a New Page .................................................................................................................... 11-5
11.4.4
Call the Directory ..................................................................................................................
11-5
11.4.5
Operator Input .......................................................................................................................
11-6
11.4.6
Alarms.......................................................................................................................................
11-6
11.4.7
Alarm Summary Page ...........................................................................................................
11-7
11.4.8
View or Acknowledge Alarms ............................................................................................... 11-7
11.4.9
Fault Relay ............................................................................................................................... 11-8
System Errors .............................................................................................................................................. 11-9

Communication Errors............................................................................................................................... 11-11
11.6.1
Serial and Acceleratl/On ..........................................................................................................11-11
PanelMate II/III Online Operation ...........................................................................................................11-13
11.7.1
11.7.2
Alarms........................................................................................................................................... 11-13
Element Selection ...................................................................................................................... 11-14
Chapter 12. Hardware Maintenance ................................................................................................. 12-1

12.1 Regular Maintenance ...................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 Monitor Adjustments ....................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.3 Problems with the TouchPanel ....................................................................................................................... 12-3
12.4 Problem ............................................................................................................................................................... 12-3
Chapter 13. Troubleshooting Guide .................................................................................................. 13-1
13.1 Problems with the Monitor .............................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.2 Problems with the Configuration Keyboard ................................................................................................. 13-2
Chapter 14. Allen-Bradley PLCs ....................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.2 Memory ............................................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.3 Possible Configurations ................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.3.1
Serial Communication to One PLC ....................................................................................... 14-2
14.3.2
Data Highway Connections Using Serial Communication Modules ................................. 14-3
14.3.3
Multiple Connections to a Single PanelMate ........................................................................ 14-4
14.3.4
Multiple Data Highways Using Serial Communication ...................................................... 14-5
14.3.5
PLC-3 Configurations Using Serial Communications ......................................................... 14-6
14.3.6
PLC-5 Configurations Using Serial Communications ......................................................... 14-8
14.4 Allen-Bradley Modules for Serial Communication ..................................................................................... 14-11
14.5 Serial Cabling ..................................................................................................................................................... 14-12
14.6 Serial Communications Parameters .............................................................................................................. 14-12
14.7 Switch Settings ................................................................................................................................................... 14-13
PanelMate Series
vii
Table of Contents
14.7.1
Modules for PLC Data Highway Connection ...................................................................... 14-13
14.7.2
Modules for PanelMate to Data Highway Communication ................................................. 1415
14.7.3
Modules for Direct Connection .............................................................................................. 1417
14.7.4
Modules for PanelMate to Data Highway Plus Connection ............................................... 14-18
14.8 Word and Bit References ............................................................................................................................... 14 19

14.8.1
Word References ...................................................................................................................... 14-19
14.8.2
PLC Bit References .................................................................................................................. 1420
14.9 PLC Specific Word and Bit References ....................................................................................................... 14-21

14.9.1
Allen-Bradley PLC-2 Word and Bit References .................................................................. 14-21
14.9.2
14.9.3
Chapter 15. The Acceleratl/On Interface ............................................................................................15-1

15.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.2 Possible Configurations ................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.2.1
Direct Data Highway Connections ......................................................................................... 15-2
15.2.2
Multiple Data Highway Connections ..................................................................................... 15-2
15.2.3
Serial and Direct Data Highway Connections ..................................................................... 15-3
15.2.4
Direct Data Highway Plus Connections ............................................................................... 15-3
15.2.5
Serial and Direct Data Highway Plus Connections ............................................................. 15-4
15.2.6
Direct Data Highway and a Data Highway Plus Connections ........................................... 15-5
15.2.7
Direct Remote I/O Connections ............................................................................................. 15-6
15.2.8
Serial and Direct Remote I/O Connections .......................................................................... 15-6
15.3 Cabling ................................................................................................................................................................ 15-7

15.4 Communication Parameters ........................................................................................................................... 15-8
15.5 Diagnostic Indicators .......................................................................................................................................15-8
15.6 Word and Bit References ............................................................................................................................... 15-8
15.6.1
Word References .......................................................................................................................15-8
15.6.2
PLC Bit References ...................................................................................................................15-10
15.7 PLC Specific Word and Bit References ...................................................................................................... 15-10

15.7.1
Data Highway and Data Highway Plus ................................................................................. 15-10
15.7.2
Remote 1/0 ..................................................................................................................................15-10
15.7.3
Active Racks ...............................................................................................................................15-13
15.7.4
Block Transfers ...........................................................................................................................15-14
15.7.5
Unsolicited Write Message ......................................................................................................15-18
Chapter 16. Eaton PLCs ................................................................................................................... 16-1

16.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................16-1
16.2 Memory ................................................................................................................................................................16-1
16.3 Possible Configurations ...................................................................................................................................16-3
16.3.1
viii
Direct ............................................................................................................................................16-3
PanelMate Series
Table of Contents
16.4
16.3.2
Cabling
16.5
16.6
Communications Parameters .................................................................................................................... 16-4

Switch Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 16-5
16.6.1
16.6.2
16.7
16.8
Multiple ....................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................
CPU20 .......................................................................................................................................
CPU25 and CPU50 ................................................................................................................
16-3
16-4
16-5
16-6
Word and Bit References ........................................................................................................................... 16-8

16.7.1
Word References ....................................................................................................................
16-8
16.7.2
PLC Bit References ..............................................................................................................
16-9
PLC Specific Word and Bit References ................................................................................................... 16-10

16.8.1
Eaton Register and Device References ............................................................................... 16-10
16.8.2
CPU20 PLC ID Number Setting ............................................................................................. 16-11
16.8.3
CPU25 and CPU50 PLC ID Number Settings ..................................................................... 16-11
Chapter 17. General Electric PLCs .................................................................................................. 17-1

17.1
17.2
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 17-1

Memory ....................................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.3
Possible Configurations .............................................................................................................................. 17-3
17.4
17.3.1
17.3.2
Direct ........................................................................................................................................ 17-3

Multidrop ................................................................................................................................. 17-3
Cabling
.......................................................................
17-4
17.4.1
17.4.2
PanelMate ...............................................................................................................................
CCM2 ......................................................................................................................................
17-4
17-5
17.4.3
Series Five................................................................................................................................. 17-6
17.4.4
Series Six and Six Plus ............................................................................................................17-7
17.5
17.6
Switch Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 17-8
17.7
17.6.1
17.6.2
CCM ........................................................................................................................................
CCM2 ......................................................................................................................................
17-8
17-10
17.6.3
CCM3 ......................................................................................................................................
17-11
17.6.4
I/O CCM ..................................................................................................................................
17-11
17.6.5
Series Five CPU ..................................................................................................................... 17-13
Word and Bit References............................................................................................................................. 17-14

17.7.1
Word References..................................................................................................................... 17-14
17.7.2
17.8
PLC Bit References ...............................................................................................................
17-15
PLC Specific Word and Bit References ................................................................................................. 17-16

17.8.1
GE Series Five PLC Word and Bit References .................................................................. 17-16
17.8.2
GE Series Six Word and Bit References ............................................................................... 17-17
17.8.3
GE Series Six Plus Word and Bit References ....................................................................... 17-23
Chapter 18. ASCII Generic Protocol ..................................................................................................18-1

18.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 18-1
PanelMate Series
ix
Table of Contents
18.2 Hardware Interface to PLCs .........................................................................................................................18-1

18.3 Method of Operation .......................................................................................................................................18-2
18.4 PanelMate Configuration - Octal vs. Decimal .............................................................................................18-3
18.5 Generic Protocol Format .................................................................................................................................18-5
18.5.1
Frames ........................................................................................................................................18-5
18.5.2
Task Blocks ................................................................................................................................18-6
18.5.3
Task Codes .................................................................................................................................18-7
18.5.4
Block Check Calculation .........................................................................................................18-13
18.6 PLC Name and Port Parameters Editor ......................................................................................................18-15
18.7 Checking the Communication Link ...............................................................................................................18-15
18.8 Generic Protocol Driver Development .........................................................................................................18-16
18.8.1
Overview ......................................................................................................................................18-16
18.8.2
Establish Communication Link ...............................................................................................18-16
18.8.3
Implement Generic Protocol Frames ....................................................................................18-18
18.8.4
Communications Using Task Blocks .....................................................................................18-20
18.9 Main Program Functions .................................................................................................................................18-23
Chapter 19. Modicon PLCs .............................................................................................................. 19-1
19.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................19-1
19.2 Memory ...............................................................................................................................................................19-1
19.3 Possible Configurations .....................................................................................................................................19-1
19.3.1
Direct ............................................................................................................................................19-1
19.3.2
Multiple PLCs on a Single Modbus .......................................................................................19-2
19.4 Cabling ..................................................................................................................................................................19-3
19.5 Communications Parameters ...........................................................................................................................19-3
19.6 Switch Settings ....................................................................................................................................................19-4
19.6.1
984 and 584 Modbus Ports ......................................................................................................19-4
19.6.2
884 Modbus Ports ......................................................................................................................19-4
19.6.3
Micro 84/J375 Modbus Adapter ..............................................................................................19-5
19.6.4
484 PLC/J474 Modbus Communication Interface ...............................................................19-7
19.7 Word and Bit References ................................................................................................................................19-10
19.7.1
Word References ......................................................................................................................19-10
19.7.2
PLC Bit References ..................................................................................................................19-11
19.8 PLC Specific Word and Bit References ......................................................................................................19-12
19.8.1
Modicon Micro 84, 184, 384 and 484 Register, Input and Coil References ........................19-12
19.8.2
Modicon 584, 884 and 984 Register, Input and Coil References ..........................................19-13
Chapter 20. Reliance AutoMate PLCs ............................................................................................... 20-1
20.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................20-1
20.2 Memory ................................................................................................................................................................20-2
20.3 Possible Configurations ....................................................................................................................................20-2
20.3.1
Direct ............................................................................................................................................20-2
PanelMate Series
Table of Contents
20.3.2
20.4 Cabling
Serial Communications Card ................................................................................................. 20-3

20-4
20.5 Communications Parameters .................................................................................................................... 20-4

20.6 Switch Settings ................................................................................................................................................ 20-5
20.6.1
20.6.2
Serial Communications Card .................................................................................................. 20-5

R-Net Gateway ........................................................................................................................ 20-5
20.7 Word and Bit References ................................................................................................................................20-7

20.7.1
Word References ....................................................................................................................... 20-7
20.7.2
PLC Bit References ................................................................................................................. 20-8
20.8
PLC Specific Word and Bit Reference ..................................................................................................... 20-9

20.8.1
Reliance Word and Bit References ...................................................................................... 20-9
Chapter 21. Siemens PLCs ............................................................................................................ 21-1

21-1
21.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 21-1
21.2 Memory ......................................................................................................................................................
21.3
Possible Configurations .............................................................................................................................. 21-3
21.4
21.5
21.6
21.7
21.3.1
21.3.2
Cabling
Direct Connection .................................................................................................................... 21-3

Multiple Connection ................................................................................................................ 21-3
.......................................................................
21-4

Word and Bit References............................................................................................................................ 21-5
21.6.1
21.6.2
Word References........................................................................................................................21-5
PLC Bit References .................................................................................................................21-6
PLC Specific Word, Byte and Bit References ......................................................................................... 21-7

21.7.1
Siemens Word, Byte, and Bit References .............................................................................21-7
Chapter 22. Square D PLCs ........................................................................................................... 22-1
22.1
22.2
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 22-1

Memory ........................................................................................................................................................ 22-1
22.3
Possible Configurations ...............................................................................................................................22-2

22.3.1
22.3.2
Direct ...........................................................................................................................................22-2
Network .......................................................................................................................................22-2
22.4
Cabling ............................................................................................................................................................22-3
22.5
22.6
Communications Parameters .....................................................................................................................22-4

Switch Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 22-5
22.6.1
22.6.2
22.7
22.8
Thumbwheel Switches ..............................................................................................................22-5

DIP Switches ............................................................................................................................ 22-6
Word and Bit References ............................................................................................................................22-8

22.7.1
Word References ..................................................................................................................... 22-8
22.7.2
PLC Bit References ................................................................................................................ 22-10
PLC Specific Word and Bit References ..................................................................................................22-10

22.8.1
PanelMate Series
Square D Sy/Max Word and Bit References .......................................................................22-10
xi
Table of Contents
Chapter 23. Texas Instruments PLCs .............................................................................................. 23-1

23.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................23-1
23.2 Memory ...............................................................................................................................................................23-1
23.3 Possible Configurations ...................................................................................................................................23-3
23.3.1
Direct ...........................................................................................................................................23-3
23.3.2
Direct with DCPM .....................................................................................................................23-3
23.4 Cabling ................................................................................................................................................................23-4
23.5 Communications Parameters ..........................................................................................................................23-4
23.6 Switch Settings ...................................................................................................................................................23-5
23.6.1
Dual Communication Port Module ........................................................................................23-5
23.7 Word and Bit References ...............................................................................................................................23-6
23.7.1
Word References ......................................................................................................................23-6
23.7.2
PLC Bit References ..................................................................................................................23-7
23.8 PLC Specific Word and Bit References ......................................................................................................23-7
23.8.1
Texas Instruments Word and Bit References .....................................................................23-7
Chapter 24. Westinghouse Numa-Logic PLCs ................................................................................... 24-1
24.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................24-1
24.2 Memory ...............................................................................................................................................................24-1
24.3 Possible Configurations ....................................................................................................................................24-2
24.3.1
Direct ........................................................................................................................................... 24-2
24.4 Cabling ................................................................................................................................................................. 24-3
24.5 Communications Parameters .......................................................................................................................... 24-4
24.6 Switch Settings ................................................................................................................................................... 24-5
24.7 Word and Bit References ................................................................................................................................ 24-5
24.7.1
Word References ...................................................................................................................... 24-5
24.7.2
PLC Bit References ................................................................................................................. 24-6
24.8 PLC Specific Word and Bit References ......................................................................................................247
24.8.1
Westinghouse Word and Bit References .............................................................................. 247
Appendix A. Transfer/Merge Utility .......................................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................A-1
A.1.1
Utility Requirements ................................................................................................................ A-1
A.1.2
Filenaming Conventions ........................................................................................................... A-2
A.1.3
Cabling ........................................................................................................................................ A-3
A.1.4
Starting the Transfer/Merge Utility ...................................................................................... A-3
A.2 Communication Parameters ............................................................................................................................. A-3
A.3 Menu Selections ................................................................................................................................................. A-4
A.4 Upload Configuration from PanelMate ........................................................................................................ A-4
A.4.1
Configuration Name .................................................................................................................. A-4
A.5 Download Configuration to PanelMate ........................................................................................................ A-5
A.5.1
Configuration Name .................................................................................................................. A-5
xii
PanelMate Series
Table of Contents
A.6
Create New Configuration ..........................................................................................................................A-6

A.6.1
A.6.2
A.6.3
A.7
A.8
A.9
Create from Existing Configuration ...................................................................................... A-6

Create from a Blank Configuration ...................................................................................... A-7
Build Configuration Editor ..................................................................................................... A-7
Edit Existing Configuration .........................................................................................................................A-8

Display Configuration ..................................................................................................................................A-10
Rename Configuration ................................................................................................................................A-10
A.10 Delete Configuration ...................................................................................................................................A-10

A.11 Edit Utility Parameters ...............................................................................................................................A-il
A.12
A.11.1
A.11.2
EDIT ........................................................................................................................................
Base Directory ........................................................................................................................
A.11.3
Temporary Directory .............................................................................................................. A-11
A.11.4
A.11.5
Communication Port ............................................................................................................... A-11

Baud Rate................................................................................................................................. A-12
A.11.6
Parity ......................................................................................................................................... A-12
A.11.7
Data Bits .................................................................................................................................. A-12
A.11.8
Stop Bits ................................................................................................................................... A-12
Merge File Editor ...................................................................................................................................... A-13

A.12.1
A.13
A.14
A-11
A-11
Copying an Individual File ...................................................................................................... A-13
A.12.2
DISP CONFIG ........................................................................................................................ A-15
Directory Editor ......................................................................................................................................... A-16
A.13.1
A.13.2
SELCT TITLE .......................................................................................................................

SWAP PAGES ......................................................................................................................
A-16
A-16
A.13.3
MOVE PAGE .......................................................................................................................
A-16
A.13.4
COPY PAGE ........................................................................................................................
A-16
A.13.5
DELETE .................................................................................................................................
A-17
A.13.6
MEMORY FREE ................................................................................................................
A-17
A.13.7
MORE ....................................................................................................................................
A-17
A.13.8
EXIT ........................................................................................................................................ A-17
Message Library Editor ..............................................................................................................................A-17
A.14.1
A.14.2
SELECT ..................................................................................................................................
PREV MESS ..........................................................................................................................
A-18
A-19
A.14.3
NEXT MESS ...........................................................................................................................
A-19
A.14.4
MEMORY FREE .................................................................................................................
A-19
A.14.5
SAVE .......................................................................................................................................
A-19
A.14.6
EXIT .........................................................................................................................................
A-19
Appendix B. Detailed Specifications ..................................................................................................................... B-1

B.1
B.2
Communications to PLCs ...........................................................................................................................B-1

B.1.1
Master Mode .............................................................................................................................. B-1
Communications to PLCs or Host Computer .......................................................................................... B-1
PanelMate Series
xiii
Table of Contents
B.2.1
Slave Mode ............................................................................................................. B-1
B.3
B.4
Communications to Serial Printers ............................................................................................ B-1

Fault Relay ............................................................................................................................. B-1
B.5
Main Processor ....................................................................................................................... B-1
B.6
Monitor .................................................................................................................................. B-2
B.7
Environment ........................................................................................................................... B-2
B.8
Power Requirements ............................................................................................................... B-2
B.9
Configuration Keyboard Communications ................................................................................ B-2
B.10
Other ...................................................................................................................................... B-2
Appendix C. Demonstration Page Program ..................................................................................... C-1
r
xiv
PanelMate Series
Introduction
OBJECTIVES
In this introduction, you will learn:
Who this manual is written for
How this manual is organized
Suggested ways for using this manual
Which notational conventions are used
How to Use this Manual

Welcome to the Eaton IDT PanelMate Product Manual. This is the only manual you will receive with
your PanelMate I, PanelMate II or PanelMate III System. The manual contains everything you need to
know about PanelMate assembly, screen configuration, installation, operation and maintenance.
Since PanelMate II and PanelMate III include all of the features and capabilities of PanelMate I, this
manual contains descriptions to fit all three products. Any features unique to any of the three specific
PanelMate's will be noted as such.
As a new user of PanelMate, you will want to get acquainted with how PanelMate works and how it is
supposed to be used before you begin configuration of your own control system. Therefore, we
strongly recommend that you take time now to read Chapter 1, "PanelMate Overview." Once you have
an understanding of what you can expect from PanelMate, you can proceed through the manual, using
it as a guide for assembly, configuration, installation, operation and maintenance. To make the manual
more readable, information about PanelMate's interaction with specific programmable controllers
(PLCs) is segregated into chapters. After you have become accomplished at configuring screens and
have placed PanelMate in operation, this manual will become a reference book for regular maintenance,
troubleshooting and repair.
This manual is written for system engineers, plant engineers, plant maintenance personnel and Eaton
IDT personnel; any persons that may be involved in configuring screens, or installing or maintaining a
PanelMate. This manual is not written for plant personnel who will be using the PanelMate to
control factory operations. The task of informing plant operators on how to use PanelMate in specific
situations is left to the people who configured the screens. However, parts of Chapter 11 may be used
for overall guidance in training plant operators.
PanelMate Series
I-1
Typographical Conventions
Typographical Conventions
Certain typographical conventions are used consistently in this manual. They include: < Enter
>
BackPac
Refers to the enter/return key on the Configuration Keyboard.

Non-volatile, reprogrammable device used to read, load, and save user configuration data.
ISA Symbols
Set of graphic symbols conforming to the Industrial Society of America standards.
PLC
Abbreviation for programmable logic controller
[]
Delineates a PLC word or bit reference
<>
Delineates a specific key on the Configuration Keyboard
Cursor
Refers to the up, down, right and left arrow keys located on the numeric
arrow keys
keypad of the Configuration Keyboard
PanelMate II and PanelMate III contain all of the functionality provided in PanelMate I, along with several
other advanced capabilities. Therefore, when the term PanelMate is used, it references the operation of
PanelMate I, PanelMate II, and PanelMate III. The terms PanelMate I, PanelMate II, and PanelMate III
are used individually when describing a unique capability inherent only to that specific PanelMate.
Manual Organization
This manual is divided into five parts:
Part 1 - Overview & Installation
Part 2 - Configuration Mode Part
3 - Utilities Part 4 - Run Mode
Part 5 - Communications
In addition, there are three appendices:
Appendix A - Transfer/Merge Utility
Appendix B - Detailed Specifications
Appendix C - Generic Protocol Program for the Example Page
The manual is written as an instruction manual for beginning users and as a reference manual for more
experienced users. Each chapter leads with learning objectives that present the main topics of the
chapter. By scanning the learning objectives, a beginner will get a preview of the chapter, while an
experienced user will be able to quickly determine if the chapter contains the information that is
sought.
1-25
PanelMate Series
Chapter 1. PanelMate Overview
OBJECTIVES
In this chapter, you will learn:
What PanelMate is used for
The words we use to describe PanelMate
How easy it is to configure screens
How PanelMate works on the factory floor
1.1 Benefits
The Eaton IDT PanelMate provides an economical and flexible alternative to hardwired operator
control panels. Using a single serial connection to a PLC, PanelMate can replace individual control
devices such as pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights, thumbwheels, analog meters, message
display units and digital readouts, as well as all of the associated wiring and PLC I/O modules. PanelMate
II/III's graphic capability provides the functionality previously performed by CRT-based devices; however,
PanelMate 11/111 gives you control, which was a capability that CRT-based devices lacked. The Eaton IDT
PanelMate is capable of replacing over 600 hardwired devices, yet it is economical to use even if only
a handful of points are being controlled or monitored. The benefits are even greater if subsequent
changes are made to the operator's panel.
In addition to replacing conventional panel-mounted controls, operator message units and controller
faceplates, PanelMate also works as an alarm annunciator and logger. Critical PLC control operations can
be monitored constantly, and abnormal conditions reported on the screen and on a hardcopy
printer.
The Eaton IDT PanelMate offers advantages over hardwired devices similar to the advantages
provided by PLCs over conventional relay control systems. You have the flexibility of being able to quickly
construct or alter operator controls without coordinating the purchase and fabrication of a panel that
contains a variety of devices from different vendors. Control panel wiring is eliminated, and the cost and
lead time of developing an operator interface is reduced. Adding a control function later is simple and
costs virtually nothing. Solid-state technology provides inherent reliability advantages over mechanical
control devices. Additionally, no special training or computer programming skills are required for
screen configuration or online use because PanelMate uses the same kind of logic and terminology as
conventional control panels and PLCs.
The key to easy system integration is PanelMate's built-in family of editors. These easy-to-use editors
smoothly guide the user through an uncomplicated fill-in-the-blank process. No special training is
required because PanelMate's configuration editors guide the user in arranging pre-stored templates on
the page and defining each template's individual operating characteristics. In PanelMate II/III,
you can configure symbols to customize your pages for even more effective communication to plant
personnel.
PanelMate Series
1-1
1.1 Benefits
After configuration, PanelMate's self-documenting feature provides hardcopies of the current configuration
for your records. This capability makes generating complete documentation of the control system quick and
easy. You can also use a BackPac or IBM PC backup and downloading for permanent backup or easy transfer
of the configured pages to other PanelMate units.
Besides eliminating PLC I/O to the control panel, the microprocessor-based PanelMate can also relieve the PLC
of the burden of translating data from engineering units, comparing values against alarm limits, and
generating ASCII alarm messages, giving you more room in the PLC for control logic. This means you can
reduce the load on the PLC for other application requirements at no increase in price. Savings are also
achieved by reducing the PLC programming that is required for the control system.
PanelMate also improves operator performance compared to conventional control panels. PanelMate reduces
the number of sensory inputs that the operator is subjected to at any one time. It can also be used to set
priorities for the operator's attention. Alarm messages are also provided in the same viewing area as all the
controls for fast operator recognition. Just five multi-function control buttons and a sealed, quick response
keypad replace hundreds of buttons and switches found in typical control panels. PanelMate's use of multifunctional control buttons improve operator performance by providing only appropriate input options.
Online, PanelMate displays control information simply, clearly and quickly for instantaneous operator action.
Since PanelMate can be used with all major brands of PLCs, it can become your plant's standard
man/machine interface, thereby reducing your training costs and improving operator performance.
In addition to its serial communication abilities, PanelMate is available with the Acceleratl/On interface. This
feature allows direct connection to Allen-Bradley Data Highway, Data Highway Plus, or Remote I/O
networks without the need for a separate interface module. Acceleratl/On provides an increase in PLCaccess speed while reducing overall equipment costs.
PanelMate benefits include:
27-2
Reduced cost and lead time of engineering configuration

Eliminates extensive I/O wiring
Flexibility to easily change control function
Control operations can be monitored constantly and can be easily adjusted
Reduced load on the PLC, along with reduced PLC programming
Reporting of alarm conditions, including a hardcopy printout
Exceptionally easy-to-use configuration editors
Easy connection to all major brands of PLCs
Available Acceleratl/On interface permits direct connection to Allen-Bradley Data Highway, Data
Highway Plus or Remote I/O networks.
PanelMate Series
1.2 Product Description

The Eaton IDT PanelMate video control panel is a compact, rugged operator interface device for use
with PLCs. PanelMate uses an industrial-grade 14-inch color CRT and a unique set of graphic
"templates" to display the status of PLC variables in an easy-to-read fashion. Operators can also control or adjust
PLC operations directly from PanelMate using the built-in membrane touch pads. The Eaton IDT PanelMate is
designed for easy mounting in a variety of industrial enclosures, including consoles, standard 19-inch racks,
and floor or wall-mounted panels. The entire front bezel of the unit is gasketed and completely sealed against
dust, dirt, oil and moisture, making PanelMate ideal for use in harsh NEMA 4 or NEMA 12 applications.
The PanelMate system software is structured with a few principle sections accessible directly from the
Main Menu. Additional built-in features, functions and editors are available within each software section.
The product documentation and on-screen status messages help users to rapidly enter and exit the
sections needed for display creation and online operation.
1.2.1 Enhancements
During the first several years of their existence, the PanelMate I, II and III products were identified as
part of a "2800 series":
Product
PanelMate I
Series #
2800
PanelMate II
PanelMate III
2810
2820
These number references were used to specify the desired product at the time of purchase.
Enhancements to the PanelMate Product have caused Eaton IDT to change the series references to
help differentiate the enhanced product. The new series is referred to as the "2900 series":
Product
PanelMate I
Series #
2900
PanelMate II
2910
PanelMate III
2920
Existing users of PanelMate 2800 series systems who purchase 2900 series systems should take note of
the differences between the two series. The following section lists several key differences which apply to
PanelMate I, II or III systems of the two series.
1.2.1.1 Optional I/O Boards
2900 Series
The Acceleratl/On interface is available to permit direct connection of PanelMate to the Allen-Bradley Data
Highway, Data Highway Plus or Remote I/O networks. Also, a Dual Serial Port Expansion Board is
available. This board supplies two additional optically-isolated serial ports to PanelMate for
communication to PLCs or host computers.
Either of these may be installed within the PanelMate 2900 series electronics enclosure.
2800 Series
This series had no provision for installation of optional interfaces.
PanelMate Series
1-3
1.2.1.2 Non-Volatile Storage
2900 Series
A new electrically eraseable memory packaged within a detachable cartridge is now available for storing user
configuration data. It is called a BackPac. Compared to the ultraviolet-eraseable memory used previously in
the 2800 series, the BackPac is instantly reprogrammable and protects data better, by preventing direct
contact which might produce electrostatic damage to memory chips.
Also available is an EPROM Reader Cartridge. This device allows the 2900 series PanelMate to read
EPROMs created on a 2800 series unit.
2800 Series
This series used removeable, UV-eraseable EPROMs for non-volatile storage of configuration data. Note
A DOS-based transfer utility is available for either 2900 or 2800 series systems.
1.2.1.3 Communication Ports
2900 Series
This series offers two RS232 serial ports as standard. One of the ports may be configured as either a
serial printer port or a PLC/host port. An optional I/O board providing two additional RS232 ports is available
for users who need a total of up to 4 ports. The previously described Acceleratl/On interface is also available to
add an Allen-Bradley PLC direct interface to the standard two RS232 ports. An optional serial-to-parallel
converter may be externally connected to the standard serial port 1, to provide access for printers which only
have parallel ports.
2800 Series
This series provide one dedicated parallel and one dedicated serial printer port. It additionally provided
three PLC/host ports.
1-4
PanelMate Series
1.2.2 Hardware
The Eaton IDT PanelMate consists of two basic pieces: The Main Video Unit containing the screen and
control buttons; and the TouchPanel containing the selection pad, cancel button and numeric keypad.
Note
The Configuration Keyboard is needed only for the Configuration Mode and is considered an
accessory to PanelMate.
CONTR OL
BUTTONS
SCREEN
MAIN VIDEO
UNIT
TOUCHPANEL
LL
s c
O~O
NUMERIC
KEYPAD
CANCEL
BUTTON
SELEC TION PA D
Figure 1-1 PanelMate Front View
(:)(5) C19(el( 9)(e )nr

0 0 rim(!
OcDOOUOUCL)
(cuL ) CPU( ) ( ` )~UU(
(Q)
0 (Q) C)( )fl lU(
)
M0 (
0
1
(
) (
aT
LOCK _____ )(LOC.
Iow
) (
"
L O
PU
lt- )
) (
) (
LOCK
F10
INSERT )
( DCL_______________
Figure 1-2 PanelMate Configuration Keyboard
PanelMate Series
1-5
1.2.3 Configuration Mode

During the Configuration Mode, displays on the screen will consist of menus, editors and tables. The tables
and editors are used to develop the pages that make up the online system.
The PanelMate Configuration Mode consists of the following major menus, editors and tables:
Main Menu
System Utilities Menu
Define PLC Name and Port Editor
System Parameters Table Directory
Editor
Page Editor
Indicator Template Editor
Readout Template Editor
Bar Template Editor Display
Template Editor
In PanelMate II and PanelMate III systems, the following additional editors are provided:
Graphic Element Editor
Readout Element Editor
Bar Element Editor
Message Element Editor
Character Editor Symbol
Editor
The Eaton IDT PanelMate makes designing your PLC-based control systems easy. One standard PanelMate
can be used in a wide range of applications, and each unit has its own "configuration system" built-in. There is
no need to buy a separate configuration package. Just plug the Configuration Keyboard (or a standard IBM
PC keyboard) into PanelMate and you are ready to create or alter screen pages that will mimic the function of
traditional hardwired operators' panels.
PanelMate uses "templates", or fixed graphic shapes and formats, to present information to the online
operator, thus providing a proven, standard method of presentation. PanelMate II/III offers the
same template graphics as PanelMate I, plus the additional flexibility of custom user-defined graphics and
free-form text and numerics. Graphics configured for online animation based on PLC data are called
Elements. PanelMate I and II provide 10 pages of graphics for online operation; PanelMate III provides 30
pages. Note that pages configured with a PanelMate I can be transferred to a PanelMate II, and
pages configured with a PanelMate II can be transferred to a PanelMate III.
1-6
PanelMate Series
1.2.4 Special Features of Configuration Mode

The PanelMate editors are designed to be easy and straightforward to use. All editors have several features
in common, so that no additional learning is required to move from editor to editor. These features are
described below in alphabetical order.
1.2.4.1 Cursors
PanelMate uses four cursors. Only one cursor will be visible on the screen at any one time. All cursors are
controlled by the arrow keys. The four cursors are:
Cell Cursor
Field Cursor
Character
Cursor
Insert Mode
Cursor
a white border surrounding a blank cell or template when it is selected

a green bar that highlights a cyan field when it is selected
a small white block that appears in the selected character field when the
EDIT mode is selected, and in the Alarm Window when selecting alarms for
acknowledgment.
a half-size version of the character cursor that appears in the selected al
phanumeric field when < Ins > is pressed
1.2.4.2 Cursor Moves

All cursors can be moved using the arrow keys of the numeric keypad on the Configuration Keyboard. Note
NUMLOCK must be OFF
In the Page Editor, the cell cursor moves one cell at a time, regardless of the size of the template it is
marking, e.g., two cursor moves are required to move across a double-wide Indicator Template.
1.2.4.3 Error Messages

When you attempt to do something that is not allowed, an error message will be printed at the bottom of the
screen. To cancel the error message, simply continue with the correct keystroke.
1.2.4.4 Field Colors

In the Directory Editor and all template editors, an entry field will display the following colors: cyan
green
blue
a closed field
the field that is currently selected for viewing or editing
a selected field that can be edited; i.e., a green field will become blue when < Fl >
is pressed.
1.2.4.5 Function Keys

In the Directory Editor and Page Editor, a menu at the top of the screen shows the functions of the < Fl >
through <F10> keys.
In the template editors, the only function keys that you will need are < Fl > , which continues as the EDIT
function, and <F10>, which will return you to the Page Editor.
The < F1 > key is always used as a toggle to the editing mode. Press < F1 > to enter the edit mode (the
selected field will change from green to blue), make changes, additions, insertions and deletions as
necessary, and then press < F1 > to exit the edit mode. You must exit before you select another field.
The <F10> is always used to exit from the editing screen that is currently displayed. Pay attention to
prompting messages, as they may remind you about saving changes before exiting.
PanelMate Series
1-7
1.2.5 Template Mode
PanelMate uses pre-defined functional "templates" to represent indicator lights, digital readouts, analog (level)
meters and message display panels. These four primary template types are called the Indicator, Readout, Bar
and Display templates.
The screen is divided into 15 template cells. A template is positioned and defined with the use of function
keys, arrow keys and screen prompts.
The type of template chosen determines the way in which PLC data will be displayed and the information you
need to provide to defme its operation. The definition data will usually include the name for the template
(e.g., "BACKWASH PUMP 1" or "KILN 27 TEMPERATURE"), the PLC locations to be monitored, the
associated colors and status messages to be used to represent different conditions, and any high and low alarm
limits to be considered. Each template also allows you to define control functions which will be available to
the operator, such as the ability to start a motor or adjust a setpoint value.
PanelMate I and PanelMate II will allow up to 10 pages, with 15 templates per page. PanelMate III will allow
up to 30 pages to be created, with 15 templates per page. If there are no pages configured beyond page 9,
PanelMate III will display only 10 pages. If any or all of the pages numbered 10-15 have been configured,
PanelMate III will display 16 pages if the standard queuing method is selected. When pages 16-29 are
configured, PanelMate III will automatically use the First-In-First-Out (FIFO) method to display the oldest
pages in alarm. Any combination of template types may be grouped on a single page, allowing you to tailor the
layout of the controls to the needs of your particular application.
Current Page Title

Overview Field Alarm
Page I __________ Pa a Title Area _______________________________15:23:42

lei
W
~21
131___ 141 ______ 151 ___ 151
171
181
191
Uindou ___________________________
r
Template Cells
5eneralized Page Layout
Figure 1-3 PanelMate I and PanelMate II Page Layout
~- Control Button Labels
C u r r e n t Page Title
Pa e 1
Pa a Title Area
15:23:42
Overuiw Field
Alarm Window
~- Control Button Labels
Template Calls
i
Generalized Page Layout
Figure 1-4 PanelMate III Page Layout (16 Pages)

Current Page Title
Overview Field Alarm
Window
ICI-El
P
IMI
Title Area
15:23.42
ICI E-1MEE WIMIWIMIM1911MIZEIWI9IEI-:09-2IC
C o n t r o l B u t t o n L a b el
Taeplate Cells
Generalized Page Layout
Figure 1-5 PanelMate III Page Layout (30 Pages)

A single template may be used to represent a number of hardwired devices. As a simple example, an
Indicator template with control functions might replace three indicator lights (Running, Stopped,
Tripped) and two pushbuttons (Start, Stop).
When defining the operation of a template, you can indicate that certain conditions are to be recognized as abnormal or alarm conditions. In the above example, the "Tripped" condition is abnormal. The
Eaton IDT PanelMate watches for these conditions, even when the page containing that template is not
being displayed. If that condition occurs, an alarm message will be printed in the 4-line alarm window
automatically built into every screen. The message tells the operator the device name, type of fault and
time of occurrence, as well as which page the template is on. In addition, an "overview" field (also built into
every screen) indicates graphically the pages which contain alarm conditions. A dedicated alarm
summary page provides a complete listing of all current faults.
Pages are saved in battery-backed SRAM memory in the Eaton IDT PanelMate, which means that
there is never a worry about losing your work. You may download to an IBM PC or use a BackPac for
non-volatile backup.
PanelMate Series
1-9
1.2.6 Graphics Mode

PanelMate II/III's editing features include the Template Mode editors of PanelMate I, plus a Graphics
Mode which includes advanced text capabilities and custom graphics. PanelMate II/III's Main Menus and
Directory Editors are identical to PanelMate I. The differences appear in the Page Editor.
Templates may be added to the screen and configured as in PanelMate I. Additionally, there are four
Element Editors available in the Graphics Mode which have functions similar to the Template Editors.
These Element Editors provide user-definable attributes which allow for creation of custom graphics
elements. There are 17 lines and 65 columns available on the screen to design custom graphics. Within each
Element Editor is a configuration spreadsheet which features a structured fill-in-the-blank and multiple
choice approach similar to the Template Editors. Templates and Elements may be mixed on the same page.
The four Element Editors are: 1.
Graphic
Element
Editor
2.
Readout Element Editor 3. Bar

Element Editor
4. Message Element Editor
Within the Graphics Mode, you may choose to add an element and access one of these editors, or you
may select one of the following editing features:
Page Editing
Parameters
Template
Mode
Window
Mode
Parameters which may be affected include: Foreground Color, Background

Color, Blink Color, Font, and Cursor Direction.
Within the Graphics Mode, you may simply press the associated Function
Key to toggle to the Template Mode.
The window mode is used to define an area of the screen as a window,
and allows the following operations to be performed on the contents of the
window: Move, Copy, Delete, Memorize, Recall. Note that only Graphic
Mode elements and text are affected.
Character
A primary feature offered by PanelMate II/III is the ability to create custom
Editor
characters which can be combined with other custom characters to create
a Symbol. The Character Editor provides the means to define the bit-map
associated with a specific character.
The character is edited on the same page that it will be used. In this manner, the
user can view the character in its normal size and position, along with an
expanded 9 x 12 character matrix representing the current bit-map of the
character.
Symbol
A Symbol is an independently named collection of characters which are
Editor placed on the screen in relation to each other. Symbols are created and edited within
the Symbol Editor and are stored in the Symbol Library. Each Symbol has a
defined origin and may be placed on a page relative to this origin. Symbols
may be used on numerous pages, and numerous times on a single page.
After a Symbol has been created in the Symbol Editor and saved in the
Symbol Library, it may be added to a page within the Page Editor. Note
that the Symbol may simply be used as a static element. By configuring a
Symbol, it is transformed from a static state to a dynamic state. The Symbol,
configured in the Graphic Element Editor, becomes a Graphic Element when
dynamics are added.
1-10
PanelMate Series
1.2.7 Run Mode

Once display configuration is completed in the Configuration Mode, the Eaton IDT PanelMate is ready to
be connected to one or more PLCs. PanelMate can be easily used with all major brands of PLCs and
intelligent control devices. A single serial cable is required to connect PanelMate with any programmable
controller, host computer or intelligent device. PanelMate can also be used with different types of devices
simultaneously. Two independent serial communication ports are standard equipment. With the addition of
an optional Dual Serial Port Expansion Board, PanelMate can support a total of four serial ports. The two
additional ports are optically isolated and support any of the PanelMate serial PLC drivers. PanelMate can
communicate with serial and IBM PC-compatible parallel printers to print alarms and messages in the Run
Mode.
Note
A serial-to-parallel converter module is available for devices requiring a parallel connection.
In addition to its serial communication abilities, PanelMate supports the Acceleratl/On interface. With this
feature, PanelMate can communicate to an Allen-Bradley Data Highway, Data Highway Plus, or Remote
I/O network without an Allen-Bradley interface module.
On power-up, with the keyswitch in the RUN position, PanelMate performs system diagnostics. If a failure
should occur, an indication of the problem will be displayed. After power-up diagnostics are completed, the
system display configuration is loaded into working memory.
The initial page will be drawn, and the Control Button labels will appear. The Control Buttons and
TouchPanel may be used to call another page.
Any template that displays a small arrow in the lower left-hand corner of the template is defined for control
by the operator. The Graphic Elements in PanelMate II/I1I can also be defined for control. The user may
select the position and placement of the Graphic Element's arrow, and can choose to view the arrow on a
continuous basis or only when the element is selected.
Before any control change can be made to a particular device, that template or element must be "selected".
To select a particular template, press the area of the Selection Keypad that corresponds to the location of the
template on the screen. In PanelMate II/III, a template cell area may contain more than one graphic
element. To select an element, press the associated Selection Keypad area. If the desired element is not
initially selected, repeatedly press the associated keypad area to step through the elements located within the
template cell area. If the template or element is defined for control button input, the corresponding control
button labels will appear when it is selected. The operator can then press the appropriate control button (to
start or stop a motor, for example), or press the large cancel button to disarm the control buttons. All control
buttons provide momentary operation control. Therefore, the designated PLC bit will be set to ON or 1
when the button is depressed, and will reset to OFF or 0 when the button is released.
If the template or element is defined for numeric keypad input, the control button labels will prompt the
user to enter the new value. All numeric operator inputs require at least two keystrokes. This prevents any
accidental entries that could occur by pressing the wrong key.
All alarm conditions designated in the PanelMate editors are constantly monitored. When an alarm condition
occurs, an alarm message is automatically configured and printed on the current page and to a printer, if
connected. The four most recent alarm messages will appear in the alarm window on the current page. Each
alarm message will include:
Device name
Nature of the alarm (e.g., high, low)
Time of the event being reported
Page the device is listed on in PanelMate
The Alarm Summary Page is automatically compiled by PanelMate as alarm conditions occur. The 100
most recent alarm messages can be viewed on the Alarm Summary Page at any time. PanelMate will
request updates from the PLC for data on the current display page and for all alarm points.
PanelMate Series
1-11
1.2.7.1 Test in Run Mode

This feature allows you to enter Run Mode without using the keyswitch. It provides a relatively quick
way to move back and forth from Run Mode to Configuration mode.
For proper operation, you must be communicating with a programmable controller or other intelligent
device. Otherwise, you will encounter communication timeout errors that will prohibit operations. To
avoid these timeout errors, it is possible to partially test the system when not connected to a PLC by
excluding all control button bit references from the system configuration.
The configuration in battery-backed RAM is used when you select Test in Run Mode from the Main
Menu. To use a configuration from a BackPac, you must use the keyswitch to enter the Run Mode.
To return to Configuration Mode, press < Ctrl > < Alt > < Del > at the same time on the
Configuration Keyboard.
1.2.7.2 Startup Procedures

For maximum efficiency, we recommend that you follow the procedures listed below to take your
PanelMate from the shipping box to the factory floor:
1. Unpack the PanelMate system (refer to Chapter 2 for information)
2. Assemble the system (refer to Chapter 2 for information)
3. Check the system's health (refer to Chapters 2 and 10 for information) 4.
Install the system (refer to Chapter 2 for information)
5. Use the System Utilities to define the PLC brand(s) that will be used with this PanelMate, and the PLC names
that will be used in word and bit references (refer to Chapter 9)
6. Configure pages (Chapters 4 through 8)
7. Return to the System Utilities and set the communications parameters for all ports you will be using,
and make any additions you require (refer to Chapters 9 and 10)
8. Produce hard-copy documentation of the configured system (refer to Chapter 10)
9. For further security, backup your system on a BackPac or an IBM PC (refer to Chapter 10) 10.
Test the configured system in Run Mode with all PLCs connected (refer to Chapter 11)
11. Make changes in Configuration Mode as needed; remember to reprint documentation and
provide a backup of the changed system on a BackPac or an IBM PC
12. If configuration has been completed while PanelMate is sitting on a desktop, install the
PanelMate unit in its industrial enclosure (refer to Chapter 2)
13. Re-test the system with the PanelMate keyswitch turned to Run Mode and all PLCs
connected
1-12
PanelMate Series
1.2.8 Improving Operator Performance

Color
Selection
Character
Sizes
Device
Names
Be consistent. Use the same colors to designate the same conditions

throughout the system.
Be logical. If there are no industry-wide conventions, use red background for
alarm conditions, green for "on" or "normal" or "OK", and yellow for "caution".
For a "normal off" condition, try using a black background with white foreground
characters.
For the most readable text, use bright foreground colors against dark background colors. The "bright" colors are white, yellow, cyan and green. The
"dark" colors are black, blue and red. For variation, and without too much
loss in readability, you can also use dark colors as the foreground against
bright colors.
Always use the largest size characters that will fit in the template.
Use upper and lower case characters; they are easier to read than all upper
case. Be very descriptive in the device name, as this will be the field printed
in alarm messages. Left-justify the device name to make placement consistent
for the operator.
Control Use upper and lower case characters; they are easier to read than all upper Button
case. Be very descriptive so that it is easy to determine which template's Labels
control
buttons' labels are on the screen. For example, for a "start" button,
use the label "Start Motor 2" instead of "Start".
Control Group buttons together near the middle of the screen. The only exception Button to
this would be when you wish to purposefully separate a critical function Positions
from
other control functions.
Templates that require the same types of operator control (such as stop/start)
should consistently place these control buttons in the same positions (e.g., stop
is always the second button and start is always the third button).
Page
Group controls on pages so that operations that are performed together are
Layouts
grouped together. Also, make pages look dissimilar so the operator can easily
distinguish page changes without referring to the page number.
Audible
Use It! Feedback for operator input greatly improves operator performance.
Feedback
Mounting
Mount the Main Video Unit at eye level. For maximum operator efficiency,
Position
use the accessory TouchPanel Shelf to tilt the keyboard to a more comfortable working angle.
Monitor
Reduce potential eyestrain by adjusting the monitor's brightness and contrast
Adjustments
for the ambient lighting of the online PanelMate.
Automatic
Use this feature to avoid accidentally leaving the control buttons "armed"
Cancel
for an extended length of time.
Leave There is no reason to unplug PanelMate during normal operation. PanelMate PanelMate is
designed to be used as part of your control system, and is expected to Running
perform as reliably and consistently as your PLCs or control panel devices.
PanelMate Series
1-13
Chapter 2. Assembly and Installation
OBJECTIVES
How to set-up PanelMate for configuration
How to install PanelMate in an industrial enclosure
How to connect a printer to a PanelMate
How to use PanelMate's fault relay
How to attach a horn to PanelMate
How to mount PanelMate to slide in a 19-inch rack
How to mount PanelMate in a 12-inch deep panel
How to modify PanelMate for a 230V AC power supply
2.1 Unpacking
Report any damage to the carrier who delivered the equipment and immediately call the Eaton IDT
Customer Service Department at 614/882-3282 (the Interstate Commerce Commission has a time limit on
reporting concealed damage). Check packing cartons for all items shown on the packing list.
Carefully remove all equipment from the packing cartons and inspect all parts for damage in shipment.
Keep the cartons and packing materials for future shipment.
Please check to be certain that all items are present:
PanelMate
1 Main Video Unit
1 TouchPanel
1 PanelMate Product Manual
1 Shipping kit (plastic bag) containing:
2 Security keys
1 Packet of mounting nuts and washers
14 #8 nuts, 14 #8 washers
1 Cutout/torque drawing
If you ordered a Configuration Keyboard as an accessory, it will be packaged separately:
1 Keyboard with connector cord attached 1
Extension cable
PanelMate Series
2-1
2.1 Unpacking
If you ordered a Rack Mount Adaptor Kit as an accessory, it will be packaged separately:
1 Rack mount frame
1 Rack mount base
2 Rack mount slides
Packeted mounting hardware:
16 thin wall hex nuts
4 J type cage nuts
4 #8 pan head screws
4 #8 split ring washers, 4 #8 washers 2
#10 split ring washers, 2 #10 washers 2
#10 nuts
1 Assembly drawing
If you ordered a Panel Mount Adaptor Kit as an accessory, it will be packaged separately:
1 Panel mount adaptor
1 TouchPanel shelf
1 Panel mount adaptor gasket 1
TouchPanel shelf gasket
Packeted mounting nuts and washers:
14 #10 nuts, 14 #10 washers 2
Assembly drawings
If you ordered a TouchPanel Shelf as an accessory, it will be packaged separately:
1 TouchPanel shelf
1 TouchPanel shelf gasket
Packeted mounting nuts and washers:
12 #8 nuts, 12 #8 washers 1
Assembly drawing
If you ordered an Audio Feedback Kit as an accessory, it will be packaged separately: 1
Speaker with connecting cable attached If you ordered a Support Kit as an
accessory, it will be packaged separately:
1 Packet of mounting nuts and washers containing:
6 #8 nuts, 6 #10 nuts
1 Remote mounting kit for the Configuration Keyboard 1
Keyboard extension cable 1 Packet with a keyboard
connector cap and o-ring 1 BackPac
15-1/4" diskette with IBM PC Transfer Utility 1
Cable for use with IBM PC 1 Release Notes
If you ordered an extra BackPac as an accessory, it will be packaged separately: 1
BackPac
2-2
PanelMate Series
43.2 Installation Guidelines
2.2 Installation Guidelines

Choosing where and how to mount your Eaton IDT equipment is the first step in assuring its proper
operation and long life.
The installation should protect your system from dust, moisture, corrosive vapors, and other airborne
contaminants. The front panel of PanelMate provides a NEMA 4 or NEMA 12 rating when mounted in a
correspondingly-rated enclosure. This prevents contaminants from entering the enclosure.
When choosing an enclosure or mounting position, allow plenty of free space around your PanelMate. Leave at
least six inches above and below the unit and four inches on either side. PanelMate depends on this room to
allow convection cooling of its interior. Also remember to leave room for easy access to circuit boards, backup
media (like BackPac), wiring or cabling connections, and regular maintenance. Detailed panel cutout drawings
are found in this chapter for easy reference.
Your enclosure should be constructed of 14 gauge steel. This will help guard your PanelMate against
electromagnetic interference. It also provides good heat dissipation and proper structural support.
If the inside temperature of the enclosure is above the system's recommended range (see next section), you
can use filtered fans, heat exchangers, air conditioners, or a larger enclosure to lower the
temperature. Keep in mind that your system will be more reliable and have a longer life if it is
exposed to milder environmental conditions.
If an air-purged enclosure is used, it is recommended that the inside/outside pressure differential not
exceed 0.5 PSI (13.8 inches water column). If needed, your system can withstand a differential of up to
4.6 PSI (127 inches water column).
2.2.1 Environmental Considerations

The system is designed and tested to operate over a wide temperature range. Temperatures outside this
range can severely shorten the life of your PanelMate. High humidity, vibration, shock, or altitude can also
adversely affect the system's operation and lifespan. See the table below for a list of environmental
operating parameters for PanelMate.
Locate your system as far as possible from transformers, relays, motor starters, and power or high-voltage wiring.
Maintain at least ten feet between your system and this type of equipment. This equipment generates
interference which can induce noise in electrical wiring. Magnetic fields greater than 0.5 Gauss can cause
picture jitter and discoloration in video monitors.
Line power provided to any electronic equipment should be relatively free of voltage drifts, spikes, and drop-outs.
Spike suppressors, uninterruptable power supplies and other devices can be used to condition line voltage. Line
power wiring should be Number 14 AWG stranded copper, with white insulation for neutral, black for hot, and
green for ground (American color code). Line frequency should also be maintained within noted tolerances. All
equipment should be properly grounded at a ground run separate from that used by high-power devices such as
motor starters and arc welders.
Power Input
90-132V AC @ 47-63 Hz (also 180-264V AC)
Power Consumption
100 W (140 VA)
Operating Ambient Temperature
32-122 deg. F (0-50 deg. C)
Humidity
20-95% non-condensing
Vibration
Shock
0.006 inch peak-to-peak @ 10-57 Hz

1 G @ 57-500 Hz
10 G @ 10 msec.
Operating Altitude
0-10,000 ft. ASL
Table 2-1 Environmental Operating Parameters
PanelMate Series
2-3
2.3 Assembly for Desktop Configuration
2.2.2 Wiring Considerations

Another important concern should be the proper installation of wiring or cabling for your PanelMate. Line power
wiring should be Number 14 AWG stranded copper, with white insulation for neutral, black for hot, and green
for ground (American color code).
When planning the location and placement of wiring make sure that high-power lines are not in close proximity to lowlevel signal or communication cables. High-power conductors include AC power lines and high power AC or DC I/O
lines, such as those which connect to hard-contact switches, relays, solenoids, motors, generators, and arc
welders. These generate a large amount of electrical noise.
Low-signal-level conductors include those carrying serial communication and local area networks such as
Ethernet and PLC networks. These have a low tolerance for induced electrical noise. All low level wiring should
be shielded and routed in a separate conduit or raceway from high-power wiring. Raceways and conduit must be
properly grounded.
Route low-level conductors at least one foot from 120V AC power lines, two feet from 240V AC power
lines, and three feet from 480V AC power lines. If a low level conductor must cross high power lines, it should do
so at a right angle.
RS232 serial communication cables should be no longer than 50 feet long, although high-noise environments may
require shorter cabling. The effects of electrical noise can be reduced by using cables with twisted-pair conductors.
This method uses one conductor of a twisted pair for a data transmit or receive line, and connects the second
conductor of that pair to ground. Signal ground is run by paralleling two conductors of a twisted pair and using
them as a single conductor. Higher noise immunity and distance can be achieved by using RS422 or 20 mA
current loop communication. All communication cables should be shielded, with the shield grounded at one end
only (to prevent shield current flow).
If there are significant voltage differences (6 volts) between the grounds of two devices which must be connected,
the devices should be electrically isolated from each other. This can be accomplished with optical, fiber optical,
or transformer isolators. PanelMate's Dual Serial Port Board provides optical isolation for serial connections as a
part of its design.
Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation of local area network and other communication cabling. High
frequency communication often requires special conductors and precautions to guard against signal reflections.
External high-frequency disturbances may require grounding of cable shields at both ends or at multiple points
along the run.

When configuring the PanelMate control system pages, you may use the PanelMate Main Video Unit on a
desktop or mounted in a panel or console. Consult this section for information about assembling PanelMate for
use on a desktop.
Refer to appendix B for detailed information about power requirements and operating specifications.
2-4
PanelMate Series
2.3.1 Place the Main Video Unit on a Desktop

For configuration, you will not need the TouchPanel at all. Therefore, put it in a safe place until you are ready to
test the system in Run Mode.
Note that the front panel of the Main Video Unit extends below the enclosure approximately 2 inches. For best
viewing, you should place the unit on the desktop so that the enclosure is slightly tilted. Allowing the bottom of
the unit to lay flat on a hard surface may result in overheating. Don't forget to leave room at the front of the unit
for the Configuration Keyboard.
2.3.2 Configuration Keyboard to Main Video Unit

Using the cable that is attached to the configuration keyboard, plug the keyboard into PanelMate (you won't
need the extension in this arrangement). The keyboard port is located on the Main Video Unit's right side
(looking at the front), above the three 25-pin D-connector ports.
The Eaton IDT configuration keyboard is IBM AT/XT-compatible, but it can only operate in the IBM PC/XT
mode. Other IBM PC/XT compatible keyboards should work, although complete compatibility is not
guaranteed. If you are planning to use a keyboard other than Eaton IDT's configuration keyboard, your
keyboard must be set for IBM PC/XT operation.
2.3.3 Connect Power

The AC power terminals are located at the back of the Main Video Unit. Connect the power here. No line cord
is included. PanelMate is factory-set to operate with 115V AC. You may operate with 230V AC after making a
minor modification. For more information, see the Modification Procedure in section 2.4.6, Connect Power.
O
D
N Neutral G
Ground
L
Line (hot)
Figure 2-1 Terminal Block
Note
It is recommended that power, noise and surge protectors be used when PanelMate is installed in areas
where the power quality is poor.
The main power switch is also located at the back of the Main Video Unit. Make sure the rocker
switch is in the ON position.
Once switched on, PanelMate performs approximately 20 seconds of internal diagnostic checks before it
begins loading the system configuration and port communications. You may hear the monitor
"crackle," and the keyboard LEDs will be lit. The screen will first display a colored check pattern, and
will then display 13 green blocks on a black background. If any of the blocks are red, see section 11.1.1,
Run Normal Power-up Diagnostics, for more information.
When PanelMate has completed its diagnostic routines, the Main Menu will appear on the screen.
PanelMate Series
2-5
2.3.4 Clear Memory

Note Each PanelMate 11/111 is shipped with a set of symbols loaded into memory. These symbols will be
lost if memory is cleared. If you wish to save them, you may do so by loading them to a BackPac or
to an IBM PC. See section 10.3 for more information on memory transfers.
For best results, clear the battery-backed RAM as described in the following steps before proceeding:
1. When the Main Menu appears on the screen, use the cursor arrow keys to move the cell
cursor to the center template labeled, "Get System Utilities."
Configure
Pages
Get System
Utilities
Test in
Run Mode
Figure 2-2 Main Menu

2. Once this template is selected, press < F1 >. The System Utilities Menu will immediately
appear on the screen:
Define PLC Names and Port Parameters
Define System Parameters System Online
Labels Print Documentation Transfer
Memory
Check System Health
Clear Memory
3. Select "Clear Memory," using the arrow cursor keys.
4. Press < F1 >.
5. Press < Y > in response to the prompt, "Do you really want to clear memory?".
6. Press < Y > again, in response to the prompt, "All Pages, Messages, System Parameters
will be erased. Do you want to proceed?".
7. Press < F5 > to clear memory.
Once you have cleared memory, a line will appear on the screen confirming the action.
2-6
PanelMate Series
2.3.5 Check System Health

To assure yourself that the system is in good health before you get started, you may wish to perform all
system health checks.
To check the monitor:
1. Use the cursor arrow keys to move the green bar cursor to select "Check System Health". 2.
Press < F1 > ; the System Health Menu will immediately appear on the screen.
3. Since the cursor is now on "Display Test", just press < F1 > to select "Display Test"; a new menu
will immediately appear on the screen.
4. Since the cursor is now on "Crosshatch Pattern", just press < F1 > to select it; a white grid
pattern will immediately appear on the screen.
5. Press < F10 > to return to the Display Tests Menu.
6. Use the cursor arrow keys to select "Color Check".
7. Press < F1 > ; color bars will immediately appear on the screen. 8.
Press < F10 > to return to the Display Test Menu. 9. Press < F10 >
again to return to the System Health Menu.
To check the Configuration Keyboard:
1. Use the cursor arrow keys to move the cursor to select "Configuration Keyboard Test" from
the System Health Menu.
2. Press < F1 > ; a keyboard test screen will immediately appear on the screen.
3. Press each key on the keyboard to confirm that it is communicating with the PanelMate unit.
4. Press < Alt > and < F10 > at the same time to return to the Display Test Menu. 5.
Press < F10 > again to return to the System Health Menu.
Further tests are also available, as you can see from the System Health Menu. For instructions on how
to perform all system checks, consult Chapter 10.
2.3.6 Set the Real-Time Clock

1. Return to the System Utilities Menu by pressing < F10 > while in the System Health Menu. 2.
Select "Define System Parameters" using the cursor arrow keys. 3. Press < F1 > ; the System
Parameters Table will immediately appear on the screen.
4. Select the Time and Date fields as needed, using the cursor arrow keys. Press < F1 > to enter
and exit the EDIT mode for each field. Enter the time as HH:MM:SS with the hours in a 24hour format. Example: 2:45:11 pin should be entered as 14:45:11.
5. You may also set the date now, if you wish. Use a MM/DD/YY format.
2.3.7 Monitor Adjustments

PanelMate's monitor has been adjusted at Eaton IDT before shipment. However, it is possible the
shipping has caused some maladjustment. If you notice a problem in resolution of the crosshatch
pattern or color tones, consult Chapter 12 for information on making monitor adjustments.
PanelMate Series
2-7
2.4 Installation in an Industrial Enclosure

PanelMate is designed to be used on the factory floor, mounted in an industrial enclosure. Consult this
section for information about installing PanelMate in an enclosure. If you will be using any of the
PanelMate accessories, please refer to the sections of this chapter that provide specific information about each of
the accessories before proceeding with installation.
The instructions in this section are based on the assumption that you have already fully configured a
PanelMate and tested the configuration in Test in Run Mode.
Refer to appendix B for detailed information about power requirements and operating specifications.
2.4.1 Check System Health

If this system was not used for configuration, you should assure yourself that the system is in good health
before you install it. Therefore, perform all system health checks first.
1. Perform tasks 2.3.1 through 2.3.7 of Section 2.3 of this chapter.
2. Connect the TouchPanel to the Main Video Unit. This is done by taking the cable that is
attached to the TouchPanel and plugging it into the 25-pin D-connector port labeled
"MATRIX KEYBOARD" on the Main Video Unit.
3. Perform the Membrane Keypads Test to check all operator input areas of the TouchPanel
(refer to chapter 10 for information on running this test).
4. Disconnect the power, Configuration Keyboard, and the TouchPanel once you are satisfied the
system is working properly.
2.4.2 Load PanelMate with Your System Configuration

If this PanelMate was not used for configuration, you must either insert a BackPac that contains the
configuration or transfer the configuration from your IBM PC. Refer to chapter 10 for information about
transferring memory.
2.4.3 Install PanelMate in Enclosure

Make cutouts in the enclosure as shown on the diagram on the following page. Insert the TouchPanel in
the bottom cutout and fasten it with twelve #8 nuts and washers that are supplied with the unit.
Insert the Main Video Unit in the top cutout and fasten it with sixteen #10 nuts and washers that are
supplied with the unit.
Caution
Care should be exercised when tightening the nuts. The fasteners must be
tightened enough to obtain a proper seal, yet not be tightened enough to
strip the threads from the welded steel studs. The following torque limits
should not be exceeded:
#8 nuts (TouchPanel) = 7 inch-pounds
#10 nuts (Main Video Unit) = 17 inch-pounds
2-8
PanelMate Series
2.4.4 Connect TouchPanel to Main Video Unit

Connect the TouchPanel to the Main Video Unit. This is done by taking the cable that is attached to the
TouchPanel and plugging it into the 25-pin D-connector port labeled "MATRIX KEYBOARD" on the Main
Video Unit.
FRONT VIEW
PmNMN
SIDE VIEW
~~
800
Panelmate x Monitor and

Keyboard Outline
Drawing
oIjo
07 o
Unit Weight
0~0 0
1
65 LBS.
000
TCROUE REOUIREMENIS
24 INCH LB FOR /10-32 NITS
7.5 INCH LB FOR #8-32 NUTS
19.00
REAR VIEW_
.48
RECOMMENDED PANEL CUTOUTS
15.95
.95
0. 4
NOTE
1. N1 DIMENSIONS ME IN INCHES.
9.46
C
o
DI
0.
ck
O
13.00
12.00
OMER
_______________
20
12.00
'
2 5 E lk " 0 1 1
(16 PLACES)
A/C POWER
4.50
0 5D
(MN.)
`0.90
I ^,
'1.19
6.90
(MAX.)
3.44 4.63
l
0.
0.1E
22 OLIN HOLE
4.26
1.66
(12 PLACES)
1
0.34
..
17.64
6.6.
16.66
16.32
Figure 2-3 Panel Cutout
PanelMate Series
-
17
2.4.5 Turn Keyswitch to Run Mode and Plug in All Cables

Turn the keyswitch so that PanelMate will power-up in Run Mode.
Plug in all PLCs and a printer, if desired, to the ports you have defined for the connections. Refer to
appendix A for information about PLC cabling. Refer to section 2.5 of this chapter for information about
printer cabling.
Plug in the speaker if you have decided to use audio feedback for operator input and/or alarms.
Refer to section 2.7 of this chapter for information about Eaton IDT's Audio Feedback Kit.
Wire the fault relay if you plan to use it. Refer to section 2.6 of this chapter for information about the
fault relay.
Connect power to PanelMate.
2.4.6 Connect Power

The AC power terminals are located at the back of the Main Video Unit. Connect the power here. No
line cord is included. PanelMate is factory-set to operate with 115V AC. You may operate with 230V
AC after making the modification on the following page. You must perform the entire procedure with the
system fully disconnected from any power source.
Note
It is recommended that power, noise and surge protectors be used when PanelMate is installed in
areas where the power quality is poor.
N Neutral G
Ground
L
Line (hot)
Figure 2-4 Terminal Block

The main power switch is also located at the back of the Main Video Unit. Make sure the rocker
switch is in the ON position.
Once switched on, PanelMate performs approximately 20 seconds of internal diagnostic checks before it
begins loading the system configuration and port communications. You may hear the monitor
"crackle", and the keyboard LED's will be lit. The screen will first display a colored check pattern,
and will then display 13 green blocks on a black background. If any of the blocks are red, see section
11.1.1, Run Normal Power-up Diagnostics, for more information.
When PanelMate has completed its diagnostic routines, the Main Menu will appear on the screen.
2-10
PanelMate Series
2.5 Connect Printer to PanelMate
230V AC Modification Procedure

1. Unplug the power cord from the power source.
2. Looking at the back of the PanelMate unit, locate the switch labeled "115".
N r-
Figure 2-5 115V AC/230V AC Power Modification Switch 3.

Slide the switch to the left into the "230" position. 4. Plug the power cord into a
230V AC power source.
Note
Connection of PanelMate to 230V AC power without completion of the previously noted

procedure will cause internal damage to your PanelMate unit.

PanelMate can communicate with either serial or parallel printers. Either type of printer can be used to
print documentation in the Configuration Mode or print alarm messages in the Run Mode. The
following paragraphs describe how to use a parallel or serial printer with PanelMate.
2.5.1 Parallel Printer Interface

The 2900 series PanelMate does not have a parallel port; however, a serial-to-parallel converter is
available if you wish to use a parallel printer. A parallel port can be configured in the PLC Name and
Port Table. This is permitted so that users having both 2800 and 2900 models of PanelMate can
perform any configuration work they wish on the 2900, then transfer the configuration to a 2800 model if
desired. See Section 1.2.1, Enhancements, for more information on ports.
To configure this port, select "Get System Utilities" from the Main Menu. Then:
1. Select "Define PLC Names and Port Paramenters".
2. Press < F1 >.
3. Select "Serial Port 1" field.
4. Press < F1 > to enter EDIT mode.
5. Use cursor keys to select "PRINTER".
6. Press < F1 > to exit EDIT mode.
7. Press < F10 > twice to return to Main Menu.
PanelMate Series
2-11
2.5.2 Serial Printer Interface

Serial Port 1 may be used for a printer or for PLC (or host) communication. All serial ports are located on
the right side of the Main Video Unit (looking from the front). The pin assignments for PanelMate's Serial
Port 1 are as follows:
1r`
14
0
0
0
13~
250
Pin S
20
1 Eaton IDT reserved
21
22
23
24
25
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
RS232C TxD
RS232C RxD
RS232C RTS
RS232C CTS
Eaton IDT reserved
Signal GND
Eaton IDT reserved
RS422 RxD (-)
RS422 RxD (+ )
Eaton IDT reserved
Eaton IDT reserved
Eaton IDT reserved
Eaton IDT reserved
RS422 Term (+)
Eaton IDT reserved
RS422 Term (-)
Eaton IDT reserved
Eaton IDT reserved
Note
On the 2800 series PanelMate:

Pin 1 is Chassis GND Pin
21 is Power GND Pin
24 is -12V (0.2A)
Pin 25 is + 12V (1A)
Note
PanelMate supports XON/OFF.
RS 232C DTR
Eaton IDT reserved
RS422 TxD (+ )
RS422 TxD (-)
Eaton IDT reserved
Eaton IDT reserved
To command PanelMate to use Serial Port 1 for printer communications, select "Get System Utilities" from
the Main Menu. Then:
1. Select "Define PLC Names and Port Parameters". 2.
Press < F1 >.
3. Select "Serial Port 1" field, if the printer will be needed for online usage. Select "DOC" field, if the
printer will be needed during configuration.
4. Press < F1 > to enter EDIT mode.
5. Use cursor arrow keys to select "PRINTER". 6.
Press < F1 > to exit EDIT mode.
7. Match all communications parameters with serial printer. 8.
Press < F10 > twice to return to Main Menu.
2-12
PanelMate Series
2.6 Fault Relay
2.6 Fault Relay

The fault relay is located in the bottom right-hand corner of the back of PanelMate (as viewed from the
front).
As noted on the PanelMate unit itself, the relay may be wired in a normally open or normally closed
configuration. It is a Form C contact, rated for 2 amps at 220V AC, 2 amps at 120V AC and 2
amps at 28V DC resistive load.
During normal operation, the fault relay will be energized upon power-up. Whenever PanelMate
detects a communication error or system failure as described in Chapter 11, the fault relay will be deenergized. It is also possible to de-energize the fault relay whenever an alarm condition occurs. You
can set the fault relay to de-energize on alarms by using the System Utility, "Define System
Parameters" (refer to Chapter 9).
2.7 Audio Feedback Kit

The Audio Feedback Kit is an optional accessory to PanelMate.
To connect the speaker to PanelMate, simply remove it from the box, mount it where you want it, and
connect the speaker to the terminals located on the right side of PanelMate, next to the
Configuration Keyboard port.
The provided speaker is an 8-ohm speaker rated at 2 watts.
2.8 TouchPanel Shelf

The TouchPanel Shelf is an optional accessory to PanelMate. To
install the TouchPanel Shelf, complete the following tasks:
1. Make a cutout for the shelf as shown in the diagram below. Note that these dimensions are larger
than the cutout for the TouchPanel itself.
Note that the cutout dimensions for the keyboard shelf are different than those for the PanelMate
TouchPanel.
i
d
11.37
4.87
0.38
0.37
"A-
22 014. HOLE (14

PLACCS)
,J
18.30
5 38
9.63
3.8E
18.13
19.26
REAR VIES
Figure 2-6 Keyboard Shelf Cutout
PanelMate Series
2-13
2.54 TouchPanel Shelf
2. Attach the TouchPanel to the shelf with twelve #8 nuts and washers (refer to the diagram as
needed).
Caution Care should be exercised when tightening the nuts. The fasteners must be tightened
enough to obtain a proper seal, yet not be tightened enough to strip the
threads from the welded steel studs. The following torque limits should not be
exceeded:
#8 nuts = 7 inch-pounds
Figure 2-7 Keyboard Shelf Installation

3. Prepare the rubber gasket for attachment to the shelf by stripping off a small section of the paper
protecting the adhesive on one side of the gasket. Carefully attach the gasket to the shelf,
uncovering the adhesive a few inches at a time.
Note
It is important to attach the gasket so that its outside edge is even with the outside edge of the
shelf.
4. Insert the TouchPanel Shelf in the panel and fasten with fourteen #8 nuts and washers.
exceeded:
#8 nuts = 11.5 inch-pounds
5. Connect the TouchPanel to the Main Video Unit.
2-14
PanelMate Series
2.9 Panel Mount Adaptor Kit

The PanelMate Adaptor Kit is an optional accessory to PanelMate, and allows for mounting a unit into a 12inch deep enclosure. The kit consists of two adaptors, one each for the TouchPanel and Main Video Unit.
To install the adaptors, first make panel cutouts as shown in figure 2-8. Note that these dimensions are
larger than the cutouts needed for the TouchPanel and Main Video Unit themselves.
To install the adaptor for the TouchPanel, follow the directions for installing the TouchPanel Shelf (Section
2.8 of this chapter).
FRONT VIFW
0.45
SALE VTRW
AUDIO JACK
7L
"C'
PanelMate
Monitor and Keyboard
,,( Collars
Outline Drawing
aIai
aaaad
Unit Weiht
65 LBS.
MOO
70ROUE REOUIREMFNr5
24 INCH L B S FOR /10-32 NUTS WHICH
MOUNT UNIT IN EXTENSION COLLAR.
28 INCH LOS FOR 110-32 NUTS HOOCH
MOUNT THE COLLAR. 7.5 INCH LBS FOR /l-32
NUTS WHICH MOUNT KEYE104RO N
EXTENSION COLLAR.
11.5 N C H L135 FOR /7-32 NUTS WINCH
MOUNT THE COLLAR.
N25 0M HOLE (14 PLACES) II T_E
~ POYFfr1
A / C POWER
I. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
-`FAULT
RELAY
f p
1I
22 OM. HOLE
Figure 2-8 Panel Mount Cutout
PanelMate Series
2-15
Once the TouchPanel Adaptor is fully installed, complete the following tasks to install the Main Video
Unit Adaptor. Refer to Figure 2-9.
1. Attach the adaptor to the Main Video Unit with sixteen #10 nuts and washers. You will need
a long shafter, magnetic nut driver to reach the studs.
exceeded:
Figure 2-9 Main Video Unit Installation
2-16
PanelMate Series
2. Attach the gasket to the adaptor. This is most easily done by placing the entire Main Video
Unit, with the adaptor attached, face down on a working surface. Take care to prevent
scratching the front of the unit.
Prepare the rubber gasket for attachment to the adaptor by stripping off a small section of the paper
protecting the adhesive on one side of the gasket. Carefully attach the gasket to the adaptor, uncovering the
adhesive a few inches at a time.
Note
It is important to attach the gasket so that its outside edge is even with the outside edge of
the adaptor.
3. Insert the adaptor/Main Video Unit in the panel and fasten the adaptor to the panel with
sixteen #10 nuts and washers.
threads from the welded steel studs. The following torque limits should not
be exceeded:
PanelMate Series
2-17
2.10 Rack Mount Adaptor Kit

The Rack Mount Kit is an optional accessory to PanelMate. To install PanelMate in a 19-inch rack so
that it can be slid out from the front of the rack, complete the following tasks:
1. Attach the TouchPanel to the frame with twelve #8 nuts and washers. Refer to figure 2-10.
Figure 2-10 Rack Mount Installation
2-18
PanelMate Series
2. Attach the Main Video Unit to the frame with the sixteen special thin-walled hex nuts and
washers that are supplied with the Rack Mount Adaptor Kit. These nuts have the same
diameter as #8 nuts, but are tapped with 10-32 threads. Do not fully tighten these nuts until
steps 3, 4, and 5 are completed. Refer to figure 2-11.
v
P-NMA -1.
M
G
D
D
O F7 FY,
0470
A________________________________________ 4
FRONT VIF:W
1t00
SIDE VIEW
1032
15.95
24 (REF)
13.47
POWER
A/C POWER
PANELMATE
MONITOR AND KEYBOARD
O RACK MOUNT FRAME
OUTLINE DRAWING
NOTES;
FAU T RELAY
1) WEN UNIT IS 1O OTED M A RCE. SERV1/PMNLIEL PONT 08-25

COMTCCTOP NC.I2NOS 01 CISTONCR P9090(0 COOLES SHOAL. RE RIGHT ANCIL
TYPE. SONS RENNOEIOED CONNECTOR HOUSINGS ARt AS FOLLOWS' ANPI0TOL
RroOIKTS NO. 17-1372
w CORP. NO. 2079(M
IN" N0 052M
8.22
WEIGHT
65 LBS.
m CAN10N NO. OS-I 10043-22

m CJMITO N N0. oa-11041.3-3
2) F PMLS IN WK ARE NOT TAPPED FOR #10-32 THEM '.f TYPE CAGE 1A- 009950
MM TUG 100141 UNIT OUST pE ECAGED G110 MIL EDGE AT RE CORRECT RETIM
90.00140 00.E. TO SECURE 1NTR N P I - E 0 0 0 A G A Y T N E N A N [ L 5 S7 1 M N
COMlRS CF RAG( .IOINIT TONIC
3) ALL OM040NS ARE N INCITES.
REAR VIEII
Figure 2-11 Rack Mount Outline
PanelMate Series
2-19
Caution Care should be exercised when tightening the nuts. The fasteners must be tightened enough
to obtain a proper seal, yet not be tightened enough to strip the threads
from the welded steel studs. The following torque limits should not be
exceeded:
#8 nuts (TouchPanel) = 7 inch-pounds
Special 10-32 nuts (Main Video Unit) = 17 inch-pounds
3. Disassemble the slide rails. Attach the outside rails to your rack. If the mounting rails in your
rack are not tapped for 10-32 threads, use the "J" type cage nuts supplied with the Rack
Mount Adaptor Kit to secure the slide rails.
4. Attach the two inside slide rails to the base of the Rack Mount Kit using the screws and hex
nuts supplied with the kit. Use the diagram on the previous page for correct orientation.
5. Using four 3/8-inch screws with #8 flat washers and split ring washers, attach the base of the
Rack Mount Kit to the bottom of the PanelMate Main Video Unit.
Using two #10 hex nuts, attach the base of the Rack Mount Kit to the frame. At this
point, fully tighten the sixteen hex nuts attached during step 2.
6. Slide the mounted PanelMate into the rack. To secure the unit, tighten the four captive
screws that are located in the corners of the frame.
7. Use special connector housings for all 25-pin cables that will be attached to PanelMate. To
provide proper clearance inside the rack, use right-angled connectors such as the following:
Manufacturer
Amp Corp.
Part No.
207908
Amphenol Products
17-1372
Inmac
852F9
ITT Cannon
DB-115339-22
ITT Cannon
DB-110963-3
To purchase right-angle connectors, contact the above listed manufacturers directly.
2-20
PanelMate Series
2.61 Remote Connection for Configuration Keyboard
2.11 Remote Connection for Configuration Keyboard

The remote connector for the Configuration Keyboard is provided in the Support Kit, which is an optional
accessory to PanelMate.
The connector is mounted to the front of PanelMate's enclosure to provide easy access to the keyboard port. To
install this remote connector, perform the tasks listed below:
1. Make a panel cutout of the dimensions shown below near the PanelMate. The dimensions are in
millimeters, with inches shown in parentheses.
18.2'c'
(.717)
Figure 2-12 Remote Connector Cutout

2. Cut off the female end of the keyboard extension cable that is provided in the Support Kit. Expose
the five wires to a length suitable for soldering.
3. Disassemble the connector, separating the hex nut and O-ring from the front-mounting
female receptacle.
4. Mount the connector to the panel.
5. Using an ohm meter or continuity checker, establish which wires of the keyboard extension cable are
to be soldered to which contacts of the connector.
6. Solder the keyboard extension cable to the back of the remote connector.
PanelMate Series
2-21
2.12 The Acceleratl/On Interface
2.12 The Accelerati/On Interface

2.12.1 Introduction
The AcceleratI/On interface is a separate product which is compatible with model 2900 PanelMate
series units. An Acceleratl/On interface may be installed in a model 2900 PanelMate unit to provide
communication to Allen-Bradley PLCs via Data Highway, Data Highway Plus, or the 1771 remote 1/O
network.
The interface provides several distinct advantages:
With Acceleratl/On, a PanelMate unit can connect directly to Data Highway, Data Highway Plus, or the
remote 1/O network without requiring any communication modules.
The direct connection just noted eliminates the need for serial RS232 connections, permitting data
to transfer at 57.6K baud.
When it is connected to the remote I/O network, a unique monitor mode permits PanelMate with
AcceleratI/On to read discrete inputs or outputs directly off the I/O link without requiring the PLC
to transmit the data to PanelMate.
While PanelMate is communicating to one or more Allen-Bradley PLCs through Acceleratl/On, it
can still simultaneously communicate to other PLCs using its two serial ports.
When Acceleratl/On is used as an interface to Data Highway or Data Highway Plus, PanelMate
functions as a master device - polling one or more PLCs on the network to obtain or transmit data.
When AcceleratI/On is used as an interface to the remote I/O network, the combination of PanelMate with
AcceleratI/On installed will emulate one or more remote racks. The PLC can use single transfer or block
transfer operations to read or write data from/to the AcceleratI/On interface, as though the interface
were a rack. As with any remote network, the PLC will be the master in such a case, while PanelMate
(with AcceleratI/On) and any real I/O racks will be slaves.
2.12.2 Installation
The AcceleratI/On interface is packaged and sold separately from PanelMate. To install an
AcceleratI/On interface on a model 2900 PanelMate unit, follow these steps:
1. Ensure that the PanelMate is disconnected from AC power.
2. Ensure that you observe proper procedures to guard against electrostatic damage. Before handling
the Acceleratl/On interface, use static straps, floor mats or other recommended devices for
minimizing the risk of static discharge.
3. Locate the electronics module at the right side of the PanelMate unit. The cover of the
electronics module housing may be removed without detaching the entire module from the
PanelMate chassis. Remove the cover from the module by removing the two screws holding it
in place at the back edge of the cover. Gently lift the cover away from the enclosure, taking
care to dislodge it from two tabs which hold in place the edge opposite the two screws.
4. Using proper electrostatic protection procedures, remove the Acceleratl/On interface from its
shipping package.
2-22
PanelMate Series
2.12 The Acceleratl/On Interface
5. As indicated in Figure 2-13, position the Acceleratl/On board so that its male connector is
squarely aligned with the female connector on the board within the PanelMate electronics
enclosure. Gently press the connector into place and tighten the thumbscrews firmly. Use the
three screws provided to firmly secure the three corners of the board to their support posts.
...........................................................
1/0 CARD PORT
.................... E.........................................................................
PROM
OPTIONAL I / 0 CARD
ERIRL PORT 1
-
TOUCHPANEL PORT
FIRMWARE CARD
Figure 2-13 PanelMate Electronics Module

6. On the electronics module cover, remove the four screws which fasten the 3" square cover plate.
Remove the cover plate.
7. Carefully replace the cover plate onto the electronics enclosure housing, taking care that the
new opening in the cover plate mates evenly with the connector well on the AcceleratI/On
board. Re-secure the cover, using the two screws originally removed in step 3.
At the completion of step 7, the AcceleratI/On interface is now fully installed and available for use.
Refer to chapter 15, Acceleratl/On, of the PanelMate Series Product Manual for further information.
PanelMate Series
:
2.13 Dual Serial Port Board

2.13.1 Introduction
The Dual Serial Port Board from Eaton IDT is a separate product which is compatible with model
2900 PanelMate series units. A Dual Serial Port Board may be installed in a model 2900 PanelMate unit
to provide two additional serial ports.
With a Dual Serial Port Board, a PanelMate unit can provide two additional RS232/RS422 serial ports for a total
of four serial ports on the 2900 PanelMate series.
The two ports are optically isolated minimizing noise and interference during communications.
2.13.2 Installation
The Dual Serial Port Board is packaged and sold separately from PanelMate. To install a Dual Serial Port
Board on a model 2900 PanelMate unit, follow these steps:
1. Ensure that the PanelMate is disconnected from AC power.
2. Ensure that you observe proper procedures to guard against electrostatic damage. Before
handling the Dual Serial Port Board, use static straps, floor mats or other recommended
devices for minimizing the risk of static discharges.
3. Locate the electronics module at the right side of the PanelMate unit. The cover of the
electronics module housing may be removed without detaching the entire module from the
PanelMate chassis. Remove the cover from the module by removing the two screws holding it
in place at the back edge of the cover. Gently lift the cover away from the enclosure, taking
care to dislodge it from two tabs (opposite the two screws) which hold in place the edge
4. Using proper electrostatic protection procedures, remove the Dual Serial Port Board from its
shipping package.
5. As indicated in Figure 2-14, position the Dual Serial Port Board so that its male connector is
squarely aligned with the female connector on the board within the PanelMate electronics
enclosure. Gently press the connector into place and tighten the thumbscrews firmly. Use the
three screws provided to firmly secure the three corners of the board to their support posts.
DPT[D..L vD I...
S.r.u ?-T 7 s.~ta
rxT
......................................
....................
.........................
.............
E-PM.
ELKY.K CN.D
K
SCu M PORT
SE.T.L
PD.T Y
TDUCxr..EU MRT
..........................................................................
Figure 2-14 Dual Serial Port Board
2-24
PanelMate Series
6. On the electronics module cover, remove the four screws which fasten the 3" square cover plate.
Remove the cover plate.
7. Carefully replace the cover plate onto the electronics enclosure housing, taking care that the new
opening in the cover plate mates evenly with the connector well on the Dual Serial Port Board. Resecure the cover, using the two screws removed in step 3.
At the completion of step 7, the Dual Serial Port Board is now fully installed and available for use.
PanelMate Series
2-25
Chapter 3. Directory Editor
OBJECTIVES
How to get PanelMate ready for configuration
How to enter the Configuration Mode
How to title pages by creating the Directory
How to enter the Page Editor
How to check the amount of remaining memory
3.1 Before You Start Configuring Pages

As soon as you begin configuring pages (which is just a few short steps from here), you will need to
begin referencing PLC words and bits. For maximum efficiency, you should review the communication
chapters to become familiar with the way PanelMate expects you to enter these word and bit references.
Now, go to the PLC Name and Port Editor (from the System Utilities Menu) and define PLC names, the
types of PLCs you will be using with this unit, the communications parameters for PanelMate's ports, the
default PLC, and format information if you are planning to use the Generic Protocol.
For information on how to get to the PLC Name and Port Editor, refer to Chapter 9.
3.2 Entering the Configuration Mode

To enter the Configuration Mode, the keyswitch at the back of the unit should be pointed to "Configuration". (Be sure that the Configuration Keyboard is attached to the unit.) If the system is poweredup at
this time, remember that PanelMate performs a series of internal diagnostic routines before the Main
Menu appears on the screen.
PanelMate Series
3-1
3.3 Functions of the Directory Editor
Configure
Pages
Get System
Utilities
Test in
Run Mode
Figure 3-1 Main Menu

1. Select the "Configure Pages" template, using the cursor arrow keys to move the cell cursor. 2. Press <
F1 > ; the Directory Editor will immediately appear on the screen.

The Directory Editor is used to:
1. place titles on pages
2. access the Page Editor 3.
edit titles on pages
4. re-order the pages by swapping them or moving them 5. delete
entire pages
6. copy entire pages
7. see which pages are still blank
8. check the amount of free memory
Note The two fields on the Directory Editor, Page No. and Page Title, are used to perform very different
functions, so it is important to "keep them straight" in your mind as you read the instructions. Use
the Page No. field to make changes that affect entire PAGES: deleting, copying, re-ordering. The
Page Title field changes JUST THE PAGE TITLE.
The pages themselves are fully defined using the Page Editor.
3-68
PanelMate Series
3.3.1 Place Titles on Pages

Each page in the PanelMate system should have a unique title. To place a title on a page, enter
the title in the field next to the appropriate Page No. while in the Directory Editor. A page title
can be up to 45 characters long. Follow the procedure below:
1. Select the Page Title field by using the cursor arrow keys.
2. Press < F1 > to enter the EDIT mode; the green bar will become blue.
3. Type the title.
4. Press < Fl > again to close the field.
PanelMate will automatically place this title on the correct page. You can verify this by looking at
this page in the Page Editor.
Note
PanelMate III requires two screens to show the directory of all 30 pages. The < F7 > key
must be used in the Directory Editor to show pages 15-29. This key will work as a toggle
between pages 0-14 and pages 15-29.
3.3.2 Access the Page Editor

You will want to go to the Page Editor when you want to create or edit pages. You must go through
the Page Editor to add or modify any templates or elements. To access the Page Editor:
1. Select the page number you wish to work on, using the cursor arrow keys.
2. Press < F1 > ; PanelMate will move immediately to the Page Editor, showing the page you
have selected.
Note
PanelMate III requires two screens to show the directory of all 30 pages. The <F7> key
must be used in the Directory Editor to show pages 15-29. This key will work as a toggle
between pages 0-14 and pages 15-29.
3.3.3 Edit Existing Titles

Any title can be edited at any time using the following procedure:
Select the Page Title to be edited (use cursor arrow keys to step through Page # and Page Title
fields).
Use the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor over characters without erasing them.
Type over any characters to change them.
Press < Backspace > or < Del > to erase characters.
Press < Ins > to enter the insert mode, which will allow you to insert characters at the position
of the cursor. Press < Ins > again to get out of the insert mode.
To delete a title and start again:
1. Select the Page Title to be deleted, using the cursor arrow keys.
2. Press < F5 > to delete the title.
3. Press < F5 > again in response to the prompt that appears at the top of the screen.
4. You are now ready to place a new title in the field.
PanelMate Series
3-3
3.3.4 Reordering Pages

The contents of a page, including its title, can be moved to another page number, if that page is blank,
by using MOVE. Two non-blank pages can be exchanged by using SWAP.
To move an entire page to a new page number:
1. Select the page number to be moved, using the cursor arrow keys. 2.
Press < F3 >.
3. Select the new page number, using the up or down arrow keys.
4. Press < F3 > again to move the entire page to the new page number. To
swap two pages:
1. Select the first page number to be swapped, using the cursor arrow keys. 2.
Press < F2 >.
3. Select the second page number to be swapped, using the up or down arrow keys.
4. Press < F2 > again to swap these two entire pages, so that the first page is now in the
second page's location, and the second page is in the first page's location.
3.3.5 Delete an Entire Page

If you are dissatisfied with an entire page's contents, you may delete the entire page, including all of its
definitions, using the following procedure:
1. Select the page number of the page to be deleted, using the cursor arrow keys. 2.
Press < F5 >.
3. Because of the finality of this command, a prompt will tell you to press < F5 > again if you wish
to delete the entire page. Press < F5 > again.
4. Another prompt will appear, asking if you are sure. Press < Y > to delete the entire page.
3.3.6 Copy an Entire Page

If another page in your system is to be very similar to a page you have already configured, it may be
quicker to first copy the configured page and then make changes to it, rather than reconfigure
a whole new page.
To copy an entire page, including all of its definitions, use the following procedure:
1. Select the page number of the page to be copied, using the cursor arrow keys. 2.
Press <F4>.
3. Select the new page number (the destination of the copy), using the up or down arrow keys. 4. Press
< F4 > again.
3.3.7 Check Available Memory

When you have completed an editing session, it is important to know how much battery-backed memory you
still have available. Press < F6 > for a prompt that will list the number of bytes of memory that can
still be used. Note that it is possible to create dense pages that can use up the available
memory before the total number of pages have been configured.
3.3.8 Return to the Main Menu

When you have completed an editing session, you must return to the Main Menu before turning off the
system so that the memory checksum can be recalculated by the system. In order to do this, press < F10
>.
70-4
PanelMate Series
71-4
PanelMate Series
Chapter 4. Page Editor
OBJECTIVES
How a PanelMate page is laid out
How to add templates to a screen
How to add elements to a page

How to create and edit Symbols and Characters
4.1 Configuring PanelMate

The Page Editor is used to configure and edit the pages that will be used online. While the Directory Editor
is identical for PanelMate I, PanelMate II, and PanelMate III, major differences exist between their Page
Editors. These differences are due to the additional Graphics Mode capabilities of PanelMate II/III.
PanelMate I uses "templates", or fixed graphic shapes and formats, to present information to the online
operator, thus providing a proven, standard method of presentation. PanelMate II/III offers the same
template graphics as PanelMate I, plus the additional flexibility of customer user-defined graphics and
free-form text and nunierics. Therefore, PanelMate I offers Template editing (Template Mode),
while PanelMate II/III provides for both Template editing and Graphics editing (Graphics Mode). Graphics
configured for online animation based on PLC data are called "Elements". Note that pages configured with
a PanelMate I can be transferred to a PanelMate II/III, providing an easy, cost-effective upgrade path from
PanelMate I capabilities to PanelMate II/III functionality.
PanelMate provides the following Template Editors, which are accessible from the Page Editor:
Indicator Template Editor
Readout Template Editor
Bar Template Editor Display
Template Editor
PanelMate II/III provides these Template Editors, along with the following Graphics Mode Editors:
Graphic Element Editor
Readout Element Editor
Bar Element Editor
Message Element Editor
Symbol Editor Character
Editor
PanelMate Series
4-1
4.2 Page Layout
4.2 Page Layout

All ten pages that can be active in PanelMate's Run Mode have the same basic layout. As you have
discovered, the page title, created in the Directory Editor, is centered on the top line of the page in white
letters on a blue background. To the left of the page title is the page number and to the right of the title is the
time. The Page Layout will be the same for the PanelMate III as for PanelMate II, if pages 10-15 contain no
information. If any of these pages are being used, the Page Layout will appear as shown in figure 4-2. (The
time can be set using the System Utilities; refer to Chapter 9.)
The second line of the screen is the system overview. For information regarding the use of this overview, refer
to Chapter 11.
Lines 3 through 6 (four lines) comprise the alarm window. These lines are reserved for alarm messages that
are automatically created by PanelMate when an alarm condition is detected. You will be defining the alarm
conditions as part of the template and element definitions.
One-sixth of the screen, located at the far right, is reserved for labels for the five Control Buttons. You
can define Control Button usage in the definitions of each type of template or element; a single template or
element can be associated with as many as five Control Buttons.
To view a template's or element's Control Button labels, select that template or element with the cursor
while in the Page Editor.
Note that templates with associated control functions will have a small arrow placed in the lower left corner
of the template. Within each element editor, the control indicator (arrow) position may be selected.
Curr.ne Pa.e Title
P. e I
Gu.rvie~ Pbid
El
P . a T i t l e P re .
16:27:42
INNIS
Rlarn Wind,. -~
Control Button Labels
Tenplate Cells _______________ I
Generalized Pape L.yom
Figure 4-1 PanelMate I and PanelMate II Page Layout
C ....... t Pave Title

G~.rutw Psad _______________
I Pa-. Till. . 15:2J:d2
.1arn ufnd.u _________________
Control Button Labels
Te.elate cells
Generalized Page Lay.ot
Figure 4-2 PanelMate III Page Layout
4-73
PanelMate Series
4.3 Pa e Editor in Tern late Mode
The remainder of the screen is divided into 15 cells. A normal-size Indicator or Readout Template is the
size of one cell. Therefore, it is possible to place up to fifteen templates on a single page. However, the
smallest Bar Template covers two vertical cells and the smallest Display Template covers three horizontal
cells. Keep these limitations in mind when planning the arrangement of templates on a page.
Using PanelMate II/III, both templates and elements may be placed on a page. The size and
position of the graphics elements are user-selectable and, therefore, are not restricted by the layout of the 15
cells. Note, however, that elements and templates may not overlap or directly border each other. Also,
elements may not be inserted at another element's origin.
4.3 Page Editor in Template Mode

The Page Editor is used to:
1. place new templates on a page
2. access the Template Editors to define the templates 3.
move templates from cell to cell on the same page 4. copy
templates to another cell on the same page 5. delete templates
from a page 6. copy templates from page to page
7. save a page in non-volatile (battery-backed) RAM memory
Within the Template Mode of the Page Editor, the following menu
is displayed. The operation of
F1-EDIT
F2-ADD
F3-MOVE
F6-GRAPHICS F7-MEMORIZE F8-RECALL
F4-COPY
F5-DELETE
F9-SAVE PAGE F10-EXIT
Figure 4-3 Template Mode Menu each

item is reviewed in the following sections.
4.3.1 Add a Template

To add a new template to a page:
1. Select an empty cell by using the arrow keys to move the cell cursor. Be sure to select a cell that can
accommodate the size of template you plan to use. The selected cell is always the leftmost or
topmost cell of a template.
2. Press < F2 > to add a new template.
3. Select the type of template you wish to add by pressing < 1 >, < 2 >, < 3 >, or < 4 > for Indicator,
Readout, Bar, and Display templates, respectively. PanelMate will move immediately to the proper
Template Editor, showing the template you have selected. Refer to the appropriate Template
Editor for information on how to create the template's definition.
4. Press < F10 > to return to the Page Editor.
PanelMate Series
4-3
4.3 Pa e Editor in Tern late Mode
4.3.2 Edit a Template Definition

As noted in the previous section, whenever you add a new template to a page, you will automatically be
moved to the Template Editor so that you can fully define the template. To make a change or addition to a
template that you have already defined, use the following procedure:
1. Select the template to be edited by using the arrow keys.
2. Press < Fl > to edit the selected template. PanelMate will move immediately to the proper
Template Editor, showing the template you have selected. Refer to the appropriate Template
Editor for information on how to make changes to the template's definition.
3. Press < F10 > to return to the Page Editor.
4.3.3 Move Templates

Once a template has been placed on a page, it can be moved to any empty cell(s) on the page by using the
MOVE function:
1. Select the template to be moved, using the arrow keys. 2.
Press < F3 >.
3. Select the new location for the template. Be sure the area you have selected is large enough
to accommodate the template. Remember that the cell you select will be the leftmost or
topmost cell of the template.
4. Press <F3> again.
Note The new location for a template must be completely blank. Therefore, the MOVE function cannot be
used to move a Bar Template up or down, nor can it be used to move a Display Template from side
to side. Use MEMORIZE - DELETE - RECALL for these types of moves.
4.3.4 Copy Templates

If a number of similar templates are to be used on the same page, it may be easier to fully define the first
template, copy it as many times as needed, and then edit the definitions of the copies.
To copy a template:
1. Select the template to be copied, using the arrow keys. 2.
Press < F4 >.
3. Select the location for the copy. Be sure the area you have selected is large enough to accommodate
the template. Remember that the cell you select will be the leftmost or topmost cell of the template.
4. Press <F4> again.
5. To edit the definition of this template, press < Fl > .
6. To make another copy of the same template, start at step 1 again.
Note This function does not keep the copy in memory. Therefore, to copy the same template repeatedly, you
must go through the entire copy procedure each time or use the MEMORIZERECALL function.
75-4
PanelMate Series
4.3 Page Editor in Template Mode
4.3.5 Delete Templates

When a template is deleted from a page, the entire definition is also deleted. To delete a template: 1.
Select the template to be deleted, using the arrow keys. 2. Press < F5 >.
3. Because of the finality of this command, a prompt will tell you to press < F5 > again if you wish
to delete the template. Press < F5 > (this is the second entry of < F5 > ).
4. Another prompt will appear, asking if you are sure. Press < Y >.
4.3.6 Copy Templates from Another Page

The MEMORIZE-RECALL functions can be used to copy templates from one page to another, or to
copy a template several times onto the same page. In both cases, the template and its full definition
are copied. Therefore, for most efficient use of these functions, fully define the first template, copy it as
many times as needed, and then edit the definitions of the copies.
To copy templates using MEMORIZE-RECALL:
1. Select the template to be copied, using the arrow keys.
2. Press < F7 > ; a prompt will appear at the top of the screen to place a copy of the
template in PanelMate's working memory.
3. Press < F7 > again.
4. Select the new location for this template. This can be done by using the arrow keys to select a
cell on the same page, or by exiting the page you are on (press < F10 > ), selecting a new page,
and then selecting the new location on the new page.
5. Press < F8 > to place the memorized copy in the new location. Because this template
remains in memory, more copies can be made by selecting new locations and pressing <
F8 > as many times as needed.
The template in memory will remain in memory until a new template is placed there, or the system loses
power, or the PanelMate is changed to Run Mode.
As a reminder, be sure to select a cell that can accommodate the size of template you are copying. The
selected cell is always the leftmost or topmost cell of a template.
4.3.7 Save a Page

As you edit a page, all of your work is in a "working RAM" area that will be cleared when you exit the Page
Editor. You must save your work to move it into battery-backed RAM.
To save your page and store the information in non-volatile memory (battery-backed RAM), press <F9>.
A page may be saved at any time, but be sure to save before you exit the Page Editor. If you exit
without saving, your new work on the page will be lost.
4.3.8 Check Available Memory

When you have completed an editing session, you may wish to know how much battery-backed memory you
still have available. Press < F6 > for a prompt that will list the number of bytes of memory that can
still be used.
PanelMate Series
4-5
4.4 Pa e Editor in Gra hits Mode
4.3.9 Access the Graphics Mode

Within the Page Editor, press < F6 > to toggle between the Template Mode and the Graphics Mode. Note
that the Graphics Mode is only available on the PanelMate II and PanelMate III.
4.3.10 Exit the Page Editor

To exit the Page Editor and return to the Directory Editor, press < F10 >. Be sure to press < Y > to save
the page (in response to the screen prompt) if you have made any changes to the page and have not previously
saved them.
4.4 Page Editor in Graphics Mode

The Page Editor is used to:
1. place new graphics elements on the screen
2. access the element editors to define the elements 3. create
customized characters
4. combine characters to create a symbol
5. select window mode to move, copy, and delete sections of the page.
4.4.1 Overview
The page configuration structure of the PanelMate II/III is very similar to that of PanelMate I, in that the
Main Menus and Directory Editors are identical. The differences appear in the Page Editor, where
PanelMate II/III contains all of the tools available in PanelMate I, along with the additional Graphics Mode
functions.
Therefore, the PanelMate II/III's Page Editor contains both the Template Mode and the Graphics Mode.
Templates may be added to the screen and configured as in PanelMate I. Additionally, there are four
Element Editors available in the Graphics Mode which have functions similar to the Template Editors.
However, these Element Editors provide user-definable attributes which allow for creation of custom graphics
elements. Within each Element Editor is a configuration spreadsheet which features a structured fill-in-theblank and multiple choice approach similar to the Template Editors. Templates and Elements may be mixed
on the pages.
At the PanelMate II/III Page Editor, you may select either the Template Mode or the Graphics Mode. This
selection is made by pressing the associated Function Key to toggle between the two modes.
Within the Graphics Mode, you may select one of the Element Editors (i.e., Graphic Element
Editor, Readout Element Editor, Bar Element Editor, Message Element Editor) or you may select
Parameters Editing, Window Mode, Symbol Editor or Character Editor.
Page Editing Parameters which may be altered to edit the screen characters include: Foreground Color,
Background Color, Background Blink, Font and Cursor Direction.
The Window Mode is used to define an area of the screen as a window, and allows the following operations
to be performed on the contents of the window: Move, Copy, Delete, Memorize, Recall. Note that only
Graphics Mode elements and text are affected.
The Character Editor in PanelMate II/III provides the ability to create custom characters. The Character
Editor provides the means to define the bit-map associated with a specific character.
4-6
PanelMate Series
Within PanelMate II/III, there are four Fonts, or sets of characters. These are Normal, Double High,
Quad and Graphic. A Font is actually a list of 128 characters whose shapes are defined by a pixel-map and
are configured in a user-defined arrangement within the Character Editor. The character is arranged in
a 9 x 12 matrix of pixels, where the user defines which pixels are ON or OFF, along with the ON/OFF
(Foreground/Background) Colors.
A Symbol is an independently named collection of characters which are placed on the screen in
relation to each other. Symbols are created and edited within the Symbol Editor and are stored in the
Symbol Library. Each Symbol has a defined origin and may be placed on a page relative to this
origin. Therefore, Symbols may be used on numerous pages, and numerous times on a single page.
After a Symbol has been in the Symbol Editor and saved in the Symbol Library, it may be added to a
page within either the Symbol Editor or the Page Editor. Note that the Symbol may simply be used as
a static element. By configuring a Symbol, it is transformed from a static state to a dynamic state. The
Symbol, configured in the Graphic Element Editor, becomes a Graphic Element when dynamics are
added.
Note Each graphic element may be configured for up to 5 different visual states. During online operation,
as changes in PLC data are evaluated, a currently-visible state will be erased in black so that a
new state may be made visible. It is recommended that symbols not be permitted to
overlap, in order to avoid unwanted and unpredictable overwrites of a graphic element.
4.4.2 ISA Symbol Set (PanelMate II/III)

Each PanelMate II/III is shipped with a standard set of graphic symbols loaded into memory. There are
52 symbols conforming to ISA standards. The ISA symbols allow the user to begin building graphic
displays without the need to create custom symbols first.
4.4.3 Graphics Mode Page Editing

Within the Graphics Mode of the Page Editor, the following menu is displayed. The operation of each
item is reviewed in the following paragraphs. Note that following sections provide more complete
information on several items.
F1-EDIT
F2-ADD
F3-PARAMETERS F4-SYMBOL
F6-TEMPLATE F7-WINDOW
FB-IDENTIFY
F5-CHARACTER
F9-SAVE PAGE Flo-EXIT
Figure 4-4 Graphics Mode Menu
Edit an Existing Element

To edit an existing element, place the character cursor on the origin cell of the graphic element. Upon
pressing < F1 >, the configuration spreadsheet is accessed. This spreadsheet is used to specify online
dynamics such as color, blink, message and control button definitions.
Add an Element to the Page

To insert a new element onto the page, press < F2 > . The position of the cursor at the time < F2 > is
pressed, is considered the origin of the new graphic element. If there is already an origin under the
cursor, an error message is displayed. Upon pressing < F2 > to add an element, a prompt is displayed
requesting the element type to be configured. Press the associated key to select the desired element's
configuration spreadsheet.
PanelMate Series
4-7
Edit Parameters
This function permits the editing of Graphics Mode screen characters including: Foreground Color,
Background Color, Background Blink, Font and Cursor Direction. These editing functions are further
described in Section 4.8.
Symbol Editor
The Symbol Editor is used to create, edit and save independently named symbols. A Symbol is a collection of
characters which are placed on the screen relative to a defined origin. Press < F4 > to access the Symbol
Editor. See Section 4.6 for further details.
Character Editor
The Character Editor provides the ability to create custom characters by defining the bit-map associated
with a character. Press < F5 > at the Page Editor to access the Character Editor. See Section
4.5 for further C.b_~ _.'Js.
Template Mode
Within the Graphics Mode, press < F6 > to access the Template Mode. Note that by pressing < F6 > at the
Page Editor, you may toggle between the Graphics and Template Mode.
Window Mode
Once you have begun placing characters, symbols and graphic elements such as messages, readouts and bars
on a page, you may need to rearrange the layout. The WINDOW function permits you to move, delete and
copy elements added during the Graphics Mode (it does not work for Templates). The WINDOW function
also permits you to "memorize" a section of a page, then "recall" it on another page, to speed up the page
creation process. To access the Window Mode, press < F7 >. See Section 4.7 for further details.
Identify an Element's Origin Cell

This function permits you to identify the origin cell of any of the four types of graphic elements. Press < F8 >
to toggle the color of the origin cell of each graphic element on the page. This function is used
particularly in conjunction with the EDIT function.
Delete an Element
To delete a Graphic Element from a page, along with all of the associated configuration information, place
the cursor at the origin of the element and press < Del > . In response to the prompt, press "Yes" to delete
the element and re-draw the screen.
Save the Page

This function saves the page to the battery-backed memory, in its current configuration.
Exit the Page Editor

Press < F10 > to exit the Page Editor. This function permits exit back to the Directory Editor, with options of
either saving or not saving the current page.
79-8
PanelMate Series
4.5 Character Editor

The Character Editor may be entered from the Page Editor (<F5>) or from the Symbol Editor (< F6 >
). The Character Editor permits you to create a new character or edit an existing character while still
viewing any page layout.
The Character Editor page is displayed at the right side of the configured page, to allow viewing of the
original page during editing. The information provided on the editor page includes: the font type currently
available for editing; the specific keyboard recall character currently selected for editing; a 9 x 12 matrix of
dots representing the pixels in a character cell, in expanded format; the actual sized character.
The first step in editing an existing character or creating a new one is to select the keyboard recall character to
be referenced. If an actual character has already been created and assigned to a recall character, the actual
character will be displayed.
The editing functions available from keys < Fl > through <F10> in the "SELECT MODE" are as follows.
4.5.1 Edit
Press < Fl > to select to edit a character. This function provides access to other function selections which
permit editing the pixels in the 9 x 12 cell matrix of the character already chosen. The EDIT MODE functions
include:
ARROW
9 x 12 matrix.
< Fl >
CHANGE
The keyboard direction arrows are used to move a "cursor" pixel around KEYS the
This key is a "toggle" which either lights or unlights the pixel at the cursor
pixel's current location. A lit pixel represents it as foreground, while an unlit pixel
represents it as background.
This key simply clears (erases) the entire matrix.
< F2 >
CLEAR
< F3 >
INVERT
< F6 >
< F7 >
SHOW
FONTS
This key causes all pixels in the 9 x 12 matrix to change to the state opposite
the current one: all of those which are ON turn OFF; all OFF turn ON.
This key provides a page of helpful explanations. HELP
This key provides a directory of fonts.
<F8>
RESTORE
This key clears the 9 x 12 pixel matrix and restores any pixel pattern which
had previously been assigned to the recall character.
4.5.2 Select Font

Press < F2 > to choose Select Font. If the Quad or Double High fonts have been made available for creation of
custom characters, this key will allow selection of alternate reference fonts by use of the up/down arrow keys.
The field is closed with the < F10 > key.
4.5.3 Copy Character

Press < F3 > to select to Copy a character. This function permits you to copy the pixel map from one
recall character to another.
PanelMate Series
4-9
4.5.4 Help
Press < F6 > to select Help. This key accesses a page that presents helpful descriptions of concepts used in
the Character Editor.
4.5.5 Show Fonts

Press < F7 > to select Show Fonts. This key presents a directory of the Normal and Graphic characters in the
system, as well as Double High and Quad characters, if these fonts have been selected for redefinition. The
characters available for you to edit are shown on the directory in solid blue color. By pressing the horizontal or
vertical direction arrow keys while in the directory, you may select a character to edit upon exiting the
directory.
Note that it is possible to use the memory space normally reserved for Quad Sized or Double High characters
for creation of additional customized characters. In such a case, however, you will completely remove access to
the entire font as it was previously defined. Therefore, when the system parameter for the Double High and/or
Quad font is set to "Y", the font ceases to have the special (Double High or Quad) characteristics. In effect,
the entire font becomes "normal-sized". Whenever a font is redefined in such a fashion, the new definition of
any character will appear on any pages where the previous definition had already been placed. Be aware that
this could cause unexpected appearances on such display pages. Note the Font Directory containing the
predefined characters is shown in Figure 4-5, which follows.
4.5.6 Restore
Press < F8 > to select Restore. This function clears the 9 x 12 pixel matrix, and restores any pixel pattern
which had previously been assigned to the recall character.
4.5.7 Save Font

Press < F9 > to select Save Font. This key saves any of the character changes made during the editing session.
The following figure shows the directory of the Normal and Graphic characters which come standard with
the system.
- RECALL
KEY
-- NORMAL
^@â^b^c^dê^f^g^hî^j^k^1^M^nô^p^q^r^s^tû^v^w^x^y^z^C^\^] ^^
r,
!t r 1 LL J
"`cR
>
- GRAPHIC
- RECALL
KEY
- NORMAL
- GRAPHIC
RECALL KEY
- NORMAL
-
- GRAPHIC
1RECALL
KEY
NORMAL
GRAPHIC
4t
...
sp !
!
8 $ 7.. & ( ) * + - . /
M $ % & ( ) *+ - , /
0 1 2 3 4 S 6 78 9 : ; <_ > ?
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 9 : ; < _ > ?
--i
i i 1 lllI IlII 1
1 1 i i I--IL F
@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N 0 P Q R S T U V U X Y Z C\] ^_
@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N 0 P Q R S T U V U X Y Z C\] ^
J : i ! A.f
a b c d e f 9h i j k 1 n n o p q
a b c d e f 9 h i j k 1 Mn o p g
/ / \ \ < > , `- `` , % ~
f /
r s t u v w x y z{
r s t u v w x y z{
C = - = C 2, r, 7 Q
}
de
}
0
47 C E
Figure 4-5 Normal and Graphic Character Set
4-10
PanelMate Series
4.6 Symbol Editor
4.6 Symbol Editor

A symbol is a collection of characters chosen from any of the fonts, and placed on the screen in
relation to a character cell designated as the origin. When adding a symbol to a page with the ADD
function of the Page Editor, the origin will be used as a reference. Symbols are stored in a library and
referenced by name.
When < F4 > is pressed to enter the Symbol Editor, you will be prompted to enter a name consisting of
up to six characters, which will be used to recall a predefined symbol or to begin construction of a new
one. Pressing < F2 > within the Symbol Editor will print a library of existing symbol names.
Once you are in the Symbol Editor, characters may be placed on the page to form a symbol by
pressing keyboard recall keys and using the direction arrows to position the character cursor. The
editing functions available from the keys < Fl > through <F10> are as follows:
< Fl >
This function allows you to name the symbol to be edited or created. If
EDIT the name is not currently in the library, a prompt will be issued to ascertain if this is a new
symbol. If the answer is no, the symbol name prompt will be reissued. If the
answer is yes, the symbol may be drawn on the page using the current cursor
position as the origin.
< F3 >
This key permits changes to the character cell parameters.
PARAM
ETERS
< F4 >
This function moves the symbol identified for editing. When < F4 > is
MOVE pressed, the symbol is highlighted. As arrow keys are pressed, a shadow of the symbol
will move in the given direction. When the shadow is positioned where the symbol is
to be moved, press < F4 > to physically move the symbol to the new location.
Press < F10 > to cancel the action.
< F5 >
This function removes the identified symbol from the library. It makes no
DELETE check to see if the symbol has been referenced by any page. If the symbol has been
deleted from the library, an error message may be issued by the Page Editor
when it tries to draw and update the screen. The Online System
issues an error message and aborts at startup time.
PanelMate Series
< F6 >
CHARACTER
This key permits entry into the Character Editor (described previously) for
changes to characters used in symbols.
< F7 >
ORIGIN
< F8 >
REDRAW
< F9 >
SAVE
This key permits alteration of the designated origin cell location of a symbol,
without changing the shape or location of the symbol being edited.
This key refreshes the entire screen when pressed.
When pressed, this key saves the current symbol to the symbol library.
4-11
4.6 S bol Editor
Upon pressing < F9 > to Save, the following prompt is displayed: "Symbol in Library. Replace with
this version? Enter Y or N."
Press "Y" to save the symbol, overwriting the previous version. Press "N" to save the symbol under a new
name.
When the symbol is displayed on the page, another prompt asks if you will configure the symbol. If
you enter "Y", the Graphic Element Editor spreadsheet will be displayed (see Section 5.4). If you enter
"N", the symbol is placed on the page as a static symbol.
The page which follows contains gridwork provided to help you plan character composition and layout of
symbols. The grid may be photocopied as needed. Each small rectangle may be shaded-in to represent a
pixel. Groupings of 9 x 12 pixels are bordered to form a character cell, which is very close to the
actual proportion on the PanelMate Il/III page.
83-12
PanelMate Series
4.6 Symbol Editor
PanelMate Series
4-13
4.7 Window Mode
4.7 Window Mode

A "window" is an area of the screen which is to be addressed by certain functions. Static text and all
origins within the window's area (as depicted by a color change) are the targets of the functions. For
symbols and elements, only the origin cell need be included in the window area to affect the entire
shape and configuration.
When the "< F7 > WINDOW" key is pressed, the function key labels change, and you are instructed to
begin defining the window by positioning the cursor at one corner of the window. Then press the
function key indicative of the desired action (MOVE, COPY, DELETE, or MEMORIZE). As the
cursor is moved, a rectangle of character cells is formed with the cursor itself as one corner and the
marked character cell as the opposite. The character cells within the rectangle are highlighted by
complementing their colors.
At this point, the instructions are dependent on the action selected.
F1F6-IDENTIFY
<F3>
F2-
F3-MOVE
F4-COPY
F5-DELETE
F7-MEMORIZE
F8-RECALL
F9-
FIC-EXIT
Figure 4-6 Window Mode Menu

When the < F3 > MOVE function key has been pressed, the window is
MOVE
and the window
itself, as whose
well asorigins
the cursor,
disappears.
In
place,
alldefined
static characters
and all graphics
were included
in the
their
window, are now highlighted. At this point, the items selected are treated as an
entity. As the direction keys are pressed, a "shadow" of the selected items
moves in the direction indicated. When the shadow is in the desired location,
the < ENTER > key is depressed and the graphics are moved to their new
location, if each of the member characters is in a valid location. Note that a
group of elements being moved may contain several origin cells. The final
location after the move must not be such that a moved origin cell overlaps an
existing origin location. In such a case, an error message is issued and the
shadows remain.
< F4>
The Copy function works exactly as does the Move function with the crucial
COPY difference that, once the selected items are drawn in their new location, the original
copies are not erased. The associated spreadsheets are also duplicated.
< F5 >
Once the window is defined and the selected graphics are highlighted, three
DELETE levels of prompts are issued in the same fashion as the Delete Template function
before any action is taken. If all three prompts are answered positively, all
trace of the graphics is removed and forgotten.
< F6 >
This function is used to identify the origin cell locations of all graphic ele
IDENTIFY ments currently on the page. This key acts as a toggle to turn the identification
on and off. Access of other areas of the editors also turns off the identification.
< F7 > This function makes temporary copies of the graphics selected in the window. MEMORThese temporary copies are kept until the Main Menu is re-entered or I ZE another graphic
is memorized. Memorize is used in conjunction with Recall.
< F8 >
If the Memorize function described above has been executed previously (in
RECALL other words, there is something in the Memorize buffer), this function copies the
memorized graphics to the same page positions as when they were
memorized. Initially, only their shadows appear. The procedure, at this point, is
the same as it is for the Move function.
4-14
PanelMate Series
4.8 Parameters Editin Functions
4.8 Parameters Editing Functions

4.8.1 Parameters Editing
All graphics elements are placed on the page by moving a character cell cursor to the desired "origin cell"
selected on the 17 x 65 character cell matrix available for each page. An individual character may be
placed in any cell as part of a label or message. Status lines are present at the top of the Graphics
Mode Page Editor to identify the current character foreground and background colors, blink state,
font in use, cursor position and direction, and cell location of the cursor. The status line format is
shown in the following figure.
Foreground
Line/Column
Background
Colors Blink
Template
OFF
Font
Cursor Direction
Figure 4-7 Status Line Format

At the Page Editor, press < F3 > to edit a parameter. Upon pressing < F3 >, the background color of
these fields is changed from white to cyan. Note that the first field's background color is green. This
indicates that the field can be selected for editing. Press < F1 > to edit the field with the green
background, or press a direction arrow key to move and select another field. Upon pressing < F1 > at a
green field, the background color becomes blue, and the field may then be edited. Press the up and
down arrow keys to scroll through the list of options appropriate to that field. The Cursor Direction
parameter data is entered directly by pressing any of the eight direction keys, not by scrolling. When the
desired option is displayed, press the < F1 > key to record the value. The field's background now reverts to
green, and another field may now be selected. When all editing has been completed, press the < F10 >
key to exit the Parameters Editor and return to the function from which the Parameters Editor was
accessed.
While in the Parameters Editor, an existing static character's color, font, and/or blink attribute can be
modified. First, adjust the appropriate status line fields to reflect the desired attribute combination, then
press "<F2> PAINT". Next, by using the arrow keys, position the cursor over the character to be
adjusted and press the space bar. The character now has the characteristics displayed on the status lines,
and the cursor has moved one character cell in the direction currently indicated on the status line. Press
< F10 > to exit the Paint Mode and return to the Parameters Editor.
4.8.2 Direct Editing Functions

Within the Graphics Mode Page Editor, several direct editing functions are provided to reduce the
number of necessary keystrokes. For example, when editing the Cursor Direction parameter, one must
first select Parameter Editing, then select Cursor Direction, and finally select the desired direction. To
reduce the number of keystrokes, specific keystrokes are provided to accomplish specific results. This
section contains information on each available direct editing function. The direct editing keystrokes,
shown in bold type below, are not shown on the page menus.
Show Fonts
The Show Fonts function displays a page containing the current configuration of the Font directory. This
page, as shown in Section 4.5, may be accessed normally from the Character Editor. The direct editing
function decreases the number of necessary keystrokes and deletes the need for accessing the Character
Editor.
To access the Show Fonts page from the Page Editor or from the Symbol Editor, press < Alt > < F7 >. To
return to the editor, press < F10 > .
PanelMate Series
4-15
4.9 Example Page
Cursor Movement
Cursor movements within the Page Editor and Symbol Editor are normally one character movement per
arrow key depression.
To accelerate cursor movement, press < CTRL > < ARROW KEY > to move the cursor five characters.
This function is available at the Page Editor and Symbol Editor.
Element Selection
To select an element within the Page Editor, it is normally necessary to move the cursor to the element's origin.
To accelerate the process of element selection, simply press <5> at the numeric keypad to move the cursor
to the nearest origin of an element.
Font and Cursor Direction Selection

The Font and Cursor Direction may be edited as described in Parameters Editing. To reduce the number of
necessary keystrokes, the following keystrokes may be used at the Page Editor and Symbol Editor to select
the associated parameter.
< Alt > <N>
Select Normal Font
< Alt > <G>
Select Graphic Font
< Alt > <D>
Select Double High Font
< Alt > <Q>
Select Quad Font
< Alt > <U>
Set Cursor Direction to Up
< Alt > <W>
Set Cursor Direction to Down
< Alt > <L>
Set Cursor Direction to Left
< Alt > <R>
Set Cursor Direction to Right
4.9 Example Page

Each PanelMate II/III system is shipped with an Example Page installed in battery-backed RAM. The
Example Page is listed as page 0 on the page directory. It is furnished in order to provide an example of each
kind of template and each kind of graphic element, complete with parameters configured for Generic
Protocol.
By following the steps and suggestions listed in the next section, you may view examples of templates,
graphics elements and characters used for static labels. You may also examine how a symbol is assembled
from characters, and what entries are made to configure a template or graphic element to a PLC or host
device via Generic Protocol. If you wish to actually configure the Example Page to run on your particular brand
of PLC, additional suggestions are provided later in this section.
You may transfer the page to a BackPac if you wish, by using the "Transfer Memory" function available through
the "Systems Utilities" selection of the Main Menu.
4-16
PanelMate Series
4.9 Example Page
4.9.1 Exploring the Example Page

1. From the Main Menu, press < F1 > to select Configure Pages, then press < F1 > to select page 0.
2. The figure which follows illustrates the page layout. The Page Editor will initially be in the
Template Mode. Press the keyboard direction arrows to move the cursor through the indicator,
display, readout and bar template areas. Note when moving the cursor, that it requires three (3)
presses of the horizontal arrow key to fully cross the display template, and two (2) presses of the
vertical arrow key to fully cross the bar template. At each template, you may press < Fl > to
access its configuration page to examine all parameters which have been pre-assigned. Press <
F10 > to return to the page.
10:23:42
PAGE 0 Example Page -- Generic Protocol
PAGE EDITOR - GRAPHICS MODE

FI=EDIT
F2=ADD
F3=PARAMETERS F4=SYMBOL
FS=CHARACTER
F6=TEMPLATE F7=WINDOW FO=IDENTIFY
F9=SAVE PAGE F10=EXIT
Foreground
Background
RD ICOLORSI
Blink EW Font INORMALI
Line/Column 10 ON Template 01 Cursor Direction 13
Indicator
Template
tank
level OK
Message 1 shows during configuration
Readout
Template
123456
Turn on
alarm state
(momentary)
*PanelMate II*
pages may contain:
Templates
Graphics
Numerics
Text
Set bit
(momentary)
,*
123456
' Bar
1000.0
N1
0.0000
Select Readout
to change value:
500.00
6 400.00 ,
Figure 4-8 Example Page

3. You will note when moving the template cursor, that the cursor passes non-destructively over areas of
descriptive text, plus graphics such as a pump, tank and valve. None of these are templates.
4. Press <F6> to enter Graphics Mode. Note these changes on the page:
The Fl-F10 selection menu changes content, and changes background color from green
to yellow.
Two parameter lines appear just under the selection menu.
The template cursor disappears and is replaced by a character cell cursor.
5. Press <F8> to make visible origin cells of the graphic elements on the page. Use the arrow keys to
place the cursor on the origin cell for the pump in the left center of the page. Press < F1 > to
view the configuration table for the pump symbol, then < F10 > to return to the page.
6. Repeat the strategy used in the previous step to examine the configurations of the message elements,
the readout element (number "123"), the bar element (the tank level), and the flow valve.
PanelMate Series
4-17
4.9 Example Page
7. Note the blue and red area at right center of the screen, which contains a list of the four categories of
visual elements. This area of the page is neither a template nor a graphic element. It is merely a
collection of characters placed on the page for labeling purposes.
8. Move the cursor to the top left of the red/blue descriptive area just noted. Press < F7 > to access the
window functions, then follow the selection menu to delete (< F5 >) the red/blue labeling
from the page. This will make some work space available. Press < F10 > to return to
Graphics Mode.
9. Move the cursor to the center of the newly created workspace. Press < F4 > to access the Symbol
Editor, then press < F2 > to see a library of names of existing symbols. Note that one of the
symbols is named "valve". Press < F10 > to return to the Graphics Mode of the Page Editor.
10. Press < F2 > followed by < 1 > to select addition of a symbol. Type the name, "valve", followed by
pressing < ENTER >. A valve symbol should appear at the cursor location. Ifyou wish to change
its configuration, press < Y >; if not, press < N >.
11. In Graphics Mode, move the cursor to an open area near the valve. Change parameters from
Normal to Graphic font by following these steps:
Press < F3 > to alter parameters
Press right arrow three (3) times to access Font field Press
< F1 > to permit change
Press down arrow to change from Normal to Graphic font Press
< F1 > to complete the change Press < F10 > to return to
Graphics Mode
12. To display three (3) characters which make up the valve symbol, press these three keys in sequence:
WXY. To add the valve stem, move the cursor to the proper location and press V. Note that you
are simply placing characters on the screen during this process. You are not creating a symbol. The
illustration which follows shows the dot composition of the four characters which make up the
valve.
.O.~.O.~.O.e.O.~. ..O.~.O.~.O.~.O..j.~.j
O.~.O.~.O.~.O.~.
.:.i.:.4.;.d.:.O..P.:.}.:.i.:.
.~.0.~.0.~.
.:.4.e.O.:.+.:.i. :.#.:.9.:.4.:.b..j
+.:.
.~.9.~.0.~.O.~.e..q.~. e.:.e.:.e.s.:.
.:.
..j....#..j...p.: p..j,0.+0.
.e.~.O.~.a.~.e.~.
j.~.o.~.e.~.
: # : d :e :p
..e.:.O.:.O.:.O..j
.:.j.:.b.:.j.:.
.~.O.~.P.~.O.
..j.:.O.e.O.:.O..O.:.j.:.j.:
.d.:.
OOO
'
.j.:.j.:.j.:.j.:. .j.:.j.:.i.:.j.:.
.:.#.;.e.:.e.:.e..:.o.:.e.:
.e.:.9..:.o.:.o.:.j.:.j.
.:.O.:.O.:.O.~.O..:.e.:.O.
:.o.:.0.
.:.i.:.d.:.b.:.~..:.O.:.j.:.
j.~.~...:.O.:.O.:.i.:.v.
.j.:,j.:.j.:.0.:.
.:.j.:.O.:.O.:.O..j.:.j.:.j.:.j.
j.:.j.:.j.:.i.:. :.
.:.j.:.j.:.j.:.j.
.:.0.:.0.:.0.:.0. O.~.j.:.:.a.:.
.:.e.:.O.p.:.O.:.p .
O.:.j.:.l.:.j.~ .:.O.:.b.:.b.:.v.
Figure 4-9 Valve Creation
4-18
PanelMate Series
4.9 Example Page
13. To view or alter the dot composition of any character, press < F5 > to enter the Character
Editor. Press < w > to view the dot composition of this character, at the right of the screen.
Press < F7 > to display the library of current character assignments for each font. Note that the
recall keys are listed in order of the ASCII table. The top row of recall keys contains a white
background, which is used to indicate that you must press < Ctrl > plus the recall key listed.
Press < F10 > to return to the Character Editor, then < F10 > again, followed by < N >, to
return to the Graphics Mode.
14. You may wish to practice these editing operations by using the Fl-F10 selection keys and
referring to the function descriptions in this chapter:
Character Editing (< F5 > )
Symbol Editing (< F4 > )
Addition of Graphic Elements (<F2>)
Window Operations (< F7 > )
4.9.2 Configuring the Example Page

As noted at the beginning of the discussion of the Example Page, you may wish to actually configure this
page to run online with your particular brand of PLC or other intelligent device. The page has been preconfigured using the Generic Protocol. If you wish to use a personal computer to verify successful
online operation, you may enter the Generic Protocol program (written in BASIC) shown in Appendix C.
Additional guidelines which may be used to match a sample program to the existing page configuration,
are as follows:
1. The registers referenced for updates are numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4.
2. The page includes one of each type of template and graphics element, and allows pushbutton
inputs to check bit sets and alarms. Usage is as follows:
Bits:
1 01 - momentary set via pushbutton to set alarm state 1
02 - momentary set via pushbutton 2 01 - set to ON if
register 3 > register 4 (valve) 2 02 - set to ON if register
3 < register 4 (pump) 2 03 to 2 16 - not used
Registers:
3 - current tank level (adjusted by program)
4 - desired tank level (adjusted by user via numeric input)
Logic:
The program needs to compare register 3 to register 4. When 3 > 4, the program sets bit 2 01 to
ON, then decrements 3 until its value equals that in 4. When 3 < 4, the program sets . bit 2 02 to
ON, then increments 3 until its value equals that in 4. When 3 = 4, both 2 01 and 2 02 should
be OFF.
PanelMate Series
4-19
Chapter 5. Indicator Template and Graphic Element

Editors
OBJECTIVES
What Indicator Templates and Graphic Elements are used for
How to define an Indicator Template and a Graphic Element
How to edit existing Indicator Templates and Graphic Elements
How to return to the Page Editor
k.
5.1 Functions of Indicator Templates

Indicator Templates are designed to be used as the lights and buttons on a control panel are used: to
indicate the status of devices and to control them, e.g., by turning them on or off.
5.1.1 Defining Indicator Templates
This single editor is used to define all the characteristics of an Indicator Template including its colors, status
messages, alarm conditions, and all control functions. The following section describes how each field in
this editor relates to the template, and what the appropriate field entries might be. Refer to the figure
below as needed.
Motor i
Device N a m e
on
Status _
Area
Template Label
1
Control Button
Indicator
Figure 5-1 Indicator Template
PanelMate Series
5-1
The following figure shows a representation of the Indicator Template Editor. Each of the fields
which compose this spreadsheet is reviewed in the following sections.
INDICATOR TEMPLATE EDITOR
Template Size
Character Size
Device Name:
TEMPLATE DEFINITION TABLE

PG BG 8
Template Label
Conditional E pression
A A 1
c m k
CONTROL BUTTON DEFINITION TABLE

FG BG B
Control L a b e l
PLC Bit Reference
Figure 5-2 Indicator Template Editor
5.1.1.1 Template Size

The selections available are NORMAL or DOUBLE-WIDE. Remember that for placing the template on
the page, the cell cursor is always the left cell of a double-wide template.
5.1.1.2 Character Size

This field defines the size of the characters used in the status area of the template. The device name
area of the template always consists of normal-size characters. The selections available are NORMAL,
QUAD or DOUBLE-HIGH. For maximum readability, select the largest size that will fit in the
template.
5.1.1.3 Device Name

This field accepts 22 normal-size characters in 2 lines. Only normal-size characters are used in this field.
If you wish to center the device name, use < Enter > to insert a carriage return and the space bar to
add spaces.
The name used here may be part of an alarm message, so be sure to be as descriptive as possible.
5.1.1.4 Template Definition Table

In the Template Definition Table, there are five lines that can be filled in to define various states of
the device. These five lines have their priorities established so that line 1 has the highest priority and
line 5 has the lowest priority. This means that if two lines have conditional equations that solve to true,
the configuration of the line with the highest priority will be displayed in the template.
During configuration, line 5 will be displayed on the page as a default. Consequently, if you define a
template and leave line 5 blank, which is a perfectly acceptable thing to do, the template appearing in the
Page Editor will be "blank"; it will have the white on blue device name and a black background outlined
in white for the status area.
5-2
PanelMate Series
FG, BG, B (Foreground, Background, Blink)

These fields allow you to select the foreground and background colors of the status area of the
template. (The device name is always white on blue.) You may also determine if the background color
should be blinking or non-blinking.
In the FG (foreground) and BG (background) fields, the selections available are WH (white), CY
(cyan), MG (magenta), BL (blue), YE (yellow), GR (green), RD (red), and BK (black).
In the B (blink) field, the selections available are N (no blinking background) or Y (yes, blinking
background).
Template Label
This field accepts up to 25 characters. The template itself will limit the number of characters you can
use depending on whether you use a normal or double-wide template, and whether you use normal, quad or
double-high characters. Be sure to view the template on the editor's screen to make sure the label
looks the way you want it to.
Conditional Expression
The conditional expression placed in this field may be a numerical, logical or relational expression which
evaluates to true or false. When a numerical expression is evaluated, if the result is even (least
significant bit = 0), the value is false; and if the result is odd (least significant bit = 1), the value is
true. When in the Run Mode, if an expression evaluates to true, the template characteristics defined for the
line that is true will be used to display the template on the page. If more than one expression is true at
the same time, the line with the highest priority will be displayed, with line 1 having the highest
priority and line 5 having the lowest priority.
This field accepts up to 70 characters. For information regarding the format for PLC word references,
consult the appropriate PLC chapter for your specific PLC brand.
Refer to table 5-1 for a list of operators that may be used in a conditional expression. The operators are
listed in order of precedence. Level 1 has the highest precedence and level 14 has the lowest
precedence. All operators on the same level are evaluated left to right. Parenthesis may be used to
change the order of operation.
PanelMate Series
5_3
Order of
Precedence
Operator
Name
Operator
sqr()
Square root
abs()
Absolute value
logo
Base 10 log
nlog()
Natural log
sin()
Sine
cos()
Cosine
tan()
Tangent
asin()
Arcsine
acos()
Arccosine
atan()
Arctangent
2
3
NOT (bit-wise)
exp
Exponential
Power
Multiply
Divide
Modulo
Subtract
Add
Shift right
Shift left
Less than
C=
Less than or equal to
Greater than
Greater than or equal to
Equal to
9
10
<>
&
Not equal to
AND (bit-wise)
11
XOR (bit-wise)
12
OR (bit-wise)
13
14
&&
Logical AND
Logical OR
Table 5-1 Operators
Note
5-4
The results of all trigonometric functions are in radians.
PanelMate Series
The following conditional expression examples are shown using A-B PLC-2 format:
[204 03] & [204 04] & [205 07]
This conditional expression would resolve to true if each bit is on.
[35] > 500
This condition expression would resolve to true if the value of word 35 is greater than 500.
[204 06]
The condition expression could be as simple as a single bit reference. This would resolve to
true if the bit is on.
Refer to the appropriate PLC chapter for information regarding the format for PLC word references.
Alm (Alarm)
The selections available are Y (yes) or N (no).
This field allows you to designate any line of the template definition as an alarm state. A Y in this field
means that, if the conditional expression in this line solves to true, an alarm message will be placed in
the alarm window of the page that is in view.
A Y also designates that this condition will be monitored at all times, regardless of the page that is in
view. Therefore, judicious use of this alarm state is recommended to maximize the response time of the
system.
Ack (Acknowledge Required)

In PanelMate II/III, all Element and Template spreadsheets contain an additional field labeled Ack
(Acknowledge Required). This field will accept a Y or N. If Y is entered, the corresponding alarm
message must be acknowledged by the online operator before it is removed from the alarm list. If the
alarm does not merit acknowledgment by the operator, then N may be entered into the field, and the
alarm message will automatically be removed from the list when the alarm condition clears.
5.1.1.5 Control Button Definition Table

This table is used to define the five keys on the rights side of PanelMate. In the Control Button
Definition Table, there are five lines that can be filled in to define five control buttons. Line 1 of the
table corresponds to the top control button; line 2 corresponds to the control button that is second
from the top, etc. It is not necessary to use all five control buttons. Simply leave a line blank if you do
not want a control button at that location.
If a control button is defined, a small arrow will be displayed in the lower left corner of the template to
indicate to the operator that a control function is available.
When the control button is pressed, PanelMate sends a command to the PLC to set the referenced bit
(e.g., [120 00]) to a 1. When the button is released, a separate command is sent to set the bit to a 0,
thus providing a momentary input to the PLC. If a maintained input is desired, the bit may be latched
in PLC logic.

These fields allow you to select the foreground and background colors of the control button. You may
also determine if the background color should be blinking or non-blinking.
In the FG (foreground) and BG (background) field, the selections available are WH (white), CY
In the B (blink) field, the selections available are N (no blinking background), or Y (yes, blinking
background).
PanelMate Series
5-5
5.2 Gathering Information for Configuration
Control Label
This field accepts three lines of 11 normal-size alphanumeric characters. The characters will automatically
wrap to the next line so you can eliminate a carriage return in some instances. If you wish to center your
label, insert spaces to move the text to the desired location.
PLC Bit Reference

This field accepts 18 alphanumeric characters. This field defines which PLC bit will be turned on when an
operator presses the corresponding control button. It is not possible to use any expression or conditional logic
in this field (including a logical NOT).
5.1.2 Editing Existing Templates

To edit an existing template, use the cursor arrow keys in the Page Editor to select the template to be edited.
The Indicator Template Editor will immediately appear on the screen with the fields filled-in as you last
saved them for the selected template.
5.1.3 Exit the Indicator Template Editor

To exit the Indicator Template Editor and return to the Page Editor, press <F10>.

Before sitting down at a PanelMate unit to begin configuration, it will probably be useful to gather all the
information you will need. The form provided on the following page may be reproduced and used to
organize your data prior to entry into PanelMate. When a form is completed, you will have gathered all the
information you will need for this particular template.
5-6
PanelMate Series
INDICATOR TEMPLATE EDITOR

Template Size: NORMAL or DOUBLEWIDE
Character Size: NORMAL or QUAD or DOUBLE-HIGH
Device Name (22 char):____________________________________________________________
Priority
FG
BG
FG
BG
Template Label Conditional Expression

(25 char)
(70 char)
Alm
Ack
1
2
3
4
5
Button
Control Label
(33 char)
PLC Bit
Reference (18 char)
1
2
3
4
5
PanelMate Series
5-7
5.3 Functions of Graphic Elements (PanelMate 11/111)
5.3 Functions of Graphic Elements (PanelMate II/III)

Graphic Elements are similar in function and purpose to the Indicator Templates. The Graphic Element
contains the same control functions as the Indicator Template, and their Control Button Definition
Tables are identical. The main difference is that the Indicator Template is a pre-defined graphic, while
the Graphic Element is a user-defined symbol for status indication.
The Graphic Element can be used to indicate the status of a device and provide control for the device (e.g., by
turning it ON or OFF). In the Graphic Element Editor, there are five lines to define the various states of
the device. To tie a state to information in the PLC, a conditional expression may be entered which evaluates
to true. The characteristics defined in the Symbol field, and FG, BG and B fields, will be used to display the
Graphic Element. The expression may be as simple as the condition of a single bit in the PLC (true = ON; false
= OFF), a value comparison (register > constant), or a Boolean expression of up to 70 characters in length.
The following figure shows a representation of the Graphic Element Editor. Each of the fields which
compose this spreadsheet is reviewed in the following sections.
GRAPHIC ELEMENT
CONFIGURATION EDITOR
Symbol Display Area
N 'tie
SYMBOL DEFINITION TABLE

FG BG B
A A I
c m k
symbol
Element Origin: Line Column

Control Indicator: Line d Column s Arrou
Display

PLC Bit Reference
FG BG B
Con rol Label
Figure 5-3 Graphic Element Editor
5.3.1 Device Name

This field accepts 22 normal-size characters. This name is only used as part of an alarm message. Therefore,
it should be as descriptive as possible.
5.3.2 Symbol Definition Table

In the Symbol Definition Table, there are five lines that can be filled-in to define various states of the
device. These five lines have their priorities established so that line 1 has the highest priority and line 5 has
the lowest priority. Therefore, if two lines have conditional expressions that solve to true, the configuration of
the line with the highest priority will be displayed on the page.
During configuration, the values in line 5 will be displayed on the page as default values.
99-8
PanelMate Series
5.3 Functions of Graphic Elements (PanelMate II/III)

Symbols may be multicolored in their original form, since the Symbol Editor allows independent assignments of both foreground and background colors for each of the symbol's individual character cells.
Individual cells within a symbol may also have independent blink states: Within the Graphic Element
Editor spreadsheet, there are fields for assignment of Foreground Color (FG), Background Color (BG),
and Blink (B). When the Graphic Element Editor is first entered, the FG and BG fields contain the
characters TR, and the B field contains a T. These characters designate the field assignment as Transparent,
and displays the original color and blink values of each character within the symbol.
If a color abbreviation (WH, CY, MG, BL, YE, GR, RD, BK) is entered in the foreground or background field, the foreground or background of all characters comprising the symbol will be assigned that
color when the expression is true. Likewise, if blink is assigned by entering Y, the background pixels of
the entire symbol will blink when the expression is true.
Symbol
When a symbol is edited in the Graphics Element Editor, the symbol's name will automatically be
entered as the default value on line 5 of the Symbol field. This Symbol field accepts a Symbol name up
to six characters in length. This same Symbol may be used on other lines to define additional states for
the element, or other Symbols may be used to show other states by entering their names on the
additional lines of the Symbol field.
The conditional expression placed in this field may be a numerical, logical or relational expression which
evaluates to true or false. When a numerical expression is evaluated, if the result is even (least significant
bit = 0), the value is false, and if the result is odd (least significant bit = 1), the value is true. When in
the Run Mode, if an expression evaluates to true, the characteristics defined for the line that is true
will be used to display the Symbol on the page. If more than one expression is true at the same time,
the line with the highest priority will be displayed, with line 1 having the highest priority and line 5
having the lowest priority.
This field accepts up to 70 characters. For information regarding the format for PLC word references,
consult the PLC chapter for your specific PLC brand.
Refer to table 5-1 for a list of operators that may be used in a conditional expression. The operators are
listed in order of precedence. Level 1 has the highest precedence and level 14 has the lowest
precedence. All operators on the same level are evaluated left to right. Parenthesis may be used to
change the order of operation.
PanelMate Series
5-9
5.3 Functions of Gra hic Elements (PanelMate II/III
Alm (Alarm)
The selections available are Y (yes) or N (no).
This field allows you to designate any line of the template definition as an alarm state. A Y in this field
means that, if the conditional expression in this line solves to true, an alarm message will be placed in
the alarm window of the page that is in view.
A Y also designates that this condition will be monitored at all times, regardless of the page that is in
view. Therefore, judicious use of this alarm state is recommended to maximize the response time of the
system.
Ack (Acknowledge Required)

In PanelMate II/III, all Element and Template spreadsheets contain an additional field labeled Ack
(Acknowledge Required). This field will accept a Y or N. If Y is entered, the corresponding alarm
message must be acknowledged by the online operator before it is removed from the alarm list. If the
alarm does not merit acknowledgment by the operator, then N may be entered into the field, and the
alarm message will automatically be removed from the list when the alarm condition clears.
Element Origin
The Element Origin fields simply contain the Line and Column position of the element origin character.
Control Indicator
The Control Indicator fields are used to position the control indicator arrow, associated with the
dynamic element. The default position for the Control Indicator is actually on the origin cell, so most
users will want it moved to a more easily visible location. The user may select the line/column location,
along with the orientation or position of the arrow. The Display field is used to determine if the arrow is
always visible, or visible only when the element is selected.
Since PanelMate II/III allows multiple elements to be placed within one template cell, the control
indicator is the method of showing you which element is selected.
5-10
PanelMate Series
5.3.3 Control Button Definition Table

In the Control Button Definition Table, there are five lines that can be filled in to define five control
buttons. Line 1 of the table corresponds to the top control button, line 2 corresponds to the control
button that is second from the top, etc. It is not necessary to use all five control buttons. Simply leave
a line blank if you do not want a control button at that location.
If a control button is defined, a small arrow will be displayed, as configured in the Control Indicator
fields.
in PLC logic.

In the B (blink) field, the selections available are N (no blinking background), or Y (yes, blinking
background).
Control Label
This field accepts three lines of 11 normal-size alphanumeric characters. The characters will automatically wrap to the next line so you can eliminate a carriage return in some instances. If you wish to
center your label, insert spaces to move the text to the desired location.
PLC Bit Reference

This field accepts 18 alphanumeric characters. This field defines which PLC bit will be turned on when
an operator presses the corresponding control button. It is not possible to use any expression or
conditional logic in this field (including a logical NOT).
5.3.4 Editing Existing Elements

To edit an existing element, use the arrow keys at the Page Editor to move the cursor to the element's
origin. Press < F1 > to edit the element, and the Graphic Element Editor will immediately appear on the
screen. Press < F8 > to identify all element origins on the page.
5.3.5 Exit the Graphic Element Editor

To exit the Graphic Element Editor and return to the Page Editor, press <F10>.

organize your data prior to entry into PanelMate. When the form is completed, you will have gathered
all the information you will need for this particular element.
PanelMate Series
5-11
GRAPHIC ELEMENT EDITOR
Device Name (22 char):
Priority
FG
BG
Button
FG
BG
Symbol
(70 char)
Alm
Ack
1
2
3
4
5
Control Label
(33 char)
PLC Bit
Reference (18 char)
1
2
3
4
5
5-12
PanelMate Series
Chapter 6. Readout Template and Readout Element

Editors
OBJECTIVES
How Readout Templates and Readout Elements
can be used
How to define a Readout Template and a
Readout Element
How to edit existing Readout Templates and
Readout Elements
6.1 Functions of Readout Templates

Readout Templates are designed to be used as numerical readout devices on a control panel and are
used to display a digital value. PanelMate also provides two ways for the operator to change a value.
6.1.1 Defining Readout Templates
This single editor is used to define all the characteristics of a Readout Template including the values it
displays, its high and low alarm limits, and all control functions. (Note that all the field colors are fixed for
Readout Templates.) The following section describes how each field in this editor relates to the template, and
what the appropriate field entries might be. Refer to the figure below as needed.
Device Name
Value 1 Expression
Value 2 Expression
Indicates Numeric
or Button Control
I_'
template if Value 2 is
di l
d)
Figure 6-1 Readout Template
PanelMate Series
6-1
The following figure shows a representation of the Readout Template Editor. Each of the fields which
compose the spreadsheet is reviewed in the following sections.
READOUT TEMPLATE EDITOR
Template Size /Character Size
1234. 567
Decimal Places
Device Name
Units
Value 1 Expression
Value 2 Expression
High Alarm Expression
Low Alarm Expression
Deadband Range
of (High Alarm - Low Alarm)
Alarm Acknowledgement
Control Type BUTTONS

FG BG B
Control Label
PLC Bit Reference
Figure 2-6 Readout Template Editor
6.1.1.1 Template Size/Character Size

The selections available are NORMAL/QUAD, NORMAL/DOUBLE-HIGH, or DOUBLEWIDE/QUAD.
Redefining the double-high or quad font will limit the character size selections. The maximum number of digits
that can be displayed in each combination of template/character size is: normal/quad, 6 digits; normal/doublehigh, 9 digits; double-wide/quad, 12 digits.
6.1.1.2 Decimal Places

This field accepts the numbers 0 through 9. This field defines how the number will be formatted on the
template.
6.1.1.3 Device Name

This field accepts 22 normal-size characters in 2 lines. Only normal-size characters are used in this field. Use
< Enter > to insert a carriage return, and the space bar to add spaces if you wish to center the device
name.
6.1.1.4 Units
This field accepts 9 alphanumeric characters. It defines the type of units that are being displayed to the
operator, such as "DegF' or "gals". This field is not displayed on a single-width template when Value 2 is
displayed.
6-2
PanelMate Series
6.1.1.5 Value 1 Expression

Value 1 is the value that will be displayed in the center of the template. This field accepts up to 70
characters.
The expression entered here may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed, as well as
mathematical operations. Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations.
The following examples of expressions are shown, using A-B PLC-2 format:
[123]
This expression could be as simple a single word reference.
([123]*10) + [124]
This could be a mathematical expression that includes PLC references or constants that will
solve to a value.
[abl,242] + [ab2,234]
Also, information from multiple PLCs may be included in the same expression. In this expression, word 242 in PLC abl is added to word 243 in PLC ab2.
Note
Refer to Chapter 5 for a list of available conditions and operators.

Value 2 is the value that will be displayed in the bottom of the template. It is most often used as the
setpoint for the device.
This optional field accepts up to 70 characters.
See Section 6.3.4 for descriptions of expressions.
Note
6.1.1.7 High Alarm Expression

The results of the High Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value 1 Expression. If
Value 1 exceeds the high alarm, an alarm message will be printed in the alarm window of the page
that is currently in view, and the template is displayed with white characters on a blinking red
background.
This is an optional entry. If no alarm is desired for this device, leave this field blank.
The expression entered here may include ONLY ONE PLC WORD or BIT REFERENCE. Mathematical operations that may be used are multiplication, division, addition and subtraction. You may also
enter a single constant value (e.g., 900) as an expression. Parentheses may be used to change the order
of operations.
This field accepts up to 70 characters.
Note
PanelMate Series
6-3
6.1 Functions of Readout Tem lates
6.1.1.8 Low Alarm Expression

The results of the Low Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value 1 Expression. If Value 1 is
less than the low alarm, an alarm message willl be printed in the alarm window of the page that is currently in
view, and the template will be displayed with white characters on a red background.
The expression entered here may include ONLY ONE PLC WORD or BIT REFERENCE. Mathematical
operations that may be used are multiplication, division, addition and subtraction. You may also enter a
single constant value (e.g., 900) as an expression. Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations.
Note
6.1.1.9 Deadband Range

The deadband range is an area below the high alarm value and above the low alarm value, that must be
crossed before Value 1 is considered to have returned to normal status (go out of alarm). The deadband range
prevents multiple alarm messages being generated when Value 1 is hovering around an alarm threshold.
High Alarm Level
107. Deadband Range

----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------
-------------10% Deadband Range
Low Alarm Level
Figure 3-6 Deadband

This field accepts the numbers 0 through 99. These numbers represent the percentage of the high alarm
value minus the low alarm value that defines the width of the deadband.
6.1.1.10 Alarm Acknowledgment

In PanelMate 11/111, all Element and Template spreadsheets contain an additional field labeled Alarm
Acknowledgment. This field will accept a Y or N. If Y is entered, the corresponding alarm message must be
acknowledged by the online operator before it is removed from the alarm list. If the alarm does not merit
acknowledgment by the operator, then N may be entered into the field, and the alarm message will
automatically be removed from the list when the alarm condition clears.
6-107
PanelMate Series
6.1.1.11 Control Type

The selections available are NONE, NUMERIC or BUTTONS.
A Readout Template may be defined to show a value without the operator being able to control it. For
this type of template, select NONE.
Select NUMERIC if the operator will be directed to use the numeric keypad to enter a (setpoint) value. When
this selection is made, two new fields will appear on the screen. These fields, Input Value Expression and
Target Word Address, are described below.
Select BUTTONS if the operator will be directed to use the control buttons to change a (setpoint) value. It is
likely that you will use buttons labeled "increase" and "decrease", or a similar system, to change this value. When
this selection is made, a Control Button Definition Table will appear on the screen. This table is described
below,
If either numeric or button control is defined, a small arrow will be displayed in the lower left corner of the
template to indicate to the operator that a control function is available.
6.1.1.12 Numeric Control Definition

The numeric control definition consists of two entries, the Input Value Expression and the Target Word
Address. The Input Value Expression is a mathematical expression that must be performed on the operator's
numeric keypad input before the number is stored in the PLC. The Target Word Address is the PLC
word reference that will store the result of the Input Value Expression.
Input Value Expression

This expression is any mathematical expression that must be performed on the operator's input before the
number is stored in the PLC. A question mark inside brackets, [?], is used to designate the variable operator
input. The expression entered here may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed, as well as
mathematical operations. The < > operators can be used for ranging (see Example 2 below). Parentheses
may be used to change the order of operations.
This field accepts up to 70 characters. If the operator input is to be entered in the PLC as-is, enter [?] in the
field.
Example 1:
([?]-32)*5/9
The operator's input is changed from an entry of Fahrenheit to Celsius.
Example 2:
[?]*([?] > = 0)*([?] < = 100) + ([?] < 0)*[123] + ([?] > 100)*[123]
Target Word Address: [123]
The expression in Example 2 will limit entries between 0 and 100 to the PLC register. Entry of any value
outside this range will have no effect on the value in the register.
Note
Refer to Chapter 5 for a list of available conditions and expressions.
Target Word Address

This field defines the location of the operator's input in the PLC, as the result of the Input Value
Expression.
As an example, to store the result of the Input Value Expression ([?]-32)*5/9 in Allen-Bradley register n9:364
as a signed, 16-bit integer, use the Target Word Address:
[n9:364#s16]
PanelMate Series
6-5

(e.g., [120 00]) to a 1. When the button is released, a separate command is sent to set the bit to a 0, thus
providing a momentary input to the PLC. If a maintained input is desired, the bit may be latched in
PLC logic.

In the FG (foreground) and BG (background) fields, the selections available are WH (white), CY (cyan),
MG (magenta), BL (blue), YE (yellow), GR (green), RD (red), and BK (black). In the B (blink) field,
the selections available are N (no blinking background) or Y (yes, blinking background).
Control Label
This field accepts three lines of 11 normal-size alphanumeric characters. The characters will
automatically wrap to the next line so you can eliminate a carriage return in some instances. If you wish
to center your label, insert spaces to move the text to the desired location.
PLC Bit Reference


To edit an existing template, use the cursor arrow keys in the Page Editor to select the template to be
edited. The Readout Editor will immediately appear on the screen with the fields filled in as you last saved
them for the selected template.
6.1.3 Exit the Readout Template Editor

To exit the Readout Template Editor and return to the Page Editor, press <F10>.

information you will need. The form provided on the following page may be reproduced and used to organize
your data prior to entry into PanelMate. When the form is completed, you will have gathered all the information
you will need for this template.
109-6
PanelMate Series
READOUT TEMPLATE EDITOR

Template Size/Character Size: NORMAL/QUAD or NORMAUDOUBLE-HIGH or
DOUBLE-WIDE/QUAD
Decimal Places (0-9):

Decimal Name (22 char): _________________________________________________________
Units (9 char):
Value 1 Expression (70 char):

High Alarm Expression (70 char):
Low Alarm Expression (70 char):
Deadband Range (0-99%): _________________________________________________________

Alarm Acknowledgement: _________________________________________________________
Control Type: NONE or NUMERIC or BUTTONS

If NUMERIC,
Input Value Expression (70 char):
Target Word Address (19 char):
If BUTTONS,
Button
FG
BG
Control Label
(33 char)
PLC Bit
Reference (18 char)
1
2
3
4
5
PanelMate Series
6-7
6.3 Functions of Readout Elements (PanelMate II/III)

The Readout Element Editor is similar in function and purpose to that of the Readout Template Editor.
With the Readout Element Editor, you may easily create custom elements using a structured fill-in-theblank and multiple choice approach similar to the Template Editors.
Readout elements are designed to replace numeric and digital readout devices found on a conventional
control panel, and to supply the functionality often provided by CRT-based devices. Displayed values can
be scaled by PanelMate II/III without requiring any additional logic in the PLC.
The following figure shows a representation of the Readout Element Editor. Each of the fields
which compose this spreadsheet is reviewed in the following sections.
Readout Length
READOUT ELEMENT EDITOR

1234567898
Character Size
Decimal
Device Name
~ ________________ ~
Foreground Color
Value
Expression
Deadband Range
Control Type
Direction
Background Color
(High Alarm
Places
I___ ~_ ( _
U
Low Alarm)
Control Indicator Display =
Control Indicator Position

FG BG B
Control Label
PLC Bit Reference
Figure 6-4 Readout Element Editor
6.3.1 Readout Length

This field defines the size of the field in which the readout is to be displayed.
6.3.2 Character Size

The Character Size is the Font which will be used to display the Readout Element on the page.
6.3.3 Direction
The Readout Element may be displayed in a left-to-right or top-to-bottom orientation. Press the arrow keys to
toggle between the selections of Vertical and Horizontal.
6.3.4 Value Expression

The Value Expression field accepts up to 70 characters. The calculated value is the value that will be displayed
in the Readout Element.
6-111
PanelMate Series
6.3.5 High Alarm Expression

The results of the High Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value Expression. If Value
exceeds the high alarm, an alarm message will be printed in the alarm window of the page that is
currently in view.
The expression entered here may include more than one PLC word or bit reference. Mathematical
single constant value (e.g., 900) as an expression. Parentheses may be used to change the order of
operations.
Note
6.3.6 Low Alarm Expression

The results of the Low Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value Expression. If Value
is less than the low alarm, an alarm message will be printed in the alarm window of the page that is
currently in view.
operations.
Note
6.3.7 Deadband Range

The deadband range is an area below the high alarm value and above the low alarm value that must be
crossed before Value is considered to have returned to normal status (go out of alarm). The deadband
range prevents multiple alarm messages being generated when Value is hovering around an alarm
threshold.
High Alarm Level
--------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------
10%Deadband Range
10% Deadband Range
Low Alarm Level
Figure 6-5 Deadband

PanelMate Series
6-9
6.3.8 Alarm Acknowledgment

This field will accept a Y or N. If Y is entered, the corresponding alarm message must be acknowledged by the
online operator before it is removed from the alarm list. If the alarm does not merit acknowledgment by the
operator, then N may be entered into the field, and the alarm message will automatically be removed from the
list when the alarm condition clears.
6.3.9 Control Type

A Readout Element may be defined to show a value without the operator being able to control it. For this type
of template, select NONE.
Select NUMERIC if the operator will be directed to use the numeric keypad to enter a (setpoint) value. When
this selection is made, two new fields will appear on the screen. These fields, Input Value Expression and
Target Word Address, are described below.
likely that you will use buttons labeled "increase" and "decrease", or a similar system, to change this value. The
Control Button Definition Table, described below, is used to configure the buttons.
If either numeric or button control is defined, a small arrow will appear, as defined in the Control Indicator
fields.
6.3.10 Numeric Control Definition

6.3.11 Control Indicator Position

The Control Indicator fields are used to position the control indicator arrow to the most convenient, visible
location near the Readout Element. The available selections for the Control Indicator Position are: Above,
Below, Left and Right.
6.3.12 Control Indicator Display

The Control Indicator Display field is used to determine if the arrow is always visible, or visible only when
the element is selected.
113-10
PanelMate Series

in PLC logic.

(cyan), MG (magenta), BL (blue), YE (yellow), GR (green), RD (red), and BK (black). In the B
(blink) field, the selections available are N (no blinking background) or Y (yes, blinking background).
Control Label
PLC Bit Reference

conditional logic in this field (including a logical NOT).

To edit an existing element, use the cursor arrow keys in the Page Editor to move the cursor to the
element's origin. Press < Fl > to edit the element, and the Readout Element editor will immediately
appear on the screen.
6.3.15 Exit the Readout Template Editor

To exit the Readout Element Editor and return to the Page Editor press < Fl0 >.

organize your data prior to entry into PanelMate. When the form is completed, you will have
gathered all the information you will need for this element.
PanelMate Series
6-11
READOUT ELEMENT EDITOR

Readout Length:________________________________________________________________
Character Size: NORMAL or DOUBLE-HIGH or QUAD
Decimal Places:
Decimal Name (22 char):
Direction:
Foreground Color: _______________________________________________________________

Background Color:
Value Expression (70 char):
Deadband Range (0-99%):
Alarm Acknowledgement: Yes or No
If NUMERIC,
If BUTTONS,
Button
FG
BG
Control Label
(33 char)
PLC Bit
Reference (18 char)
1
2
3
4
5
6-115
PanelMate Series
Chapter 7. Bar Template and Bar Element Editors
OBJECTIVES
How Bar Templates and Bar Elements can be used

How to define a Bar Template and Bar Element
How to edit existing Bar Templates and Bar Elements
7.1 Functions of Bar Templates

Bar Templates are designed to be used as the analog meters and faceplates on a control panel and are used to
indicate a value in analog fashion, with a bar graph. This bar graph can show current value, setpoint, and high
and low alarm levels. The current value and setpoint are also displayed digitally. PanelMate also provides two
ways for the operator to change the setpoint value.
7.1.1 Defining Bar Templates

This single editor is used to define all the characteristics of a Bar Template including the bar's upper and lower
limits, a setpoint position, high and low alarm limits, and all control functions. (Note that all the field colors are
fixed for Bar Templates.) The following section describes how each field in this editor relates to the template,
and what the appropriate field entries might be. Refer to the figure on the next page as needed.
Maximum Calibration
Units
Value 1 Expression
Minimum Calibration

Valoe I Val.. 2
Control
indicator
Figure 7-1 Bar Template
PanelMate Series
7-1
The following figure shows a representation of the Bar Template Editor. Each of the fields which
BAR TEMPLATE EDITOR
Template Size
Device Name
Units
Maximum
Calibration
Minimum
Calibration
Value 1 Expression
Value 2 Expression
Deadband Range
Control Type
I Y. of (High Alarm - Low A larm)
I BUTTONS I

FG BG B
Control Label
PLC Bit Reference
1
2
3
4
Figure 7-2 Bar Template Editor
7.1.1.1 Template Size

The selections available are 2HIGH or 3HIGH. Remember that for placing the template on the page, the
cell cursor is always the top cell of the template.
7.1.1.2 Device Name

This field accepts 22 normal-size characters in 2 lines. Only normal-size characters are used in this field.
Use < Enter > to insert a carriage return and the space bar to add spaces if you wish to center the device
name.
7.1.1.3 Units
This field accepts 6 alphanumeric characters. It defines the type of units that are being displayed to the
operator, such as "DegF" or "gals".
7.1.1.4 Maximum Calibration

This is a 6-character field that accepts 6 digits, or 5 digits with a decimal point placed anywhere in the
field.
The Maximum Calibration is the value that defines the highest point of the green bar. This value will appear on
h
l
7-117
PanelMate Series
7.1.1.5 Minimum Calibration

This is a 6-character field that accepts 6 digits, or 5 digits with a decimal point placed anywhere in the
field.
The Minimum Calibration is the value that defines the lowest point of the green bar. This value will
appear on the template.
On a 3HIGH Bar Template, note that PanelMate will use the Maximum and Minimum Calibrations to
calculate the bar's midpoint, and place that value on the template, too.

Value 1 is the value that will be displayed as a full green bar on the template. This field accepts up to
70 characters.
The following examples of expressions are shown using A-B PLC-2 format:
[123]
This expression could be as simple as a single word reference.
([123] 10) + [124]
This could be a mathematical expression that includes PLC references or constants that will
solve to a value.
[abl, 242] + [ab2, 243]
Also, information from multiple PLCs may be included in the same expression. In this expression, word 242 in PLC ab1 is added to word 243 in PLC ab2.
Note

Value 2 is the value that will be displayed as a white horizontal line to the right of the green bar. It is
most often used as the setpoint for the device.
This optional field accepts up to 70 characters.
Note
PanelMate Series
7-3
7.1.1.8 High Alarm Expression

The results of the High Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value 1 Expression. If Value 1
exceeds the high alarm, an alarm message will be printed in the alarm window of the page that is currently in
view, and "ALARM!" will appear on the template (below the device name) in white on blinking red. A High
Alarm bar is shown in red to the right of the green bar.
Note
7.1.1.9 Low Alarm Expression

The results of the Low Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value 1 Expression. If
Value 1 is less than the low alarm, an alarm message will be printed in the alarm window of the page that is
currently in view, and "ALARM!" will appear on the template (below the device name) in white on blinking red.
A Low Alarm bar is shown in red to the right of the green bar.
Note
7.1.1.10 Deadband Range

The deadband range is an area below the high alarm value and above the low alarm value, that must be
crossed before Value 1 is considered to have returned to normal status (go out of alarm). The deadband
range prevents multiple alarm messages from being generated when Value 1 is hovering around an alarm
threshold.
High Alarm Level
107.. Deadband Range

----------------------------------------------------------------
.__-..----..------------------------------------------` ------------- .._.___.

10% Deadband Range
Lou Alarm Level
Figure 7-3 Deadband
7-4
PanelMate Series
7.1.1.11 Alarm Acknowledgment

In PanelMate II/III, all Element and Template spreadsheets contain an additional field labeled Alarm
Acknowledgment. This field will accept a Y or N. If Y is entered, the corresponding alarm message must be
acknowledged by the online operator before it is removed from the alarm list. If the alarm does not merit
acknowledgment by the operator, then N may be entered into the field, and the alarm message will
7.1.1.12 Control Type

A Readout Template may be defined to show a value without the operator being able to control it. For this
type of template, select NONE.
Select NUMERIC if the operator will be directed to use the numeric keypad to enter a (setpoint) value.
When this selection is made, two new fields will appear on the screen. These fields, Input Value Expression
and Target Word Address, are described below.
likely that you will use buttons labeled "increase" and "decrease", or a similar system, to change this value. When
this selection is made, a Control Button Definition Table will appear on the screen. This table is described
below.
If either numeric or button control is defined, a small arrow will be displayed in the lower left corner of the
template to indicate to the operator that a control function is available.
7.1.1.13 Numeric Control Definition


input. The expression entered here may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed, as well as the
mathematical operations of multiplication, division, addition and subtraction. The < > operators can be
used for ranging (see Example 2 below). Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations.
This field accepts up to 70 characters. If the operator input is to be entered in the PLC as-is, enter [?] in
the field.
Example 1:
([?]-32)=5/9)
The operator's input is changed from an entry of Fahrenheit to Celsius.
Example 2:
[?]([?]> =0)([?]< =100)+([?]<0)=[123]+([?]>100)[123]
Target Word Address: [123]
The expression in Example 2 will limit entries between 0 and 100 to the PLC register. Entry of any value outside
this range will have no effect on the value in the register.
Note
PanelMate Series
7_5
Target Word Address

This field defines the location of the operator's input in the PLC as the result of the Input Value
Expression.
As an example to store the result of the Input Value Expression ([?]-32)*5/9 in Allen-Bradley register 364
as a signed, 16-bit integer, use the Target Word Address:
[364#S16]

In the Control Button Definition Table, there are five lines that can be filled in to define five control buttons.
Line 1 of the table corresponds to the top control button, line 2 corresponds to the control button that
is second from the top, etc. If is not necessary to use all five control buttons. Simply leave a line blank
if you do not want a control button at that location.
thus providing a momentary input to the PLC. If a maintained input is desired, the bit may be latched in PLC
logic.

These fields allow you to select the foreground and background colors of the control button. You may also
determine if the background color should be blinking or non-blinking.
In the B (blink) field, the selections available are N (no blinking background) or Y (yes, blinking
background).
Control Label
automatically wrap to the next line so you can eliminate a carriage return in some instances. If you wish to
PLC Bit Reference


edited. The Bar Template Editor will immediately appear on the screen with the fields filled in as you last
saved them for the selected templates.
7.1.3 Exit the Bar Template Editor

To exit the Bar Template Editor and return to the Page Editor, press <F10>.
7-121
PanelMate Series

organize your data prior to entry into PanelMate. When a form is completed, you will have gathered all
the information you will need for this particular template.
PanelMate Series
7_7
BAR TEMPLATE EDITOR

Template Size: 2HIGH or 3HIGH
Units (6 char):
Maximum Calibration (6 char):_______________________________________________________
Minimum Calibration (6 char):
Value 2 Expression (70 char): _______________________________________________________
High Alarm Expression (70 char): __


Alarm Acknowledgement:
If NUMERIC,
If BUTTONS,
Button
7-8
FG
BG
Control Label
PLC Bit
(33 char)
Reference (18 char)
PanelMate Series
7.3 Functions of Bar Elements (PanelMate II/III)
7.3 Functions of Bar Elements (PanelMate II/I11)

The Bar Element Editor is similar in function and purpose to that of the Bar Template Editor. With the Bar
Element Editor, you may easily create custom bar graphs using a structured fill-in-the-blank and multiple
choice approach similar to the template editors.
Bar Elements are designed to replace the analog meters and faceplates found on a conventional
control panel. They may also be used along with Symbols or Graphic Elements to simulate tank fills, pipe
flow, conveyors and other specific applications. Elements also allow for definition of high and low alarm
levels.
The following figure shows a representation of the Bar Element Editor. Each of the fields which compose
this spreadsheet is reviewed in the following sections.
BAR ELEMENT EDITOR
Bar Direction
Bar Height
Bar Color
Bar Width
Erase Color
Device Name
Maximum Calibration
Minimum Calibration
Value
Expression
Deadband Range
Control Type

FG
BG B
Control Label
PLC Bit Reference
Figure 7-4 Bar Element Editor
7.3.1 Bar Direction

The Bar Direction field determines in which direction the dynamic portion of the bar will move: UP,
DOWN, LEFT or RIGHT.
7.3.2 Bar Height and Width

The Bar Height and Bar Width fields allow for user-defined dimensions of the overall bar region. These
values are entered as the number of character spaces.
7.3.3 Bar and Erase Colors

The Bar Color and Erase Color fields determine the foreground (write) and background (erase) colors,
respectively, of the Bar Element.
7.3 Functions of Bar Elements (PanelMate 11/111)
7.3.4 Device Name

This field accepts 22 normal-size characters. The name used here may be part of an alarm message
and, therefore, should be as descriptive as possible.
7.3.5 Maximum Calibration

This is a six-character field that accepts six digits, or five digits with a decimal point placed anywhere in
the field. The Maximum Calibration is the value that defines the highest point of the displayed bar.
7.3.6 Minimum Calibration

This is a six-character field that accepts six digits, or five digits with a decimal point placed anywhere in
the field. The Minimum Calibration is the value that defines the lowest point of the displayed bar.
7.3.7 Value Expression

The Value Expression field accepts up to 70 characters. The calculated value is the value displayed as
the bar height.
the mathematical operations of multiplication, division, addition and subtraction. Parentheses may be
used to change the order of operations.
Note
7.3.8 High Alarm Expression

The results of the High Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value Expression. If
Value exceeds the high alarm, an alarm message will be printed in the alarm window of the page that
is currently in view.
operations may be used. You may also enter a single constant value (e.g., 900) as an expression.
Parentheses may be used to change the order of operations.
Note
7.3.9 Low Alarm Expression

The results of the Low Alarm Expression are compared to the results of the Value Expression. If
Value is less than the low alarm, an alarm message will be printed in the alarm window of the page that
is currently in view.
operations.
Note
7-10
PanelMate Series
7.3.10 Deadband Range

The deadband range is an area below the high alarm value and above the low alarm value, that must
be crossed before Value is considered to have returned to normal status (go out of alarm). The
deadband range prevents multiple alarm messages being generated when Value is hovering around an alarm
threshold.
High Alarm Level
----------------------------------------------------------------
10% Deadband Range
._.__' ---------------- .___.' -----------------10% Deadband Range

Low Alarm Level
Figure 7-5 Deadband

7.3.11 Alarm Acknowledgment

This field will accept Y or N. If Y is entered, the corresponding alarm message must be acknowledged by
the online operator before it is removed from the alarm list. If the alarm does not merit acknowledgment by the operator, then N may be entered into the field, and the alarm message will
7.3.12 Control Type

A Bar Element may be defined to show a value without the operator being able to control it. For this
type of template, select NONE.
Select NUMERIC if the operator will be directed to use the numeric keypad to enter a (setpoint)
value. When this selection is made, two new fields will appear on the screen. These fields, Input
Value Expression and Target Word Address, are described below.
Select BUTTONS if the operator will be directed to use the control buttons to change a (setpoint) value.
It is likely that you will use buttons labeled "increase" and "decrease", or a similar system, to change this
value. The Control Button Definition Table, described below, is used to configure the buttons.
If either numeric or button control is defined, a small arrow will appear, as defined in the Control
Indicator fields.
PanelMate Series
7-11
7.3.13 Numeric Control Definition

numeric keypad input before the number is stored in the PLC. The Target Word Address is the PLC word
reference that will store the result of the Input Value Expression.

input. The expression entered here may include as many PLC word or bit references as needed, as well as
This field accepts up to 70 characters. If the operator input is to be entered in the PLC as-is, enter [?] in the
field.
Note
Target Word Address

This field defines the location of the operator's input in the PLC, as the result of the Input Value
Expression.

The Control Indicator fields are used to position the control indicator arrow to the most convenient, visible
location near the Bar Element. The available selections for the Control Indicator Position are: Above, Below,
Left and Right.

The Control Indicator Display field is used to determine if the arrow is always visible, or visible only
when the element is selected.
7-12
PanelMate Series

buttons. Line 1 of the table corresponds to the top control button; line 2 corresponds to the control
button that is second from the top, etc. If is not necessary to use all five control buttons. Simply leave
(e.g., [120 00]) to a 1. When the button is released, a separate command is sent to set the bit to a 0, thus
providing a momentary input to the PLC. If a maintained input is desired, the bit may be latched in PLC logic.

In the B (blink) field, the selections available are N (no blinking background) or Y (yes, blinking background).
Control Label
automatically wrap to the next line so you can eliminate a carriage return in some instances. If you wish to
PLC Bit Reference

operator presses the corresponding control button. It is not possible to use any expression or conditional
logic in this field (including a logical NOT).

To edit an existing element, use the arrow keys at the Page Editor to move the cursor to the element's origin.
Press < Fl > to edit the element, and the Bar Element Editor will immediately appear on the screen.
7.3.18 Exit the Bar Element Editor

To exit the Bar Element Editor and return to the Page Editor, press < F10 >.

information you will need. The form provided on the following page may be reproduced and used to organize
your data prior to entry into PanelMate. When a form is completed, you will have gathered all the information
you will need for this particular element.
PanelMate Series
7-13
7.4 Gatherin Information for Confi uration
BAR ELEMENT EDITOR

Bar Direction: Up, Down, Left or Right Bar
Height:
Bar Width:
Bar Color:
Erase Color:
__________________________ M
aximum Calibration (6 char):
Minimum Calibration (6 char):
Value Expression (70 char):
Alarm Acknowledgement: Yes or No
If NUMERIC,
If BUTTONS,
Button
FG
BG
Control Label
(33 char)
PLC Bit
Reference (18 char)
Control Indicator Position: Above, Below, Left or Right

Control Indicator Display: Always or Selected
7-14
PanelMate Series
Chapter 8. Display Template and Message Element

Editors
OBJECTIVES
How Display Templates and Message
Elements can be used
How to define a Display Template and a
Message Element
How to edit existing Display Templates and
Message Elements
How to create the Message Library
8.1 Functions of Display Templates

Display Templates are designed to be used like LED or LCD message units or displays. They are most
effective when used for informational messages and not as alarm messages. Three independent lines of
text can be written in a Display Template, with each line consisting of up to 65 characters. The Message
Library will hold up to 100 lines for PanelMate I, 250 lines for PanelMate II, and 500 lines of text for
PanelMate III.
8.1.1 Defining Display Templates

This single editor is used to define all the characteristics of a Display Template including its colors,
messages, and all control functions. The following section describes how each field in this editor
relates to the template, and what the appropriate field entries might be. Refer to the figure on the next
page as needed.
Message
Expressions:
Line
1
Line
Line 3
1
Indicates Button
Control
Figure 8-1 Display Template
PanelMate Series
8-1
8.1 Functions of Dis la Tern latex
The following figure shows a representation of the Display Template Editor. Each of the fields which
DISPLAY TEMPLATE EDITOR
Template Size
Line
1 2
3
Message Expression
Test Message
0
FG BG B
Control Label
PLC Bit Reference
1
2
3
4
Figure 8-2 Display Template Editor
8.1.1.1 Template Type

The selections available are 3WIDE, 4WIDE or 5WIDE. Remember that, for placing the template on the
page, the cell cursor is always the leftmost cell of the template.
8.1.1.2 Message Expression

The value of this expression selects which message will be displayed. Note that the lines are numbered
1, 2 and 3 to the left of the Message Expression field.
If the Message Expression results in a number greater than the number of available messages or less
than 0, nothing will be displayed.
If the Message Expression results in the number of an undefined message, a line will be written that
exhibits the background color and character size listed for that message. If you have not changed it, the
line will be normal-size and black.
Message 0 is pre-defined; it will place a normal-size black line in the designated line of the Display
Template. For blank lines of other sizes or colors, you must create your own message.
If you wish to display a message based on a bit, multiply the bit reference times the message number to
produce the message number. For example, to display message #25 when Allen-Bradley bit [127 14] is on,
enter in the Message Expression Field: [127 14]=25
The message expression could be as simple as a word reference (e.g., [253]) or a mathematical expression
which would solve to a value corresponding to a message number (e.g., [254] + 12).
8-2
PanelMate Series
8.1 Functions of Display Templates
8.1.1.3 Test Message

To see something in the Display Template during configuration, you may insert a message number in the
test message field. The message corresponding to that number will be displayed on the template line you
designated. If there is no message defined for that number, nothing will appear.
Note that when you return to the Page Editor, only Message 1 will be displayed, regardless of the
message numbers listed in the Test Message fields. To fully test a Display Template, you must test in
Run Mode.
The Message Library, described later in this chapter, is used to define messages.

indicate to the operator that control function is available.
in PLC logic.

In the B (blink) field, the selections available are N (no blinking background) and Y (yes, blinking
background).
Control Label
PLC Bit Reference

conditional logic in the field (including a logical NOT).
PanelMate Series
8-3
8.1 Functions of Dis la
Tem lates
8.1.1.5 Message Library

To define the messages in the Message Library, press <F6>.
The Message Library defines the text color and blink characteristics, the contents, the character sizes, and
messages. If you want a single Display Template to display a three-line message, three separate
messages must be used. Note that each line of text is totally independent, so care must be taken in
making color and character size selections.
Note
It is possible for quad or double-high character lines to interfere with each other. Therefore, be
sure to test all message combinations that you expect to use before going online.
Msg# (Message Number)

All the messages are listed in numerical order. Enter the message number you wish to access in this
field to scroll through the listing.

These fields allow you to select the foreground and background colors of the line of text. You may also
background).
Message Text
This field accepts up to 65 alphanumeric characters. The template itself will limit the number of
characters you can use, depending on the size of the template and characters you select.
Char Size (Character Size)

The selections available are NORM (normal), DHIGH (double-high), or QUAD.
Quad and double-high characters use two lines of the Display Template. Therefore, special care must be
taken if you plan to change text sizes on template updates or mix template sizes on a single template.
Note that when you use quad or double-high characters on line 3, they will erase the bottom of the
template outline.
Destn (Destination)
It is possible to have messages sent to a printer, as well as have them displayed on a page. The
selections available are SCREEN, PRINTER or BOTH.
Note About Message #0

Message 0 is pre-defined and cannot be changed. This message will place a normal-size black line in the
designated line of the Display Template. For blank lines of other colors or size (double-high or quad),
you must create your own message.
8-4
PanelMate Series

edited. The Display Template Editor will immediately appear on the screen with the fields filled in as
you last saved them for the selected template.
8.1.3 Exit the Display Template Editor

To exit the Display Template Editor and return to the Page Editor, press <F10>.

information you will need. The forms provided on the following pages may be reproduced and used to
organize your data prior to entry into PanelMate. When the forms are completed, you will have
gathered all the information you will need for this particular template.
PanelMate Series
8-5

Template Size: 3WIDE or 4WIDE or 5WIDE
Message Expression
(70 char)
Line
1
2
3
Button
8-6
FG
BG
Control Label
(33 char)
PLC Bit
Reference (18 char)
PanelMate Series

Message Library
Msg#
PanelMate Series
FG
BG
Message Text
(65 char)
Char
Size
Destn
8-7
8 3 Functions of the Messa e Element PanelMate II/M
8.3 Functions of the Message Element (PanelMate II/III)

The Message Element Editor is similar in function and purpose to that of the Display Template
Editor. With the Message Element Editor, you may easily create custom elements using a structured
fill-in-the-blank and multiple choice approach.
Message Elements are designed to replace LED or LCD message units or display readouts. They are
most effective when used for informational messages (e.g., prompting or diagnostic information).
This editor also provides access to a Message Library where messages are defined. PanelMate II/III
users may also reference PLC register locations within a message in order to display the numeric
register content within the message.
The following figure shows a representation of the Message Element Editor. Each of the fields which
compose this spreadsheet is reviewed in the following sections.
MESSAGE ELEMENT EDITOR
Message Length
MessageM
Direction
Message Expression
Test Message Global

Control Indicator Display

FG BG B
Control Label
PLC Bit Reference
* To View Message Library, Press F6
Figure 8-3 Message Element Editor
8.3.1 Message Length

The Message Length field determines the maximum length of the message which can be displayed. The
limits are 65 characters when the message field is displayed horizontally, and 17 characters when the field
is displayed vertically.
8.3.2 Direction
The Direction field determines the orientation in which the message is displayed. The Message Element
may be displayed in a left-to-right or top-to-bottom orientation. Press the arrow key to toggle between the
selections of Vertical and Horizontal.
8.3 Functions of the Message Element (PanelMate ll/III)
8.3.3 Message Expression

This field accepts up to 70 characters. The result of this expression should be a number from 0 to 250
for PanelMate II or 0 to 500 for PanelMate III. This number is the number of the message that will
be displayed in the Message Element. If the Message Expression results in a number greater than 250 (500
for PanelMate III) or less than 0, nothing will be printed.
If the Message Expression results in the number of an undefined message, a line will be written that
exhibits the default background color and character size. This is normal-size characters and a black
background color.
Message 0 is pre-defined and will place a normal-size black line in the Message Element. For blank
lines of other sizes and colors, you must create your own messages.
Within PanelMate II/Ill messages, users may reference PLC register locations in order to display the
numeric register content within the message. See Section 8.3.10, Register References Within Messages, for
further details.
8.3.4 Global Messages

Normally, only Message Elements on the currently-visible page are monitored during online operation.
PanelMate may also be configured to monitor message elements from pages that are not visible. These
elements are considered Global Message Elements. To make an Element global, set the Global field to Y.
Any Global Messages triggered during online operation will be sent to the printer if they have
destination settings of PRINTER or BOTH. Global Messages are not sent to the screen if the page where
they were configured is not visible.
8.3.5 Test Message

To view a message on the page during configuration, a message number may be entered into the Test
Message field. The message corresponding to this number will be displayed at the element origin. If there is
no message defined for that number, nothing will appear.
Note that when you return to the Page Editor, Message 1 will be displayed regardless of the message
number listed in the Test Message field.

The Control Indicator fields are used to position the control indicator arrow to the most convenient,
visible location near the Message Element. The available selections for the Control Indicator Position are:
Above, Below, Left and Right.

The Control Indicator Display field is used to determine if the arrow is always visible, or visible only
when the element is selected.
PanelMate Series
8-9
8.3 Functions of the Message Element (PanelMate II/IH)

buttons. Line 1 of the table corresponds to the top control button; line 2 corresponds to the control
indicate to the operator that control function is available.
in PLC logic.

background).
Control Label
PLC Bit Reference

This field accepts 18 alphanumeric characters. This field defines which PLC bit will be -turned on when
conditional logic in the field (including a logical NOT).
8.3.9 Message Library

To define the messages within the Message Library, press <F6> at the Message Element Editor.
The Message Library defines the contents, the text color and blink characteristics, the character sizes, and
the destination of up to 250 (500 for PanelMate III) one-line messages. Note that each line of text is
totally independent, so care must be taken when making color and character size selections. It is possible
for quad or double-high character lines to interfere with each other. Therefore, be sure to test all
message combinations that you expect to use before going online.
Each of the fields which compose the Message Library are reviewed in the following sections.
Msg# (Message Number)

All the messages are listed in numerical order. Enter the Message Number you wish to access in this
field to scroll through the listing.
8-139
PanelMate Series

These fields allow you to select the foreground and background colors of the line of text. You may also
background).
Message Text
This field accepts up to 65 characters. The message direction will determine the number of characters
used.
Char Size (Character Size)

The selections available are NORM (normal), DHIGH (double-high), or QUAD.
Destn (Destination)
It is possible to have the message sent to a printer, as well as displayed on the page. The
selections available are SCREEN, PRINTER or BOTH.
Note about Message #0

Message 0 is pre-defined and cannot be changed. This message will place a normal-size black line in the
Message Element. For blank lines of other colors or size (double-high or quad), you must create your
own message.
8.3.10 Register References Within Messages

Within PanelMate II/III, users may reference PLC register locations within a message in order to
display the numeric register content within the message. Users may employ the following format to display
the contents of the registers. You may have up to five register references within a message.
PanelMate Series
8-11
8.3 Functions of the Messa e Element PanelMate II/III
General Format Expression

Note
A message containing multiple PLC references will print to the screen or printer multiple times
-- once for each reference in the message.
$tw.d(expression)
where$ = format indicator
t = type of numeric display
I
Integer display
Floating decimal point real value display
Hexadecimal display
Octal display
Binary display
Fixed decimal point real value display
Exponential display
ASCII character display
w = total width of the formatted number to left of decimal point

= separator between width of format and the number of
decimal places (used with F or E format)
d = number of decimal places (used with F or E format)
Format type D (floating decimal point) permits the decimal point to float in the display depending on the register's
value. This contrasts with the format type F (fixed decimal point), which formats a value
with a fixed decimal location. Format type F may be useful when creating a column of values.
Note
Floating decimal point format type should not be confused with floating point mathematics or
floating point data types which cannot be read or manipulated in PanelMate.
Each format has a maximum number of digits it can display. A number cannot be completely displayed if the
format description is too small. The following are the width limits for each format type.
Iii
=
Largest Integer value width is 11
H8
Oil
B32
D65
F65.d
E65.d
A
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
141-12
Largest Hexadecimal value width is 8

Largest Octal value width is 11
Largest Binary value width is 32
Largest Floating Decimal Point value width is 65
Largest Fixed Decimal Point value width is 65
Largest Exponential value width is 65
Largest ASCII character width is 2. (The least significant 16 bits
are used in the following order: high byte, low byte). When using
both characters, verify the PanelMate default format is capable
of reading numbers which use the high byte. An alternate
PanelMate word reference format may be necessary, i.e., #U16. d
decimal places
PanelMate Series
For example, if the message is:

"Current tank level is $13([40123]) gallons.", and the value in register 4012.3 is 567, then the appearance of the message on the screen would be:
"Current tank level is 567 gallons."
If the message is:
"Production rate per press is $D5([R0456]/17) units per hr.", and the value in R0456 is 7890, then
the appearance of the message on the screen would be:
"Production rate per press is 464.1 units per hr."
If the message is:
"Part name in linel is $A([200#U16]).", and the value in register 200 is 16693, the message will
display the following:
"Part name in linel is A5".
Note Allen-Bradley default reference can not read or write to values over 999 (BCD3 format). With the #U16
format, PanelMate can read and display the ASCII equivilant of 16693. If an Allen-Bradley
PLC-5 is used, the following format would be used: $A([N10:3]). With this PLC type, the #U16
format is not necessary since the default format for the PLC-5 is S16.
Decimal-Based Formats
The decimal-based format types are:
1. Integer
2. Floating decimal point real value 3.
Fixed decimal point real value 4.
Exponential
It should be noted that all the decimal-based numeric formats are right-justified and padded with leading
blanks, if necessary. If a value for a decimal format has too many digits for the specified format size, then the
presentation will have "*" placed in it for the width of the format specified in the format code.
Decimal Place Formats

For fixed decimal point format (F), the number for the total width of the formatted value (w) must be at
least one greater than the number of decimal places (d). If negative values will be displayed, "w" must be
at least two greater than "d".
For the exponential fomat (E), the total width of the formatted value (w) must be at least eight greater
than the number of decimal places (d).
The following table shows examples of the different formatting types. The data type, actual data, and
visual appearance are shown. The heading on the column for visual appearance marks 13 column
locations to help reference the placement of characters.
PanelMate Series
8-13
8.3 Functions of the Message Element (PanelMate 11/111)
Type
15
14
12
13
Columns
0123456789.012
324
521
-8.73
324
521
-9
7321
14
824.67
D7
421.45
D4
23.45
825
421.450
H3
255
OFF
H5
-255
FFFO1
H2
300
2C
04
54
03
01
B9
B4
88.45
21
1.00
86
0066
130
5
001100100
0110
F5.1
523.46
523.5
F10.4
253.21
253.2100
F5.2
326.23
F8.3
-43.888
F5.0
397.52
E12.3
- 43 .888
398
-324.1
E13.2
0.06734
E9.0
156.2
D4
999.89
-3.241E+02
6.73E-02
2E+02
1000
D6
6245.21
D1
0.04
D1
-0.04
D4
82345.2
D3
-1.444
6245 2
-1
F7.3
619.52
619.520
F7.2
619.52
619.52
F6.2
619.52
F5.3
619.52
F5.1
619.52
619.52
619.5
D7
619.52
619.520
D6
619.52
619.52
D5
619.52
619.5
D4
619.52
D3
619.52
E12.4
E12.3
814
Data
619.52
619.52
Table 8-1 Formatting Types
620
620
6.1952E+02
6.195E+02
PanelMate Series
Binary-Based Formats
The binary-based format types are:
1.
Hexadecimal
2. Octal 3.
Binary
For binary-based formats, digits will be inserted for the entire width of the format size;
there is no blank padding. If a value for a binary format has too many digits for the
specified format size, the most significant digits of the value will be truncated until the
number will fit in the size specified.
Example:
value = 300
Presentation with H4 format:
012C
Presentation with H2 format:
2C
8.3.11 Clock and Calendar Access

The internal clock of PanelMate II/III may be included in messages sent to the screen
and/or printer. The Clock and Calendar Access formats are as follows:
$(mon)
month
$(day)
day
$(year)
year
$(hour)
hour (24 hour time format)
$(min)
minutes
$(sec)
seconds
$(time)
hour:minute:second
$(date)
month/day/year
$(elk)
hour:minute:second month:day:year

Message Length (65 char): ___________________________________________________________
Direction: Horizontal or Vertical
Message Expression (70 char)
Test Message
Control Indicator Position: Above, Below, Left or Right

Control Indicator Display: Always or Selected
Button
FG
BG
Control Label
(33 char)
PLC Bit
Reference (18 char)
1
2
3
4
5
DISPLAY TEMPLATE EDITOR/

Message Library
Msg#
F G BG
Message Text
(65 char)
Char
Size
Destn
PanelMate Series
8-17
Chapter 9. Defining System Parameters
OBJECTIVES
How to set the communications parameters for each port
How to define the "default PLC"

How to set a port for ASCII Generic Protocol
How to change the System Online Labels

How to adjust the audio output volume
How to use the fault relay for an alarm signal

How to select the page that will be displayed at powerup
How to set the scan rates for alarm conditions and updating
the current pages
How to set the screen blanking time interval
How to set the automatic cancel time interval
How to set the time
9.1 System Utilities Menu

To access the System Utilities Menu from the Main Menu, select the Get System Utilities template using
the cursor arrow keys, and then press < F1 >. The System Utilities Menu will immediately appear on the
screen.
The System Utilities Menu offers the following selections:
Memory
Check System Health
Clear Memory
This chapter addresses the first three selections. Consult Chapter 10 for information about the remaining
selections.
PanelMate Series
9-1
9.2 Define PLC Name and Port Parameters

This utility is used to configure PanelMate's communication ports and identify other intelligent devices
PanelMate will access. To access the utility, use the cursor arrow keys to select the correct field in the System
Utilities Menu, then press < F1 >.
The following figure shows a representation of the PLC Name and Port Editor page. The top half of the table is
used to select the PanelMate port parameters, while the bottom half of the table is used to select specific PLC
parameter values. Information for inserting parameter values into the table is discussed in the following
sections.
PLC NAME AND PORT EDITOR
11:41:27
PANELMATE PORT PARAMETER

Network Data
Port
Use
ID#
Bit
Par
PRINTE
DOC
1
2
I/0
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
NONE
EATON
TI
0
0
22
PLC NAME TABLE

Name
ID#
eil
2
e2
6
0
0
til
23
t12
41
ti3
10
0
dhl
47
dh2
104
Stop
Bits
8
8
7
Ports
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
I/0
I/0
1
1
2
NONE
EVEN
ODD
Model
CPU20
CPU20
520
620
520
565
530
520
PLCS/1
PLC-2 0
19200
9600
4800
RS422
RS232
Default PLC Name
til
Screen Scan Delay
12.001
sec
Alarm Scan Delay
11.001
Sec
Message Scan Delay 15 00
I sec
Figure 9-1 PLC Name and Port Editor
9.2.1 Port Parameter Table

Use this table to set the communications parameters of each port, as well as the port's address on a
network, if applicable.
The communications parameters set in this table are read by PanelMate at system start-up. Therefore,
if you make changes to this table, you must cause PanelMate to run through a start-up. This can be
accomplished by any of the following procedures, after returning to the Main Menu.
Press < Ctrl > < Alt > < Del > at the same time
Turn the keyswitch to Run Mode
Interrupt power (be sure the battery is operating)
The following paragraphs describe the function of each field and how to make entries in that field.
9-2
PanelMate Series
Use
This column describes the way a port will be used. To make an entry in this field: 1. Select the
field using the cursor arrow keys 2. Press < F1 > to enter the edit mode
3. Scroll through the choices, using the cursor arrow keys 4. Press
< F1 > again to exit the edit mode
The use of communication ports is slightly different between the 2800 series and 2900 series. The following is
an explanation of the uses for each port:
PAR
This line is not used with the 2900 series. It should be set to "NONE".
DOC This line selects use of Serial Port 1 during Configuration Mode. It enables the port to
produce documentation from PanelMate editors. The available selections are
"NONE" and "PRINTER."
1 For the 2900 series PanelMate, this line selects use of Serial Port 1 during Run Mode. It enables the port
to print messages and alarms or to communicate to a PLC or host. The available
selections are "NONE," "PRINTER," "GENERIC' and the various serial PLC
drivers supported by PanelMate.
2 This line selects use of Serial Port 2 during Run Mode. It enables the port to communicate to a
PLC or host. The available selections are "NONE", "GENERIC" and the various
serial PLC drivers supported by PanelMate.
3 or I/O For 2800 series PanelMate, this line selects use of Serial Port 3 during Run Mode. It
enables the port to perform the same functions as Serial Port 2.
For 2900 series PanelMate, this line is used if an available AcceleratI/On interface
or Dual Serial Port Board is installed. If neither of these is installed, the correct
selection is "UNEQUIP." If an Acceleratl/On interface is installed, the valid
selections are "DHWAY," "DHWAY+" and "A-B REM" for Data Highway,
Data Highway Plus, or Remote I/O networks. If "A-B REM" is selected, a
second configuration screen is available to configure Remote I/O racks. Press
<F2> to reach this screen. If a Dual Serial Port Board is installed, the line is
used to select the use of Serial Port 3. Available selections are "NONE,"
"GENERIC" and the various serial PLC drivers supported by PanelMate. A new
line will appear to select the use of Serial Port 4.
4 For 2800 series PanelMate, this line selects use of Serial Port 4 during Run Mode. It enables
the port to perform the same functions as Serial Ports 2 and 3.
For 2900 series PanelMate, this line selects use of Serial Port 4 on the available
Dual Serial Port Board. This line will only appear if the previous line is set for
"NONE", "GENERIC" or one of the various serial PLC drivers supported by
PanelMate. Those are also the available selections for this line.
PanelMate Series
9-3
Network ID#
The network ID number is the number assigned to PanelMate on the PLC network for this particular port.
To make an entry in this field:
1. Select the field, using the cursor arrow keys 2.
Press < F1 > to enter the edit mode
3. Enter up to three digits in this field
4. Press < F1 > again to exit the edit mode
Note
Do not use the same number for the network ID# and the PLC ID#. See
the appropriate PLC chapter for PLC dependent network ID# information.
Data Bits
This field defines the number of data bits that PanelMate will be expecting for this port. The selections
available are 5, 6, 7 or 8.
1. Select the field, using the cursor arrow keys
2. Press < F1 > to enter the edit mode
Stop Bits
This column defines the number of stop bits that PanelMate will be expecting for a port. The selections
available are 1, 2 or 1.5.
Parity
This column defines a port's parity. The selections available are NONE, ODD or EVEN. To make
an entry to this field:
9-4
PanelMate Series
Baud Rate
This column defines the communication baud rate that a port will use. The selections available are 110, 300,
600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19,200 for serial ports. For the "A-B REM" selection of the Acceleratl/On
interface, the choices are 57.6 and 115.2.
1. Select the field, using the cursor arrow keys 2. Press
< F1 > to enter the edit mode
Elect (Electrical)
This column defines the type of communications that a port will be using. The selections available are RS232,
RS422 or RS485.
Note
At the present time, PanelMate does not support RS485 communication. To
make an entry in this field:

< F1 > to enter the edit mode
9.2.2 Format for Generic Protocol

The fields below this heading (Type, ID# and BCC/Bit #) are only applicable to serial ports that will be
using the ASCII Generic Protocol for communications. The following paragraphs describe what each field
is defining, and how to make entries in each field.
For detailed information regarding the ASCII Generic Protocol, refer to Chapter 18.
Type
This field defines the type of addressing that will be used in the ASCII Generic Protocol. The selections
available are OCTAL or DECIMAL.
1.
2.
Select the field, using the cursor arrow keys

3.
Scroll through the choices, using the cursor arrow keys
4.
Press < F1 > again to exit the edit mode
PanelMate Series
9-5
ID#
This field indicates whether an ASCII Generic Protocol frame will include the ID# of a specific PLC or host.
The selections available are N or Y.
If PanelMate will be communicating with a single PLC or host, the field should be filled in as N. To make an
entry in this field:
BCC/Bit #
This field indicates whether an ASCII Generic Protocol frame will include the BCC of the frame. The
selections available are N or Y.
< F1 > again to exit edit mode
9.2.3 PLC Name Table

Use the PLC Name Table to completely identify each PLC (or other intelligent device) that this
PanelMate unit will be communicating with. The following paragraphs describe what each field is
defining, and how to make entries in each field.
Name
This field defines a user-chosen name for a specific PLC or other device. You will use this name when
specifying word and bit addresses during page development.
3. Enter up to 6 alphanumeric characters (letters and numbers only)--you will find that short names
will make it easier to enter word and bit references in the template editors
4. Press < F1 > again to exit edit mode
ID#
This field defines the ID number of a specific PLC on the data highway or network. To make an
entry in this field:
3. Enter up to 8 alphanumeric characters
Note
Do not use the same number for the network ID# and the PLC ID#.
See the appropriate PLC chapter for specific PLC ID# information.
9-6
PanelMate Series
Port
This field identifies the serial port that a specific PLC will be connected to on the PanelMate unit. On the
2900 series PanelMate, the selections available are 1, 2, 3, 4 or I/O. On the 2800 series PanelMate, the
selections available are 2, 3, or 4.
3. Scroll through the choices, using the cursor arrow keys 4.
Model, PLC
This field further defines the type of protocol that PanelMate will be expecting from a specific port. The
selections available will depend on how you defined the use of the serial port in the Port Parameter Table.
For example, if Serial Port 2's use is defined as A-B, then the selections available for Model
(assuming Port in the PLC Name Table is "2") will be "PLC-2 0", "PLC-2 d", "PLC 5/12", "PLC 5/15", or
"PLC 5/25". No Model is available for the ASCII Generic Protocol.
9.2.4 Default PLC Name

This field identifies the PLC, by name, that you intend to use as the default PLC. This means that
each PLC word and bit reference that does not specifically state the name of a PLC, will be assumed to
be referring to this default PLC. Therefore, it is to your advantage to name the PLC that will
be referred to most as the default PLC.
Note
Make an entry in this field regardless of the number of PI-Cs you will be using. To

3. Scroll through the choices, using the cursor arrow keys; the selections available will be the names
listed in the "Name" field of the PLC Name Table
PanelMate Series
9-
9.2.5 Screen Scan Delay

This field defines the time, in seconds, that PanelMate will wait between updates of the current screen. An
entry of 0 will cause PanelMate to update the current screen as fast as possible. The maximum entry
accepted is 99.9 seconds.
2. Press < Fl > to enter the edit mode
3. Enter the number of seconds you want the screen scan to delay 4.
Press < Fl > again to exit the edit mode
Note that the screen scan delay does not apply to words and bits that are updated using the ASCII
Generic Protocol.
9.2.6 Alarm Scan Delay

This field defines the time, in seconds, that PanelMate will wait between updates of all alarm conditions that
are not shown on the current screen. An entry of 0 will cause PanelMate to update the background alarms as
fast as possible. The maximum entry accepted is 99.9 seconds. For best performance, set this time to the
longest interval your application will permit. A minimum of 1.0 seconds is recommended.
3. Enter the number of seconds you want the alarm scan to delay 4. Press
< Fl > again to exit the edit mode
Note that the Alarm Scan Delay does not apply to words and bits that are updated using the ASCII
Generic Protocol.
9.2.7 Message Scan Delay

This field defines the time, in seconds, that PanelMate will wait between updates of all register
references defined in messages. An entry of 0 will cause PanelMate II/III to update the register values as fast
as possible. The maximum entry accepted is 99.9 seconds. For best performance, set this time to the
longest interval your application will permit. A minimum of 1.0 second is recommended.
3. Enter the number of seconds you want the message scan to delay 4. Press
Note that the Message Scan Delay does not apply to words and bits that are updated using the ASCII
Generic Protocol.
9-8
PanelMate Series
9.156 Remote 110 Configuration
9.3 Remote I/O Configuration

Acceleratl/On allows PanelMate to simulate one or more remote racks on a quarter rack basis. The PLC
communicates to the Acceleratl/On interface, as though the interface were a rack. For more information, see
chapter 15, Acceleratl/On.
The following screen is used to configure the active racks and block transfers. This editor is divided into two
sections, the Active Rack Table and the Active Block Transfer Table. A screen will be displayed after
configuring the 1/0 port for Remote I/O and pressing <F2>. The number of racks available is dependent
on the PLC Model configured. The PLC Model will appear at the top of the screen.
The following sections describe the function of each field.
121:45:381
ALLEN-BRADLEY REMOTE I/0 CONFIGURATION
PLC Model: PLCS/1S

ACTIVE RACK TABLE
QTR.
M 1234
1
3**
2 2*
3 1
ACTIVE BLOCK TRANSFER TABLE

Transfer
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Direct
COMMON
READ
WRITE
COMMON
READ
WRITE
WRITE
WRITE
Rack
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
Group
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
Slot
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
Size
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
10
Figure 9-2 Remote 1/0 Configuration Editor
9.3.1 Active Rack Table

The Active Rack Table allows you to define which racks are to be simulated by PanelMate on the network.
Each full rack can be split into a quarter rack or any multiple of a quarter rack (i.e., 114, 1/2, 3/4, or
full rack). A blank field is the default value and shows that the quarter rack is inactive. A status of
1, 2, 3, or 4 implies the quarter rack is active and indicates the starting quarter for a fractional rack.
An asterisk, *, is contained in the other quarter racks which make up a fractional rack. For example,
if you configured a half rack to start on the second quarter of rack 1, a 2 would appear in the second
quarter space for rack 1 and an asterisk would appear in the third quarter space as a place holder.
Figure 9-2 shows an example of PanelMate simulating 3/4 of rack 1, 1/2 of rack 2, and 1/4 of rack 3.
A status of 1 denotes 1/4 rack, 2 denotes 1/2 rack, 3 denotes 3/4 rack and 4 denotes a full rack.
1.
2.
Select the field using the cursor arrow keys

Press < Fl > to enter the edit mode
3.
4.
PanelMate Series
9-9
9.3 Remote I/O Configuration
9.3.2 Active Block Transfer Table

The Active Block Transfer Table will allow you to configure active block transfers between PanelMate and a
PLC. You may define up to 16 active block transfers, A through P, each with up to 64 words.
Direct
This column defines the direction of the block transfer. The available selections are NONE, READ, WRITE,
and COMMON. All of the selections describe communication from the PLC's point of view. READ means
that the PLC will read a block of data from the PanelMate. WRITE means that the PLC will write a block of
data to PanelMate. The COMMON selection allows the PLC to both read data from and write data to
PanelMate.
1. Select the field using the cursor arrow keys
Rack
This column defines the quarter rack being used by the block transfer. The available selections are
determined by the Active Rack Table. This field will scroll through only the active racks in the table.
3. Scroll through the choices, using the cursor arrow keys 4. Press <
Fl > again to exit the edit mode
Group
This column defines the group number within the quarter rack being used by the block transfer. Note that
groups 0 and 1 are in quarter 1, groups 2 and 3 are in quarter 2, groups 4 and 5 are in quarter 3, and
groups 6 and 7 are in quarter 4. The selections available are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7.
Slot
This column defines the slot number within the group being used by the block transfer. The available
selections are 0 and 1.
157-10
PanelMate Series
158-10
PanelMate Series
9.4 Define System Parameters
Size
The column defmes the size in 16-bit words of the block transfer. The available selections are decimal numbers
from 1 to 64.
1. Select the field using the cursor arrow keys 2.
Press < Fl > to enter the edit mode

To access this utility, use the cursor arrow keys to select this field from the System Utility menu. Then press <
Fl >. The System Parameters Table will immediately appear on the screen.
The following figure shows a representation of the System Parameters Table. Information for inserting
parameter values into the table is discussed in the following sections.
SYSTEM PARAMETERS TABLE
0
Startup Page Number
Audio Output
Operator Input
MEDIUM
Alarms
MEDIUM
Redefine Fonts
Double
High
Quad
Y I
N
I
I
Automatic Cancel Inactivity Period I

Control Bit Reset Delay
Remote Silence
(to PLC)
Host Display Window
Alarm Horn Bit
(from PLC)
Immediate Page Change
Retry Delay
IIIIZIIII
21
el
Remote Alarm
(to PLC)
Acknowledge Bit (from PLC)
Fault Relay
Deenergize on Alarm I_ Y _ I
Page Status Line Display
1201
Screen Blanking Inactivity Period
Remote Enable
(to PLC)
Fault Relay Bit (from PLC)
Time_______________ Date
106/02/901
109:59:031
Page Change
(to PLC)
Register
(from PLC)
Set Time and Date
Reset Clock to 00:00:00 Bit
Figure 9-3 System Parameters Table (PanelMate III)
9.4.1 Audio Output

There are two fields in this category: operator input and alarms. These fields define the volume of the audio
tone that will be output by PanelMate's horn in each of these categories.
Operator Input
The selections available in this field are OFF, LOW, MEDIUM or HIGH. To
PanelMate Series
Alarms
The selections available in this field are OFF, LOW, MEDIUM or HIGH. To make
an entry in this field:
9.4.2 Redefine Fonts (PanelMate II/III)

The two fields in this category permit PanelMate II/III users to redefine either the double-high or quad
fonts (or both) to allow the character cells in each font to be available for creation of additional customized
characters. As explained in the PanelMate II/III section of this text, this operation completely removes
access to the entire pre-stored font.
Redefining the double-high or quad numerical characters will alter the characters displayed in a
Readout Template.
The selections available for double-high or quad are Y or N. To
3. Use the cursor arrow keys to change choices
Note
The redefined fonts are saved in SRAM with one file for each redefinable font. Redefined fonts
which will not be used should be deleted in order to save SRAM.
A font file can be deleted by pressing < F5 > in the Character Editor. Pressing this key will
delete the currently selected font.
9.4.3 Fault Relay

The field in this category determines what happens to the fault relay when an alarm condition is
detected.
De-Energize on Alarm
The selections available in this field are Y or N. An N response will cause the fault relay to de-energize only
when a communication error is detected or when AC power to PanelMate is lost. A Y response will cause
the fault relay to de-energize also when an alarm condition is detected. The fault relay is re-energized
when the operator presses the control button labeled Enable Fault Relay.
9-12
PanelMate Series
9.4.4 Host Display Window (PanelMate III)

PanelMate III will allow a host computer to send data to the PanelMate for display in an extra display called the
Host Display Window. The Host Display Window uses the entire 3 x 5 template block display area. Data is
sent from the host via the ASCII Generic Protocol.
3. Use the cursor arrow keys to toggle between Y to enable the window and N to disable the window 4. Press < F1
> again to exit edit mode
The Host Display Window will now be accessible during online operation. To display the window, press the
control button labeled Get Page, and the control button labels will change. Press the button labeled Host
Display Window. The Host Display Window will now appear. The < Cancel > key can be used to recall the
previous display or a different display.
The user is prompted that the host has sent data for the Host Display Window by the left most section of the
Overview Field blinking yellow. This section will return to a blue color once the Host Display Window has been
selected. See Chapter 18 for information on the protocol for sending or erasing the Host Display Window (task
codes 69 and 70 in the PanelMate Task Code Table, Chapter 18).
9.4.5 Immediate Automatic PLC Page Change

PanelMate can allow a PLC to change the current page without having to be in a default state. When a new value
has been received in the Page Change Register (from PLC), this field will allow a page change to occur without
operator intervention. With this field set to Y, the page change will take place within one second, even if the
operator is in the process of entering information. An N selection will inhibit the PanelMate from changing pages
until it is in the default state. For more information about changing pages, refer to section 9.4.16, Page Change
Register.
Scroll through the choices using the cursor arrow keys
9.4.6 Page Status Line Display

This field defines how PanelMate will display the Page Status Line. The selections available in this field are
the STANDARD and FIFO queuing method. By selecting the STANDARD queuing method, the Page
Status Line will display ten pages sequentially (0-9) for PanelMate I, PanelMate II and PanelMate III (if there
are no pages configured beyond page 9). If you select STANDARD and there are no pages configured
beyond page 15, PanelMate III will display 16 pages sequentially (0-15). PanelMate III will automaticallly use the
FIFO queuing method if any pages are configured beyond page 15. By selecting the FIFO queuing method, only
the pages in alarm will be shown. For PanelMate I and PanelMate II, a maximum of ten pages can be
displayed. For PanelMate III, a maximum of 21 pages can be displayed. If you have more than 21 pages in alarm,
the plus (+) indicator will be shown in the far right column.
1.
2.
3.
Scroll through the choices using the cursor arrow keys
4.
PanelMate Series
9-13
9.4.7 Retry Delay

In the event of lost communications, this field defines how PanelMate will attempt to re-establish
communications to the PLC. With this field set to Y, PanelMate will increase the time interval of
attempts to re-establish communications as the length of time that the PanelMate and PLC are not
communicating increases. This selection prevents several PLCs on a network from becoming busy
unnecessarily if communications have not taken place over a long period of time. With a selection of N,
PanelMate will immediately and continuously attempt to re-establish communications. This will prevent
any delays which may occur after successfully sending data to the PLC.
9.4.8 Set Time and Date

This category has two fields in it: time and date.
To set the time in an HH:MM:SS format, using military or 24-hour time (e.g., 2:32:45
in military time):
pin = 14:32:45

Press < F1 > to enter the edit mode 3. Enter the
correct number 4. Press < F1 > again to exit the
edit mode
To set the date in MM/DD/YY format:
Press < F1 > to enter the edit mode 3. Enter the
correct number 4. Press < F1 > again to exit the
edit mode
Note that values in the Time and Date field are checked at power-up. If these values are not valid (e.g.,
due to a loss of battery backup), the Time field will be set to 00:00, and the Date field to 01/01/80. Note
The System Calendar uses a 29 day format for February; therefore, the date will need to be reset
yearly except on leap year.
9.4.9 Startup Page Number

This field defines the page that will appear on the screen when the system goes online. To make
an entry in this field:
9-14
PanelMate Series
9.4.10 Screen Blanking Inactivity Period

This field defines the length of time, in minutes, that a page will remain on the screen when there has been no
operator input during Run Mode operation. To maximize the life span of PanelMate's monitor, we
recommend that you use this feature. If no operator input has occurred during the time period you
have selected, the screen will become blank, with a single message scrolling slowly up the screen:
Press any membrane key to resume display.
This screen blanking will help prevent etching of the monitor. Etching can occur when the same page is constantly
displayed on the screen for very long periods of time. Screen Blanking is only operative
in the Run Mode.
The selections that are available are OFF and 20 to 400 minutes, in 20-minute increments.
9.4.11 Automatic Cancel Inactivity Period

This field defines the length of time, in minutes, that a template will remain selected (and control
buttons will be armed appropriately) before returning to a canceled or neutral state. This feature
should be used to prevent accidental entries in cases where the operator makes a template selection
and then is distracted prior to taking the appropriate action or canceling the selection.
The selections that are available are OFF and 1 to 20 minutes, in 1-minute increments. To
9.4.12 Control Bit Reset Delay

During Run Mode, when one of the five membrane key control buttons is pressed, it writes a "1" to its
assigned bit location; when it is released, it writes a "0" to that location. This field allows the user to set
a time delay between the writing of 1 and 0 for the membrane keys. The selections
available are: 0, 250, 500, or 1000 (milliseconds). The default setting for the time delay is zero, which
will execute the operation as quickly as possible.
1.
2.
3.
4.
PanelMate Series
9-15
9.4.13 Remote Alarm Acknowledge Bit

(to PLC)
PanelMate can set a bit in a PLC when the control button Acknowledge All Alarms is pressed. This bit is
defined in the field marked Remote Alarm Acknowledge Bit (to PLC). Only bit references are
permitted. No expressions may be entered in this field. Leaving this field blank will disable the feature.
Press < F1 > to enter the edit mode 3. Type in the
reference for the PLC bit 4. Press < F1 > again to exit
the edit mode
(from PLC)
PanelMate can scan a bit in a PLC and Acknowledge All Alarms when this bit is set. Once the referenced bit is
set, all alarms will be acknowledged as if the control button labeled Acknowledge All Alarms has been
pressed. Only bit references are permitted. No expressions may be entered
in this field. Leaving this field blank will disable the feature.
reference for the PLC bit 4. Press < F1 > again to
exit the edit mode
9.4.14 Remote Silence Alarm Horn Bit

(to PLC)
PanelMate can set a bit in a PLC when the control button labeled Silence Alarm Horn is pressed. Only bit
references are permitted. No expressions may be entered in this field. Leaving the field blank will disable the
feature.
exit the edit mode
(from PLC)
PanelMate can scan a bit in a PLC and silence the alarm horn if the bit is set. Only bit references are
permitted. No expressions may be entered in this field. Leaving the field blank will disable the feature.
exit the edit mode
9-16
PanelMate Series
9.4.15 Remote Enable Fault Relay Bit

(to PLC)
PanelMate can set a bit in a PLC when the control button labeled Enable Fault Relay is pressed. Only bit
feature.
Press < Fl > to enter the edit mode 3. Type in the
reference for the PLC bit 4. Press < F1 > again to exit
the edit mode
(from PLC)
PanelMate can scan a bit in a PLC and enable the fault relay if the bit is set. Only bit references are permitted.
No expressions may be entered in this field. Leaving the field blank will disable the feature.
Press < Fl > to enter the edit mode 3. Type in the
reference for the PLC bit 4. Press < Fl > again to
exit the edit mode
9.4.16 Page Change Register

(to PLC)
PanelMate can write the number of its currently-displayed page to a register in a PLC. Once configured, this
action will happen any time a page change occurs in the PanelMate (either a manual or automatic page
change.) Only register references are permitted. No expressions may be entered in this field. Leaving a field
blank will disable the feature.
< F1 > to enter the edit mode 3. Type in the
reference for the PLC register 4. Press < F1 > again
to exit the edit mode
PanelMate Series
9-17
(from PLC)
PanelMate can scan a PLC register and change its page depending on the value in the register. When a new
valid value has been received in the page change register, the right most section of the Overview Field will
blink yellow. If a control template or element has been selected by the operator, the page will not change
immediately. As soon as the control template or element is deselected, the page will change. (This requirement
can be changed through use. of the Immediate Page Change feature described in section 9.4.5.) Only register
references are permitted. No expressions may be entered in this field. Leaving a field blank will disable the
feature.
reference for the PLC register 4. Press < F1 > again
to exit the edit mode
9.4.17 Reset Clock Bit

PanelMate can scan a bit in a PLC and reset its clock when the bit is set. The internal clock will be reset to
00:00:00 (midnight) when the referenced bit changes from the off (0) state to the on (1) state. Only bit
feature.
Note The amount of time that PanelMate is devoting to communications and alarm scanning will require that
the PLC latch the bit long enough for PanelMate to read it. Since PanelMate may not reset the clock
immediately after the PLC has changed the bit, the clock synchronization may not be exact.
The date will be changed to the day closest to the current time. The following examples show how the date is
affected by the clock synchronization bit.
Time/Date Before Reset
23:30:10 December 10,
00:30:10 December 13,
12:00:00 December 24,
11:59:59 December 27,
Time/Date After Reset

1989
1989
1989
1989
00:00:00 December 11,

00:00:00 December 13,
00:00:00 December 25,
00:00:00 December 27,
1989
1989
1989
1989
1. Select the field, using the cursor arrow keys. 2.

Press < F1 > to enter the edit mode. 3. Type in the
reference for the PLC bit. 4. Press < F1 > again to
exit the edit mode.
9-18
PanelMate Series
9.5 System Online Labels

This utility will allow you to change the labeling used on most of PanelMate's screens to any one of the
available fonts (normal for PanelMate I; normal, double high, quad, or graphic for PanelMates II and III).
Any of these fonts can be changed to a language other than English. To access this utility, use the cursor
arrow keys to select this field from the System Utilities menu. Then press <Fl>.
The following labels may be changed.
View or Acknowledge Alarms
Enable Fault Relay
Get Page
Change Value
Directory
Enter New Value:
Scroll Up
Clear
Scroll Down
Change Online Labels
Acknowledge Selected Alarm
PAGE
Acknowledge All Alarms
Press Page Number Below
Get Alarm Page
Clrd
Host Display Window
Ackd
Silence Alarm Horn
LOW ALARM
HIGH ALARM
This utility contains four screens for changing the labels. A menu at the top of each screen describes
the use of the function
F1 F2
F3
F4
F7
F9
PanelMate Series
keys. The following is a list of each function key and its use. Open and
close the currently highlighted field for modification. Open and close
the Character Font field for modification.
Display previous screen.
Display next screen.
Show character fonts (only valid for PanelMate II and PanelMate III).
Save the system labels file to SRAM without exiting the System Online Labels
Editor.
F10
Exit the System Online Labels Editor with optionally saving the
file to SRAM. system labels
9-19
9.5.1 Screen One

The first screen will allow you to select the startup label set (standard or user) and to allow the label set to be
changed during online operation.
Startup Online Labels

This field allows you to select the label set to be used at startup. The selections available in this field are
STANDARD or USER. If STANDARD is selected, PanelMate will use the label set shipped with
PanelMate when going online. If USER is selected, PanelMate will use the label set you have created when
going online.
Press < F1 > to enter the edit mode.
3. Use the cursor arrow keys to change the choices. 4. Press
< F1 > again to exit the edit mode.
Change Labels Online

This field allows you to select whether or not the operator will be permitted to change the label set during
online operation. If you select "Y" for this field, a control button labeled "Change Online Labels" will appear
when the < Get Page > control button is pressed. This button will toggle between using the standard and user
selected fonts. The selections available in this field are Y or N.
Press < Fl > to enter the edit mode.
3. Use the cursor arrow keys to change the choices. 4. Press
< F1 > again to exit the edit mode.
9-20
PanelMate Series
9.5.2 Screen Two

This screen will allow you to redefine the following labels.
View or Acknowledge Alarms
Get Page
Directory
Scroll Up
Scroll Down
Acknowledge Selected Alarm
Acknowledge All Alarms
Get Alarm Page
Host Display Window
To change an entry in one of the fields:
1. Press <F2> to enter the edit mode for the character font.
2. To choose the font to be used as an alternative to the normal font, scroll through the
choices, using the cursor arrow keys.
3. Press <F2> to exit the edit mode for the character font.
4. Select the field containing the label to be changed, using the cursor arrow keys.
5. Press < F1 > to enter the edit mode.
6. Make the necessary changes to the label.
7. Press < F1 > to exit the edit mode.
9.5.3 Screen Three

This screen will allow you to redefine the following labels.
Silence Alarm Horn
Enable Fault Relay
Change Value
Enter New Value:
Clear
2. To choose the font to be used as an alternative to the normal font, scroll through the
choices, using the cursor arrow keys.
4. Select the field containing the label to be changed, using the cursor arrow keys.
5. Press < Fl > to enter the edit mode.
PanelMate Series
9-21
9.5.4 Screen Four

This screen will allow you to redefine the following labels. PAGE
Press Page Number Below
Clrd
Ackd
LOW ALARM
HIGH ALARM
2. To choose the font to be used as an alternative to the normal font, scroll through the choices, using the
cursor arrow keys. For Clrd, Ackd, LOW ALARM, and HIGH ALARM fields, the normal
character font must be used. This is so that alarm messages will be displayed as quickly as
possible.
4. Select the field containing the label to be changed, using the cursor arrow keys. 5. Press <
F1 > to enter the edit mode.
9-22
PanelMate Series
Chapter 10. Documentation, Memory and System Health

Utilities
OBJECTIVES
How to print system documentation
How to provide back-up of the system on a BackPac or an EPROM.
How to provide back-up of the system on an IBM PC

How to check the monitor's linearity and color
How to test the Configuration Keyboard, TouchPanel

and Control Buttons
How to test the audio signal and fault relay

How to check the battery and fuse status
10.1 System Utilities Menu

To access the System Utilities Menu from the Main Menu, select the Get System Utilities template, using the
cursor arrow keys, and then press < F1 >. The System Utilities Menu will immediately appear on the
screen.
The System Utilities Menu offers the following selections:
Memory
Check System Health
Clear Memory
This chapter addresses the final four selections. Consult Chapter 9 for information about the remaining
selections.
PanelMate Series
10-1
10.174 Print Documentation
10.2 Print Documentation

All entries made in the Directory Editor, the Template Editors, the System Utilities, the Message Library,
Online Labels, and all page layouts can be documented using this utility.
Before proceeding, please be sure your printer is properly connected to Serial Port 1 and communication parameters are set. Consult Chapter 2 for information regarding the printer connection to PanelMate.
Note
The port labeled DOC in the PLC Name and Port Parameters table is used for printing.
1. To access the utility, Print Documentation, use the cursor arrow keys to select this field in the System
Utilities Menu, then press < F1 >. The Documentation Menu will immediately appear on the
screen.
2. Select all the items you wish to print at the same time by using the cursor arrow keys to highlight the
field, and pressing < F1 > to make the selection. The < F1 > key functions as a toggle so that
changes or corrections are easy to make.
3. Press < F5 > to print all selected items.
4. Press < F6 > to abort printing. Printing will cease once all information has been cleared from the
PanelMate buffer. This could be as much as 3 or more printed pages. Note that there is no
way to resume printing from where it stopped after an abort; you will need to start again.
5. Press < F10 > to return to the System Utilities Menu.
10.3 Transfer Memory

Use this utility to copy your PanelMate's pages and other information from battery-backed SRAM to an
EPROM*, a BackPac, or an IBM PC. You can also use this utility to copy pages back to a PanelMate from an
EPROM*, a BackPac, or an IBM PC. This makes it easy to back up your work or move pages from one
PanelMate to another.
When moving pages and other information between two PanelMates, make sure to check the software
version numbers of both units. You may move pages directly from one PanelMate version to a PanelMate
of the same or higher version number. If you wish to move pages from one PanelMate to a unit that has a
lower version number, you must use the Transfer/Merge Utility available for the IBM PC. See Appendix A
for information.
Note To make back-ups of the contents of battery-backed RAM onto an IBM PC disk, you will need the
optional Transfer/Merge Utility from Eaton IDT. See Appendix A for information on the
Transfer/Merge Utility.
* Model 2800 systems only
10-2
PanelMate Series
10.3.1 Accessing the Transfer Memory Utility

To access the utility, Transfer Memory, use the cursor arrow keys to select this field in the System Utilities
Menu, then press < F1 >. The Memory Transfer Menu will immediately appear on the screen.
Select the action you wish to perform using the cursor arrow keys. These actions are available:
Save to EEPROM*
Save to EPROM**
Save to IBM PC
Load from EEPROM*
Load from EPROM***
Load from IBM PC
To return to the System Utilities Menu, press <F10>. Appears
EEPROM is another term for BackPac.
in menu on model 2900 systems only. Note that
*** Model 2900 systems require an EPROM Reader Cartridge
to load from EPROM.
10.3.2 Memory Transfers Using a BackPac

To perform memory transfers to or from BackPac, you must do the following: 1.
Insert the BackPac.
2. Select either Save or Load from the Memory Transfer Menu. 3.
Execute the transfer by pressing < F1 >
Insert BackPac
1. Insert the BackPac into the 50-pin port labeled "EEPROM". 2. Lock
the BackPac by tightening the screws on the cartridge.
3. If you intend to remove the BackPac, untighten the screws and place adhesive labels on the
cartridge to identify and date it in case there are later versions.
EEPROM
K E
Y B
D
SERIAL PORT 1
SERIAL PORT 2
TOUCHPANEL PORT
Figure 10-1 EEPROM and Port Locations
L
PanelMate Series
10-3
Execute the Memory Transfer

Once the BackPac is inserted, select the action you wish to perform by using the cursor arrow keys. Then
press < F1 > to execute the transfer.
Note As soon as you press < F1 >, the selected field will change from green to blue, and the transfer will
be initiated. A prompt will appear on the screen indicating that the BackPac is being programmed.
It can take from approximately 10 seconds to several minutes for the programming to be completed.
When the transfer is completed, the selected action will return to green.
To return to the System Utilities Menu, press < F10 >.
10.3.3 Memory Transfer Using EPROM Reader on 2900 Series

Note This section is for 2900 series PanelMate users only. If you have a 2800 series PanelMate, please read
section 10.3.4, Memory Transfer Using EPROM on 2800 series. See section 1.2.1., Enhancements,
for more information on the differences between the 2900 series and the 2800 series PanelMate.
Information which has been stored to EPROM using a 2800 series PanelMate may be transferred into a 2900
series PanelMate using an available EPROM Reader Cartridge. This cartridge will not allow a 2900 series
PanelMate to write to EPROM. For information about saving information from a 2900 series PanelMate, see
section 10.3.2, Memory Transfers Using BackPac. For information about writing to EPROM, see section
10.3.4, Memory Transfer Using EPROM on 2800 series.
To transfer memory from EPROM to a 2900 series PanelMate, you must do the following: 1.
Insert the EPROM(s) into the socket(s) on the EPROM Reader Cartridge. 2.
Insert the cartridge into PanelMate.
3.
Select Load from the Memory Transfer Menu.
4.
Execute the transfer by pressing < F1 >.
Insert EPROMs and Cartridge

Two blank zero-insertion-force EPROM sockets are located on the top side of the EPROM Reader
Cartridge.
1. If your PanelMate information is stored on one EPROM, place it in socket #1. If the information is on
two EPROMs, place them in sockets #1 and 2 as they were on the 2800 series PanelMate which
created them. Make sure the notched end of the EPROM(s) is toward the screw at one end of
the socket(s).
2.
3.
Lock the EPROM(s) into the socket by tightening the screw(s) at the end of the socket(s).
Insert the EPROM Reader Cartridge into the 50-pin port labeled "EEPROM".
4.
Lock the cartridge to the port by tightening the screws at the sides of the cartridge.
Execute Memory Transfer

Once the EPROM(s) is inserted into the cartridge and the cartridge is inserted into the port, select "Load
from EPROM" by using the cursor arrow keys. Then press < Fl > to execute the transfer.
As soon as you press < Fl >, the selected field will change from green to blue, and the transfer will be
initiated. A prompt will appear on the screen indicating the EPROM(s) is being read. When the transfer is
completed, the selected field will return to green.
Press < F10 > to return to the System Utilities Menu.
10-4
PanelMate Series
10.3.4 Memory Transfer Using EPROM on the 2800 Series

Note This section is for 2800 series PanelMate users only. If you have a 2900 series PanelMate, please read
section 10.3.2, Memory Transfers Using a BackPac, or section 10.3.3, Memory Transfer Using
EPROM Reader on 2900 Series. See section 1.2.1, Enhancements, for more information on
the differences between the 2900 series and the 2800 series PanelMate.
To perform memory transfers from an EPROM, you must do the following:
1. Insert an EPROM into EPROM socket 1 for either PanelMate I or PanelMate II; insert
EPROMs into both sockets for PanelMate III.
2. Select either Save or Load from the Memory Transfer Menu. 3.
Execute the transfer by pressing < F1 >. Insert EPROMs
Either one or two blank zero-insertion-force EPROM sockets are located on the right side of PanelMate
(looking at the unit from the front), just above the parallel port.
1. Remove the small cover that is protecting the fuse battery and EPROM sockets. It is not necessary to disconnect power if
all you intend to do is insert or remove EPROMs.
2. Insert the EPROM(s) with the notched edge of the EPROM(s) at the top of the socket. 3.
Lock the EPROM(s) into the socket by tightening the screw directly above the socket.
4. If you intend to remove the EPROM(s), place adhesive labels on the EPROM(s) to identify and
date them in case there are later versions.
EPROM Models supported by PanelMate
75-72563 IC, EPROM, 256K, 32Kx8, 75-75122 IC, EPROM, 512K 64Kx8, 200 NS 300 NS
*General Instruments #27256-20J
*Intel #D27512-2, P27512
*Toshiba #TMM27256AD-20
*General Instruments #27C512-20
*Fujitsu #MBM27256-20
*Fujitsu #MBM27512-20
*Hitachi #HN27256-20, 27C256
*Advanced Micro Devices
#AM27256-2
*Intel #27256-2, P27256
Note
PanelMate Series
*Fujitsu #27C512-20
*Toshiba #TMM27512D-20
*Texas Instruments #TMS27C512-2JL
*Hitachi #27512
PanelMate II and PanelMate III will write to 512K EPROMs only. PanelMate I may use either 256K
or 512K EPROMs.
10-5
SOCKETI
E-PROM
SOCKET2
E-PROM
`PARALLEL PORT
Figure 10-2 EPROM Socket and Port Locations
Execute the Memory Transfer

Once the EPROM(s) is inserted, select "Load from EPROM" by using the cursor arrow keys. Then press
< Fl > to execute the transfer.
Note As soon as you press < F1 >, the selected field will change from green to blue, and the transfer will
be initiated. A prompt will appear on the screen indicating that the EPROM is being programmed.
It takes several minutes for the programming to be completed. When the transfer is completed,
the selected action will return to green.
To return to the System Utilities Menu, press < FlO > .
10.3.5 Memory Transfers Using the IBM PC

To perform memory transfers to or from the IBM PC, see Appendix A, Transfer/Merge Utility.
10-6
PanelMate Series
10.4 Check System Health

This utility can be used to check the following features of each PanelMate unit: 1. Color
and linearity of the monitor
2. Communications of the Configuration Keyboard, TouchPanel and the control buttons 3. Status
of the audio tones, fault relay and battery 4. Display of the power-up diagnostic results
To access the System Health Menu, select Check System Health from the System Utilities Menu, using the
cursor arrow keys. Then press < Fl > .
The System Health Menu will immediately appear on the screen:
Display Test Configuration
Keyboard Membrane
Keypads Test Tone Relay,
Battery Test
The following paragraphs explain how to use each of these menu selections.
10.4.1 Display Test

This function provides a way to check the linearity and colors of the monitor. To access this utility, select
Display Test from the System Health Menu, using the cursor arrow keys. Then press < F1 >.
The Display Test Menu will immediately appear on the screen:
Crosshatch Pattern
Color Check Solid
Black Screen Solid
White Screen Dot
Pattern
To check the monitor's linearity, select either Crosshatch Pattern or Dot Pattern using the cursor arrow keys,
and then press < F1 >. A white-on-black crosshatch pattern will immediately appear on the screen. If these
lines appear wavy or skewed, consult the troubleshooting guide in Chapter 12 for help in solving this
problem. Press < F10 > to return to the Display Test Menu.
To check the monitor's color, select Color Check from the Display Test Menu by using the cursor arrow keys.
Then press < Fl > . Seven bars of color will immediately appear on the screen. If color adjustments are
required, consult the monitor adjustment section of Chapter 12 for help. Press < F10 > to return to the
Display Test Menu.
To further test the monitor, solid black and solid white screens are also available. To return
to the System Health Menu, press < F10 > again.
PanelMate Series
10-7
10.4.2 Configuration Keyboard Test

This utility tests the function of each key on the Configuration Keyboard (this test will work with any
IBM PC-compatible keyboard that works with PanelMate).
Be sure that the Configuration Keyboard is connected to PanelMate. To access this utility, select
Configuration Keyboard Test from the System Health Menu, using the cursor arrow keys. Then press
<Fl>.
The Configuration Keyboard Test area will immediately appear on the screen. As you press any key, the
transmitted character will appear on the screen. All characters are displayed on the screen in their
keyboard configuration.
Note that the cursor appears as a magenta block as soon as the first key is pressed.
If a key does not transmit the expected character AND you purchased your keyboard from Eaton IDT,
call the Eaton IDT Customer Service Department for assistance. If the keyboard was not purchased
from Eaton IDT, check the list of compatible keyboards in Section 2.2.2.
To return to the System Health Menu, press < Alt > and < FlO > at the same time.
10.4.3 Membrane Keypads Test

This utility tests the function of all membrane keypad areas on the PanelMate unit. Be sure that the
TouchPanel is connected to PanelMate.
To access this utility, select Membrane Keypads Test from the System Health Menu, using the cursor arrow
keys. Then press < Fl > .
The Membrane Keypads Test area will immediately appear on the screen. As you press any area of the
TouchPanel (including the large keypad, the cancel key, and the numeric keypad) or any of the control
buttons on the right side of the Main Video Unit, a corresponding rectangle will appear on the screen. All
membrane areas are displayed on the screen in their keyboard configuration.
Note that the cursor appears as a magenta block as soon as the first membrane area is pressed.
If a membrane area does not transmit a corresponding rectangle, call the Eaton IDT Customer Service
Department for assistance.
To return to the System Health Menu, press <F10>.
10.4.4 Tone Relay, Battery Test

This utility tests the volume of the audio tone, the activation of the fault relay, and battery status. It also
reports the results of the power-up diagnostic routines.
To access this utility, select Tone, Relay, Battery Test from the System Health Menu, using the cursor arrow
keys. Then press < F1 >.
The Alarm and Status Utility menu will immediately appear on the screen:
Low Audio Tone
Medium Audio Tone High
Audio Tone Activate Fault
Relay Deactivate Fault Relay
PowerUp Diagnostic Results
Battery Status
The following paragraphs explain how to use each of the menu selections.
10-8
PanelMate Series
10.5 Clear Memory
Low, Medium and High Audio Tones

Before testing the audio output of PanelMate, be sure that a speaker horn is attached to the unit.
To verify that all tones are working (and to determine which volume is most suited to your application), use
the cursor arrow keys to select one of the Audio Tone fields, and then press < F1 >. The selected volume of
the audio tone will sound immediately and will continue until you press < F1 > again.
Activate and Deactivate Fault Relay

If you are in a relatively quiet room, it is not necessary to have the fault relay connected to verify that it is
functioning. As the relay is activated and deactivated, you can hear a click as the relay opens and closes.
To activate and deactivate the relay, use the cursor arrow keys to move to the Deactivate Fault Relay field
on the Alarm and Status Utility menu. To verify that the relay is working, press < F1 >. Then move to the
Activate Fault Relay field and repeat the procedure.
PowerUp Diagnostics
It is possible to recall the results of the power-up diagnostic routines after operation is underway by using this
selection from the Alarm and Status Utility menu.
Select PowerUp Diagnostic Results using the cursor arrow keys, then press < F1 >. The results of the
power-up diagnostics will immediately appear on the screen, along with the time. Consult Chapter 11 for
more information regarding power-up diagnostics.
Battery Status
This function checks the health of the battery that is used for battery-backed RAM.
Select Battery Status from the Alarm and Status Utility menu using the cursor arrow keys, then
press < F1 >. The battery status, OK, LOW or BAD will immediately appear on the screen.
10.5 Clear Memory

This function fully erases all battery-backed memory, including all pages, everything created in all template
editors, and all system parameters. Therefore, there are several levels of prompting messages you must pass
through before the non-volatile RAM memory is cleared.
To clear everything in battery-backed RAM:
1. Select Clear Memory in the System Utilities Menu by using the cursor arrow keys 2. Press <
F1 >
3. Press < Y > in response to the prompt:
Do you really want to clear memory?
4. Press < Y > again in response to the prompt:

All Pages, Messages, System Parameters will be erased. Do you want to proceed? 5.
Press < F5 > to clear the memory

At any time in this sequence, you can abort the operation by pressing <N> instead of <Y>, or by pressing
<F10> instead of <F5> as the final entry.
Once you have cleared memory, a line will appear on the screen confirming the action.
PanelMate Series
10-9
Chapter 11. Run Mode
OBJECTIVES
What happens when you power-up in Run Mode
How to use the control buttons
How to use the numeric keypad
How to call new pages
How to use the system overview
How to call the alarm summary pages
How to acknowledge alarms
What error messages from PanelMate mean
What to do if something goes wrong during Run Mode
11.1 Power-Up Sequence in Run Mode

On power-up, with the keyswitch in the RUN position, PanelMate performs the following sequence of
operations prior to beginning normal communications.
1. Run normal power-up diagnostics
2. Load system configuration into working RAM 3.
Initialize all control button bit references 4. Energize
the fault relay
The following paragraphs describe each of these events more fully.
11.1.1 Run Normal Power-Up Diagnostics

Normal system power-up diagnostics include tests of:
System memory
Battery
Watchdog timer
Serial and parallel ports
Real-time clock
Power supply
PanelMate Series
11.184 Power-U Se uence in Run Mode
During the system memory test, the screen displays a pattern of colored blocks which shifts twice.
Once all power-up diagnostics are completed, the system initially displays a row of 13 blocks, as
shown in the following diagram, to indicate the results of the test. A red block indicates a failure.
C
Not Used
Not Used
SRAM
Battery
Failure
RT C Battery Fa ilu re Not

Used
Character Cell RAM Test
Serial Port 4 Test
Serial Port 3 Test
Serial Port 2 Test
Serial Port 1 Test
Only if available
Watchdog Timer Test

Real-Time Clock Test
Dynamic RAM Test
Figure 11-1 Power-up Diagnostics Indicators

Shortly thereafter, any failures will be listed in words on the screen. Some failures are not necessarily
fatal, and you can proceed after noting the problem, by pressing a membrane key. The following
failures allow you to continue, although you should plan to correct the problems:
Battery dead or low
One or more port failures
The other failures will not permit you to continue. The system halts at fatal failures with an error
message.
The failure message, "To enter Configuration Mode, connect the configuration keyboard", may be
caused by:
The keyboard is not totally IBM PC-compatible (IBM AT keyboard is not compatible) The
keyboard is not properly connected at the port; unplug the keyboard, check the connectors,
and then securely plug the keyboard into the port
11-184
PanelMate Series
11.2 Entering Run Mode
11.1.2 Load System Configuration

Your pages are loaded from either a BackPac or battery-backed SRAM memory and the checksum is
verified. A prompt appears at initialization to tell you which memory area is being used to load the
system configuration. If the checksum does not verify, the system halts with an error message.
11.1.3 Energize the Fault Relay

The fault relay, which initially is de-energized, is energized upon successful completion of all of the
previous operations. Any fatal failure, as listed in 11.1.1 above, will cause the relay not to be energized and
the system to be halted. This entire sequence will take about 20 seconds from the time that power is
applied.
Once a successful power-up sequence is completed, normal communications and page updates will begin.
11.1.4 Initialize All Control Button Bit References

All PLC bit references which are associated with configured control buttons, are written to 0. This
initializes all control points to a safe, known state.
Note To users of ASCII Generic Protocol, at this step, PanelMate will prepare messages with task code 67
for each PLC bit reference in the system configuration. At this time, the host computer should be
prepared to request the information from the PanelMate.
11.2 Entering Run Mode

If you are in the Configuration Mode and wish to change the keyswitch to Run Mode, there is no need
to disconnect power. However, you must return to the Main Menu before turning the key. The system
checksum is recalculated every time you return to the Main Menu, and this must be done before
entering Run Mode.
When the key is turned to Run Mode, PanelMate will begin the normal power-up sequence.
11.3 Test in Run Mode

If you are in the Configuration Mode, you may enter the Run Mode from the Main Menu by selecting Test
in Run Mode, and pressing < F1 >. When < F1 > is pressed, PanelMate will begin functioning in the
Run Mode.
Operation of the Run Mode is consistent, whether you enter Run Mode in this way or by using the
keyswitch. The only difference is that the Test in Run Mode will always use the configuration from the
battery-backed RAM, while the Run Mode selected by the keyswitch will first check for a configuration
in the BackPac and then will use the battery-backed RAM if none exists.
To return to Configuration Mode, press < Ctrl > < Alt > < Del > at the same time on the Configuration
Keyboard.
11.4 Run Mode Operations

Proper Run Mode operations will only occur if a programmable controller or other intelligent device is
properly communicating with PanelMate. In Run Mode, a variety of operations will take place; some
are related to the display functions of PanelMate, and some are related to the operator input functions.
The following sections describe the Run Mode functions of PanelMate.
PanelMate Series
11-3
11.4 Run Mode 0 erations
11.4.1 System Overview

The System Overview is located between the page title and the alarm window.
Page 1
Page Title Area

_______ let ___I11 __ 121 __
15:23:42
131___ 141 __ I51__ 161___ 171 __ 181
>I
Figure 11-2 PanelMate Page Banner

The background color of the numbered blocks provides the following information to the operator:
black - this page has no information on it
green - all devices on this page are operating normally
blinking red - at least one device on this page is in an alarm condition
PanelMate I and PanelMate II's page banner will look like figure 11-2.
PanelMate III has the capability to create up to 30 pages (numbered 00-29). If no information is on
pages 10-29, PanelMate III's page banner will also look like figure 11-2 . If any or all of the pages
numbered 10-15 have been configured, then the Page Banner will display 16 pages (numbered 00-15) as
shown in figure 11-3.
Page 1
Page Title Area
15:23:42
1001 1011 1021 1031 1041 1051 lest 1071 1081 1091 lief 1111 1121 1131 1141 1151 ,
Figure 11-3 PanelMate III Page Banner (16 Pages)

If any or all of the pages numbered 16-29 have been configured, then the Page Banner will be numbered similar
to figure 11-4. Note that when pages 16-29 are configured, PanelMate III will use the FirstIn-First-Out
(FIFO) method to display only the oldest pages in alarm.
Note
The plus "+" in the right corner of the the overview field signifies that there is more than 21
pages in alarm.
Page 1 _____________ Page Title Area ______________________________________ 15:23:42
.12011e31107111911e2111211041123110811011(06112911e9112111e01101110s112811101117112611
Figure 11-4 PanelMate III Page Banner (21 Pages)
11-4
PanelMate Series
11.4.2 Default Control Button Labels

The default control button labels will appear when the
system powers up in Run Mode, when the < CANCEL >
button is pressed, or when operator input is completed, or
when the automatic cancel feature takes effect.
Note
"Silence Alarm Horn" only appears if audible

alarms have been selected.
"Enable Fault Relay" only appears for communications errors and alarms.
Silence
Alarm
Horn
Enable
Fault
Relay
Get
Alarm
Page
View or
Acknowledge
Alarms
Get
Page
11.4.3 Call a New Page

The first page to appear when entering Run Mode will be Page 0, unless you have defined a different
start-up page when editing the System Parameters Table. From the default control button selections,
select any other page by performing the following tasks:
1. Press the control button labeled "Get Page". The control button labels will change. Control button
4 will access a system directory.
2. On the numeric keypad, press the number of the page you wish to select. The new page will
appear immediately. If you press the number for the page you are already on, the page is not
redrawn. Press < CANCEL > to remain on the current page and return the control buttons to
their default labels.
Note
If pages 10-29 on a PanelMate III are configured, then a two digit number will have to be
entered to select a page. For example, page number 1 will be entered as 01.
PLC Page Selection

PanelMate has the capability to monitor a register in the PLC and change the page shown on the
screen automatically.
The Page Change Register field (described in Section 9.4.14) holds the reference used to select which page
to place on the screen. When a valid page number is in this register and a control element or template
is not selected in the current page, that page will be recalled to the screen. If control is currently
selected, the right end of the Page Banner blinks yellow, indicating a change in the page register. Once
control is relinquished, the page referenced in the register will be recalled.
11.4.4 Call the Directory

A directory of the page titles is automatically created by PanelMate as you configure your system. If
you need to refer to this list of page titles while in Run Mode, press the control button labeled "Get
Page" from the default control button selections. The control button labels will immediately change.
Press control button 4, "Directory", to view the directory.
To exit from the directory, press any page number or < CANCEL > .
PanelMate III has 30 pages available for configuration. The directory is called exactly the same as
previously described if pages 10-29 are left blank. If any or all of pages 10-29 have been configured, then
the control button labeled "Directory" will operate as a toggle between the directory of pages 0-14 and
15-29. After pressing the control button labeled "Get Page," the label "Directory" will appear.
Press the Directory control button to display the directory of pages 0-14; press the control button
labeled "Directory" again to display the directory of pages 15-29.
PanelMate Series
11-5
11.4.5 Operator Input

All operator input requires at least two keystrokes. This prevents any accidental entries that could be made by
mistaking a control button or numeric key.
Any template or element that displays a small arrow in the lower left-hand corner of the template, can be
controlled by the operator.
Before any change can be made to a particular template, that template must be selected. To select a particular
template, press the area of. the Selection Keypad that corresponds to the location of the template on the
screen. (Note the 5-by-3 grid marked on the Selection Keypad.) If you miss, try again until the white box
cursor surrounds the template you wish to select. See Section 11.7.2, Element Selection, for information on
selecting elements.
If the template requires control button input, the corresponding control button labels will appear when
the template is selected. Press the appropriate control button. If the wrong template is selected before the
control button is pressed, simply use the selection keypad to make the right choice. If no selection is wanted,
press < CANCEL > .
The PanelMate control buttons provide momentary input. When the button is pressed, PanelMate sends a
command to the PLC to set the referenced bit to a 1. When the button is released, a separate command is
sent to set the bit to a 0, thus providing a momentary input to the PLC. If a "maintained" input is
desired, the bit may be latched in PLC logic.
If the template requires numeric keypad input, the label of control button 4 will read "Change Value" when
the template is selected. Press control button 4. The control button labels will immediately change to read
"Clear" for control button 4, and "Enter New Value" for control button 5. Use the numeric keys to write the
value onto the screen (in the label of control button 5), then press control button 5 (enter new value) to
transmit the value to the PLC. If the wrong number is written before the control button is pressed, simply
press control button 4 (clear) and try again. If no selection is wanted, press < CANCEL > .
PanelMate commands for control button and numeric input will not overwrite PLC logic.
11.4.6 Alarms
All alarm conditions that you designate in the PanelMate template editors are constantly monitored. When an
alarm condition occurs, an alarm message is automatically configured by PanelMate and printed on the current
page. The same message will also go to a printer if you have configured a printer in the PLC Name and
Port Editor.
The Alarm Horn can be silenced two different ways. The Alarm Horn can be silenced by pressing the control
button labeled "Silence Alarm Horn" from the default control button selection. The Alarm Horn can also be
silenced remotely by setting a bit in the PLC. See Section 9.4.10, for more information on configuring the
Remote Silence Alarm Bit. PanelMate can also set a bit in the PLC when the control button "Silence Alarm
Horn" is pressed. This can allow one operator to silence all Alarm Horns on all PanelMates on a network.
The alarm message always includes:
11-6
the device name

the nature of the alarm (high or low alarm, or the alarm condition label)
the time of the event being reported
the page the device is listed on in PanelMate
PanelMate Series
Additionally, the following attributes also apply to alarm messages, depending on the condition being
reported:
New alarms
Acknowledged
Cleared, not acknowledged
Displayed as white text on a red background

Displayed as yellow text on a black background. The
abbreviation "Ackd" will appear in the message in front of
the time
Displayed as red text on a white background. The
abbreviation "Clrd" will appear in the message in front of
the time
Cleared and Acknowledged The message will disappear from the screen. The message that gets
sent to the printer will include the abbreviation "Cird" in
front of the time.
The four most current alarm messages appear in the alarm window of the current page.
11.4.7 Alarm Summary Page

The Alarm Summary Page is automatically created by PanelMate as alarm conditions occur. The 100
most current alarm messages can be viewed on the Alarm Summary Page at any time. As new alarms
occur, the oldest alarms will be removed. For example, if 100 alarms have occurred and then one more
occurs, the 100th alarm will be removed and the new alarm will be added to the beginning of the Alarm
Summary Page. The page indicator for the page which contains the removed alarm will still flash red
until the alarm condition has been cleared.
To get to the Alarm Summary Page, press Get Alarm Page from the default control button selections. The
Alarm Summary Page will appear immediately, displaying the most current 23 alarm messages. If there
are no alarm messages to display, the page will be blank.
To view the alarms beyond the most current 23, use the control buttons labeled "Scroll Up" and
"Scroll Down". These buttons move a small, white block cursor that marks the start of a specific
alarm message. When the block cursor is scrolled down past the last message on the screen, the
messages beyond 23 appear. This block cursor is also used to mark individual alarm messages for
acknowledgment.
To return to any other page in the system, press the control button labeled "Get Page", and enter the
page number using the numeric keypad.
11.4.8 View or Acknowledge Alarms

To acknowledge alarms in the alarm window located on each page, press the control button labeled
"View or Acknowledge Alarms" from the default control button selections. The control buttons will
immediately change and a small, white block cursor will mark the most current alarm, located at the
top of the alarm window.
To acknowledge alarms in the Alarm Summary Page, press the control button labeled "View or Acknowledge Alarms". The control buttons will immediately change and a small, white block cursor will
mark the most current alarm, located at the top of the page.
PanelMate Series
11-7
These control button labels will appear:

Note that "Silence Alarm Horn" only appears if audible
alarms have been selected.
The following paragraphs apply to all alarms, regardless of
whether you are viewing the alarm window or the Alarm
Summary Page.
To acknowledge a single alarm, move the block cursor using
the "Scroll Up" or "Scroll Down" buttons to mark the alarm.
Then press the control button labeled "Acknowledge Selected
Alarm" to acknowledge.
To acknowledge all new alarms, press the control button
labeled "Acknowledge All Alarms". It does not matter where the
block cursor is located. This action acknowledges all new alarms,
whether they are actually in view or not.
S c r o l l Dow
Acknowladg
Selected
Alarm
Acknowlede
All
Alarms
The alarms can also be acknowledged rmotely. Once the Alarm Acknowledge Bit (defined in the
System Parameters Table) is set, all alarms will be acknowledged.
PanelMate is also capable of setting a bit in the PLC when the "Acknowledge All Alarms" control
button is pressed. The Remote Alarm Acknowledge Bit is also defined in the System Parameters
Table. This capability, along with the ability to remotely acknowledge all alarms, can be useful in
allowing one operator to acknowledge all alarms on a network of PanelMates from a single system.
11.4.9 Fault Relay

The Fault Relay is energized at power-up if enabled in the System Parameters Table, and will deenergize when an alarm condition occurs. The Fault Relay can be re-energized, enabled, remotely by
setting a bit in the PLC. This bit is defined in the System Parameters Table. The control button
labeled "Enable Fault Relay" can also be used to set a bit in a. PLC. This bit can then be used to
enable other PanelMate fault relays on a network from a single PanelMate.
11-8
PanelMate Series
11.5 System Errors
11.5 System Errors

During Run Mode operation, two basic conditions are checked; proper operation of the CPU, and proper
operation of the system software.
Proper operation of the CPU is monitored by a Watchdog Timer. If a CPU error is detected, the fault
relay is de-energized, the screen turns red with a blinking area in the middle, and the system is halted.
One possible reason for the Watchdog Timeout error could be related to the power. Check to make sure
that the PanelMate is properly installed. If problems still occur, call Eaton IDT Customer Service at (614)
882-3282 for more information.
Proper operation of system software is monitored to ensure that all internal processes are active and
functioning normally. If a system software error is detected, the fault relay is de-energized, and the
system is halted.
An error message is displayed at the bottom of the screen:
System Error X
System Halted.
#Z
where X = a system error code which indicates the nature of the problem:
4nn - Error in main communication program 50n
- Error in A-B interface routine
51n - Error in ASCII Generic Protocol interface routine
52n - Error in Modicon interface routine 53n - Error in
General Electric interface routine 54n - Error in Texas
Instruments interface routine 55n - Error in Reliance
interface routing 56n - Error in Westinghouse interface
routine 57n - Error in Square D interface routine 58n Error in Eaton interface routine
59n - Error in Remote I/O Configuration (Acceleratl/On)
5an - Error in Data Highway/ Data Highway Plus Configuration (AcceleratI/On)
where n = any digit 0-f
Z = an internal system error code
Note
PanelMate Series
If these error messages appear, please report to Eaton IDT's Customer Service Department
at (614) 882-3282.
11-9
11.5 System Errors
Remote I/O System Errors

Because the interface to the A-B remote I/O network is a board which installs within PanelMate, some
initialization is done by PanelMate. This initialization will include verifying that the board is present and testing
the board to ensure that it will operate properly. Should the board not be present or fail operational testing
during initialization, the following message will be displayed, the system will abort the Run Mode initialization,
and the system will halt:
System error 59x
I/O board failure
where:
x = e r r o r c od e =
0 - Board not present
1 - Unable to link to code module 2 Board memory write failure
3 - Error writing to board memory 4 Board failed to initialize
5 - Board failed internal diagnostic
Non-I/O Board Initialization Fatal Errors

A fatal error may occur during the initialization of the driver (outside of the I/O board initialization)
which will stop the PanelMate from successfully entering the Run Mode. Other fatal errors may be
detected once communications have begun; these errors generally indicate failure to obtain a system
resource (memory not available, cannot link to data module, cannot open device, etc.) These errors
will be displayed on the PanelMate error line in the following format:
System Error 59x
where:
x = error code =
5 - Unable to link to data module
6 - Unable to link to memory arena
7 - Unable to allocate reply buffer memory
11-10
PanelMate Series
11.6 Communication Errors

11.6.1 Serial and Acceleratl/On
Integrity of the communication link to the PLC (or host) is monitored by ensuring that proper responses
are received for each transmission that PanelMate makes, according to the specific protocol in use.
Communication problems can include:
Broken or incorrect cabling to the PLC
PLC or interface card failure
Incorrect setting of PLC interface card switches
Removal of a PLC from the active network
Attempt to access a non-existent PLC address
Attempt to write to a protected PLC address
Too much traffic on a PLC network

PanelMate will try to re-transmit a request several times before reporting that a communications error
has occurred. Unlike Systems Errors, Communication Errors do not halt the PanelMate system.
PanelMate continues to re-transmit requests indefinitely, even after an error has been reported.
The frequency of the re-transmission depends on the Retry Delay setting (refer to secion 9.4.7). If the retry
delay is Y, the frequency of the re-transmission gradually decreases to five minutes if requests continue
to fail over a prolonged period of time. This effectively prevents failing requests from conflicting with
other communications. If the retry delay is N, the frequency of re-transmission is constant. Communication
errors are reported on the bottom of the screen as follows:
Comm Err X
where X
PortP
PLC id N (M oct)
PLC Err Y
#Z
a communication error code which indicates the nature of the problem:

1 - PanelMate cannot read a block because of a PLC exception; refer to the PLC
error
12- PanelMate cannot write a 16-bit value because of a PLC exception, refer to the
PLC error
13 PanelMate cannot write a 32-bit value because of a PLC exception, refer to the
PLC error
14 PanelMate cannot write a bit because of a PLC exception, refer to the PLC error
101 - PanelMate receives no response from attempting to read a block
102 - PanelMate receives no response from attempting to read a scattered block (TI
only)
112- PanelMate receives no response from attempting to write a 16-bit value
113 - PanelMate receives no response from attempting to write a 32-bit value 114PanelMate receives no response from attempting to write a bit
301 - PanelMate receives no response when trying to communicate with other
device.
302- error inquiring of other device
303 - timed-out while inquiring of other device
304- unsolicited input received
PanelMate Series
P = the number of the serial port on which the error occurred (1, 2, 3, 4 or I/O).
N = the decimal value of the network ID number of the PLC to which the transmission was
directed. For Reliance AutoMate PLC users, N is equal to the network ID in
the form node slot.
M = the octal equivalent of N (for Allen-Bradley users).
Y = the error code which was generated by the PLC to point to the reason for
the error. This will often be 0, unless the PLC is able to respond with such a
code. Refer to you PLC manual for error code identification.
Z = an internal error code which will normally be 0.
Error codes 101 and 11.4 are most common when attempting to set-up PLC communications. When these error
codes are received, it is usually an indication that no transmission is occurring between the PLC and PanelMate.
To correct this problem, check the cable connections and all communication parameters.
When a communication error is reported, the fault relay is de-energized, but the system continues to operate. Other
PLC transmissions will be attemptedand processed. Transmissions which have failed willl be re-attempted until normal
communication is re-established. Each time the error is detected, the message will be reprinted at the bottom of
the screen (and the relay will be de-energized). The data at the time of a communication failure will remain on the
current page. If a different page is selected, no data from the PLC with errors will be shown. For example, if the
page contains a readout template, no numerical data from the PLC with the communication errors will be shown.
The numerical area will be blank All data from other PLCs which are operating correctly, will be displayed as usual.
Once the communications problem is corrected and the Enable Fault Relay control button is pressed, the page will be
redrawn. Any templates or elements which reference a PLC which is not communicating will not be redrawn until
valid communications has resumed.
When the error is corrected, the relay remains de-energized until the operator presses the 'Enable" control
button, which appears on the default selections when a communications error occurs. This also clears the message
from the bottom of the screen. (The button label disappears once the button has been pressed.)
Note Invalid information may still be displayed. For example, if an expression for a bar element value contains a
reference to a PLC which is communicating and also contains a reference to a PLC which is not
communicating, the bar element will be updated on the screen, even though invalid data may be in the
data base.
Remote I/O
During the operation of the Allen-Bradley Remote 1/0 driver, various communication errors may occur which give
an indication of problems which are occurring but are not serious enough to prevent recovery. These communication
errors will be reported just like communication errors occurring on other supported PLC brands. These
communication error messages will be displayed on the PanelMate error line in the following format:
Comm Err < Type >
Remote I/0 ERR
Rack < rack >
Group < group >
where:
Type = type of communication error
Remote I/O ERR =
1 - unknown request
2 - block transfer count too small 3 communications not active 4 - selected
rack not active
5 - no block transfer has been received
rack = PLC rack number with communication error
group = PLC group numer with communication error
Since the interface board has status information available, error detection is immediate, with no timeouts or
retries necessary.
194-12
PanelMate Series
11.7 PanelMate II/III Online Operation

Generally speaking, there are no significant differences in online operation between PanelMate I and
PanelMate II/III, only enhancements. These enhancements are in two primary areas: alarms, and object
selection from the keyboard matrix.
Figure 11-4 shows a PanelMate II/III in Run Mode. Note that the only visible difference between
PanelMate I and PanelMate II/III is the existence of the graphics elements on the PanelMate II/III.
11.7.1 Alarms
In PanelMate I, all alarms must be acknowledged by the operator before they are removed from the
alarm list. In PanelMate II/III, the user has the option of indicating, for each alarm, whether
acknowledgment is required before it will be removed from the alarm list.
When the alarm condition clears, the system checks to see if the alarm has been acknowledged. If no
acknowledgment is required, the alarm is removed from the list. Otherwise, the alarm will remain on the
list until it is properly acknowledged.
Other than the alarm's eventual automatic removal from the alarm list, there is no other indication to the
operator that operator intervention is not required. The operator can still acknowledge it. Operator
input is unnecessary, not forbidden.
While a Readout or Message element remains on the alarm list, the element will be displayed white on
blinking red. When it clears the list, it will be redrawn with configured attributes. Graphic elements will be
drawn as configured.
PanelMate Series
11-13
11.7.2 Element Selection

To select a given template, the operator would push the membrane on the TouchPanel corresponding to
the area on the screen containing the template in which the operator is interested. In PanelMate II/III,
a given template cell area may contain more than one graphic element which may be configured for
control. So that the operator can select the desired element, the following procedure is presented:
When the membrane is initially touched, the first element that lies within the indicated template cell
area is selected, and is identified by its flashing control indicator. If this is not the desired element, a
subsequent pressing of the same membrane will step to the next element in a top-to-bottom, leftto-right
search pattern within the cell area. The selection process will cycle and recycle through all of the
elements with controls lying within the selected cell area.
Page 1
Tank Control System
10:23:42
101 _ 111__121 _ 131 __ 141 _ 151 __1 ______ 171 _ 181

Loop 5
Inlet Valve 168
Storage Tank
Spindl e Motor 8
.....
STUCK
HIGH ALARM
FAULT
Ackd 89:03:00
Ackd 89:03:12
Clrd 09:03:43
"
Pg.9
P9.9
Pg.S
'iiPg.b
Silence
Alarm
Horn
Inlet Pump
Motor
IIIII1111111
1111111111
Outlet Pump
Motor
uuu............ uuuuiw
uw
nm
iilf
uuuw
Maintain Storage Tank Lev el
ununaunoUnuuuu.
unmnnrnnummiiii
4000 Gallons
uunnu
uuuuuuu.unnmu.
Figure 11-5 Example of PanelMate II/III Page
...............................................................................................................................................
196 14
lM t S i
Chapter 12. Hardware Maintenance
OBJECTIVES
What regular maintenance PanelMate requires
How to make adjustments to the color monitor
How to replace the battery How to replace the
fuses
How to determine what is wrong if there is a problem
12.1 Regular Maintenance

Very little regular maintenance is required to keep your PanelMate in perfect running condition.
The face of the unit can be cleaned, whenever needed, with any common, non-abrasive cleaning
product.
Every 3 to 6 months, run all the system health checks that are provided in the system. These include the
Display Tests, Membrane Keypads Test, and Relay and Battery Tests. Refer to Chapter 10 for directions
on running these system health checks.
It is best to mount PanelMate in a closed industrial enclosure. However, if a PanelMate is operating in a
dusty environment and is unprotected (e.g., mounted in a control panel whose door is often left open),
periodically use forced air to blow off any dust that may have accumulated on the circuit boards. Be sure
to check the battery, and then disconnect power before conducting this procedure.
PanelMate Series
12-1
198.2 Monitor
12.2 Monitor Adjustments

The following diagram shows the locations of the monitor adjustments that are accessible to you
through the enclosure. If the monitor cannot be adjusted to an acceptable performance level, contact the
Eaton IDT Customer Service Department at (614) 882-3282. Do not attempt to remove the enclosure
from the monitor.
Warning
Use a plastic screwdriver to make monitor adjustments.
0
LI
O CONTRAST
OO
-O- BRIGHTNESS
00
N
~~
POWER
POWER
AC P O W E R
A/C POWER
N G L
~CAUTIO
FAULT
RELAY
f
AC POKE
V-SIZE -~
X
H-PHASE-1
I
9
FA U LT RELAY
G0o
0
0 -------------------------------- 0 ----------------------------------0 -
Figure 12-1 Monitor Adjustments
CONTRAST The CONTRAST control will increase or decrease the contrast of the screen.
BRIGHTNESS The BRIGHTNESS control will increase or decrease the brightness of the
screen. This should be the first control checked if no picture appears.
198-2
V-SIZE
The V-SIZE control will increase or decrease the vertical size of the screen.
H-PHASE-1
The H-PHASE-1 control will adjust the horizontal location of the screen.
PanelMate Series
12.3 Replacing the Battery
12.3 Replacing the Battery

The battery on PanelMate is soldered-in and should be replaced at Eaton IDT. Contact the Customer
Service Department at (614) 882-3282 if the battery needs to be replaced. The battery should be replaced
whenever the battery status is LOW; do not wait for the battery to die.
12.4 Replacing the Fuse for the Entire Unit

The fuse for the entire unit is soldered-in and should be replaced at Eaton IDT. Contact the Customer Service
Department at (614) 882-3282 if the fuse needs to be replaced.
l
PanelMate Series
12_3
Chapter 13. Troubleshooting Guide
This section of the manual is provided to help you determine if problems you are having with PanelMate can be readily solved on your own or require help from Eaton IDT's Customer Service Department.
Please try all recommended solutions of your problem before contacting Eaton IDT Customer Service at
(614) 882-3282.
13.1 Problems with the Monitor

No picture on the screen
Make sure the monitor is switched on; the black switch at the back of the unit must be ON.
Attempt to adjust the brightness of the monitor (refer to Section 12.2). Make sure your power
source is actually supplying power to the PanelMate unit. Check the fuse at the rear of the unit
(refer to Section 12.4). Screen is completely gray
Completely restart PanelMate by disconnecting from its power source and then reconnecting. (This is a
symptom of a PanelMate main power supply failure; if the restart corrects the problem, there
is no need to contact Eaton IDT Customer Service.)
Screen is distorted, off-center, or dull
Refer to the Monitor Adjustments section of Chapter 12 and attempt to correct problems. Single
message on black screen that says "press any membrane key to recall
display"
This is normal operating procedure when the System Parameters Editor has been set for Automatic
Screen Blanking. To disable this feature, set Automatic Screen Blanking to OFF (refer to Chapter 9).
Watchdog timeout message on red screen that says "Watchdog Timeout. Press
Cancel key to continue"
A Watchdog Timeout error indicates a problem with PanelMate's hardware. If this message is encountered, call the Eaton IDT Customer Service Department at (614) 882-3282. Please have the unit's
serial number ready for the Eaton IDT technician who serves your call.
PanelMate Series
13-1
13.2 Problems with the Configuration Keyboard
13.2 Problems with the Configuration Keyboard

The first step if any problems are encountered with the configuration keyboard is to make sure that it is
compatible with PanelMate systems if the configuration keyboard was not purchased from Eaton IDT.
Section 2.2.2 contains a list of keyboards known to be compatible/non-compatible.
Keyboard does not work at all; LEDs are not lit

Check integrity of the keyboard cable and connectors; look for cuts or a loose connection.
One or several keys do not work

Use the Configuration Keyboard Test to check if the keys are sending a signal to PanelMate (refer to Chapter
10).
Does not work after exiting "Test in Run Mode"

This is a symptom of some IBM PC-compatible keyboards (not purchased from Eaton IDT). To return
keyboard to operation after pressing < Ctrl > < Alt > < Del > (normally used to exit Test in Run Mode),
unplug the keyboard, wait approximately 30 seconds, and then plug the keyboard back in. This should reset the
keyboard.
13.3 Problems with the TouchPanel

Keyboard does not work at all
Check the integrity of the cable and connectors.
One or several membrane keys do not work

Use the Membrane Keyboard Test to check if the keys are sending a signal to PanelMate (refer to Chapter
10).
13.4 Problems with the Control Buttons

One or several buttons do not work
Use the Membrane Keyboard Test to check if the keys are sending a signal to PanelMate (refer to Chapter 10).
13-2
PanelMate Series
13.5 Problems with Audio Output
13.5 Problems with Audio Output

No sound is produced at all
Check the System Parameters Editor to make sure you have the audio output set for either LOW, MED, or
HIGH volume (refer to Chapter 10).
Check the connection of the speaker to the PanelMate.
Check the integrity of the speaker cable.
If you have purchased your own speaker, make sure it is an 8-ohm speaker.
Sound is only produced for operator input or alarms

Check the System Parameters Editor to make sure you have the audio output set correctly (refer to
Chapter 10).
13.6 Problems with the Fault Relay

Fault relay is not energized at start of Run Mode operation
View the PanelMate screen to check for system or communications errors that may be reported (refer to
Chapter 11).
Use the fault relay health check to make sure the relay is working properly (refer to Chapter 10).
If you are using ASCII Generic Protocol, make sure your host is not polling PanelMate before it has a chance to
energize the relay.
Fault relay de-energizes when an alarm occurs

This is a normal operation if you have used the System Parameters Editor to set this feature. Use the System
Parameters Editor to disable this feature (refer to Chapter 9).
13.7 Problems with a Printer

Printer will not work at all
Note
If you are using a parallel printer, you must connect the available serial-to-parallel converter to one
of the serial ports (2900 series only).
Check to make sure the printer cable is connected to the correct port.
Check the Port Parameter Table. Make sure the correct port is selected for PRINTER use.
Verify that all communications parameters match between PanelMate and your printer. Remember to
completely restart the system if you make changes to these parameters.
Check to make sure the printer is ready; if the printer is out of paper or off-line, it will not work. Check the
integrity of the cable and connections. Verify that the cable is wired properly.
Check the integrity of the PanelMate communications port by restarting the system (power off, then repower), and noting the report of the power-up diagnostics.
PanelMate Series
13-3
13.8 Problems when Transferring Memory
13.8 Problems when Transferring Memory

Cannot save to the inserted Backpac
Make sure that the BackPac is properly installed.
Cannot load from the inserted BackPac

Make sure that the BackPac is properly installed.
The BackPac you are attempting to load from may be corrupted. Resave the configuration to
another BackPac, then try to transfer the configuration again.
Cannot load from the inserted EPROM Reader Cartridge

Make sure that the EPROM cartridge is properly installed.
Make sure the EPROM(s) is placed with the notched end toward the screw at one end of the socket(s). Make
sure you are trying to load from the correct EPROM cartridge.
The EPROM you are attempting to load from may be corrupted. Resave the configuration to another
EPROM, then try to transfer the configuration again.
Cannot make an IBM PC transfer at all

Make sure that the cable connecting the IBM PC serial port to PanelMate's Serial Port #1 is the one
provided by Eaton IDT.
Verify that you have properly set the communications parameters on the IBM PC serial port to match
the parameters of PanelMate's Serial Port #1.
Check the integrity of the PanelMate communications port. Do this by restarting the system (power off, then
re-power) and noting the report of the power-up diagnostics.
If a "framing error" occurs, verify the communication parameters match the PanelMate and the IBM PC.
Cannot load to the IBM PC

If you are receiving an error message that reads "invalid checksum error," you may have forgotten to initialize
PanelMate's port by pressing < Ctrl > < Alt > < Del > at the appropriate time. You must reboot
PanelMate (after exiting to the main menu) for any changes to the system parameters to take effect.
Cannot load from the IBM PC

The file you are attempting to load from the IBM PC may be corrupted. Resave the configuration to the
IBM PC, then try to transfer the configuration again.
13.9 Problems with the Real-Time Clock

The time is inaccurate following a power disruption
This is a symptom of a dead or low battery. Check the integrity of the battery. Do this by restarting the
system (power off, then re-power) and noting the report of the power-up diagnostics.
13-4
PanelMate Series
13.10 Communications Problems using the Generic Protocol
13.10 Communications Problems using the Generic Protocol

PanelMate does not respond at all
Verify that the host is using the frame format exactly as specified in Chapter 17.
Make sure that the cable connecting the host to PanelMate is properly wired.
Verify that you have properly set the communications parameters on the host to match the parameters of
PanelMate's serial port.
Check the integrity of the PanelMate communications port by restarting the system (power off, then repower) and noting the report of the power-up diagnostics.
13.11 Specific Error Messages

Must clear memory before proceeding
This error message occurs most often in response to a problem with the battery. Therefore, check the
battery health.
Memory error
Changes made in the Configuration Mode are only saved properly when the configuration keyboard is
used to return to the Main Menu before going to Run Mode. If you have just used the keyswitch to
move from the Configuration Mode to the Run Mode, you have failed to return to the. Main Menu
before exiting the Configuration Mode. You will need to return to the Configuration Mode, check your
most recent changes, return to the Main Menu, and then switch to Run Mode.
The memory that PanelMate is trying to use has been corrupted. Reload the memory and try again.
Error encountered during initialization of data structures

Return to the Configuration Mode and check the PLC Name and Port Editor. Especially verify all
Network ID numbers and the default PLC. A default PLC must be named, even if you are using one
PLC.
Too many operators or operands

This is the error message that PanelMate will report if there are expression fields that contain only
spaces. Return to the Configuration Mode and check all blank expression fields. The best way to do
this is to open and close all blank fields, using < F1 >. When you close the field, any field with
spaces in it will generate an error message at the bottom of the screen, "Invalid expression. Too many
operators." If you encounter this error message, re-open the field and use < Del > to delete all spaces.
The error may also indicate a blank space in front of logical expressions which contain a NOT sign (- ). In
newer versions, spaces between the NOT sign and the reference should be omitted.
Error in memory checksum calculation

This error message indicates that all or part of the system configuration memory is corrupted. Most
commonly, this error is displayed after improperly exiting a system editor. To correct this error, recalculate the checksum by entering and exiting the editor as normal.
PaneIMate Series
13-5
Chapter 14. Allen-Bradley PLCs
14.1 Introduction
PanelMate can be used with any of the programmable controllers in the Allen-Bradley PLC, PLC-2,
PLC-3 and PLC-5 families. Communication to a PLC can be accomplished in a number of different
ways. These include: direct connection to a single PLC; connection to Data Highway or Data Highway Plus
via an intermediate serial communication module; direct connection to Data Highway, Data Highway
Plus, or Remote I/O using the Acceleratl/On interface. Instructions for use of AcceleratI/On begin in
chapter 15.
14.2 Memory
See your PLC manual for information on memory ranges for your specific processor.
14.3 Possible Configurations

Examples of possible connections are described and shown in the following pages.
I-AnelMate Series
14-
14.3 Possible Confi urations
14.3.1 Serial Communication to One PLC
If PanelMate is to communicate to a single PLC, a direct connection is most efficient. This allows the
connection to be made with a single Allen-Bradley module (1771-KG, 1775-KA or 1770-KF2B).
0
0
0
0
Co
Cablemm
i
A-B cable
1771-CO,CN,CR
0
Ii
1771-KG
PLC 2/30
PaneIMate
C mmunications
0
0
0
0
Cable
1
PLC3
Panel Mate
Communications
Cable
0 0
0 0
0
PanelMate
1775-KA
Data Highway Plus
(Peer Communications Link)
I_____
1770-KF2B PLC 5/15
Figure 14-1 Connection to a Single PLC
14-208
PanelMate Series
14.3.2 Data Highway Connections Using Serial Communication Modules

Multiple devices may be interconnected via Data Highway. Each device needs its own module to
communicate on the highway. Switch settings, described later in this section, determine each device's
station address.
Communications Data
Cable
Highway
A-B cable 1771CO,CN,CR
0 0
c
_:::C=
1771-KF
PanelMate
1771-KA 1771-KA2
PLC 2/30
0 0
0 0
0
1 1771-KF
PanelMate
PLC 3
1775-KA
1785-KA Data
PLC 5/15
Highway Plus
(Peer Communications Link)
Communications
Cable
Figure 14-2 Multiple Data Highway Connections
PanelMate Series
14-3
14.3.3 Multiple Connections to a Single PanelMate

PanelMate has the ability to do simultaneous communications out each of its serial ports, using either
direct or data highway connections. Information from any port can be used at any time throughout
PanelMate.
Communications
Cable
1771-KG
PLC 2/15
A-B cable 1771-CO

0 0
0 0
0
Data
Highway
0
1771-KA
PLC 2/30
Panel Mate
Figure 14-3 Connection to many PI-Cs
14-4
PanelMate Series
14.3.4 Multiple Data Highways Using Serial Communication

If a substantial volume of Data Highway communication is necessary to other devices in addition to
PanelMate, it may be desirable to establish a dedicated Data Highway or direct connections for
PanelMate to avoid extended response times due to highway traffic. Allen-Bradley's 1771-KA2 and
1771-KG modules allow multiple routes into a single PLC-2 processor. The PLC-3 accepts multiple
1775-KA modules.
Data
Highway
No.2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1771-KE
Communications
Cable
Data Highway No.1
0-
1771-KA2
1771-KA2
A-B cable 1771-CO,CN,CR
PLC 2/30
Panel Mate
Communications
Cable
Data Highway
10
0 0
0 0
0
PLC 2/30
Panel Mate
PanelMate Series
14-5
14.3.5 PLC-3 Configurations Using Serial Communications

The diagram which follows illustrates that the 1771-KF module provides an interface between
PanelMate and the Data Highway. Note again that the 1771-KF station address must be different from
the other device addresses. Addresses and ID numbers shown in the diagram are samples only.
Communications A-B Data
Cable
Highway
Data Highway
0 0
0 0
0
An
1771-KF
PLC-3 1775-KA
PanelMate
Network ID
= 30 in octal
PLC ID
= 15 in octal
Address
= 30 in octal
Input Image File

= 24 in decimal
Station #
= 15 in octal
Figure 14-5 Connection to a PLC-3

The 1775-KA module will allow PanelMate to access the PLC-3 directly, as shown in the diagram which
follows:
0 0
0 0
0
Communications
Cable
Modem
Port
PanelMate
Network ID
= 30 in octal
PLC ID
= 15 in octal
PLC3
1775-KA
Input Image File =

24 in decimal
Station #
15 in octal
14.3.5.1 Accessing PLC-3 Data Using PLC-2 Protocol

PanelMate can communicate with Allen-Bradley programmable controllers via the Data Highway or
direct connection using PLC-2 protocols. The PLC-3 and 1775-KA Communications Adaptor Module can
recognize these protocols and allow PanelMate to access data table memory as if that memory were
resident in a PLC-2 series processor.
14-6
PanelMate Series
In this manner, PanelMate communicates through a file in the Input Image Section of the PLC-3
Data Table, where file number (10-100) corresponds to the station address of PanelMate. This is set
as the Network ID# in the Port Parameter Table in the PLC Name and Port Editor. Statuses from
real-world input modules are stored in Input Image File 0 and are not affected.
You should map any I/O and numeric data which is to be used by PanelMate from other areas of the
data table, into the assigned Input Image File. This can be easily accomplished in a few rungs of ladder
logic, using Move File (MVF) instructions. This creates a compact data sub-table that PanelMate can
access with a minimum number of reads, resulting in optimum communications response.
The following is an example of this technique. Assume that you want to use the following data in
PanelMate:
512 Outputs
512 Inputs
Points Used
PLC-3 Data
Table Addresses
00000/00-00037/17
10000/00-10037/17
FO0:0-FO0:31
FI0:0-FI0:31
100 Binary
first 100 words of
FB2:0-FB2:99
Values
Binary File 2
Assume that the Network ID# of PanelMate is octal 30. Thus, the "window" we will be using will be
Input Image File 30 (decimal). You should ensure that this file has already been created (see PLC-3
Programming Manual Publication 1775-801).
The following three rungs would be included in the PLC-3 ladder diagram to map the three desired
memory areas into file 1030.
MVF
(EN)
Files from A to R
A: F000:0000 R. F1030:0040
Counter:
00001
POS/LEN:
0/32
Mode:
ALUSCAN
12
(DN)
15
(ER)
13
MVF
Files from A to R
________________________________(EN)
A:
1Ì000:00
(DN)
15
Counter:
POS/LEN:
C0002*
0/32
Mode:
ALUSCAN
(ER)
13
MVF
Files from A to R
A:
F6002:0000
F1030:0140
Counter:
00003*
POS/LEN:
0/100
Mode:
ALUSCAN
(EN)
12
(DN)
15
(ER)
13
* You can pick any three unused counters.
PanelMate Series
14-7
14.3.5.2 Controlling Data

If data and I/O points are to be controlled by the operator via pushbutton or numeric entries, extra rungs can be
added to move data from File 1030 into appropriate locations. The words used in 1030 for data sent by the
operator must be outside the block areas written over by the above MVF rungs. In the above example, we have
left words 0000 through 0037 available for writes.
Good engineering practice dictates that controlled statuses in the chosen Input Image File will not be written back
into FIO.
14.3.5.3 Configuration Entries

With this technique, entries made for PLC-3 addresses in the Template Editors are then identical to those made
for PLC-2 processors. Refer to chapters 5, 6, 7 and 8 of this manual for specifics on each template type.
Continuing with the previous example, the following PLC-2 type addresses would then be used to reference the
PLC-3 data.
PLC-3 Addresses
PLC-2 Address
Used in PanelMate
F0000000 to 0003117
[40 00] to [77 17]
FI000000 to 1003717
[100 00] to [137
FBO02:0000 to FBO02:0099
[140] to [303]
17]
* Assumes default PLC
14.3.6 PLC-5 Configurations Using Serial Communications

PanelMate may communicate with the Allen-Bradley PLC-5 using either of two available command sets: the PLC5 Command Set or the Basic Command Set.
This section presents the approach used with the PLC-5 Command Set which permits access to all PLC-5 file
types, and which is the approach recommended by Eaton IDT.
Section 14.3.6.2 presents an alternate approach, using the Basic Command Set. This approach is somewhat
limiting, but is provided to support existing PanelMate applications.
14.3.6.1 PLC-5 Command Set

The diagram which follows illustrates that the 1785-KA module provides an interface between the Data Highway
Plus and the Data Highway. Note again that the 1785-KA station address must be different from the other device
addresses. Addresses and ID numbers shown in the diagram are samples only.
Communications
Data Highway Plus
A-B Data (Peer Communications
Highway Link)
Cable
-o
1
J0
1
i
PanelMate
1
Network ID
= 11 in octal
0
1770-KF2A
1785-KA
PLC5/15
PLC ID
= 15 in octal
Data Highway
station address
= 11 in octal
1
Data Highway
station address
= 30 in octal *
Data Highway
Plus
Station #
= 15 in octal
*This address is not

used during PanelMate
Configuration
14-8
PanelMate Series
The 1770-KF2B module can provide access for PanelMate to use the Data Highway Plus with the PLC5, as shown in the diagram which follows:
RS232C
Communications
Cable
PanelMate
Data Highway Plus

(Peer Communications
Link)
1770-KF2B
PLC 5/15
Network ID
11 in octal
PLC ID
= 15 in octal
Address
= 11 in octal
Data Highway Plus

Station #
= 15 in octal

PanelMate can communicate with Allen-Bradley PLC-5's via the Data Highway or direct connection
using PLC-5 protocols. The PLC-5 can recognize these protocols via Data Highway Plus through
interpretation by the 1770-KF2 Series B, the 1785-KE, or the 1785-KA modules and allow PanelMate to
access multiple files in the PLC-5.
Accessing Data
PanelMate can access the following file types through the PLC-5 Command Set:
Bit
Integer
Control
Timer
BCD
Counter
Input
Output
Status
See section 14.8.8 Allen-Bradley PLC-5 Word and Bit References for more information.
Controlling Data
The operator controls the data I/O points in the PanelMate via pushbuttons or numeric entries.
PanelMate will not allow inputs to be written. See section 14.8.8, Allen-Bradley PLC-5 Word and Bit
References, for more information.
Configuration Entries
When configuring PanelMate for a PLC-5, select the PLC driver with the appropriate model from the
onscreen choices presented in the PLC Name and Port Parameters Editor. For example, if a PLC-5/15
is used then the configuration should read "PLC 5/15".
PanelMate Series
14-9
14.3.6.2 Using Basic Command Set with the PLC-5

PLC-5 Configurations
PanelMate can also communicate with the Allen-Bradley PLC-5 via the Data Highway or direct
connection using PLC-2 protocols. The PLC-5 can recognize these protocols via Data Highway Plus
through interpretation by the 1770-KF2 Series B or the 1785-KA modules, and allow PanelMate to
access a single file as if that memory were resident in a PLC-2 series processor.
In this manner, PanelMate communicates through a single file in the PLC-5 Data Table, where the file
number (9-999) corresponds to the station address of PanelMate. This address is set as the Network ID# in the
Port Parameter Table in the PLC Name and Port Editor, which is accessed from the Get System
Utilities choice on the Main Menu.
The file must be created as an integer (N) type and must correspond to the station address selected
through DIP switch settings on the KF2 Series B module. The same value must be entered as
PanelMate's Network ID# in the Port Parameter Table in the PLC Name and Port Editor. Note,
however, that the PanelMate Network ID# and the station number on the KF2 Series B modules are
both set as octal, while the file number in the PLC-5 is decimal. For example, for a KF2 Series B module
station address of 11 (octal); integer file N 9 (decimal) would be chosen and PanelMate Network ID#
11 (octal) would be entered. The PLC Unit Number (also on the PanelMate PLC Names and Port
Parameters Page) must correspond to the Data Highway Plus station number set with DIP switches on
the PLC-5.
Accessing Data
You should map any I/O and numeric data which is to be used by PanelMate from other areas of the
data table into the assigned integer file. This creates a compact data sub-table that PanelMate can access
with a minimum number of reads, resulting in optimum communications response. Note that the PLC-5
uses decimal addressing rather than octal.
Controlling Data
If data and I/O points are to be controlled by the operator via pushbutton or numeric entries, extra rungs
can be added to move data from the integer file into appropriate locations.
Good engineering practice dictates that controlled statuses in the chosen integer file will not be written back
into the integer file.
Configuration Entries
The PLC-5 differs from the PLC-2 in that its addressing is decimal for words and bits. In order to use
decimal addressing when configuring PanelMate for a PLC-5, select "PLC-2 d" at the model field in the
PLC Name and Port Editor. All word and bit addresses refer to data within the assigned integer file.
14-10
PanelMate Series
14.4 Allen-Bradley Modules for Serial Communication
14.4 Allen-Bradley Modules for Serial Communication

A description of Allen-Bradley modules is given below. Consult the Allen-Bradley Data Highway
Module Publications 1771-801, 807, 811 or 822 for more details.
PLC Family
PLC-2
All
All
All
PLC-3
PLC-5
PLC-5
Module
1771-KG
1771-KE
1771-KF
1770-KF2A
1775-KA
1770-KF2B
1785-KE
Mounting
Rack
Rack
Panel
Desktop
Chassis
Desktop
Rack
Cable Connector
DB-15P
DA-15P
DA-15P
DB-25S
DB-25S
DB-25S
DA-15P
Connection
Direct
Data
Hwy
Data
Hwy
Data
Hwy
Direct/
Data Hwy
PCL/
Data Hwy
PCL
Port Label
RS232C
RS232C
RS232C
Computer
Modem/
Data Hwy
Computer
Computer
(RS232)
Table 14-1 Modules & Connectors for Allen-Bradley PLCs
Allen-Bradley modules for PLC to Data Highway connections:

PLC Family
PLC
PLC-2
Module #
1774-KA
1771-KA
1771-KA2
PLC-3
PLC-5
1775-KA
1785-KA
Table 14-2 Modules for Data Highway Connection
Allen-Bradley modules for PLC to Data Highway Plus connections:

PLC Family
Module #
PLC
PLC-2
1785-KA3
PLC-3
1775-S5
PLC-5
Built-in
Table 14-3 Modules for Data Highway Plus Connection
14.5 Serial Cabling
14.5 Serial Cabling

The communication between PanelMate's serial ports and most Allen-Bradley modules is RS232C, and so
has a recommended maximum length of 50 cable feet. You should construct a communication cable of the
desired length for each connection to be made. Note that the cable configuration is identical on the
PanelMate side for the various modules, with different connectors and pin outs on the Allen-Bradley
end. Refer to the tables 14-1 and 14-2 for the connector required for each module. All PanelMate ports
are female 25-pin (DB-25S), and so the connectors on the cables must be male 25-pin (DB-25P).
Communications Cable
for Allen-Bradley PLCs
1785-KE,
1771-KC,KD
KE,KF,KG
PanelMate
Serial Ports
PanelMate
Serial Ports
1770-KF2A,KF2B
1775-KA
(7
R
2
3
~~-
Hood - Shield
2
3
4
5
4
5
6
8
11
6
8
20
13
Hood
Hood
7
25
Shield
Hood
Figure 14-9 Cabling Diagrams
14.6 Serial Communications Parameters

Each Allen-Bradley module has parameters which must be set in order to establish communications with
PanelMate. This is accomplished either through DIP switch settings on the individual module or
programming selections using an Allen-Bradley programming terminal.
Standard communications parameters for communicating with Allen-Bradley PLCs are:
8 data bits
1 stop bit
no parity
9600 baud rate
The following is a summary of the information available at the time of this manual's printing, describing the
necessary settings for each of the modules. Be sure to check with Allen-Bradley for any possible updates
or changes if you encounter any difficulty in communicating to PanelMate.
14-12
PanelMate Series
14.7 Switch Settings

14.7.1 Modules for PLC Data Highway Connection
14.7.1.1 1771-KA, 1771-KA2
Cover
Plate
Switch
Location
O1
N
0
F
F
0
N
0
F
F
0
N
23
O123
N
0
F
0
F
F
Write Options
Station Number SW-
SW-1
2, SW-3, SW-4
O
N
0
F
F
I
Data Highway
Baud Rate SW5
Figure 14-10 1771-KA and 1771-KA2 Module SW1
Set switches 2 and 6 ON, and others OFF. For
1771-KA2:
Set switches 2, 5 and 6 ON, and 1, 3 and 4 OFF.
Note
PanelMate Series
Switch 6 on SW-1 is OFF when a 1771-KA module is connected to a PLC-2 (1772-LR).

Switch 6 on SW-1 is OFF when a 1771-KA2 module is connected to a PLC-2 (1772-LR), a
1771-KG series B or another 1771-KA2 module.
SW-2,3,4
These switches should be set as the octal equivalent of the decimal PLC ID#
you have established for this unit in the PLC Name and Port Editor.
SW-5
Set switches 1 and 2 ON (57.6K Baud).
14-13
14.7.1.2 1775-KA
The 1775-KA settings are programmed using the Allen-Bradley programming terminal (T50).
Station
Address
Module
Status
A number between 10 and 377 (octal) that is the octal equivalent of the
decimal PLC ID# you have established for the PLC in PanelMate's PLC Name
and Port Editor.
Enabled
Be sure to match the baud rate, parity, data bits and stop bits with the entries made in the PLC Name
and Port Editor.
14.7.1.3 1785-KA
The 1785-KA module acts as an interface between Data Highway Plus and Data Highway. The station number,
set by DIP switches on the module, is its Data Highway address, which must be different from
PanelMates's Data Highway address and the PLC-5's Data Highway Plus station number.
ON
ON
1 2_______________ 2 r
ON
ON
_____ 1 2 __________ 1 2
SW-1 through SW-4
ON
ON
SW-5
77
SW-6
23
w123
SW-1
These are spare switches which should be set OFF as shown. through
SW-4
SW-5,6 These switches represent the two-digit Data Highway address. The setting illustrated in
Figure 14-11 is for an address of 30 octal. (This is not the PLC ID#.)
220-14
PanelMate Series
14.7.2 Modules for PanelMate to Data Highway Communication

14.7.2.1 1771-KE, 1771-KF
Switch
Location
Cover
Plate
SW-1
O1
N-
2345
0
O
F
F
O
FF
________________
I
Communication
SW-3
SW-2
0123
F
F
606
N '-'
SW-4
SW-5
O123
O12
N - '=
0
FFv
I_________ i
______________ I
SW-6
O1234
O
0
FF
___
Baud Rate
Highway
Computer Link
Baud Rate
Station Number
Figure 14-12 1771-KE and 1771-KF Module

Switch settings for Revision H of 1771-KE, 1771-KF SW-1
Switches 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 OFF.
SW-2,3,4
These switches should be set as the Network ID# you have established in
PanelMate's PLC Name and Port Editor.
SW-5
Switches 1 and 2 ON (57.6K Baud)
SW-6 To use the default communications settings: switches 2, 3 and 4 ON, switch 1 OFF. This
will produce the following settings: 9600 baud, module diagnostics are on. If
switch 4 is OFF, the module will not execute diagnostics.
To use other settings, be sure that the PanelMate and PLC settings match.
For Revision levels prior to H, same as above except:
PanelMate Series
SW-1
Switches 1, 2, 3 and 4 OFF. Switch 5 ON.
SW-6
Switches 2 and 3 ON. Switches 1 and 4 OFF.
14-15
14.7 Switch Settin s
14.7.2.2 1771-KC, 1771-KD

SW-1
Communication options switches. Switch 2 and 5 must be OFF; others are not
used.
Station number switches. These should be set for the octal equivalent of the
decimal Network ID#.
SW-2,3,4
SW-5
SW-6
Data Highway baud rate switches 1 and 2 must be ON (57.6K Baud).

Computer link baud rate switches:
1 OFF
2 ON 3
ON
ON
(9600 Baud)
14.7.2.3 1770-KF2 Series A, 1770-KF2 Series B

The 1770-KF2 Series A and Series B are desktop modules which can act as interfaces for PanelMate to the
Data Highway. The Series B performs the same function as the Series A, and can alternately act as a direct
interface to the PLC-5 through Data Highway Plus.
The layout of the DIP switches for setting communications parameters is identical for the two modules, except
that SW-7 is not used on the Series A, but is functional on the Series B.
ON
ON
ON
01
12343
SW-8
SW-1
12,
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
as
oa ool oan as
12
123
i
SW-2,3,4
123
SW-5
12
SW-6
SW-7
Figure 14-13 1770-KF2A, 1770-KF2B Module DIP Switches

Switch Settings
SW-8 Note that this switch is to the left of the other switches in the previous diagram. For
RS232C communication, set switch 1 OFF and switch 2 ON (as shown in the
diagram). For RS422 communication, set switch 1 ON and switch 2 OFF.
SW-1
Switches 1, 4 and 5 OFF. Switches 2 and 3 ON.
SW-2, 3, 4 These switches represent the three-digit octal station number. They should be set as the
Network ID# you have established in the PLC Name and Port Editor. The
setting illustrated in the previous diagram is for an address of 11 octal (9
decimal).
SW-5
SW-6
SW-7
14-16
Set both switches to ON, for a Data Highway rate of 57.6K baud.
For a communication rate of 9600 baud, set switch 1 OFF and switches 2
and 3 ON (as shown in Figure 14-13). Set switch 4 ON.
For Data Highway operation, set both switches 1 and 2 OFF.
PanelMate Series
14.7.3 Modules for Direct Connection

14.7.3.1 1771-KG
Switches are located behind a cover plate at the top of the module.
Communication Rate Switches (SW-1)

Option Switches (SW-2)
Station Number Switches
(SW-3 SW-4, SW-5)
ON
p12345
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Figure 14-14 1771-KG Module

SW-1
SW-2
SW-3,4,5
14.7.3.2 1775-KA
Set switch 1 OFF and switches 2 and 3 ON.

Set switches 1, 2 and 5 OFF, and switch 3 ON. Switch 4 should be set ON if
KG is the first module, OFF if KG is the second module regardless of the
number of KG modules.
These switches determine the octal PLC ID number and are set as on the
1771-KA.
are programmed using the Allen-Bradley Industrialized Programming Terminal
The 1775-KA settings

(T50),
Data Highway
Baud Rate
57.6K Baud
Station Address
Enabled
Set to match parameters configured in the PLC Name and Port Editor. Default:
9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity.
Typically 0.5 seconds
Port Status
Baud and Parity
A number between 10 and 377 (octal) that coincides with the octal equivalent of
the decimal PLC ID# you have established for the PanelMate.
(modem port)
Module Timeout
Unpolled Mode
PanelMate Series
14-17
Accepts Writes
Enabled - Writes from PanelMate are accepted even if PLC keylock is in

"Memory Protection ON" position.
Disabled - Writes from PanelMate are only accepted when PLC keylock is in
"Memory Protect Orb'' position.
Enabled
Send Embedded
Responses
14.7.4 Modules for PanelMate to Data Highway Plus Connection

14.7.4.1 1770-KF2 Series B
The 1770-KF2 Series B module can act as a direct interface to the PLC-5 through Data Highway Plus.
The layout of the DIP switches for setting communications parameters is shown below.
ON
1 2
ON
ON
1 2
I
SW 8
SW 1
a
s
ON
ON
1 2
3,
I SW-2,3,4
a
a
ON
0
0
ON
SW 5
O
N
SW 6
ON
SW 7
Figure 14-15 1770-KF2B Module DIP Switches

Switch Settings
SW-8
SW-1
Note that this switch is to the left of the other switches in the previous
diagram. For RS232C communication, set switch 1 OFF and switch 2 ON
(as shown in the diagram). For RS422 communication, set switch 1 ON and
switch 2 OFF.
Switches 1, 4 and 5 OFF. Switches 2 and 3 ON. These switches control the
special features of the KF2 module's asynchronous
SW-2,3,4
SW-5
SW-6
SW-7
port.
These switches represent the three-digit octal station number. They should
be set the same as the Network ID# you have established for the PanelMate.
The setting illustrated in the previous diagram is for an address
of 11 octal
(9 decimal).
Set both switches to ON, for a Data Highway rate of 57.6K
baud.
For a communication rate of 9600 baud, set switch 1 OFF and switches 2
and 3 ON (as shown in Figure 14-15). Set switch 4 OFF.
For Data Highway Plus operation (not functional with KF2A), set switch
1 ON and switch 2 OFF.
14.7.4.2 1785-KE Series A
14-18
SW-1
Switches 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 OFF.
SW-2
SW-3,4
Both switches OFF.

These switches represent the two-digit octal station number. (PanelMate's
Network ID#)
SW-5
SW-6
Set both switches ON for a Data Highway Plus rate of 57.6K baud.
For a communication rate of 9600 baud, set switch 1 and 4 OFF and set
switches 2 and 3 ON.
PanelMate Series
14.8 Word and Bit References
14.7.4.3 1785-KE Series B

SW-1
Switches 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 OFF.
SW-2 These switches represent the three-digit octal station number. Switches 1 and 2 represent
octal digit 0 and are not used. Both switch 1 and 2 should be set to ON.
Switches 3, 4 and 5 represent the first octal digit, the most significant bit of
the Data Highway Plus node address. Switches 6, 7 and 8 represent the second
octal digit, the least significant bit of the Data Highway Plus node address.
(PanelMate's Network ID#)
SW-3
For a communication rate of 9600 baud with a Data Highway Plus rate of
57.6K baud, set switches 1, 2, 4 and 5 ON and switch 3 OFF.
SW-4
Both switches OFF.

14.8.1 Word References
A single format for referencing PLC words is used throughout the PanelMate template editors. Whenever
you need to refer to a specific PLC word in any expression, the following format is required.
[plcnam,word#format]
Note
plcnam, and #format are optional fields
where:
plcnam, The 6-character (or less) name of the designated PLC, as defined in the PLC Name
and Port Parameter Table, followed by a comma. Consult chapter 9, Defining
System Parameters, for more information regarding this name. If this name is
omitted, the default PLC name is assumed. (The default PLC is defined in the
PLC Name and Port Editor.) This field is optional.
word The actual PLC reference number of the word to be read or written, using the addressing
nomenclature of the PLC defined by the plcnam. Consult the following
sections for more information about word reference numbers as they are used
for specific Allen-Bradley PLCs.
#format The 3- or 4-character code that specifies the format to be assumed for the data being
read or written, preceded by a number sign (#). If this format is omitted,
default formats will be used. See the section on specific PLC word references
for default formats.
The formats that PanelMate recognizes are:
S16
Signed, 16-bit integer where the number can range from -32768 to 32767; the
high order bit is the sign.
U16
Unsigned, 16-bit integer where the number can range from 0 to 65535. S32*
Signed, 32-bit integer where the number can range from -2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647; the high order bit is the sign.
U32*
Unsigned, 32-bit integer where the number can range from 0 to 4,294,967,295.
PanelMate Series
14-19
BCD3
3-digit binary-coded decimal number where the number can range from 0 to
999.
BCD4
9999.
BCD6*
6-digit binary-coded decimal number stored in two contiguous registers, three digits
per register, where the number can range from 0 to 999,999.
BCD8*
8-digit binary-coded decimal number stored in two contiguous registers where
the number can range from 0 to 99,999,999.
BIN3
3-digit decimal number where the number can range from 0 to 999.
BIN4
BIN8*
8-digit decimal number stored as two 4-digit numbers in two contiguous
registers where the number can range from 0 to 99,999,999.
*When specifying these data formats, the address specified for word defines the
first of the two registers in the pair (i.e., the one with the lower reference). This
register is assumed to contain the most significant portion of the number.
Note that when downloading values to the PLC, PanelMate will delete any high order digits beyond the
range allowed.
Also note that BCD and BIN formats do not inherently support negative values. Expressions can be
used to scale values in PanelMate so that the operator enters and reads negative numbers, but a
positive integer will be read from or written to the PLC.
14.8.2 PLC Bit References

A single format for referencing PLC bits is used throughout the PanelMate template editors. Whenever you
need to refer to a specific PLC bit in any expression or control button definition, the following format is
required:
[plcnam, bit]
Note
plcnam, is an optional field.
where:
bit The actual PLC reference number of the bit to be read or written, using the addressing
sections for more information about bit reference numbers as they are used for
specific Allen-Bradley PLCs.
14-20
PanelMate Series
14.9 PLC Specific Word and Bit References

14.9.1 Allen-Bradley PLC-2 Word and Bit References
Allen-Bradley PLC-2 uses octal word addresses. You should select "PLC-2 o" at the model field in the
PLC Name and Port Editor to specify octal addressing. The PanelMate default format is BCD3.
The following is the format for a word reference:
[WW]
ww
PLC reference number of the word.
The following is the format for a bit reference: [ww bb]

ww
PLC reference number of the word.
bb
PLC reference number of the bit.
Note that there must be a space between the word and bit.
PanelMate can read all words between 10 and 77 (except word 27) and can read all words from 110 to
the upper limit of your specific PLC-2.
PanelMate can read all bits in the above words.
PanelMate can reference more than one PLC word with a single read. The Allen-Bradley PLC-2 can
read a maximum of sixty words per read. The maximum number of unused PLC words per read is
fifteen. Once fifteen unused PLC words are encountered, PanelMate will generate another read.
PanelMate can write to all words, and bits in all words, between 10 and 77 (except word 27) and can
write to all words, and bits in all words, from 120 to the upper limit of your specific PLC-2 UNLESS
a word is configured as an input. PanelMate can write to all bits in the above words.

Addressing for words and bits used in PanelMate expressions is octal for the PLC-2 and PLC-3
families. You should select "PLC-2 o" at the model field in the PLC Name and Port Editor to specify
octal addressing. The PanelMate default format is BCD3.
By adhering to the following procedure, you can use the PLC-2 driver for communications with a PLC3:
1. Use an Input Image File, other than file 0, for all words and bits that will be accessed by
PanelMate.
2. PanelMate will read and write to the Input Image File that corresponds to the Network ID#
assigned to the serial port communicating with the PLC-3. For example, assume that Serial
Port 2 will be used for communications to a PLC-3. By assigning Network ID# 30 to Serial
Port 2 of PanelMate, PanelMate will access Input Image File 30 in the PLC-3.
3. Use PLC logic to move the necessary data to the assigned Input Image File.
4. Be sure that data formats are consistent. You can use format assignments in PanelMate expression references or data moves in the PLC to ensure that the data formats are identical in
both PanelMate and the PLC.
PanelMate can reference more than one PLC word with a single read. The Allen-Bradley PLC-3 can
read a maximum of sixty words per read. The maximum number of unused PLC words per read is
fifteen. Once fifteen unused PLC words are encountered, PanelMate will generate another read.
PanelMate Series
14-21
14.9 PLC S ecific Word and Bit References

The Allen-Bradley PLC-5 uses decimal word addresses. The PanelMate default format is S16. The
following word and bit addressing descriptions apply to the PLC-5 Command Set. If you are using the
Basic Command Set (PLC-2 protocol) for communication with a PLC-5, refer to the previous section
on addressing for the PLC-2.
14.9.3.1 General Format

[xf:e.s/b]
Note
/b is an optional field
where
x = File Type
B - Bit (signed 16) N Integer (signed 16) R Control (signed 16) T Timer (signed 16) D - BCD
(BCD 4) C - Counter (signed
16)
Note
In Counter, Timer, and Control files word 0 is read only, and words 1 and 2 are read/write. f =
File Number
0 - 2 Reserved
3 - Bit
4 - Timer
5 - Counter 6 Control 7 Integer
8 - (invalid) Floating Point 9-999 Additional file storage
Note
The above list of file types are default for Allen-Bradley. They can be changed by the user. e =
Element Number
0 - 999 - (in decimal)
s = Subelement Mnemonic (used with Counter (C), Timer (T), and Control (R) files).
Timer (T):
PRE - Preset Value (word 1)
ACC - Accumulated Value (word 2)
Counter (C):
PRE - Preset Value (word 1)
ACC - Accumulated Value (word 2)
Control (R):
LEN - Length (word 1)
POS - Position (word 2)
b = Bit Number (not used in word references)
0-15999 - Decimal for Bit (B) type files when element number is not specified
(optional)
0-15 - Decimal for all other file types, including Bit (B) type files which
specify the element number
14-22
PanelMate Series
Certain file types allow mnemonics to be used instead of the actual bit number. The mnemonic
should be placed after the "." and the "1" is not used in this case. The following is a list of mnemonics that
can be used.
Bit Timer (T) 15 EN enable 14 IT timing 13 DN
done 0-12
INVALID
Bit
Counter (C)
15
CU up enable
14
CD down enable
13
DN done
12
OV overflow
11
UN underflow
0-10
INVALID
Bit
Control (R)
15
EN enable
14
EU unload enable
13
DN done
12
EM empty
11
ER error
10
UL unload
IN inhibit
FD found
0-7
INVALID
14.9.3.2 I/O Format

When using PanelMate to access I/O file types in the Allen-Bradley PLC-5 the following format must be
used.
[O:rg/b] or [I:rg/b]
where
I = Input
0 = Output
r = Asigned rack number
0-3 for PLC-5/12 and PLC-5/15 07 for PLC-5/25
g = I/O group number
0-7 for all PLC-5 models b
= Terminal (bit) number
Note
PanelMate Series
0-17 for all PLC-5 models

To address an I/O word, do not include the /b field
14-23
14.9.3.3 Status Format

[S:e/b]
Note
The /b is an optional field
where
S = Status
e = Element number (0-31) b
= Bit number (0-15)
Note
To address a status word, do not include the /b field.
Examples
The following are examples of valid PLC references which may be assigned in the PanelMate expression fields.
Word References
Reference
[B321:100]
Description
[N22:15] [d10:891]
Element 100 of Bit file 321
[1:02] [0:27] [S:22]
Element 15 of Integer file 22
[C222:444]
Element 891 of BCD file 10
[C15:29.ACC]
Group 2 in rack 0 of reserved Input file 0
[c354:2.PRE]
Group 7 in rack 2 of reserved Ouput file 1
[T31:999]
Element 22 in reserved Status file 2
[t9:52.aCC]
Status value in element 444 of Counter file 222
[T354:2.pre]
Accumulated value in element 29 of Counter file 15
[r119:272]
Preset value in element 2 of Counter file 354 Status
[R53:52.len]
value in element 999 of Timer file 31 Accumulated
[R111:721.PoS]
value in element 52 of Counter file 9 Preset value in
[b041:581]
element 2 of Counter file 354 Status value in element
[n421:008]
272 of Control file 119 Length value in element 52 of
[N009:077#s16]
Control file 53 Position value in element 721 of Control
[D 10:820#U32]
file 111 Element 581 of Bit file 41 Element 8 of Integer

file 421 Element 77 of Integer file 9 (signed 16-bit)
Element 820 of BCD file 10 (unsigned 32-bit)
14-24
PanelMate Series
Bit References
PanelMate Series
Reference
Meaning
[B34/17]
Bit 17 of Bit file 34 (bit 4 of element 6)
[b4:091/10]
Bit 10 of element 91 of Bit file 4
[N007:25/06]
Bit 6 of element 25 of Integer file 7
[D22:491/15]
Bit 15 of element 491 of BCD file 22
[i:37/05]
Bit 5 in group 7 of rack 3 of Input file 0
[0:24/15]
Bit 15 in group 4 of rack 2 in Output file 1
[s:06/8]
Bit 8 in element 6 of Status file 2
[T9:71.eN]
Enable bit (15) in status word of element 71 of Timer file

9
[t04:1/13]
Done bit (13) in status word of element 1 of Timer file 4
[T77:32.acc/01]
Bit 1 of accumulated value of element 32 in Timer file 77
[0005:28.UN]
Underflow bit (11) in status word of element 28 of

Counter file 5
[c163:08/14]
Down Enable bit (14) in status word of element 8 of

Counter file 163
[C88:02.PRE/9]
Bit 9 of preset value of element 2 in Counter file 88
[R6:954.fd]
Found bit (8) in status word of element 954 in Control

file 6
[r46:83/09]
Inhibit bit (9) in status word of element 83 in Control file

46
[r518:7.LeN/14]
Bit 14 of length value of element 7 in Control file 518
14-25
Chapter 15. Acceleratl/On
15.1 Introduction
The Acceleratl/On interface is a separate product which is compatible with model 2900 PanelMate series
units. An Acceleratl/On interface may be installed in a model 2900 PanelMate unit to provide
communication to Allen-Bradley PLCs through Data Highway, Data Highway Plus, or the 1771 remote I/O
network.
With Acceleratl/On, a PanelMate unit can connect directly to Data Highway, Data Highway Plus, or the remote
I/O network without requiring any communication modules.
The direct connection just noted eliminates the need for serial RS232 connections, permitting data
to transfer at 57.6K baud for Data Highway or Data Highway Plus communications or 115.2K baud for
Remote I/O communications.
When it is connected to the remote I/O network, a unique monitor mode permits PanelMate with
Acceleratl/On to read discrete inputs or outputs directly off the I/O link without requiring the PLC
to transmit the data to PanelMate.
While PanelMate is communicating to one or more Allen-Bradley PLCs through Acceleratl/On, it
can still simultaneously communicate to other PLCs using its two serial ports.
When Acceleratl/On is used as an interface to Data Highway or Data Highway Plus, PanelMate
functions as a master - polling one or more PLCs on the network to obtain or transmit data.
When Acceleratl/On is used as an interface to the remote I/O network, PanelMate simulates one or
more remote racks. As with any remote network, the PLC will be the master while PanelMate will be a
slave.

The Acceleratl/On interface may be used to communicate to a Data Highway, Data Highway Plus, or
Remote I/O network. The interface may be configured for only one of these communication types at any
one time. PanelMate's serial ports may be used, in conjunction with the Acceleratl/On port, for
communication to PLCs (or a printer) at the same time.
Examples of possible configurations are described in the following sections.
PanelMate Series
15-1
15.2.1 Direct Data Highway Connections
Data Highway 1771-CO,CN,CR
0
0
0
0
0
4
1770-CD
1771-KA2
PanelMate with Acceleratl/On
PLC 2/15
Data Highway
0
0
0
0
0
1775-KA PLC-3
1770-CD
Figure 15-1 Direct Data Highway Connections
15.2.2 Multiple Data Highway Connections

Data Highway
1770-CO,CN,CR
m ME
1770-CD
15-2
PanelMate Series
15.2.3 Serial and Direct Data Highway Connections

Data Highway 1770-CO,CN,CR
f!
=o
1770-CD
Figure 15-3 Serial and Direct Data Highway Connections
15.2.4 Direct Data Highway Plus Connections
0 0
0 0
0
1770-CD
PLC-5
1770-CD
0 0
0 0
0
II
S5
PLC-3
Figure 15-4 Direct Data Highway Plus Connections
PanelMate Series
15-3
15.2.4.1 Multiple Data Highway Plus Connections

Data Highway Plus
0 00
0
-o
PLC-5

PLC-5
00
PaneIMate with Acceleratl/On
S5 PLC-3
1770-CD
Figure 15-5 Multiple Data Highway Plus Connections
15.2.5 Serial and Direct Data Highway Plus Connections

Data Highway Plus
RS232
0
0 0
0 0
0
PLC-5
0
PLC-2
1771-KG
PaneIMate with Acceleration
a
1770-CD
0
PLC-5
Figure 15-6 Serial and Direct Data Highway Plus Connections
15-4
PanelMate Series
15.2.6 Direct Data Highway and Data Highway Plus Connections

PanelMate on a Data Highway can access all nodes on the Data Highway and the Data Highway Plus.
Note that the PanelMate on the Data Highway Plus network cannot access nodes on the Data Highway,
only nodes on the Data Highway Plus are accessible.
PLC-3
Computer
PaneiMate with Acceleratl/On
PLC-2
0 0
0 0
0
0
1775-KA
0
1771-KE/KP
0
1771-KA2
Data Highway
0
Data Highway Plus
1785-KA
0 0
0 0
0
PLC-5
PLC-5
1785-KE

Computer
Figure 15-7 Direct Data Highway and a Data Highway Plus Connections
PanelMate Series
15-5
15.2.7 Direct Remote I/O Connections

Remote I / 0
PLC
Remote I/O Rack
0
0
0
0
0
PaneIMate with Acceleratl/On
a
1770-CD
Remote I/O Rack
Figure 15-8 Direct Remote I/O Connections
15.2.8 Serial and Direct Remote I/O Connections
Remote I/O
0
1771 CO,CN,CR
00
00
0
PLC
MM
-----Remote I/O Rack
0
PLC-2
Serial
PanelMate
Cable with
1770-CD
Figure 15-9 Serial and Direct Remote I/O Connections
15-6
PanelMate Series
15.3 Cabling
15.3 Cabling
The same connection guidelines recommended for any Data Highway, Data Highway Plus, or Remote I/O
device should be used for connecting PanelMate to any of these networks. Standard 1770-CD twinaxial
cable or equivalent should be used. Proper network termination procedures should be observed.
ERROR
TRANSMIT
1
SH
2
SH 2
Figure 15-10 Network Connection on Acceleratl/On Interface
Network connections for the AcceleratI/On interface are on the Main Video Unit's right side (looking at the
front).
Accelera
tl/On
PanelMate
Interface
Data Highway
Port
1
SH
8
7
2
B
PanelMate
AcceleratI/On Interface
Data Highway
Plus Port
1
SH
Blue
Shield
1
SH
Clear
PanelMate
AcceleratI/On Interface
PLC Remote I/O

Connector
1
SH
Blue
Shield
1
SH
Clear
PanelMate Series
15-7
15.4 Communication Parameters
Two sets of electrically-common network connections are provided: 1, SH, 2. A six-position female connector
is shipped with each interface. Cabling connections are made to this female connector. The connector is
then attached to the Main Video Unit.
A 150-ohm resistor should be attached to the female connector for proper termination when required. Consult
Allen-Bradley documentation for information regarding correct termination of Data Highway, Data Highway
Plus, or Remote I/O networks.
In general, the following rules apply: If the Acceleratl/On interface is the end node on a network, the supplied
150-ohm resistor is needed. If the interface is not the end node on the network, the resistor is not needed.
15.4 Communication Parameters

PanelMate's Acceleratl/On interface can be used with either of two network communication rates, 57.6K baud or
115.2K baud. The desired rate is selected in the PLC and Port Parameters utility.
See the proper Allen-Bradley documentation for information on setting the communication rate for other
network devices.
15.5 Diagnostic Indicators

The Acceleratl/On interface has two diagnostic indicator lights near the network connector.
The green indicator is labeled TRANSMIT. It will remain off when PanelMate is in Configuration Mode.
When PanelMate goes online, the light will flash rapidly after network communication has been established.
The red indicator is labeled ERROR. It will remain on when PanelMate is in the Configuration Mode. When
PanelMate goes online, the light will go off to indicate proper initialization of the interface. A red light
which stays on during Run Mode indicates a problem with the Acceleratl/On hardware. If you have installed
the interface, check installation of the circuit board in the Electronics Module. If the installation appears correct or if
the interface was installed by Eaton IDT, call Customer Service at (614) 882-3282.

A single format for referencing PLC words is used throughout the PanelMate template editors. Whenever you
need to refer to a specific PLC word in any expression, the following format is required.
[ plcnam,word# format]
Note
plcnam, and #fonnat are optional fields
where
plcnam, The 6-character (or less) name of the designated PLC, as defined in the PLC and Port
Parameters Table, followed by a comma. Consult chapter 9, Defining System
Parameters, for more information regarding this name. If this name is omitted, the
default PLC name is assumed. (The default PLC is defined in the PLC and Port
Parameters Table.) This field is optional.
nomenclature of the PLC defined by the plcnam. Consult the following sections for
more information about word reference numbers as they are used for specific AllenBradley PLCs.
15-8
PanelMate Series
read or written, preceded by a number sign (#). If this format is omitted, default
formats will be used.
S16
U16
Unsigned, 16-bit integer where the number can range from 0 to 65535.
S32*
U32*
BCD3
3-digit binary-coded decimal number where the number can range from 0 to 999.
BCD4
9999.
BCD6*
6-digit binary-coded decimal number stored in two contiguous registers, three
digits per register, where the number can range from 0 to 999,999.
BCD8*
8-digit binary-coded decimal number stored in two contiguous registers where the
number can range from 0 to 99,999,999.
BIN3
BIN4
BINS*
8-digit decimal number stored as two 4-digit numbers in two contiguous registers
where the number can range from 0 to 99,999,999.
*When specifying these data formats, the address specified for word defines the first
of the two registers in the pair (i.e., the one with the lower reference). This register is
assumed to contain the most significant portion of the number.
Note that when downloading values to the PLC, PanelMate will delete any high order digits beyond the range
allowed.
Also note that BCD and BIN formats do not inherently support negative values. Expressions can be used to scale
values in PanelMate so that the operator enters and reads negative numbers, but a positive integer will be read
from or written to the PLC.
PanelMate Series
15-9
15 7 PLC S
ifi W d
d Bi

A single format for referencing PLC bits is used throughout the PanelMate template
editors. Whenever you need to refer to a specific PLC bit in any expression or control
button definition, the following format is required:
plcnam, The 6-character (or less) name of the designated PLC, as defined in the
PLC Name and Port Parameter Table, followed by a comma.
Consult chapter 9, Defining System Parameters, for more
information regarding this name. If this name is omitted, the
default PLC name is assumed. (The default PLC is defined in the
bit The actual PLC reference number of the bit to be read or written, using the
addressing nomenclature of the PLC defined by the plcnam.
15.7 PLC Specific Word and Bit References 15.7.1 Data Highway and
Data Highway Plus
As noted in section 15.1, Introduction, when PanelMate with Acceleratl/On is
communicating to Data Highway or Data Highway Plus, it is a master. See section 14.9
for information regarding Allen-Bradley word and bit addresses and their use in
PanelMate template editors for Data Highway/Data Highway Plus applications.
15.7.2 Remote I/O
The following subsections describe the reference formats for Input and Output memory,
the reference formats for monitored and active block transfer memory, along with error
messages which may be displayed.
Note All numbers used for PLC addressing in the remote I/O references
are in octal. 15.7.2.1 Monitored I/O
The Allen-Bradley Remote I/O Networks allow devices to address input and output
registers. The following addressing format will be used:
[T:RGBB]
where:
T
File type (1= input or O= output)

Type
separator R
Rack
number
For a PLC-2, PLC-5/15 and PLC-5/25, the maximum rack number can be contained within one octal
digit. The first character after the file type separator character ":" is the rack number. Since a PLC3 may have more than eight racks, the rack number may be comprised of two octal digits. If two octal
digits are entered consecutively after the file type separator, then the rack number is assumed to be the first
octal digit and the group number is assumed to be the second octal digit. If three octal digits are
entered consecutively after the file type separator, then the rack number is assumed to be the first two
octal digits and the group number is assumed to be the third octal digit.
15.7.2.2 Active Block Transfer Referencing

Active block transfers and monitored block transfers are different in that active block transfers have the
ability to move data to the PLC as shown in figure 15-12. Active block transfers must be configured in the
Allen-Bradley Remote I/O Configuration Table to avoid any errors. PanelMate will allow addressing
to any word within the referenced active block transfer. Since the active block transfers have been
configured beforehand, a slightly different method of referencing will be used, allowing the active block
transfer ID to be used much like a macro substitution in place of the rack-group-slot.
PLC
Remote I/O Rack
Block Transfer Write

0
0
0
Block Transfer Read
0
0
Panel Mate
Figure 15-12 Active Block Transfers
The following addressing format will be used:

[B:D WW/BB]
where:
B
D
'
WW
/
BB
Active block transfer specifier

Type separator
Transfer ID ("A-P" character designator from Active Block Transfer Table)
Block separator (only one space is allowed)
Word offset (0-77 octal, 2-digit maximum, the maximum value determined
by block transfer size)
Bit separator
Bit offset (0-17 octal, 2-digit maximum)
Example: [B:A 1/0]

PanelMate will reference bit 0 of word 1 in active block transfer "A" (block transfer "A": configured in the remote I/O configuration).
Note
PanelMate Series
The Transfer ID is configured from the Active Block Transfer Table in the Allen-Bradley
Remote I/O Configuration Editor.
15-11
15.7.2.3 Monitored Block Transfer Referencing

A block transfer causes a block of data to move between an I/O module and a PLC data file. In the
Acceleratl/On interface, block transfers are stored in data buffers and saved on a rack-group-slot basis.
Any block transfer that occurs on the bus will be buffered by the interface card, and any word within
the monitored block transfer buffer can be read by PanelMate. There are two sets of block transfer data
buffers: one for block transfer reads and one for block transfer writes.
_ Block Transfer Write

Block Transfer Read __
PLC
Remote I/O Rack
0 0 0
00
PanelMate
Figure 15-13 Monitored Block Transfers

The following addressing format will be used:
[T:RGS WW/BB] where:
G
S
''
WW
/
BB
Type (R = block read, W = block write)

Type separator R
Rack number
(1-7 octal for PLC-2)
(0-37 octal for PLC-3)
(1-3 octal for PLC-5/15)
(1-7 octal for PLC-5/25)
Group number (0-7)
Slot number (0 or 1)
Block separator (only one space is allowed)
Word offset (0-77 octal, 2-digit
maximum)
Bit separator
Bit offset (0-17 octal, 2-digit maximum)
Example: [R:100 1]
PanelMate will reference word 1 of the block transfer read going to the PLC from the module that is
in rack 1, group 0, slot 0.
15-12
PanelMate Series
For a PLC-2, PLC-5/15 and PLC-5/25, the maximum rack number can be contained within one octal
digit; thus, the first character after the file type separator character ":" is the rack number. Since a
PLC-3 may have more than eight racks, the rack number may be comprised of two octal digits. If
three octal digits are entered consecutively after the file type separator, then the rack number is assumed
to be the first octal digit, the group number is assumed to be the second octal digit and the slot
number is assumed to be the third octal digit. If four octal digits are entered consecutively after the
file type separator, then the rack number is assumed to be the first two octal digits, the group number
is assumed to be the third octal digit, the slot number is assumed to be the fourth octal digit.
15.7.2.4 Control Button Reset Delay

During Run Mode operation, operators can use PanelMate's control button feature to emulate momentary
pushbuttons. When an operator presses a PanelMate control button, PanelMate sets the assigned bit on the
Acceleratl/On interface so that the bit can be read by the remote I/O scan cycle. When the operator
releases the PanelMate control button, PanelMate clears the assigned bit on the AcceleratI/On
interface.
In order to ensure that the bit on the AcceleratI/On interface is in a "set" condition long enough to be
read by the I/O scan, PanelMate provides a method to delay resetting the bit. The Control Button
Reset Delay feature noted in Chapter 9 provides a method of delaying bit reset by multiples of 250
milliseconds.
15.7.3 Active Racks

An active rack is a rack that does not physically exist but rather is being simulated by the PanelMate
interface. Simulating a rack is the only way for the PanelMate to write data to the PLC. Note that
each full rack can be split into a quarter rack or any multiple of a quarter rack (i.e., 1/4, 1/2, 3/4 or full
rack).
PanelMate is capable of simulating racks on the bus as well as monitoring the other racks' data. This
is very important since the only way for PanelMate to write to the PLC is through a simulated rack.
There are 32 possible rack addresses. The PanelMate interface card can simulate any or all available
unused racks, but must not attempt to simulate rack addresses for racks that physically exists. If a
physical rack is being simulated, both the PanelMate and the physical rack will respond to any messages,
causing invalid data to be sent to the PLC.
Note Although a PLC-3 can have 63 racks, PanelMate can be configured for 32 racks. Since PanelMate
can only monitor a single channel on the PLC-3, only 16 racks can be simulated or monitored
anyway.
PanelMate Series
15-13
15.7 PLC S etc Word and Bit References
The Allen-Bradley Remote I/O Configuration Editor contains a section called the Active Rack
Table which will be used when configuring the active racks. Since the maximum number of racks that can be
addressed is dependent upon the PLC type, it will be necessary to enter the Remote I/O PLC model first in
the PLC Name and Port Table before proceeding to the Allen-Bradley Remote I/O Configuration Editor.
Refer to section 9.3, Remote I/O Configuration, for more information on configuring PanelMate with Remote
I/O.
The following table shows the addressable racks for each PLC model:
PLC Type
PLC-2
PLC-3
Number of Racks
Octal
Decimal
7
7
40
32
Range
1-7
0-37
PLC5/15
1-3
PLC5/25
1-7
The following write restrictions will apply:
Cannot write to an output reference

Can only write to input references if the reference's rack is active (set as active in Active Rack Table)
s Cannot write to monitored block transfers (both read and write)
Can only write to active block transfer references with a direction of READ or COMMON
15.7.4 Block Transfers

Many of Allen-Bradley's PLC modules support block transfers. These modules generally have more than one
word of information per slot, and block transfers are the only convenient way of moving data between these
modules and the PLC. The data is moved from the module into a data file within the PLC. One block
transfer can move up to 64 words of data, the block transfer specified by giving the rack, group and slot. Block
transfers only occur when the PLC is programmed to use them. To implement a block transfer, a block
transfer read (BTR) or block transfer write (BTW) instruction is placed on one of the ladder logic rungs. The
instruction will specify the rack-group-slot for the transfer as well as the number of words, file and
starting element number.
The PanelMate interface card supports two types of block transfers (monitored and active). For monitored
block transfers, PanelMate will monitor all block transfers being sent from the PLC to the various racks and
keep one read and one write per slot. For active block transfers, PanelMate is capable of sending and receiving
block transfer reads and writes for racks that have been made active. To accomplish this, the size and location
of all active block transfers to be executed by an active rack must be specified before communications start.
Active block transfers must still be programmed into the PLC for any data exchanges to take place.
15-14
PanelMate Series
15.7.4.1 Block Transfer Examples

Possible Block Transfer Write Example (PLC-5/15)
The following rung will continually block transfer write to a PanelMate.
Write
Enable
- BTW
BLOCK TRANSFER WRITE

MiB:B
Rack:
3
/ __________________________________ Group:
I
Module:
is
BT Array:
N18: 0
0
Data
File:
NZ0:0
Length: 6 4 Continuous N
Figure 15-17 Block Transfer Write
Possible Block Transfer Read Programming (PLC-5/15)

The following rung will continually block transfer read from a PanelMate.
The PLC program should use verified read data. When moving data from one type of data table
section to another, the FAL instruction will convert the data format (such as integer to BCD). If this
is not desired, use the File Copy instruction.
Read
N15 :8e
N158 Rack: 2 Group: 5 Module:
15 ST Array:
N15:8
Data
- BTR
BLOCK TRANSFER READ
0
File:
M20:0 Length:
Continuous
64
N
Move Read File to 'Verified" Read File
Read
Done
N15:8
-FAL
FILE
ARITHMETIC/LOGICAL
Control: RB:1 Length: 64
Position: 0 Made: ALL De
st:
N14:80
Expression:
N2B:0
13
Figure 15-18 Block Transfer Read
PanelMate Series
15-15
Possible Recipe Example Using Block Transfers (PLC-5/15)

(Assuming PanelMate configured as rack 1 active and Block Transfer rack 1, group 0, slot 0, is COMMON.)
In this example a standard recipe is stored in N30. It is block transfer written to a common block transfer area
in the PanelMate. Once adjustments are made to the recipe, it is Block Transfer read into N20. The data
block transfer is moved to N40 which now contains the modified recipe.
PanslMats Control
Button
-BTR
BLOCK TRANSFER READ
Reek:
1
Group:
0
Nodule:
8
BT Array:
N1B:8
Data File:
N28:0
Length:
64
Continuous
N
1:15
(EN) -
(ON) -
(ER)
PanelMate Control
Button
1:15
- BTW
BLOCK TRANSFER YRITE
Rack:
1
Group:
8
Module:
8
BT Array:
N10:5
Data File:
N38:0
Length:
64
Continuous
(EN )
(ON) -
(ER)-
-FAL
Read
Dane
13
FILE ARITHMETIC/LOGICAL
Control:
R6:2
Length:
64
Position:
B
Mode:
ALL
Dest:
Expression:
(EN)
(DN) -
N40:0B
*SN20:0
(ER)
Figure 15-19 Recipe Example Using Block Transfer
250-16
PanelMate Series
Possible Continuous Bi-directional Block Transfer Example (PLC-2)
BTU
ENABLE
818 1
-BTR
BLOCK TRANSFER READ
Data Addr:
848
010
(EN) - 07
Nodul Addr: Block

07
Length:
File:
1 30
338-336
118 (ON)
07
BTR 8TW DONE DONE 110
110
07
B6
-BT W
BLOCK TRANSFER WRTIE
Data Addr:
841
Module Addr:
1 38
Block Length:
File:
210-245
010
(EN) - 06
118 (ON)
STY
ENABLE
118
9B
06
- NFF
BTR
DONE
118
87
Counter
Addr:
023
Position:
081
File
Length: 30 File A: 300336 File R: 488-436 Rate
Scan:
30
833
(EN)
17
033
(DN) - 17
Figure 15-20 Continuous Bi-directional Block Transfer
15.7.4.2 Block Transfer Discussions
Active Block Transfer Sent to Inactive Rack

If the PLC sent a block transfer to a rack that was not active (and did not physically exist), an error
would exist in the PLC since no rack would be responding to the block transfer; the Acceleratl/On
interface would ignore the block transfer.
Active Block Transfer Write Error

If PanelMate is configured for a write (or common) block transfer, but has not received one from the
PLC, a non-fatal communication error will occur. Once PanelMate receives the block transfer, the error
will cease and no other errors will follow.
For example, a one-shot block transfer write occuring before PanelMate is initialized online.
Active Block Transfer Read Error

An error will be generated only when a block transfer read is invalid. However, no error will be
displayed when PanelMate in configured for a block transfer read and the PLC does not execute a
block transfer read or if the block transfer read occured before PanelMate is initialized online.
PanelMate Series
15-17
Block Transfer Buffer Allocation

PanelMate can buffer up to 128 block transfers (both active and monitored). The interface card allocates 128
bytes (64 words) for each monitored block transfer regardless of the size of the actual block transfer. Although
it is highly unlikely, it is possible for more than 128 block transfers to be configured or monitored. In this case,
any new block transfer (one that has not already been buffered) received after the first 128 block transfers
will not be buffered. It is also possible that enough large block transfers could be active and monitored that
the interface card may run out of enough memory to store them. In both of these circumstances, if
PanelMate makes a request for data within a block transfer which is not currently stored in the interface board
block transfer buffer, then a non-fatal communication error will result. Since block transfer buffers will never
be deallocated (the interface board would have to be reconfigured), there is no online recovery from these
errors. To recover from the errors, you must re-boot the system.
Monitored Block Transfer

It may be possible, particularly during the bit initialization or during the initial page display after Run Mode
initialization, that various references to monitored block transfers will be in error since the I/O board has not
yet monitored the block transfers containing the requested information. Nonfatal communication errors will
continue until the Acceleratl/On board has monitored the required block transfers.
15.7.5 Unsolicited Write Message

PanelMate can accept unsolicited write messages from a PLC through the Data Highway or Data Highway
Plus networks.
Unsoliciteds should only be used for priority information transfer. If PanelMate receives an unsolicited
message from a PLC, the normal polling will be interrupted and the unsolicited message will be immediately
processed. Once completed, PanelMate's normal polling will resume.
In the PLC's perspective, PanelMate will be seen as another PLC on the network. Command code "Remote
Station No." must be PanelMate's Network ID. PanelMate supports only protected and unprotected
writes. Note that the Command zone rung must be first.
The following are examples of unsolicited writes to PanelMate.
For remote station data table address, PanelMate's normal addressing restrictions apply. Refer to
the proper Allen-Bradley manual for further unsolicited message configuration.
Local Station B
Error Code
Storage Word
010
Timeout
Preset Code
077
815
02787
G
0 Start
Bit
037
Command
Code
815
Rssots Station
Bata Table Address
0400
G11
00
Start
End
A dd res s
A dd res s
0258
0255
-G-
82707
()
111
82787
(
U)
Figure 15-14 Network Connection on Acceleratl/On Interface
15-18
PanelMate Series
MSG
CTRL
MESSAGE TYPE 1
CTL = FB805:8816 CHANNEL
E2.5.2 #H830$130:8 =
$B3:4,30
Figure 15-15 PLC3 Message Instruction (Write Only)

Note
The destination address must be an input image file that matches PanelMate's Network ID.
Example:
$130:0
PM Network ID = 30
MSG
CTRL
SENO/REC MESSAGE
CONTROL BLOCK N7:1O
(EN) -
(DN) -
Figure 15-16 PLC5 Message Instruction (Write Only)
Note
The message instruction's destination address must use file address of N7 and be a valid
reference in PanelMate.
Message must be write only because PanelMate can only receive unsoliciteds.
PanelMate Series
15-19
Chapter 16. Eaton PLCs
16.1 Introduction
PanelMate supports the use of the Eaton Cutler-Hammer D500 and D200 families of Programmable Logic
Controllers (PLCs), models CPU20, CPU25, and CPU50.
Up to eight PLCs can be connected to one PanelMate by using the current protocol.
16.2 Memory
The Eaton Cutler-Hammer D500 family, models CPU20, CPU25 and CPU50, use decimal word addresses.
The following list contains descriptions of the memory types:
Memory Type Symbol
X
PanelMate Series
Description
Input device (bit)
XW
Y
Input register
Output device (bit)
YW
R
Output register
Control relay device (bit)
RW
Z
Control relay register

Remote link storage device (bit)
ZW
C
Remote link storage register

Counter register
Timer register (max. value 32767)
Data register
16-1
16.1 Introduction
The following list contains descriptions of the memory ranges:

Devices or Registers
X or Y
Device
Register
CPU20
CPU25
CPU50
X or Y 000-15F
(256 devices)
X or Y 000-15F
(256 devices)
X or Y 000-31F
(512 devices)
XW or YW 00-15
(16 registers)
XW or YW 00-15
(16 registers)
XW or YW 00-31
(32 registers)
Device
Z000-Z31 F
(512 devices)
Z000-Z31 F
(512 devices)
2000-Z31F
(512 devices)
Register
ZW00-ZW31
(32 registers)
ZW00-ZW31
(32 registers)
ZWOO-ZW31
(32 registers)
R000-R63F
(1024 devices)
ROOD-R63F
(1024 devices)
RWOO-RW63
(64 registers)
RWOO-RW63
(64 registers)
Device
Register
R000-R63F
(1024 devices)
RWOO-RW63
(64 registers)
Registers Only
CPU20
CPU25
XW
or
YW
Register
XW or YW 16-31
(16 registers)
XW or YW 16-31
(16 registers)
Register
T000-T127
(128 timers)
T000-T127
(128 timers)
Register
C00-C95
(96 counters)
COO-C95
(96 counters)
Register
D0-D1535
(1536 registers)
D0-D1535
(1536 registers)
CPU50
XW or YW 32-63
(32 registers)
T00-T127
(128 timers)
C00-C95
(96 counters)
DO-D1535
(1536 registers)
Devices R600-R63F (registers RW60-RW63) are reserved for special functions.

Data should not be altered in these locations.
Table 16-1 Memory Ranges
16-2
PanelMate Series

16.3.1 Direct
Examples of possible connections are described and shown in the following sections.
Direct connection to a CPU20 using the computer interface terminals, or to a CPU25 or CPU50 using the
computer interface board (D5000IB99).
PanelMate
communications
cable
PanelMate
Computer
Link
Module
0 0
0 0
0
D500
Figure 16-1 Single PLC Connection
16.3.2 Multiple
Multiple connections to CPU20s using the computer interface terminals, or to CPU25s or CPU50s using the
computer interface board (D5000IB99).
PanelMate
000
00
RS422
Computer
Computer
Link
Link
Module
Module
D500
D500
Computer
Link
Module
D500
Computer
Link
Module
D500
Computer
Link
Module
Computer
Link
Module
D500
D500
Computer
Link
Module
D500
Computer
Link
Module
D500
Figure 16-2 Multiple Connections
PanelMate Series
16-3
16.4 Cablin
16.4 Cabling
The communications between PanelMate's serial ports and Eaton Cutler-Hammer PLCs is RS422 and,
therefore, has a recommended maximum length of 4000 cable feet. You should construct a communications
cable of the desired length for each connection needed. The cable is a shielded twisted pair.
for Eaton Cutler-Hammer PLC
CPU20, CPU25, CPU50
PanelMate
DB-25P
Cutler-Hammer
Terminal
2 TXB
10
1 TXA
22
3 RXA
23
5 RXB
6 SG
15
*Termination
17
Shield
Hood
Hood
Figure 16-3 RS422 Cabling
16.5 Communications Parameters

Standard parameters for communications with Eaton Cutler-Hammer PLCs are: 8
data bits (fixed on Eaton Cutler-Hammer)
1
stop bit (fixed on Eaton Cutler-Hammer)
NONE Parity
9600
16-4
Baud Rate
PanelMate Series

16.6.1 CPU20
The following DIP switches are set to describe communications:

Station Switch
(for Computer
Interface)
Power
Terminals
Programmer
Connector
Computer
0000
00
Battery
Compartment
Mode Switches
BR2
Cover
LED Indicators
BR1
PEN
Switches
PR
MOD
Mode Switches
(for Computer
Interface)
I ____________
ON
Computer Interface
Terminals
Basic Unit Cable
(to I/O Unit)
Figure 16-4 CPU20

Baud Rate
Rate
BR2
BR1
Type
PR
9600
4800
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Odd
Even
OFF
ON
2400
ON
OFF
1200
ON
ON
Transmission
Parity
Mode
MOD
Mode
PEN
Special
Standard
OFF
ON
Disable
Enable
OFF
ON
Table 16-2 CPU20 Port Configurations
PanelMate Series
16-5
At the upper right of the processor, there are three two-position switches used to set its mode of operation.
Program
11
Computer
RAM
Run
G
Halt
PROM
Mode Switches
Figure 16-5
The Computer/Program slide switch must be in the Computer position and the Run/Halt slide switch must
be in the Run position to enable communications with the PanelMate.
16.6.2 CPU25 and CPU50

The following DIP switches are set to describe communications:
f Reset Button
O
G-- Write Enable Switch
Connector plugs into
Data Transmission LED Indicators
CPU card
0 00
DIP Switch
G
flat Cable --
Station Number Switch

RS422 Transmission Cable ._/
Terminal Block
Figure 16-6 RS422 Interface Board
16-6
PanelMate Series
DIP switches:
OFF
ON
8 - SPO - Control command enabled (off)
010
7 - SP1 - Program block write enabled (off)

6 - SP2 - Binary mode disabled (on)
NED
7
6
5
5 - BRO -
4
3
2
1
(on)
4 - BR1 - BAUD rate = 9600 (off)

3 - BR2 -
(off)
2 - PEN - Parity Disabled (on)

1 - EVN - Parity odd/even don't care (off or on)
Baud Rate: The DIP Switch settings shown above are for 9600 Baud. select the
setting from the following table.
If other settings are required,
Table 16-3 RS422 Interface Board DIP Switch Settings The

Write Enable switch must be in the ON position.
Baud
Rate
Disabled
9600
4800
2400
1200
600
300
1200
(5) BR0
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
(4) BR1
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
(3) BR2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
Switch
Table 16-4 CPU25 and CPU50 Baud Rate Selection
PanelMate Series
16-7

A single format for referencing PLC words is used throughout the PanelMate template editors. When
ever you need to refer to a specific PLC word in any expression, the following format is required.
Note
plcnam, and #format are optional fields.
where:
plcnam, The 6-character (or less) name of the designated PLC, as defined in the PLC Name and Port
Parameter Table, followed by a comma. Consult chapter 9, Defining System
Parameters, for more information regarding this name.
If this name is omitted, the default PLC name is assumed. (The default PLC is defined
in the PLC Name and Port Editor.) This field is optional.
more information about word reference numbers as they are used for specific Eaton
PLCs.
#format The 3- or 4-character code that specifies the format to be assumed for the data being read or
written, preceded by a number sign (#). If this format is omitted, default formats will
be used.
The formats that PanelMate recognizes are: S16
U16
Signed, 32-bit integer where the number can range from -2,147,483,648 to 2,
147,483,647; the high order bit is the sign.
U32*
BCD3
BCD4
BCD6*
BCD8*
8-digit binary-coded decimal number stored in two contiguous registers where the
number can range from 0 to 99,999,999.
16-8
PanelMate Series
BIN3
BIN4
BIN8*
*When specifying these data formats, the address specified for word defines the first
of the two registers in the pair (i.e., the one with the lower reference). This register is
assumed to contain the most significant portion of the number.
Note that when downloading values to the PLC, PanelMate will delete any high order digits beyond the range
allowed.
Also note that BCD and BIN formats do not inherently support negative values. Expressions can be used to
scale values in PanelMate so that the operator enters and reads negative numbers, but a positive integer will be read
from or written to the PLC.

need to refer to a specific PLC bit in any expression or control button definition, the following format is required:
[plcnam,bit]
Note
where:
plcnam, The 6-character (or less) name of the designated PLC, as defined in the PLC Name and Port
Parameter Table, followed by a comma. Consult chapter 9, Defining System
default PLC name is assumed. (The default PLC is defined in the PLC Name and
Port Editor.) This field is optional.
more information about bit reference numbers as they are used for specific Eaton
PLCs.
PanelMate Series
16-9

16.8.1 Eaton Register and Device References
Register References
The format used for expressions is the memory type symbol (upper or lower case) and a reference
number.
The following is the format for a register reference:
[mr]
Note
m
memory type symbol (XW, YW, RW, ZW, C, T, D)
r
register value (leading Os are not required)
In order to reference D registers greater than three digits, the D symbol must be omitted. The
D symbol on register values less than four digits is optional.
Device References
The following is the format for a device reference: [mrb]
m
memory type symbol (X,Y,R,Z)
r
Two digit register value (leading Os are required)
b
bit number in hex (0-F)
The supported Eaton PI-Cs will allow a maximum of 32 contiguous words per read. The maximum
number of unused words before another read is generated is 10.
Examples
Word References
Reference
[YW3]
[XW04]
[D1]
[1500]
[2]
[RW10]
[C29]
[T17]
Description
Output register 3
Input register 4
Data register 1
Data register 1500
Data register 2
Control relay register 10
Counter register 29
Timer register 17
Bit References
[Y03F]
[X110]
[R147]
[Z224]
16-10
Output device, bit 15 of output register 3

Input device, bit 0 of input register 11
Control relay device, bit 7 of register 14
Remote link storage device, bit 4 of register 22
PanelMate Series
16.8.2 CPU20 PLC ID Number Setting

The PLC ID number in the PLC Name Table must correspond to the selected station number on the CPU20. There
are eight distinct ID numbers (0 through 7). Stations 8 and 9 on the rotary switch correspond to station numbers 0
and 1, respectively. To avoid confusion, do not use numbers over 7.
16.8.3 CPU25 and CPU50 PLC ID Number Settings

The PLC ID number in the PLC Name Table must correspond to the selected station number on the CPU25 or
CPU50. There are eight distinct ID numbers (0 through 7). Stations 8 through F on the rotary switch correspond to
station numbers 0 through 7, respectively. To avoid confusion, do not use numbers over 7.
PanelMate Series
16-11
Chapter 17. General Electric PLCs
17.1 Introduction
The GE driver supports the Series Five, Six, and Six Plus models.
Two protocols are supported by the Series Six and Series Six Plus. The first is the peer/peer protocol
which allows either device to initiate communications. The second is the master/slave protocol which
allows only one node to be the master. The master is the only device which can initiate communications. The
Series Five driver supports the master/slave protocol only.
The Series Six Plus with bit write (S6 + WBit) supports both the Series Six and the Series Six Plus
PLCs that have a CCM2 or CCM3 card with bit write capability. In all other cases, use the driver for
your specific PLC. For example, always use the Series Five driver (S5) with Series Five PLCs.
17.2 Memory
The following memory types are supported by this driver.
Auxiliary input (bit reference)
AI
Auxiliary output (bit reference)
AO
Input (bit reference) Output (bit
I
reference) Register (word
0
R
reference)
Ix + yyyy Ix -
Expanded input channels (bit reference)
yyyy Ox +
Expanded input channels (bit reference)
yyyy Ox -
Expanded output channels (bit reference)
yyyy
Expanded output channels (bit reference)
Where:
x = channel numbers 1 - 7 and 9 - F (0 and 8 are not available for Ix+yyyy
and Ox + yyyy)
yyyy = bit number 1 - 1024
PanelMate Series
17-1
17.2 Memor
The following tables show the relationship between the I/O references and registers.
REALI/O
POINTS
REGISTER
INTERNAL DISCRETE REFERENCES

REGISTER
I/O REFERENCE
R0001
R0065
R0129
R0193
R0257
R0321
R0385
R0449
R0513
R0577
R0641
R0705
R0769
R0833
R0897
R0961
A00001 A01024
AI0001 Al 1024
01+0001 - 01+1024
11+0001 - 11+1024
02+0001 - 02+1024
12+0001 - 12+1024
03+0001 - 03+1024
13+0001 - 13+1024
04+0001 - 04+1024
14+0001 - 14+1024
05+0001 - 05+1024
15+0001 - 15+1024
06+0001 - 06+1024
16+0001 - 16+1024
07+0001 - 07+1024
17+0001 - 17+1024
R1025
R1089
R1 153
R1217
R1281
R1345
R1409
R1473
R1537
R1601
R1665
81729
R1793
R1857
R1921
R1985
User Registers
User Registers
09+0001 - 09+1024
19+0001 - 19+1024
OA+0001 - OA+ 1024
IA+0001 - IA +1024
OB+0001 - OB+1024
IB+0001 - IB+1024
OC+0001 - OC+1024
IC+0001 - IC+1024
OD+0001 - OD +1024
ID+0001 - ID+1024
OE+0001 - OE+1024
IE+0001 - IE+1024
OF+0001 - OF+1024
IF+0001 - IF+ 1024
AUX
AUX
M
A
1
N
I
0
C
H
A
I
N
A
U
X
I
0
C
H
A
I
N
I/O REFERENCE
R2049
R2113
R2177
R2241
R2305
R2369
R2433
R2497
R2561
R2625
R2689
R2753
R2817
R2881
R2945
R3009
00-0001 - 00-1024
10-0001 10-1024
01-0001 - 01-1024
11-0001 11-1024
02-0001 - 02-1024
12-0001 12-1024
03-0001 - 03-1024
13-0001 13-1024
04-0001 - 04-1024
14-0001 14-1024
05-0001 - 05-1024
15-0001 15-1024
06-0001 - 06-1024
16-0001 16-1024
07-0001 - 07-1024
17-0001 17-1024
R3073
R3137
R3201
R3265
R3329
R3393
R3457
R3521
R3585
R3649
R3713
R3777
R3841
R3905
R3969
R4033
08-0001 - 08-1024
18-0001 18-1024
09-0001 - 09-1024
19-0001 19-1024
OA-0001 - OA-1024
IA-0001 IA-1024
OB-0001 - OB-1024
IB-0001 IB-1024
OC-0001 - OC-1024
IC-0001 IC-1024
OD-0001 - OD-1024
ID-0001 ID-1024
OE-0001 - OE-1024
IE-0001 IE-1024
OF-0001 - OF-1024
IF-0001 IF-1024
Table 17-1 I/O & Register References (Series 6 & 6+)
17-2
PanelMate Series

The following sections describe some of the possible configurations of PanelMate with General Electric PLCs.
17.3.1 Direct
Direct connection between one PanelMate and one GE PLC. Either master/slave or peer-to-peer protocol
may be used.
Communications
Cable
0
=o
-0o
0
C
C
M
3
Series 6
Panel Mate
0 0
0 0
0
Series 5
Panel Mate
Figure 17-1 Direct Connections

17.3.2 Multidrop
Multidrop connection between PanelMate and GE PI-Cs. The master/slave protocol must be used for
multidrop communications. PanelMate is always the master and the GE PI-Cs are the slaves.
00 00
0
C
C
M
3
Series 6
PanelMate
I
0
C
C
M
Series 6+
C
C
M
Series 5
Figure 17-2 Multidrop Connection
PanelMate Series
17-3
17.4 Cabling
17.4 Cabling
Communications between PanelMate and General Electric PLCs can be with either RS232C or RS422. The
maximum cable length when using RS232C is 50 feet, while the maximum cable length for RS422 is 4000
feet.
17.4.1 PanelMate
Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
14
2510
Eaton IDT reserved

RS232C TxD
RS232C RxD
RS232C RTS
RS232C CTS
Eaton IDT reserved
Signal GND
Eaton IDT reserved
RS422 RxD (-)
RS422 RxD (+ )
Eaton IDT reserved
Eaton IDT reserved
Eaton IDT reserved
Eaton IDT reserved
RS422 Term (+)
Eaton IDT reserved
RS422 Term (-)
18 Eaton IDT reserved

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Eaton IDT reserved

RS 232C DTR
Eaton IDT reserved
RS422 TxD (+ )
RS422 TxD (-)
Eaton IDT reserved
Eaton IDT reserved
Table 17-2 PanelMate Port Pinouts
Note On the 2800 series PanelMate: Pin 1 is

Chassis GND Pin 21 is
Power GND Pin 24 is 12V (0.2A) Pin 25 is +
12V (1A)
17-4
PanelMate Series
17.4 Cabling
17.4.2 CCM2
The CCM2 card has two ports. One port (J1) uses a 25-pin connector, while the second port (J2) uses
a 9-pin connector. The following figures show the pinouts and signals for each port.
Port J1
Pin Signal
1
.~
14.
0
0
0
0
0
M
250
130
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Do not connect
RS232 TxD
RS232 RxD
RS232 RTS
RS232 CTS
Do not connect
Signal GND
8
9
10
11
12
Do not connect
Do not connect
Do not connect
Keyout I/O
+12 V
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
RS422 RxD (+)

RS422 RxD (-)
Do not connect
Do not connect
RS422 TxD (-)
RS422 TxD (+ )
OIU GND
20 OIU +5 V (5A)
21
22
23
24
25
RS422 CLK in (+ )
-12 V
RS422 CLK in (-)
RS422 CLK out (+ )
RS422 CLK out (-)
Table 17-3 Port J1 Pinouts
Port J2
Pin Signal
1 RS422 TxD (+ ) 2
RS232 TxD 3 RS232
RxD 4 RS232 RTS 5
RS232 CTS 6 RS422
TxD (-) 7 Signal GND
8 RS422 RxD (+ ) 9
RS422 RxD (-)
Table 17-4 Port J2 Pinouts
PanelMate Series
17-5
17.4 Cablin
17.4.3 Series Five

RS232C Communications Cable
for Series Five PI-Cs
PanelMate
(Male) DB-25P
2
CCM
(Male) J1
Panel Mate
(Male) DS-25P
(Male)
3~3
7
CPU
25-Pin
7
20
3
7
7
4
25
4
Hood- Shield
5
Hood
5
Hood
Shield-
Hood
Figure 17-3 RS232C Cabling for Series Five PLCs
RS422 Communications Cable

PanelMate
(Male) DB-25P
CCM
(Male) J1
4
5
15
17
PanelMate
CPU
(Male) DB 25P
15
17
25-Pin
(Male)
15
16
10
14
10
14
17
16
22
23
7
22
23
7
9
10
18
23
12
11
9
13
Hood
Shield
Hood
L 19
Hood
Shield
H
Figure 17-4 RS422 Cabling for Series Five PLCs
17-6
PanelMate Series
17.4 Cabling
RS422 Communications Cable

PanelMate
(Male) DB-25P
CCM
(Male) J2
10
PanelMate
(Male) DB-25P
CPU
(Male) 25-Pin
1
6
15
17
9
22
16
23
10
14
Hood
Hood
Shield
22
9
10
23
18
23
11
Hood
19
Hood
Shield
Figure 17-5 RS422 Cabling for Series Five PLCs
17.4.4 Series Six and Six Plus

for Series Six PLCs
(Male)
DB 25P
2
Panel Mate
CCM
2
(Male)2 J1
3
7
Hood
or J2
PanelMate
(Male) DB-25P
1/0 CCM
(Male) Port
(Male)
PanelMate
2
3
7
3
7
3
7
15
16
Shield
Hood
Shield
I/O CCM
(Male) Port2
2
7
4
5
Hood
Hood
Shield
Hood
Ho
Figure 16-6 RS232C Cabling for Series Six and Six Plus PLCs
RS422
C Series Six
i PLCs
ti
for
PanelMate
(Male) DB-25P
Cable
Series 6 CCM2
(Male) J1 or J2
PanelMate 6 I/0 CCM

Serie Ports 1 or 2
s
22
10
9
10
17
18
9
10
22
13
22
23
14
23
7
15
15
17
Hood
Shield
11
23
17
Hood
Hood
17
Shield
Hood
Figure 16-7 RS422 Cabling for Series Six and Six Plus PLCs
PanelMate Series
17-7

Standard communication parameters for communicating with the Series Five, Six and Series Six Plus
PLCs are as follows. These parameters are given only as a starting point and may be changed to meet
the demands of your application.
Series Six and Six Plus Series Five 8 Data bits 8 Data
bits 1 Stop bit 1 Stop bit Odd Parity No Parity
9600 Baud
19.2K Baud

PanelMate can use the CCM2, CCM3, or I/O CCM card for communications with a Series Six and
Series Six Plus PI-Cs. The CCM module is needed for communications with Series Five PI-Cs. Each of
these cards are discussed in the following sections.
17.6.1 CCM
The following figure shows the port and DIP switch positions on the CCM card. This card is used with
Series Five PLCs only.
Figure 17-8 CCM Port and Switch Positions
17-8
PanelMate Series
The CCM card has two DIP switch banks, labeled DIP SW1 and DIP SW2. DIP SW1, switch 1
through switch 7, are used to set the slave station address. Switch 1 is the least significant bit. Switch 9 is
used to select either master or slave.
Switch
8
Off*
Master/Slave
Switch
9
Master
Slave*
On
Off
* Default
Table 17-5 DIP Switch Bank 1

The second DIP switch bank is used to configure the response delay time, turnaround delay, diagnostic
mode, parity, and baud rate. The following tables show the possible settings for each DIP switch bank.
Baud
Switch
1
Switch
2
Switch
3
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600*
19.2k
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Rate
Turnaround
Delay
Switch
6
10 msec.
No Delay*
On
Off
Parity
Switch
4
Odd
None*
On
Off
Self
Diagnostics
Switch
5
Diags On
Diags Off
On
Off
Delay
Time
Switch
0*
20
100
500
Off
On
Off
On
Switch
8
Switch
9
Off*
Off
Off
On
On
* Default
Table 17-6 DIP Switch Bank 2
PanelMate Series
17-9
17.6.2 CCM2
The following figure shows the port and DIP switch positions on the CCM2 card.
SW17-.
1000 Y-SW20
L10tJl10HO E-SW8
J1
LILJWHN
A aw m
awiaz
_g
SW9
SW1 6
Figure 17-9 CCM2 Switch Positions
The CCM2 card has 17 DIP switches which are used for configuration of baud rate, turnaround time,
protocol, and parity of the two ports, labeled "J1" and "J2". The 17 switches are divided between three
switch banks and are positioned on the card as shown in figure 16-8. The switch numbers are
silkscreened on the circuit board. The switch numbers given in the following tables reference the
silkscreened numbers and not the switch `numbers marked on each individual package.
Baud
Switch
Switch
10
Switch
11
Turn Around
Delay
Switch
15
Switch
9
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19.2K
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Open
Open
Close
Close
Open
Open
Close
Open
Open
Open
Open
Close
Close
Close
0 ms
10 ms
500 ms
500 ms
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Open
Close
Close
Protocol
Switch
12
Switch
13
Switch
14
Parity
Switch
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Open
Close
Close
Open
Cpen
Close
Close
Open
Open
Open
Open
Close
Close
Close
Close
Enabled (odd)
Disabled
Rate
Master RS232
Master RS422
Slave RS232
Slave RS422
Peer RS232
Peer RS422 w/o clk
Peer RS422 with clk
Test 3
16
17
Close
Open
Table 17-7 Port J1 Configuration
17-10
PanelMate Series
Baud
Rate
Switch
1
Switch
2
Open
Open
Close
Close
Open
Open
Close
Switch
3
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19.2k
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Close
Close
Close
Protocol
Switch
4
Switch
5
Switch
6
Master RS232
Master RS422
Slave RS232
Slave RS422
Peer RS232
Peer RS422
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Open
Close
Close
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Close
Close
Test 1
Test 2
Open
Close
Close
Close
Close
Close
Turn Around
Switch
7
Switch
8
0 ms
10 ms
500 ms
500 ms
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Open
Close
Close
Delay
Miscellaneous
Switch Settings
Switch 18
Switch 19
Switch 20
Don't Care
Don't Care
Always Open
Parity
Switch
17
Enabled (odd)
Disabled
Close
Open
Table 17-8 Port J2 Configuration
17.6.3 CCM3
The CCM3 card DIP switches should be configured the same as the CCM2 card described in the
previous section. The placement and numbering of the DIP switches are exactly the same as the
CCM2 card.
17.6.4 I/O CCM

The following figure shows the port and DIP switch positions on the I/O CCM card.
Figure 17-10 I/O CCM Switch Positions

The I/O CCM card has three banks of DIP switches. Bank A is used to configure port one. Bank B is
used to configure port two. Bank C is used to configure pins 15 and 16 for RS232D operation. The first
switch position in bank C should be left in the closed state.
PanelMate Series
17-11
The following tables show the possible DIP switch settings for the I/O CCM card. The switch numbers
correspond to the number on the DIP bank.
Baud
Rate
Switch
1
110
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19.2K
Switch
2
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Close
Protocol
CCM Master RS232/RS422

CCM Master Current Loop
CCM Slave RS232/RS422
CCM Slave Current Loop
CCM Peer RS232/RS422
CCM Peer Current Loop
RTU Slave RS232/RS422
RTU Slave Current Loop
Switch
3
Parity
Switch
7
Switch
8
No Parity
No Parity
Odd Parity
Even Parity
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Open
Close
Close
Open
Open
Close
Close
Open
Open
Close
Close
Open
Open
Open
Open
Close
Close
Close
Close
Switch
4
Switch
5
Switch
6
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Open
Close
Close
Open
Open
Close
Close
Open
Open
Open
Open
Close
Close
Close
Close
Table 17-9 DIP Switch Settings for Bank
Baud
Rate
Switch
1
Switch
2
TurnAround
Switch
6
Parity
Switch
7
No Parity
Odd Parity
Open
Close
Module
Operation
Switch
8
Operational
Test
Open
Close
Reset
Switch
Switch
9
Enabled
Reset
Open
Close
Delay
300
1200
9600
Open
Close
Open
Open
Open
Close
19 2K
Close
Close
Protocol
CCM Master RS232

CCM Master RS422
CCM Slave RS232
CCM Slave RS422
CCM Peer RS232
CCM Peer RS422
RTU Slave RS232
RTU Slave RS422
0 ms
500 ms
Switch
4
Switch
5
Switch
6
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Open
Close
Close
Open
Open
Close
Close
Open
Open
Open
Open
Close
Close
Close
Close
Open
Close
Table 17-10 DIP Switch Settings for Bank B
17-12
PanelMate Series
Function
Switch
RS-232D Operation
Disconnects Pins 15, 16 for Port 1 RS232D

Connects Pins 15, 16 for Port 1 RS232D operation
(use external jumper if desired across pins 15-16)
Open
Close*
*Factory-set default position
Table 17-11 DIP Switch Settings for Bank C
17.6.5 Series Five CPU

The Series Five CPU has one four-position DIP switch bank. This DIP switch bank is used to configure the
25-pin port on the CPU and to configure the CCM address and protocol.
The following table shows the possible settings for this DIP switch:
CCM Port
Address
Communications
RS232*
RS422
Baud
Rate
300
1200
9600*
19.2K
Switch
2
CCM Port
Switch 1
1 (No Parity)
Scratch Pad
On
Off
Switch 3
1
On
Off
Switch 4
Off
Off
On
On
Off
On
Off
On
* Default
Table 17-12 CPU DIP Switch Settings
PanelMate Series
17-13
1707.1 Word References

Note
where:
System Parameters, for more information regarding this name.
If this name is omitted, the default PLC name is assumed. (The default PLC is
defined in the PLC Name and Port Editor.) This field is optional.
word The actual PLC reference number of the word to be read or written, using the
addressing nomenclature of the PLC defined by the plcnam. Consult the
following sections for more information about word reference numbers as they
are used for specific General Electric PLCs.
U16
Unsigned, 16-bit integer where the number can range from 0 to 65535.
S32*
U32*
BCD3
999.
BCD4
9999.
BCD6*
BCD8*
17-14
PanelMate Series
BIN3
BIN4
BINS*
range allowed.

required:
[plcnam,bit]
Note
where
specific General Electric PLCs.
PanelMate Series
17-15

17.8.1 GE Series Five PLC Word and Bit References
Series Five PLCs use decimal word addresses. The PanelMate format default is U16. Inputs and
outputs use bit references.
The following list contains the memory types and ranges supported by the Series Five driver:
10001
to
00001
11+0001
01+0001
01-0001
02-0001
11-0001
12+0001
02+0001
R00001
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
11024
01024
11+1024
01+1024
01-1024
02-1024
11-512
12+1024
02+1024
R16384
Table 17-13 Memory Types and Ranges

All of the references in Table 16-13 are bit references, except for registers R00001 through R16384,
which are word references.
The following is the format for a register reference.
[rr]
rr
PLC reference number of the register.
The following is the format for a bit reference:

[xi]
x
PLC memory type (0 or I).
PLC reference number of the input or output. The

following is the format for a register bit reference (Read Only):
[rr bb]
rr
bb
PLC reference number of the bit position. The bit positions are numbered
from 1 to 16, least significant to most significant, respectively.
Note
The register number must be followed by a space.
PanelMate can reference more than one PLC word with a single read. The Series Five PLC can
read a maximum of forty words per read. The maximum number of unused PLC words per read is ten.
Once ten unused PLC words are encountered, PanelMate will generate another read. Note
Bit writes
to the following are not permitted. They are generally used by the CPU:
Internal status bits I1-XXX
Output status bits
17-16
02-1000 through 02-1024
PanelMate Series
17.8.2 GE Series Six Word and Bit References

GE Series Six PLCs use decimal word addresses. The PanelMate format default is U16.
The following list contains the memory types supported by the Series Six driver: A l
Auxiliary Input (Bit
Reference)
AO
Auxiliary Output (Bit Reference)
I
0
Input (Bit Reference)

Output (Bit Reference)
Register (Word Reference)
The following is the format for a register reference. [rr]

rr
The following is the format for a bit reference:
[xi]
x
PLC memory type (0 or I).
PLC reference number of the input or output.
The following is the format for a register bit reference (Read Only):
[rr bb]
rr
bb
Note
Note that General Electric Series Six Family PLCs store double precision numbers with the first (low)
register holding the least significant word and the next consecutive (high) register holding the most
significant word. PanelMate, however, interprets the first register as the most significant word and the
next consecutive register as the least significant word. For example, if the value 1 is stored in register
624 and the value 0 is stored in register 625, General Electric would interpret the stored value as 1,
while PanelMate would display the value as 65536. To read a double precision number
correctly, multiply the low byte by 65536 and add this value to the high byte.
Bit Writes Without Ladder Logic

The GE Fanuc communication protocol for Series Six, for the latest CCM2 and CCM3 cards, will allow
PanelMate to directly alter the state of a single bit without the use of ladder logic. The part numbers for
the cards which allow single bit writes are listed below:
CCM2 IC6000B536-1
CCM3 IC6000B537-M
The part number should be labeled in the lower lefthand corner of the board. If either of these cards
are installed, then select "S6 + WBit", even for Series Six PLCs, for the model name in the PLC Name
and Port Editor; otherwise, select "S6". If the board number is IC6000B516 or IC6000B517, an upgrade kit
is available from General Electric to allow single bit writes without using ladder logic.
PanelMate Series
17-17
Bit Writes With Ladder Logic

CCM cards, other than those mentioned in the previous section, will not permit an external intelligent
device to directly alter the state of a single bit (input, output, etc.) without overwriting the entire word
in which that bit exists. As a result, PanelMate will write a value to a designated word in the GE PLCs
specifying which bit should be set or cleared. A section of each PLC program is necessary to interpret
this value in order to change the appropriate bit.
Within the PLC Name Table, the PLC ID# is defined using the following format:
ID#-Rreg# (8 characters maximum)
ID#
R
reg#
PLC ID#
optional "R"
Register value used to receive bit set/clear information
Note
Ifno register value is entered, the default is 255.
The value that PanelMate writes to the PLC in order to specify what bits to write, always contains the number
(address) of the bit to be changed. This value is represented as a positive or negative number,
depending on whether the bit is to be set or cleared, respectively. The value sent to the PLC is sent
using the normal Series Six word/block write instruction. The value is described below:
15000 < value
AN where x = value - 15000
10000 < value < = 15000
Ix where x = value - 10000
5000 < value < = 10000
AOx where x = value - 5000
Ox where x = value
0 < value < = 5000
289-18
PanelMate Series
The following ladder logic rungs may be added to a GE PLC program for the purpose of setting and
clearing individual bits as dictated by the instructions PanelMate writes to the PanelMate instruction word
(word 255) in GE PLCs.
GE Series 6: Program to Interpret Bit Controls
If Bit Address in Reg 255
CONST
R0256
R0255
R0256
01023
A MOVE B ]+[ A B ]+ ---------------------------------------------------------------- + -------+ -------+ ------- + --( )--+
1+00000
(Then set or clear bit
101023 CONST
1
I
--]/[--+ [ A MOVE
+00001
R0256
CONST
R0256
B ]+ DO [SUB
REPS]+
( ) 001
(Reset Reg 255
101023 CONST
--]/[--+ [ A MOVE B ]+
1
I
R0255
+00000
+ELSE continue with other processing
I
+[ENDSW]+
I
IR0255
+[ A
R0254
MOVE
B ]+
()
PanelMate Series
17-19
(Get absolute value of address

+
Ilf address < 0 then:
I
CONST
R0254
CONST
[SHIFT LEFT N MATRIX LEN] +
+ -( )-+ -+ I
001
00001
01024
+
+Set flag
I
101024 R0255
+--] [--+[ A
MOVE
R0254
R0254
R0254
CONST
B ]+ [
LEN]+
001
INV
IIAddressl = absolute value
101024 R0254
--]
[--+
CONST
R0255
A ADDX B = C ]+
+00001
(Auxiliary inputs
+If laddressl>15000 then:
I
ICONST
R0255
R0254
01022
A SUBX B = C ]+ ---------------------------------------+ ------ + ------ + ----- + --------+ ------- + ------ + -------- + --( )-+
1+15000
1
01022 R0255
--]
[--+
CONST
R0254
A SUBX B = C ]+ +15000
+If address > 0 then set bit

1
101022 01024
R0254
BIT SET MATRIX LEN]+ ( )
17-20
A10001
CONST
064
PanelMate Series
17 .8 PLC Specif ic Word and Bit Ref erences
(Else clear bit
1
101022 01024
R0254
+--j [--+--] [--+[ BIT CLEAR
A10001
MATRIX
CONST
LEND+
64
Inputs
+Else if Iaddressl > 10000 then
1
101022 CONST
R0255
R0254
01021
--]/[--+ [ A SUBX B
l
+ 10000 I
C ] + ------- + --------+ ------- + ------- + ------- + --------+ ----- + -----+ -(
1
101021 R0255
CONST
= C ]+
--] [--+ [ A SUBX B

l
R0254
+10000
I
+If address > 0 then set bit
1
101021
01024
R0254
10001
CONST
--] [--+ --]/[--+ [ BIT SET MATRIX LEN]+
064
+Else clear bit
1
101021
01024
+--] [--+--j [--+[
R0254
BIT
10001
CLEAR
MATRIX
CONST
LEN]+
064
(Auxiliary Outputs
+Else if Iaddressl> 5000 then
1
101022 01021
CONST
R0255
R0254
01020
= C J ----- + ----- + ------+ ----- + ----- + ----- + -------- (

A SUBX B +
05000
PanelMate Series
17-21
1
101020 R0255
CONST
R0254
--] [--+ [ A SUBX B = C ]+
+05000
Ilf address>0 then set bit

101020 01024
R0254
+--]
BIT
[--+--]J[--+[
SET
A00001
CONST
MATRIX
LEN]+
064
(Else clear bit
I
101020 01024
R0254
+--] [--+] [--+[
BIT
A00001
CLEAR
MATRIX
CONST
LEN]+
064
Outputs
+
101022 01021 01020 R0255
R00253
--
I/[ ---- 1/1 --] / [---[ A MOVE B]
I
(Else if address>0 then set bit
I
101022 01021 01020 01024 80253
BIT
SET
00001
CONST
MATRIX
LEN]+
064
(Else clear bit
I
101022 01021 11020 11024
80253
00001
CONST
--] / [--+ --] / [--+ --] / [--+ --] [--+ [ BIT CLEAR MATRIX LEN]+
064
[ RETURN ]+ I
+[ENDSW]+
I
17-22
Note:
Bit reference is sent to register 255. If bit reference

is negative then bit is to be cleared, otherwise bit is
to be set
PanelMate Series
Registers - 253, 254, 255, and 256 are used by the program.
+[ENDSW]+
Output points 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023, and 1024 are used by the program.
17.8.3 GE Series Six Plus Word and Bit References

GE Series Six Plus PLCs use decimal word addresses. The PanelMate format default is U16.
For Series Six Plus PLCs, PanelMate permits access to all memory addresses, up through the largest 5-digit
address available (PanelMate can actually read addresses up through a maximum of 99999). All registers in the
Series Six Plus may be accessed by PanelMate directly. Series Six Plus units feature extended I/O channels with
addresses grouped in blocks of 1024, using prefixes such as 12+.
The following list contains the memory types supported by the Series AI
Six Plus driver.
Auxiliary Input (Bit Reference)

AO
I
Auxiliary Output (Bit Reference)

Input (Bit Reference)
Output (Bit Reference)
Register (Word Reference)
Ix + yyyy
Expanded Input Channels
Ox + yyyy
Expanded Output Channels
where x = channel numbers 1 - 7 and 9 - F (0 and 8 not available ) yyyy =

bit number 1 - 1024
Bit Writes Without Ladder Logic

The GE Fanuc communication protocol for Series Six Plus for the latest CCM2 and CCM3 cards will allow
PanelMate to directly alter the state of a single bit without the use of ladder logic. The part numbers for the
cards which allow single bit writes are listed below:
CCM2
IC6000B536-1
CCM3 IC6000B537-M
The part number should be labeled in the lower lefthand corner of the board. If either of these cards are installed,
then select "S6+WBit" for the model name in the PLC Name and Port Editor, otherwise, select "S6+". If the
board number is IC6000B516 or IC6000B517, an upgrade kit is available from General Electric to allow single
bit writes without using ladder logic.
Bit Writes With Ladder Logic

CCM cards, other than those mentioned in the previous section, will not permit an external intelligent device
to directly alter the state of a single bit (input, output, etc.) without overwriting the entire word in which that bit
exists. As a result, PanelMate will write a value to a designated word in the GE PLCs, specifying which bit should be
set or cleared. A section of each PLC program is necessary to interpret this value in order to change the
appropriate bit.
PanelMate Series
17-23
Within the PLC Name Table, the PLC ID# is defined using the following format: ID# Rreg# (8 characters maximum)
ID#
PLC ID#
optional 'R"
reg#
Register value used to receive bit set/clear information
Note
If no register value is entered, the default is 255.
The value that PanelMate writes to the PLC in order to specify which bits to write, contains the register and
number of the bit to be changed. This value is represented as a positive or negative number, depending on whether
the bit is to be set or cleared, respectively. The PLC word containing the value is controlled by PanelMate, using
normal Series Six Plus word/block write instructions.
The two byte value sent by PanelMate is represented as shown in the following figure:
15
1
1____ 1
14
13
12
11
10
1 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 1
0= Set Bit (+ ) 1=
Clear Bit (-)
1I
A
bit value (0-2047)
Figure 17-6 Bit Reference Format

Note that GE register values range from 1 - 2048, and bits are numbered 1-16 per register. PanelMate sends a
register value from 0 - 2047, and a bit value from 0 - 15. When the PanelMate sends a bit value of 0, it is
interpreted as the sixteenth bit of the designated register value, and when it is 1 - 15, it is the specified bit of the
designated register value + 1.
Examples
PanelMate Reference = OF + 0001
Value sent to GE = 0111100000000001 (reg. = 1920, bit = 1)
Interpretation = Set bit 1 of register 1921
PanelMate Reference OE + 1024
Value sent to GE, = 0111100000000000 (reg. = 1920, bit = 0)
Interpretation = Set bit 16 of register 1920
PanelMate Reference = 01
Value sent to GE = 0100000000000001 (reg. = 1024, bit = 1)
Interpretation = Set Output value bit 1
PanelMate Reference AO1
Value sent to GE = 0000000000000011 (reg. = 0, bit = 3) Interpretation
= Set Auxiliary Output value 3 (bit 3 of register 1)
PanelMate Reference = AO1
Value sent to GE = 1111111111111101 (reg. = 0, bit 3) Interpretation =
Clear Auxiliary Output value 3 (bit 3 of register 1)
In the last example, the value is negative so the twos complement is calculated before interpreting a
register and bit value. I/O bit values (Ixxxx, Oxxxx) are designated as being in registers 1024 - 1151, but the
values in the registers are not affected since the I/O bit values are stored in a separate location. I/O values 11024
and 01024 are not available for setting and clearing unless logic is added to the PLC program to check the bit
value, in addition to the register range. In the PLC program supplied, Output register values are 1024 - 1087,
and Input register values are 1088 - 1151. Output 1024 would be designated as register 1088, bit 0, and Input
1024 would be designated as register 1152, bit 0.
Bit # 0-15
1
17 295
lM t S i
The following ladder logic rungs may be added to a Series Six Plus PLC program for the purpose of
setting and clearing individual bits as dictated by the instructions PanelMate writes to the bit write
register (default word 255) in GE PLCs.
390> >
I
I
I
IGE Series Six Plus:
Program section to implement bit set and clear operations for PanelMate pushbuttons when
PanelMate is used with the Series Six Plus advanced I/O.
The registers used are R0620 through R0632, and the outputs used are A00977
through A00985. Any other data space could be used by modifying this section of program.
PanelMate instructs the GE PLCs to set and clear bits by writing coded values to a register
called the "Bit Write Register" (BWR). The BWR is user-selectable during development using the
PLC Name and Port Editor of PanelMate. A register number may be entered following a PLC ID#
and a '" character in the Logical Device Unit, PLC ID# field. If no register number is explicitly
designated by the user, the BWR used defaults to R0255 (default setting).
In the following program, the BWR is R0621. Whenever R0621 is nonzero, PanelMate has written a
"Bit Write Code" (BWC) to the BWR, indicating a bit to set or clear. A00977 becomes energized
otherwise.
Bit Bit Bit Do not Write Write Write Set or Memory
IConst
R0622
+ [A MOVE B ] - [
Memory
Clear
R0621
R0622
Registr
A00977
B ] ------------------------------------------------------------------
1+00000
(
I
I < < RUNG 391 > >
PanelMate Series
17-25
***kk**kkkkkkkkkkkkk*kk******kk**k*kk*#k*#*kkk*k*kkk*k*kkk*kkk*k*kkkkk**kkkkkkk#R**Rk****kkkk***k**kk*
I
IIf there is a BWC in BWR, call the subroutine to set/clear bits.
I
I
I Do not I
Set
or
Clear
IA00977 Const
+--]/[-[
R0620
MOVE
Const
B ]-[ DO SUB
1 390 +00001
R0620
REPS ]-
()
001
< < RUNG 392>>
I
****R*Rkk*k*******Rk*****kkkk*kR*****RRkRRR'+:******R**k*kRRRk*R*****~'a:*>`***k****kR*k*********ii*****R**
I Clear the BWR, if there is a BWC (Note - for purposes of debugging, it Iis most
convenient to temporarily remove this rung.)
I
Debug
Do not
Bit
Rung
Set or
Write
Remover
Clear
Register I
IA00985 A00977
Const
+--] [-] / [----[
A
390
R0621
MOVE
B]
+00000
< <RUNG 393> >
*kk**kk*kkk*kkk*kk****kkR****R******k***k**********k*k***k***k*k*k*k**kkkk*kkkkk*R***R***k*Rk******kkk
I
j Else continue with other processing
I
+ [ENDSW]
I < < RUNG 394>>
17-26
PanelMate Series
(Subroutine to set/clear bits. Copy BWC (R0621) to 80622

I
I Bit
Bit
I Write
Write
I Register
Memory
IR0621
+[A
R0622
MOVE
B]
I
I
I < < RUNG 395>>
(Test BWC to see if it is a negative number and energize A00978 if it is I (high bit
set). Note that whenever the BWC is positive, a bit is to be (set, however, if the BWC
is negative, a bit is cleared.
I
I
I
Bit
Write
Memory
I
I
+ [SHIFT LEFT
I
Const
N
000001
R0622
Const
A00978
MATRIX
LEN ] -------------------------------------------------------------- ( )
001
(
I < < RUNG 396>> I
PanelMate Series
17-27
17,8 PLC S ecific Word and Bit References
(Copy BWC (R0621) to R0622 again

I
Bit
Bit
Write
Write
Register
Memory
R0621
R0622
+(
I
I
I
I
MOVE
B]
I
I
< <RUNG
397> >
I Derive the absolute value of the BWC in R0622. If the BWC is negative, stake the
twos complement of the value. (Invert all bits and add one.)
Bit
Bit
Write
Write
Memory Memory
I
IA00978 R0622
A INV
R0622
Const
LEN]
395
001
< < RUNG 398> >

I
Bit
Bit
Write
Write
Memory
Memory
+ A00978 R0622 Const R0622 (__-[ A ADDX B =

C ]395
+00001
< <RUNG 399> >
17-28
PanelMate Series
(Clear R0623
I
I
# of Bit
to be
set
IConst
+[ A
R0623
MOVE
B ]-
()
1+00000
I
I < <RUNG 400> >
(The upper 12 bits of the BWC contain the address of the register I containing
the bit to be set or cleared. Shift these bits from IR0622 to R0623, and then
save them in R0624.
I
I
Bit
Write
Memory
I
I
+( SHIFT LEFT
I
Const
R00622
MATRIX
00012
Const
LEN ]-
()
002
I
I < < RUNG 401 >> I
***etxx*x*x****,t,tx**,r,r,e*~*,r*,e,e**xx**.*****:*******w*,r,+***,r,r,r~*r**,r.**,r#*******.*,r**x***x,******#***e~*
I Move the Register Address to R0624
PanelMate Series
17-29
17.8 PLC Specific Word and Bit

References
I# of Bit Registr
Ito be
I set
Bit I
Address
of
IR0623
R0624
+ [ A MOVE
B ]i
I
(Clear R0623
I
I
# of Bit
I
I
to be
Se
tI
I Const
+[ A MOVE
]1 +00000
R0623
B
I
I < < RUNG
403>> 1
I
(The lower 4 bits of the BWC (still in R0622) contain the number of the
I bit to be set or cleared. Shift these bits from R0622
to R0623, and l allow them to remain in R0623.
I
I
Bit
Wi
I
I Const
R0631
+ [ A MOVE
B]
17.8 PLC Specific Word and Bit References (
I +00000
I
1 < < RUNG 405>>
I
I Const
R0632
+ [ A MOVE
B]
I +00000
1
I < <RUNG 406> >
1
I # of Bit
Ito be
Iset
I
IR0623
+[ A
R0632
MOVE
B]
I
I < < RUNG 407>>
IThe following checks register R0623 for zero. If the 4 bits of the BWC
I (in R0623) is zero, this indicates that the 16th bit needs to be cleared, Itherefore 16
must be added to R0623. The following rungs will accomplish Ithis function.
I
IR0632 R0631
+[A:
A00982
B ] ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (
I
I
I <<RUNG 408>>
PanelMate Series
17-31
# of Bit
to be
set
I
IA00982 Const
+-] [-[ A
R0623
MOVE
A00981
B ] ___________________________
--------------- ------- ----_(
407 +00016
< < RUNG 409> >
If the register address in R0624 is < = 1087 and R0624 > = 1024, then the l bit to be set or
cleared is a real output. A00979 becomes energized and J R0625 and R0626 are
ignored. Note that the register address is actually I register address -1.
I Register
Register
NotReal
Bit is
(Address
Address
Address
Real
of Bit
of Bit
Memory
Output
1R0624 Const
R0625
Const
R0624
R0626
A00979
+ [ A SUBX B----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------= C ]-[
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- A
SUBX-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B =
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- C ]--_------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ( ) I
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+01087
+01024
I
I < < RUNG 410> >
If BWC is for a real output, subtract 1024 from the register address, multiply by 16,
and add the bit number to get the address of the output Ito set or clear (00001
through 01024)
17-32
PanelMate Series
I
Bit is
Register
I Real
Address
Output of Bit
1A00979 R0624
+-] [-[ A
R0627
MOVE
R0627
B ]-[
A SUBX
409
Const
R0628
B=
C ]-
()
+01024
<< RUNG 411 >>
Bit is
Real
Output
~A00979 R0628
Const
R0629
+---] [---[ A MPY
B =
]-
) 409
+00016
< < RUNG 412> >
Bit is # of Bit Not Real Real to be I/O Reg Output Set Address ~A00979
R0629
R0623
R0630
] [----
ADDX B
C]-
409
< <RUNG 413> >
******************************************************************************************************* Set the
output when the BWC is positive
PanelMate Series
17-33

Not Real I
I Bit is
Real I/O Reg
Output
Address
A00979 A00978
R0630
+ -] [
] / [-[ BIT
409
395
00001
< < RUNG 414>>

SET
MATRIX
Const
LEN]-
( ) 315
064
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx******************************* I Clear the
output when the BWC is negative.
I
Bit is Not Real Real I/0 Reg Output
Address
~A00979 A00978
R0630
+----] [ ---------- ] [ -------- [ BIT
I
I
409
00001
CLEAR MATRIX
395
Const
LEN]-
315
064
< < RUNG 415> >
xzx,txxxx,tx:xx,rxxxxxxexxxxx,txxxxxxxxxx,txxx,e,txx,tx+rxxxx,t,txxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
I If the register address in R0624 is < = 1151 and R0624 > = 1088, then the Jbit to be set or
cleared is a real input. A00980 becomes energized and 1R0625 and R0626 are ignored.
I Register
Register
Not Real
Bit is
Address
Address
Address
Real
of Bit
of Bit
Memory
Input
R0624
R0626
A00980
R0624 Const
R0625
+[A SUBX B
C]-[
+01151
Const
A SUBX
C] -------------------------------------------------- (
+01088
< <RUNG 416> >
17-34
PanelMate Series
I
IIf the BWC is for a real input, subtract 1088 from the register address, (multiply by
16, and add the bit number to get the address of the input
Ito set or clear. (10001 through 11024)
1
Bit is
Register
Real
Address
Input
of Bit
1AC0980 R0624
+-] [--[ A
R0627
MOVE
R0627
B ]-[
Const
A SUBX B
415
R0628
=
C ]-
()
+01088
< <RUNG 417> >
Bit is
Real
Input
~A00980 R0628
+---] [----[ A MPY
415
Const
B
R0629
=
+00016
< < RUNG 418> >
Bit is
# of Bit
Not Real
Real
to be
I/O Reg
Input
set
Address
1A00980 R0629
+---] [--[ A ADDX
R0623
B
R0630
=
C]
415
< <RUNG 419>>
x**,ex,exx,e*+rxxxx+exxxx*x~x~x,e,ex~~e~,ex.xx~rx*,ex~e*z~xx.*xx~xx,e,e*xx~ex~x~~xxxxx.~rxxxxxxxxxxxx,exxx,~*xxx*~*xxxxxx
PanelMate Series
17-35
I Set the input when the BWC is positive

I
I
Bit is
Not Real
Real
I/0 Reg
Input
Address
IA00980
+---] [
415
A00978 R0630
/
] [ ------ [
395
10001
SET
BIT
MATRIX
Const
LEN](
064
< <RUNG 420> >
I
I
I Clear the input when the BWC is negative
Bit is
Not Real
Real
I/O Reg
Input
Address
A00980 A00978
10001
R0630
[
+-] [ ---------- ] [
I
415
395
BIT
CLEAR
Const
MATRIX
LEN])
064
I < < RUNG 421> >

I
I
Bit is
Register
Not Real
Real
Real
Address
I/O Reg
(Output
Input
of Bit
Address
R0624
Const
Bit is
IA00979 A00980
+-] / [--] /
409
A00981
[--
415
I / [ --------[
408
A ADDX
R0630
=
C]
+00001
< <RUNG 422> >
17-36
PanelMate Series
****************************************************************************************************** I
IIf the BWC is not a real input, output or if the "Adding 16 to Register" I (See
Rung 407 - 408) function was not implemented, add one to the (register address to
get a register range of 800001 through R02048 and (store in register R00630.
I
IIf the "Adding 16 to Register" function was implemented, then do not add 11 (one) to
the register, instead, store the register address in R0630.
I
I Bit is
Bit is
Not Real
Registr
Not Real I
Address
of Bit
Address
R0630
R0624
Real Real I/0 Reg Address I/0 Reg

Output Input
I
IA00979 A00980
+-] / [--] / [--] [--[
A00981
A MOVE B ]-[
Const
A MOVE B ]-
()I
409
R0630
415
408
+00000
I
I < < RUNG 423 > >
I
I ******************************************************************************************************
I Store the value in the register designated IR0626 by the address in R0630 in
I
I Bit is
Not Real I
Bit is
Real Real Address

(Output Input
Memory
I
~A00979 A00980
+--] / [----] / [----[ A
409
415
IR0630
R0626
MOVE TBL EXT B
Const
LEN ]
001
I
I RUNG 424> >
I
PanelMate Series
l When the BWC is positive, set the bit in the value copied in R0626.
I
I
I Bit is
Bit is
I Real
Real
Output Input
1A00979 A00980
+---] /
409
415
A00978
-] / [---[
# of Bit
Not Real
to be
Address
set
Memory
R0623
BIT
R0626
SET
MATRIX
Const
LEN]-
001
395
I
I < < RUNG 425>>
I
I
l When the BWC is negative, clear the bit in the value copied in R0626.
I
I Bit is
Bit is
# of Bit
Not Real
Real
Real
to be
Address
set
Memory
Output Input
A00979 A00980
A00978
+-_-] / [--] / [---------------- ] [ -------- [
409
415
395
R0623
BIT
R0626
CLEAR
MATRIX
Const
LEN]-
001 I
< <RUNG 426>>

I
17-38
PanelMate Series
I Move the modified value in R0626 back to the register designated by Ithe
address in R0630.
I
I Bit is
Bit is
Not Real
Real Real Address

IOutput Input
Memory
IA00979 A00980
+-] / [
] / [-[ A
409 409
415
R0626
MOVE TBL
IR0630
Const
EXT B
LEN ]
001
I
< < RUNG
427>>
I
I
+[Return
]
I
I
< < RUNG
428 > >
I
I
+ [ENDSW]
I
I
< < RUNG
429>>
I
I
+ [ENDSW]
PanelMate Series
17-39
Examples
Word References
Description
Reference
[R1024]
Register 1024
[R701]
Register 701
Bit References
17-40
Reference
Description
[A1233]
Auxiliary input 233
[AO466]
Auxiliary output 466
[118]
Input 18
[042]
Output 42
[IF + 999]
Input 999 of expanded channel IF +
[I7-766]
Input 766 of expanded channel 17
[OA+643]
Output 643 of expanded channel OA +
[06-1019]
Output 1019 of expanded channel 06
PanelMate Series
Chapter 18. ASCII Generic Protocol
18.1 Introduction
The ASCII Generic Protocol allows you to use PanelMate with any intelligent controller (PLC or host)
capable of sending and receiving ASCII characters over an RS-232 or RS-422 serial connection. If your
controller cannot be linked through any of PanelMate's built-in communications interfaces, you can use
the ASCII Generic Protocol to gain access to all of PanelMate's features.
The ASCII Generic Protocol simply defines the way in which PanelMate expects data to be transmitted to
it, and the way in which it will send operator inputs to the PLC or host.
18.2 Hardware Interface to PLCs

For the most straightforward interface using ASCII Generic Protocol, you will want to use a BASIC
module in conjunction with your PLC. This type of module generally provides one or more serial ports
and has direct access to PLC registers and I/O memory. In addition, it can run the short BASIC routines
that will be needed to transmit data between the PLC and PanelMate. The following is a list of some
of the major PLC brands and their corresponding BASIC modules:
BASIC Module
PLC Brand
GE Series Six TI
ASCII/BASIC module 500-
500 Series
5035 BASIC module 627
Honeywell ISSC
COP module DLog Data
Square D
Controller 1771-DB
A-B PLC-2 Series
1775-GA
A-B PLC-3 Series

Table 18-1 BASIC Modules
PanelMate Series
18-1
18.3 Method of Operation
To connect PanelMate to the PLC, a direct RS232C cable connection would normally be made between the
PanelMate and one of the serial ports on the BASIC module.
For distances over 50 feet, an RS422 electrical connection can be used.
BASIC Module
RS232C
00
00
PLC
In'
RS232C
00
0
Figure 18-1 PanelMate to BASIC Module
13.3 Method of Operation

When ASCII Generic Protocol is used, PanelMate operates as a slave and the host (BASIC module) is
always the master. This means that PanelMate does not initiate transmissions. Instead, PanelMate waits until
the host directs a command to it and then responds appropriately. The options available to the host
include:
Transmitting a group of register values
Asking for any new operator inputs

Asking for the last response to be repeated
Testing the communication link
In response to commands received from the host, PanelMate can:

Acknowledge proper receipt of the commands
Send operator inputs
Each transmission between the host and PanelMate begins and ends in a similar fashion. Transmissions will
vary in length, and will consist of numbers (primarily register values) sent as sequences of printable ASCII
characters, separated by punctuation. The use of ASCII makes this protocol very straightforward to
implement, even by using a PLC BASIC module with a limited instruction set.
In spite of the fact that it is a slave, PanelMate still remains very much in control of updating screen information
(once it receives new data from the host), detecting and announcing alarms, and accepting and managing
operator inputs. The primary difference between using Generic Protocol and specific communications
interfaces is in how the transfer of register and I/O data occurs. In the latter case, PanelMate constantly
asks for data, which the PLC then sends. When the Generic Protocol is used, the host or BASIC module
controls when (and how frequently) the data is sent out.
18-2
PanelMate Series
18.4 PanelMate Configuration - Octal vs. Decimal
O O
000
PanelMate asks for data
PLC
A
0fr
!7
f a ! er !f
PLC sends requested data
v !~
s~ o
Figure 18-2 PLC Specific Interface
0 O
O O
O
Host send new data
BASIC Module
PLC
III
PanelMate acknowledges receipt
Figure 18-3 Generic Protocol Interface
When configuring templates or elements that will be updated using the Generic Protocol, the first
decision to make is whether you prefer an octal or decimal addressing system. PanelMate will recognize either
one, depending upon a selection you make in the PLC Name and Port Parameters Editor (refer to
chapter 9). Note that the default selection is octal.
By selecting an addressing system, you define the addresses which are valid entries for word and bit references.
A Generic word address is simply a number, like [123]. Note that for decimal systems, the addresses [1] through
[65535] are all valid. For octal systems, word addresses may start at [0] and can range up to [177777], but
only valid octal numbers may be used. This means that the next address after [7] is [10]. [8] and [9] are not
valid.
PanelMate Series
18-3
18.4 PanelMate Confi- ation - Octal vs. Decimal
A Generic bit address is a two-part number consisting of a word number followed by the number of
the bit within the word. Bit numbering depends on the selection of decimal or octal, as shown in the
following diagram.
DECIMAL BITS
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
most
significant
bit
1
least
significant
bit
OCTAL BITS
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
07
06
05
04
03
02
most
significant
bit
01
00
least
significant
bit
Thus, decimal bit addresses range from [1.1] to [1.16], [2.1] to [2.16], and so on up to [65535.16]. Octal bit
addresses range from [0.00] to [0.07], [0.10] to [0.17], [1.00] to [1.07], and so on up to [177777.17].
Note that in the ASCII Generic Protocol, word and bit portions should be separated by a period or
space.
The following diagram summarizes the range of available addresses which can be used for configuration in
both decimal and octal versions. Note that address 65535 octal is actually the 27486th consecutive word.
OCTAL
10 07
DECIMAL
98
27485
27486
27487
00
65534
65535
65536
65534
177776
65535
177777
Figure 18-4 Memory Ranges
18-4
PanelMate Series
18.5 Generic Protocol Format

The ASCII Generic Protocol uses a very specific frame format in the communications between the PLC
(host) and PanelMate. The following sections fully describe how these frames must be formatted.
18.5.1 Frames
As was indicated earlier, all transmissions between the host and PanelMate have a common structure,
although length and specific content will differ. This common format is called the frame, and it defines how
all transmitted messages should begin and end. The ASCII Generic Protocol makes it easy for
programs written in BASIC to create and send messages, and to detect the beginning and end of
incoming messages.
The standard frame for messages in ASCII Generic Protocol is shown below:
ID,
task block
,bcc
CR
LF
optional fields
The ASCII character ":" (58 dec, 3A hex). This indicates the beginning of a new
message.
ID, The ID# of the PanelMate unit involved in the transmission. This is the Network ID
number assigned in the PLC Name and Port Editor. This number can be 1254. The ID# is sent as one or more ASCII characters and must be followed
by a comma (ASCII code 44 dec, 2C hex). Leading zeroes and blanks are
allowed. (None will be sent by PanelMate.)
This is an optional field. If there is only one PanelMate on the link, this field
may be omitted. You must indicate whether you will be using the ID# field by
appropriately completing the Format for Generic Protocol Table fields in the
PLC Name and Port Editor.
task block This is the main body of the frame. It contains ASCII numbers, separated by commas,
which define the type of operation and any associated data. The task block
varies in length.
See the following section, Task Blocks, for specific details.
,bcc A Block Check Calculation (BCC) is used to verify the integrity of the frame. The BCC is
computed by the sender and included with the message. The receiver
recomputes the BCC and compares it against the one sent.
The BCC is sent as one or more ASCII characters, and must be preceded by
a comma so that it is separated from the last number in the task block.
Leading zeroes and blanks may be sent.
This is an optional field. If you want to avoid calculating a BCC before and
after each transmission, this field may be omitted. You must indicate whether you
will be using the BCC field by appropriately completing the format for
Generic Protocol in the PLC Name and Port Editor.
PanelMate Series
18-5
The ASCII character ';" (59 dec 3B hex) This indicates the end of the
transmission.
CR L F The ASCII characters for carriage return (13 dec, OD hex), and line feed (10 dec, OA
hex). Neither one or both of these characters (in either order) may be
included in frames sent to PanelMate. This means that frames can be sent
easily using BASIC's printer commands like PRINT or LPRINT. These
trailing characters are ignored by PanelMate.
All frames transmitted by PanelMate include both characters in the order
shown.
18.5.2 Task Blocks

The task block defines the specific purpose of the transmission, and must be sent within the frame
previously described. The host must create the task block, place it in a frame, and send it to PanelMate. The
response from PanelMate will also include a task block within a frame. The formats of the possible task
blocks are given below and each starts with a unique "task code".
The following table lists the set of task codes that are available.
Task Code
4
Description
Hos sends
4
data to
PanelM
addr valuel
value2
...
value60
1 to 60 values
5
Host
requests
current page from PanelMate
5
133
Host
requests
operator input from PanelMate
133
132
Host
sends
to
data PanelM
132
addr valuel
and requests operator

value2I
...
input
value60
1 to 60 values
134
Host
requests
PanelMate to re-transmit last frame
134
64
18-6
Pane
lMat
64
sends standard acknowledgement to host

page
PanelMate Series
Task Code
65
Description
PaneIMate sends single-precision numeric keypad input to host
65
66
value
page
addr
value
value
PanelMate sends control button input to host

67
68
addr
PanelMate sends double-precision numeric keypad input to host

66
67
page
page
addr
bit
value
Host transmits ASCII information directly through PanelMate to an attached printer

Text up to 80 characters
69
Host Display Window Text Message

69
70
,row
,col
fg
bg
,font
bnk
text
fg
bg
,font
bnk
num row
Host Display Window Text Erase

70
row
,col
num col
18.5.3 Task Codes

Notes Regarding Register Addresses and Data Values
1. Generic word addresses can range from 0 to 65535 in PanelMate. However, many versions of
BASIC interpret values over 32767 as negative. To be compatible, PanelMate will accept
address values in the range -32768 to -1, and interpret them as 32768 to 65535. You can also
send the numbers 32768 to 65535 directly, if you prefer. When transmitting a word address to
the host, PanelMate will always use the numbers -32768 to -1 to represent addresses 32768 to
65535.
2. Register values can be sent as numbers in the range -32768 to 32767 (the minus sign is sent as an
ASCII character) to be compatible with most versions of BASIC. You can also send numbers
in the range 0 to 65535. PanelMate will accept either. How the value is ultimately interpreted
will depend on the data format selected for each configured reference.
3. Values transmitted by PanelMate will always be in the range -32768 to 32767 (the minus sign
is sent as an ASCII character). The BASIC module should interpret values in the range 32768 to -1 as 32768 to 65535, if appropriate.
PanelMate Series
18-7
4 - Host Sends Data to PaneIMate

Using task code 4, the PLC (host) can transmit from 1 to 60 specific register values to PanelMate. In
response, PanelMate is expected to return a task block containing task code 64.
,addr
,values ,value2
1 to 60 values
4
The ASCII character 4 (52 dec, 34 hex).
,addr The reference address associated with the first value in the group of values which follow.
Addresses of subsequent values in the group are assumed to be sequential. The
address may be 0 to 65535, sent in ASCII, and must be preceded by a
comma.
,value A register value, which can range from -32768 to 32767. From 1 to 60 values may be
transmitted in a block. Values are sent in ASCII and are preceded by
commas. Leading zeroes and spaces are permitted but not required.
5 - Host Requests Current Page from PanelMate

Using task code 5, the host can ask PanelMate what page is currently being displayed. This task code
can also be used by the host to determine if PanelMate is actually online.
In response, PanelMate is expected to return a task block containing task code 64.
The ASCII character 5 (53 dec, 35 hex).
133 - Host Requests Operator Input from PaneIMate

Using task code 133, the host can ask PanelMate for any new operator inputs.
In response, PanelMate will use one of the following task codes: 64
Indicates no new operator inputs are available
65
Transmits a single register value
66
Transmits a double-precision value
67
Transmits an instruction to set or clear a bit

133
133
18-8
The ASCII characters 133.
PanelMate Series
132 - Host Sends Data and Requests Operator Input

Using task code 132, the PLC (host) can transmit from 1 to 60 specific register values to PanelMate and
expect PanelMate to return any new operator inputs.
In response, PanelMate will use one of the following task codes: 64
Indicates no new operator inputs are available
65
Transmits a single register value
66
Transmits a double-precision value
67
Transmits an instruction to set or clear a bit
132 ,addr. ,valuel ,value2

1 to 60 values
,value60
132
,addr The reference address associated with the first value in the group of values which follow.
Addresses of subsequent values in the group are assumed to be sequential. The
address may be 0 to 65535, sent in ASCII, and must be preceded by a
comma.
,value A register value, which can range from -32768 to 32767. From 1 to 60 values may be
transmitted in a block. Values are sent in ASCII and are preceded by
commas. Leading zeroes and spaces are permitted, but not required.
134 - Host Requests PanelMate to Re-Transmit Last Frame

Using task code 134, the hosts requests PanelMate to repeat the last frame it has transmitted.
In response, PanelMate will re-transmit its last frame, which will include one of the task codes 64, 65, 66
or 67.
134
134
PanelMate Series
18-9
64 - PanelMate Sends Standard Acknowledgment to Host

Using task code 64, PanelMate indicates to the host that it has successfully received a transmission from the
host. As a response to a request for operator input, task code 64 indicates that no new operator inputs are
available for transmission.
If PanelMate has not successfully received a transmission from the host, PanelMate will not respond at all.
This task code may be sent by PanelMate as a response to host task codes 4, 5, 132, 133 or 134.
64 ,page
64
,page
Note

The number of the page currently being displayed (sent as ASCII characters),
preceded by a comma.
The Alarm Summary Page is page 10 for PanelMate I & II; page 16 for PanelMate III.
65 - PanelMate Sends Single-Precision Numeric Keypad Input to Host

Using task code 65, PanelMate sends a single-precision value to the host. This value is the result of the
Input Value Expression as defined for a numeric keypad input associated with a template.
This task code may be sent by PanelMate as a response to host task codes 132, 133 or 134.
65
,page
,addr
,value
65
,page The number of the page currently being displayed, sent in ASCII, preceded by a comma. The
Alarm Summary Page is page 10 for PanelMate I & II; page 16 for PanelMate
III.
,addr
The Target Word Address configured for this numerical input point. Only the
word address is sent, in ASCII, preceded by a comma.
,value The result of the associated Input Value Expression. This number is an integer in the range 32768 to 32767 and is sent in ASCII, preceded by a comma.
18-10
PanelMate Series
66 - PanelMate Sends Double-Precision Numeric Keypad Input to Host

Using task code 66, PanelMate sends a double-precision value to the host. This value is the result of the
Input Value Expression as defined for a numeric keypad input associated with a template.
This task code may be sent by PanelMate as a response to host task codes 132, 133 or 134.
66
page
,addr
,value
,value
66
,page The number of the page currently being displayed, sent in ASCII, preceded by a comma.
The Alarm Summary Page is page 10 for PanelMate I & II; page 16 for
PanelMate III.
,addr
The Target Word Address configured for this numerical input point. Only
the word address sent, in ASCII, preceded by a comma.
,value value The double-precision result of the Input Value Expression is split into two 16-bit
register values and transmitted (in ASCII) with the most significant part first.
A comma precedes each of the two values, each of which will be in the range
-32768 to 32767.
67 - PanelMate Sends Control Button Input to Host

Using task code 67, Panelmate sends an instruction to the host to set or clear a bit that is associated
with a control button input by the operator.
67
,page
,addr
,bit
,value
67
,page The number of the page currently being displayed, sent in ASCII, preceded by a comma.
The Alarm Summary Page is page 10 for PanelMate I & II; page 16 for
PanelMate III.
,addr
The word number portion of the bit address configured for the control button,
sent in ASCII, preceded by a comma.
,bit The bit number portion of the bit address configured for the control button. Range is 1-16 for
decimal systems, 0-17 for octal systems, sent in ASCII, preceded by a comma.
,value
This will be a one if the bit is to be turned on, or a zero if it is to be
turned off. It is sent in ASCII, preceded by a comma.
PanelMate Series
18-11
68 - Host Transmits Data through PanelMate to Printer

Using task code 68, PanelMate users can assign their host devices to transmit ASCII information directly
through PanelMate to an attached printer. This operation has no effect on the simultaneous processing of data
by PanelMate through its other ports.
68
68
Text up to 80 characters
Data
Text up to 80 ASCII characters.
Pass through requests are considered to be equivalent to one line of text on an IBM-compatible printer
and are, therefore, limited to 80 characters of text. Since each request is considered one line, no CR LF
pair need be embedded in the text. These will be automatically inserted by the PanelMate. Note
that the optional CR LF pair at the end of the packet is still supported.
Since the pass through request contains text instead of ASCII encoded integers, the BCC function is undefined.
BCC can still be specified and will function as with other task codes. Semicolons are not allowed in the
ASCII text field since a semicolon is used to delimit the end of the packet.
Pass through requests will be handled as an individual line of output, and no coordination of the printer port
with alarm routines is performed. If data which could cause an alarm is received by PanelMate through one
port while a pass through request is being processed through another port, the alarm data will be processed
immediately after the current pass through line is processed. The host is responsible for avoiding this conflict
of data transfers.
69 - Host Transmits Message to Host Display Window

Using task code 69, the host can send a text message to PanelMate's host display window. The host display
window is an 18 x 66 rectangular area, which is the same size as the 3 x 5 cell matrix area used for templates.
The upper left-hand corner of this area is row 0, column 0. The bottom right-hand corner of this area is row
17, column 65. The message will be truncated if larger than the size permitted by the above dimensions.
69
69
,row
,col
,fg
,bg
,font
,bnk
,text
18-12
row
,col
,fg
,bg
,font
,bnk
,text

Row number in text area starting at the upper left-hand corner (0-17).
Column number in the text area starting at the upper left-hand corner (0-65).
Foreground color of text message (0-7).
Background color of text message (0-7).
Font type (0-3).
Blinking area attribute (0 = no blink, 1 = blink),
Message to display
PanelMate Series
70 - Erase Rectangular Section of Host Display Window

Using task code 70, any rectangular block may be erased. The erase can be in any color, and can be
requested to blink.
70
,row
,fg
,bg
font
,bnk
,num row
,num col
70
,row
Row number in text area starting in the upper left-hand corner (0-17).
,col
Column number in text area starting in the upper left-hand corner (0-65).
,fg ,bg
Must be 0.
,font
Color of block after erase (0-7).
,bnk
Must be 0.
,num row
Blinking area attribute (0 = no blink, 1 = blink).
,num col
Number of rows to erase. Number of columns to

erase.
The row and column fields, along with the number of rows and columns field, define a rectangular area
starting at the row and column values.
18.5.4 Block Check Calculation

The Block Check Calculation (BCC) is a method by which the receiver can verify the integrity of a
frame. It is calculated by the sender, based on the contents of the task block and optional ID# field,
and included with the frame prior to transmission. The receiver then recalculates the BCC upon
receipt of the frame and compares it against the value sent. A match is a good indication of a properly
received frame.
If you want to omit this field from all transmissions and avoid calculating the BCC, follow the instructions in
the section Configuring the PLC Name and Port Editor. Although we recommend that you use a BCC,
you may elect to omit it because of limitations of your PLC BASIC module.
The BCC is calculated by summing all of the numerical values in the frame, starting with the ID# (if
included) or the task code (if ID# is omitted), and ending with the last value in the task block.
If the BCCs do not match when calculated by PanelMate, PanelMate will send no response. The
actual algorithm which should be used is as follows:
1. Sum all of the numeric values in the frame, starting with the first value following the colon and
ending with the last value in the task block.
If your BASIC language can handle negative numbers, use 16-bit signed addition with no
carry. The result must be a value between -32768 and 32767, inclusive.
If your BASIC language cannot handle negative numbers, use 16-bit unsigned addition with no
carry. The result must be a value between 0 and 65535, inclusive.
PanelMate Series
18-13
2. If sending, take the two's complement of the result. This value is the BCC.
If you are unfamiliar with the concept of the two's complement, just remember that the sum
that you calculated in step 1 plus the BCC, must equal 0.
If your BASIC language can handle negative numbers, the BCC will be the negative of the
sum BCC = -(sum).
If your BASIC language cannot handle negative numbers, the BCC will be the number that,
when added to the sum, will equal 65536 (which is the equivalent of 0 in your language's
"thinking"). BCC = 65536 -(sum).
If receiving, add the received BCC to the result of the previous summation. The net total
should be zero if the frame was correctly received. You will always receive values from
PanelMate in the range -32768 to 32767.
Example 1:
Send this frame from the host to PanelMate; assuming host will be working in
the range of numbers -32768 to 32767.
1,
132
,100
,12345
,627
,0
,160
,-25536
,25000
,-12829
To calculate the BCC: 1+132+100+627+12345+0+16025536+25000 = 12829 BCC = Two's complement of 12829

= -12829
Example 2:
Send the same frame as above from the host to PanelMate; assuming host will
be working in the range of numbers 0 to 65536.
132
,100
627
,12345
,0
,160
40000
,25000 52707
Note that -25536 is transmitted as 40000 (65536-25536) To

calculate the BCC:
1 + 132 + 100 + 627 + 12345 + 0 + 160 + 40000 + 25000 = 78365 78365-65536 =
12829 (remember no carry-over 65536)
BCC = Two's complement of 12829 = 52707
(65536-12829)
Example 3:
PanelMate sends the following frame to the host. PanelMate always works in
the range of numbers -32768 to 32767.
65
,204
1372
,-1642
To check the BCC:

1+65+204+1372-1642 = 0
If these values do not sum to 0, the frame is defective and should be
requested again.
18-14
PanelMate Series
18.6 PLC Name and Port Parameters Editor
18.6 PLC Name and Port Parameters Editor

You must be sure to configure the PLC Name and Port Parameter appropriately for the mode of the Generic
Protocol you wish to use. Refer to Chapter 9 for details on entering your selections in this editor.
In the Port Parameter Table, the port "Use" field should be set to Generic. Be sure to set the three format
selections in the Format for Generic Protocol section to reflect your choice of Type (octal
or decimal numbering), whether you expect the PanelMate ID# to be included with each frame (Y or N), and
whether a BCC will be included with each frame (Y or N).
When using the ASCII Generic Protocol and only one host, the PLC Name Table should be filled in as
follows:
1. For Item #1, enter any name in the PLC Name field. 2. Set
the ID# to 0.
3. Select the Port# you have defined as GENERIC. 4. Open
and close the Default PLC Name field once.
The Screen, Message and Alarm Scan delay fields are not applicable to Generic Protocol implementations.
18.7 Checking the Communication Link

The integrity of the communication link to PanelMate can be monitored by the host or PLC in three ways:
1. Continual polling of PanelMate for operator input (either task code 132 or 133). Receipt of
any response from PanelMate verifies that both PanelMate and the link are functioning.
2. Monitoring of PanelMate's fault relay contact. An energized contact indicates that PanelMate is
operating correctly.
For ASCII Generic Protocol, there is a three second timeout period which starts whenever an
operator input is ready to be transmitted. If the host has not polled PanelMate (task code 132 or
133) within three seconds of the input, PanelMate will de-energize its fault
relay and report a communications error.
3. Monitoring the number of times that a message must be sent before it is properly received by
PanelMate. If the host needs to re-send messages frequently, this would indicate a poor
communication link, probably due to noise interference.
PanelMate Series
18-15
18.8 Generic Protocol Driver Development

18.8.1 Overview
This section provides information about the typical development steps which are necessary to communicate
with PanelMate, using the Generic Protocol. Also included are numerous example programs written in
BASIC, which illustrate the techniques discussed within this chapter. At the end of this
section, these example programs are combined into a complete program for use when communicating
with PanelMate using the Generic Protocol.
The typical development path is outlined in the following steps. The remainder of this section follows
this same outline.
1. Establish a communications link
a. Select Generic Protocol on PanelMate.
b. Construct and connect serial cable(s).
c. Simulate Generic Protocol on the host device.
2. Implement Generic Protocol frames a.
Write subroutine to send frame. b.
Write subroutine to receive frame.
3. Communications using task blocks a.
Build task blocks to send data. b.
Interpret task blocks received.
4. Main program functions
a. Update PanelMate with data.
b. Receive operator entries from PanelMate.
18.8.2 Establish Communication Link

Before attempting to write a Generic Protocol driver, verify that the connecting cables and communication parameters are correct. This can be accomplished by sending a communications request from the
host to the PanelMate. A sample routine to accomplish this is included at the end of this section.
18.8.2.1 Select Generic Protocol on PanelMate

Note All system configurations should be backed-up to an BackPac or an IBM PC before clearing memory.
Any BackPacs installed in the PanelMate should be removed. Clearing memory causes PanelMate
to reset all of its memory.
To configure a PanelMate port for Generic Protocol, use the PLC Name and Port Editor to complete the
configuration.
Communication parameters set at the host are generally selected using hardware switches, software calls,
or a combination of the two. Since each device may handle these parameters differently, it is recommended to
consult the host users manual.
18-16
PanelMate Series
18.8.2.2 Connect Serial Cable

A PanelMate communications cable must be constructed. The following figures show the pinouts for
the PanelMate serial ports.
RS232C Pin Assignments
PanelMate Serial Ports
RS422 Pin Assignments

PanelMate Serial Ports
TxD
15
RxD
17
GND
Hood
10
RxD (+)
GND
Hood
Shield
22
--
RxD (-)
TO (+)
23
Hood
Tx D (-)
Shield
Hood
Figure 18-5 RS232/422 Pinouts
18.8.2.3 Simulate Generic Protocol on Host

In order to communicate with PanelMate, it is necessary to program the host to send messages to
PanelMate which, in turn, will send messages back to the host. In the following example, the host sends
a message to PanelMate asking for the current PanelMate page number. PanelMate responds by sending
a standard acknowledgment to the host, which includes the page number.
The following routine written in BASIC, illustrates how the page number of a Panelmate might be read.
The comments include an outline (lines 30, 35 and 40) of software initialization calls (which are not
detailed here) that might be required by a device. When the program is run, it should return "0,64,1,65," provided PanelMate is displaying page one. Note that in line 55, PanelMate has been assigned an
optional ID# of 35. Successful implementation of this program establishes that the communication link
from the host to PanelMate is working.
PanelMate Series
10
REM
Program to test communication link
15
REM
to PanelMate by reading the current
20
REM
PanelMate screen displayed
25
REM
30
REM
Reset the port - clear the input/output
35
REM
Buffers
40
REM
Set baud rate, stop bits, and parity
45
REM
50
REM
Send request for page #
55
PRINT
":35,5,-40,"
60
REM
65
REM
Receive response
70
LINE
INPUT BUF$
75
LPRINT
BUF$
80
END
18-17
18.8.3 Implement Generic Protocol Frames

In the previous example program, a fixed format message was sent to PanelMate to test the cabling and
communication parameters. In practice, fixed format messages are rarely used since variable data is normally
transmitted. Therefore, it is useful to write subroutines to send and receive data packets using the format
required by the Generic Protocol. The format, commonly called a frame, is shown and described in Section
18.5.1, Frames. All data sent and received using the Generic Protocol must use this format.
Send a Frame
The following routine, written in BASIC, sends a Generic Protocol frame with a unit ID, BCC, and trailing
carriage return/line feed. Assume that the following variables are initialized with the appropriate values.
IDNUM%
TASK%[ I
TASKLEN%
The ID number of the PanelMate being sent.

An array of values to be sent as the task block (1 to 62 numbers long).
The number of values to send as the task block (1 to 62).
300
REM
310
BCC% = IDNUM%
Subroutine to send a frame
320
LOOPCNT% = 0
330
PRINT
""
340
PRINT
IDNUM%,
350
IF LOOPCNT% > = TASKLEN% GOTO 410
360
BCC%= TASK%[LOOPCNT%] + BCC%
370
PRINT
""
380
PRINT
TASK%[LOOPCNT%]
390
LOOPCNT% = LOOPCNT% + 1
400
GOTO
410
PRINT
420
BCC% _ - (BCC% MOD 65536)
430
PRINT
440
PRINT
450
RETURN
350
BCC%
"
Receive a Frame
The following routine, written in BASIC, receives a Generic Protocol frame with a unit ID, and BCC.
The following variables are returned from the subroutine.
TASK%[ ]
An array of values containing the task block received (1 to 62 numbers long).
TASKLEN%: The number of values received (1 to 62).
1818
PanelMate Series
500
REM
Get a character or timeout
510
TIMEOUT% = 0
520
CH% = INKEY%()
530
IF CH%< > 0 THEN RETURN
540
IF TIMEOUT% > = 800 THEN RETURN
550
TIMEOUT% = TIMEOUT% + 1
560
GOTO
520
600
REM
Get a number from PanelMate 610
NUM% = 0
620
NEG% = 1 :REM number is positive (-1 for negative) 625

FIRST% =1
PanelMate Series
630
GOSUB
500
640
IF CH% = 45 THEN NEG% = -NEG% : GOTO 630
650
IF CH% > 57 OR CH% < 48 THEN GOTO 680
660
NUM% = (NUM%*10) + CH% - 48
670
GOTO
680
NUM% = NUM% * NEG%
690
RETURN
700
REM
710
TASKLEN% = O:FIRST% = 1
720
GOSUB
730
IF CH% = 0 THEN RETURN
740
IF CH% < > 58 THEN GOTO 720
760
GOSUB
770
780
IF CH% < > 44 AND CH% < > 59 THEN GOTO 760
790
B CC % = BC C% + N U M%
800
IF FIRST% = 1 THEN FIRST% = 0: GOTO 760
810
TASK%[TASKLEN%] = NUM%
820
TASKLEN% = TASKLEN% + 1
830
IF CH% < > 59 THEN GOTO 760
840
TASKLEN% = TASKLEN% - 1
850
IF (BCC% MOD 65536) = 0 THEN RETURN
860
LPRINT "CHECK SUM ERROR"
870
TASKLEN% = 0
880
RETURN
630
Get a packet
500
600
18-19
18.8 Generic Protocol Driver Develo ment
The following example routine should print 64 and 1, repeatedly, when run.
1000
REM
Program tests send/receive
1010
IDNUM% = 35
1020
TASK%[0] = 5
1030
TASKLEN% = 1
1040
GOSUB
300
1050
GOSUB
700
1060
IF CH% = 0 THEN LPRINT "ERROR"
1070
X% = 0
1080
IF X% > + TASKLEN% THEN GOTO 1120
1090
LPRINT TASK%[X%];
1100
X% = X% + 1
1110
GOTO
1120
LPRINT
1130
GOTO
1140
END
1080
1000
18.8.4 Communications Using Task Blocks

Using the routines provided in the previous sections, the Generic Protocol driver can be completed by
building task blocks to contain the data to be transferred, and for periodically polling PanelMate for operator
entries.
Subroutines, written in BASIC, which may be used to view the operation of each task code, are contained in
the following sections.
Task Code 4
The following subroutine builds and transmits a task 4 block. The following variables must be set prior to
calling the subroutine.
ADDR%
DADDR%
DLEN%
The reference address associated with the first value being sent to Panelmate.
The address in the PLC of the first value to send to the PanelMate.
The number of values to send to PanelMate (1-62).
2000
REM
Host sends data to PanelMate
2010
TASK%[0] = 4
2020
TASK%[1] = ADDR%
2030
REM
Set up data
2040
REM
Load TASK%[2] thru TASK%[DLEN% +2]
2050
REM
with data from PLC at DADDR% (*See comment)
2060
TASKLEN% = DLEN% + 2
2070
REM
Send packet from example #2
2080
GOSUB
300
2090
RETURN
*The manner in which host data is read is typically machine-specific.
18-333
PanelMate Series
Task Code 5
The following subroutine builds and transmits a task 5 block. There are no variables which need to be
set prior to calling the subroutine.
3000
REM
Host requests current page from PanelMate
3010
TASK%[0] =
3020
TASKLEN% =
3030
GOSUB
3040
RETURN
300
Task Code 133

The following subroutine builds and transmits a task 133 block. There are no variables which need to
be set prior to calling the subroutine.
4000
REM
Host requests operator input from PanelMate
4010
TASK%[0] =
133
4020
TASKLEN% =
4030
GOSUB
4040
RETURN
300
Task Code 132

The following subroutine builds and transmits a task 132 block. The following variables must be set prior to
calling the subroutine.
ADDR%
The reference address associated with the print value being sent to Panel
Mate.
The address in the host of the first value to send to the PanelMate.
The number of values to send to PanelMate (1-62).
DADDR%
DLEN%
5000
REM
Host sends data to PanelMate
5005
REM
and requests operator inputs
5010
TASK%[0] = 132
5020
TASK%[1] = ADDR%
5030
REM
Set up data
5040
REM
Load TASK%[2] thru TASK%[DLEN% + 2]
5050
REM
With data from the PLC* at DADDR%
5060
TASKLEN% = DLEN% + 2
5070
REM Send packet from example #2
5080
GOSUB
5090
RETURN
300
*The manner in which PLC data is read is typically very machine-specific.
PanelMate Series
18-21
Task Code 134

The following subroutine builds and transmits a task 134 block. There are no variables which need to
be set prior to calling the subroutines.
6000
REM
6010
TASK%[0] =
134
6020
TASKLEN% =
6030
GOSUB
6040
RETURN
Host requests PanelMate to re-transmit host frame
300
Interpret Task Blocks Received - 64, 65, 66 and 67

The following task blocks may be received by the host in response to an initial transmission to PanelMate.
Task codes 65, 66 and 67 are only received after the host issues a request for operator entries. The most
direct way to receive the PanelMate response task blocks is to handle all the possible packets in one
routine. Therefore, the following subroutine interprets task blocks 64, 65, 66 and 67.
7000
7010
REM
GOSUB
Interpret received packets

700
7020
7100
IF TASK%[OJ = 64 THEN RETURN
7200
IF TASK%[01 < >65 THEN GOTO 7300
7210
REM
Write TASK%[3] to register at TASK%[2] 7220
RETURN
7300
IF TASK%[0J < > 66 THEN GOTO 7400
7310
REM
Write TASK%[3] to register at TASK%[2] and
7320
REM
write TASK%[4] to register at TASK%[2] + 1
7330
RETURN
7400
IF TASK%[0] < > 67 THEN GOTO 7500
7410
IF TASK%[4] = 0 THEN GOTO 7450
7420
REM
SET bit at word number TASK%[2]
7430
REM
bit number TASK%[3] (0-15) to ON 7440
RETURN
7450
REM
SET bit at word number TASK%[2J
7460
REM
bit number TASK%[31 (0-15) to OFF 7470
RETURN
7500
18-22
LPRINT "BAD TASK CODE!" RETURN
PanelMate Series
18.9 Main Program Functions
18.9 Main Program Functions

Using the previously described subroutines to send and receive the Generic Protocol packets, a simple
loop can be written to communicate data between the host and PanelMate. The following program
example continually updates PanelMate with words 100 through 109, and then processes any operator
entries. Similarly, other words could be sent to PanelMate by adding more calls. Care should be
taken to read each PanelMate response after each host transmission.
9000
REM
Main program (addresses used are examples)
9010
ADDR% = 100: REM Send to PanelMate register 100
9020
DADDR% = 100: REM Send 10 registers (100-109)
9040
GOSUB
5000: REM Send packet, allow response
9050
GOSUB
7000: REM Process input packet
9060
IF CH% = 0 THEN LPRINT "NO RESPONSE!"
9070
GOTO
9000: REM Send/receive forever 10000
END
Examples
Word References
Reference
[1]
[123]
[65535]
[0]
[77]
[177777]
Description
Word 1
Word 123
Word 65535
Word 0
Word 77
Word 177777
Bit References
Reference
[1.8]
[123.14]
[65535.27]
[0.7]
[77.14]
[1777777.27]
PanelMate Series
Description
Word 1 bit 8
Word 123 bit 14
Word 65535 bit 27
Word 0 bit 7
Word 77 bit 14
Word 1777777 bit 27
18_23
Chapter 19. Modicon PLCs 19.1 Introduction
PanelMate can be used with any of the Modicon PLCs that have Modbus capability,
using PanelMate's Modbus ASCII mode driver. The driver takes responsibility for
communications to this programmable controller, generating the protocol necessary to
request information from and send information to the PLC. The PLCs simply respond
to these requests and commands. No ladder logic is required in the PLC to support the
interface to PanelMate
19.2 Memory
The following memory types are supported by this driver.
OXXX
Coils/discrete
outputs OXXXX
1XXX
Discrete inputs (read
only) 1XXXX
3XXX
Input registers (read
only) 3XXXX
4XXX
Holding/output
registers 4XXXX
f ll
Examples of possible connections are described and shown in the

19 3 1 Di
Communicat
0 i
C bl
0
0
0
1
584
PanelMate
Models without built-in Modbus require a Modbus adapter.

Communications
Cable
00
00
0
Micro84
Pane Mate
J375
Figure 19-2 Connection using Modbus Adapter
19.3.2 Multiple PLCs on a Single Modbus

If PanelMate is to communicate with multiple PLCs on a single Modbus network, each PanelMate and PLC
requires its own Modbus modem to provide the necessary interface.
The following table shows the Modicon PLCs, adapters, and cable connectors. Consult the proper Modicon
manual for any information not contained in this manual.
Communications
Cable
Modbus
-o
o
-o 0
J478
J478
584
J478
PanelMate
884
J474
484
Figure 19-3 Multiple PLCs on Modbus
Model
# Modbus ports
built-in
1
984
A&B
3
984-X
984-381/
-480/-680
2
984-380
884
584
484
,184
None
Modbus Adapter
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
I
None
i
J474
Modbus Modem
J478
J478/S978
J878
J878
J478
J478
J474/475
Cable Connector
DB-25P
DB-25P
DE-9P
Military
30-Pin
DB-9P
DS-25P
J375
J378
DB-25P
I
I
Port(s)
1,2,3
1,2
1,2
I
1
1,2
1.2
Table 19-1 Adapters & Cable Connectors for Modicon PLCs
19-2
PanelMate Series
19.4 Cabling
19.4 Cabling
Communications between PanelMate and Modbus is RS232C (in ASCII mode). The recommended
maximum cable length is 50 cable feet. You should construct a communications cable of the desired
length for each connection to be made. Note that the cable configuration is similar for the various
Modicon PLCs and modems.
for Modicon PLCs
PanelMate
All 25-Pin Modbus
Serial Ports
Ports
PanelMate
9-Pin Modbus
PanelMate
584 Military
Serial Ports
Ports
Serial Ports
Connector
2
X
Shield
4
5
5
7
4
5
7
M
G
P
8*
Hood
Shield _
Hood
20*
Hood
Hood
Shield
Shield
Hood
Hood
* 884 25-Pin only

You may also use a standard Modicon W190 cable instead of constructing your own.
For applications requiring additional Modbus ports, it is recommended that Modbus expanders be used.
Modbus Port Expanders from Panelogic, Phoenix Digital, and Modicon may be used to connect multiple
PanelMates to a single PLC. The PanelMate communications cable previously described may be used to
connect PanelMate and the PLCs to a Modbus Port Expander.

For each Modicon port used, certain parameters must be set in order to establish communications with
PanelMate. This is accomplished either through DIP switch settings on the individual module or
programming selections using the Modicon P190 Programmer.
Standard communication parameters for communicating with Modicon PLCs are:
7 data bits
1 stop bit*
9600 baud rate
ASCII mode
Parity - None
* 2 stop bits for 984-38X, 984-48X, 984-68X
PanelMate Series
19-3

The following is a summary of the information available at the time of this manual's printing, describing the
necessary settings for each of the modules. Be sure to check with Modicon for any possible updates or
changes if you encounter any difficulty.
19.6.1 984 and 584 Modbus Ports

The Modicon P190 Programmer is used to set the communications parameters of the 984 and 584
Modbus ports.
For the PLC address, use the number that coincides with the PLC ID# you have established for this
unit in the PLC Name and Port Editor.
For the mode, select ASCII.
Be sure to match the baud rate, parity, data bits, and stop bits with the entries made in the PLC
Name and Port Editor.
984-38X, -48X, -68X

The 984-38X,-48X, and -68X models contain a switch to determine whether the port will be set up using
the DIP switches or configured with the P190 programmer. See the Modicon manual for your specific
PLC for information on. the DIP switch settings.
19.6.2 884 Modbus Ports

Both Modbus ports can be configured using the Modicon P190 Programming Panel. The port 1
parameters may only be configured using the Programming Panel; however, the port 2 parameters are
DIP switch selectable.
Port 1 is factory-set to the following parameters:
Data Bits - 7 (fixed)
Mode - RTU (need to change to ASCII)
Parity - Even
Stop Bits - 1
Baud Rate - 9600
Note that PanelMate communicates in ASCII mode. Be aware that 884 models with 4-digit serial
numbers have no capability for ASCII mode communications.
Port 2 parameters may be selected using the DIP switches located at the rear of the 884. The top set
of switches is used to set the address of the PLC. This number corresponds to the PLC ID# entered
in the PLC Name and Port Editor.
Most
Significant
Bit
Least
Significant
Bit
1
*Switch up for a binary 1 (ON)

*Switch down for a binary 0 (OFF)
Example:
switch - 1
setting - 0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
1
6
0
7
1
8
1
=
PC address 11
Table 19-2 Port 2 DIP Switch Settings
19-4
PanelMate Series
The bottom set of switches is used to set communication parameters. Be sure the parameters of both the 884
and the PanelMate match.
Note
PanelMate only supports ASCII mode.
19.6.3 Micro 84/J375 Modbus Adapter

The J375 Modbus Adapter is a communications interface module for the Micro 84 PLC. The J375 provides
one RS232C port connection for use with intelligent RS232 devices. Also, port connections are provided
for the Micro 84 controller and a P370 Micro 84 Programmer.
The Modbus Adapter provides DIP switches at the rear of its case for address and system parameter
selection. The user may select the number of stop bits, parity, and baud rate. Data bits are fixed at 7.
*Switch up for a binary 1 (ON) *Switch down for a binary 0 (OFF)
switch: 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
1
1
3
0
0
1
1
0
0
4
0
1
0
1
0
1
I
i
Baud Rates
50
75
110
134.5
150
300
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
600
1200
1800
7000
2400
3600
4800
7200
9600
19200
= 8 data bits, RTU

7 data bits, ASCII
0=
1=
2 stop bits
1 stop bits
0 = odd parity
1 = even parity
0 = no parity
1=
parity selected
Figure 19-5 Switch Set 2 DIP Switch Settings

Switch set one (Sl) on the J375 determines the station address for the Micro 84. Station addresses are entered
as binary numbers, where switch 1 is of lowest significance and switch 8 is of highest significance.
PanelMate Series
19-5
Switches 1, 2, 3 and 4 of switch set two (S2) are used to configure the baud rate for the J375. The
following chart summarizes selection options.
Baud
Rate
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
19.2K
9600
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
4800
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
2400
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
1200
ON
ON
ON
OFF
600
300
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
150
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
134.5
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
110
75
Table 19-4 Baud Rates for the J375 Module

Switches 5 and 6 of switch set two (S2) are used to configure the parity for the J375. The following
table summarizes selection options.
Parity
Switch 5
Switch 6
EVEN
OFF
ON
ODD
ON
ON
NONE
ON
OFF
Table 19-3 Parity Settings for the J375 Module

Note
When communicating with PanelMate using ASCII Modbus, the parity selected must be
ODD or EVEN.
Switch 7 of switch set two (S2) is used to select the number of stop bits for the J375. With switch 7 set
ON, two stop bits are selected. With switch 7 set OFF, one stop bit is selected.
Switch 8 of switch set two (S2) selects ASCII mode when it is OFF, or RTU mode when it is ON.
When communicating with PanelMate, ASCII mode must be selected.
19-6
PanelMate Series
19.6.4 484 PLC/J474 Modbus Communication Interface

The J474 Communication Interface allows for a computer or other intelligent devices to communicate to a
484 PLC. The J474 may be connected to the Modbus or an RS232 device via a single 30-pin
connector. All user options such as baud rate, parity, and stop bits are selected by the wiring of this
connector.
The following tables include pin descriptions and selection options, for the J474 Modbus Communication
Interface.
Pin
Function
Protective Ground
Data Transmit
16
17
Binary Address 16
Stop Bit Option
Data Receive
18
Binary Address 32
Ready to Send
19
Parity Type Option
Clear to Send
20
Data Terminal Ready
Data Set Ready
21
Parity Enable
Signal Ground
22
Binary Address 64
Binary Address 1
23
Modbus Full Duplex In
Baud Rate 1
24
Binary Address 128

Modbus Full Duplex Out
Pin
Function
10
Binary Address 2
25
11
Baud Rate 2
26
Signal Ground
12
Binary Address 4
27
Modbus Data In
13
Baud Rate 4
28
Mode Select 1
14
Binary Address 8
29
Modbus Data Out
15
Baud Rate 8
30
Mode Select 2
Note: Pins 1 through 7 and 20 conform to EIA RS232C specifications.
Table 19-5 Port Pinouts for the J474 Interface
PanelMate Series
19-7
Baud rates are selected by connecting pins 9, 11, 13 and 15 to signal ground at pin 7. The following
chart summarizes selection options, where YES = connect to pin 7 and NO = leave unconnected.
Baud
Rate
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
11
13
15
50
YES
YES
YES
YES
75
NO
YES
YES
YES
110
YES
NO
YES
YES
134.5
NO
NO
YES
YES
150
YES
YES
NO
YES
300
NO
YES
NO
YES
600
YES
NO
NO
YES
1200
NO
NO
NO
YES
1800
YES
YES
YES
NO
2000
NO
YES
YES
NO
2400
YES
NO
YES
NO
3600
NO
NO
YES
NO
4800
YES
YES
NO
NO
7200
NO
YES
NO
NO
9600
YES
NO
NO
NO
19200
NO
NO
NO
NO
Table 19-6 Baud Rate Selection for the J474 Interface

The slave address is selected by connecting pins 24, 22, 18, 16, 14, 12, 10 and 8 to signal ground at
pin 26, where zero bit = connect to pin 26 and a one bit = leave unconnected. For example, the
address 26 in binary is 00011010, which requires connection of pins 24, 22, 18, 12 and 8 to pin 26, as shown
below.
Pin
Number
Pin
24
Pin
22
Pin
18
Pin
16
Pin
14
Pin
12
Pin
10
Pin
8
Binary
26
Table 19-7 Example for a Slave Address of 26
19-8
PanelMate Series
Specific modes of operation are selected by connecting pins 28 and 30 to signal ground at pin 26. The
following chart summarizes selection options where YES = connect to pin 26 and NO = leave
unconnected.
Note
PanelMate only supports ASCII mode.

Mode
Pin 28
Pin 30
ASCII
YES
YES
RTU
YES
NO
Not Valid
NO
YES
Test
NO
NO
Table 19-8 Mode Selection

The number of stop bits and parity are selected by connecting pins 17, 19 and 21 to signal ground at
pin 7. The following chart summarizes selection options where YES = connect to pin 7 and NO = leave
unconnected.
Option
Pin
17
Pin
19
Pin
21
Two stop bits, no parity
YES
YES
YES
One stop bit, no parity
NO
YES
YES
Two stop bits, no parity
YES
NO
YES
One stop bit, no parity
NO
NO
YES
Two stop bits, odd parity
YES
YES
NO
One stop bit, odd parity
NO
YES
NO
Two stop bits, even parity
YES
NO
NO
One stop bit, even parity
NO
NO
NO
Table 19-9 Stop Bit and Parity Selection
PanelMate Series
19-9

A single format for referencing PLC words is used throughout the PanelMate template editors. When
ever you need to refer to a specific PLC word in any expression, the following format is required.
Note
where
Parameters, for more information regarding this name. If
this name is omitted, the default PLC name is assumed. (The default PLC is
defined in the PLC and Port Parameters Table.) This field is optional.
for specific Modicon PLCs.
S16
U16
U32*
BCD3
999.
BCD4
9999.
BCD6*
BCD8*
19-10
PanelMate Series
BIN3
BIN4
BINS*
range allowed.

need to refer to a specific PLC bit in any expression or control button definition, the following format
is required:
Note
where
[plcnam,bit]
Parameters, for more information regarding this name. If this name is omitted,
the default PLC name is assumed. (The default PLC is defined in the PLC
Names and Port Parameters Editor.) This field is optional.
nomenclature of the PLC defined by the plcnam. -Consult the following
specific Modicon PLCs.
PanelMate Series
19-11

19.8.1 Modicon Micro 84, 184, 384 and 484 Register, Input and Coil
References
The Modicon PLCs listed above use decimal addresses. The PanelMate format default is BIN3. The
following list contains the memory types supported by PanelMate.
OXXX
Coils/discrete outputs
1XXX
Discrete inputs (read only)
3XXX
Input registers (read only)
4XXX
Holding/output registers

[rr]
rr

The following is the format for an input reference. [ii]
ii
PLC reference number for an input reference. The

following is the format for a coil reference. [cc]
cc
PLC reference number for a coil reference.
PanelMate cannot write to inputs or input registers. Therefore, all control button PLC bit references in the
PanelMate editors refer to Modicon coils.
Bit references in expressions refer to Modicon coils or inputs. All
references to words refer to Modicon registers.
Modicon PLC model Micro84 can read up to 16 words per read cycle. Models 184 and 484 will allow a
maximum of 25 contiguous words per read. The maximum number of unused words for the three above
mentioned PLCs is 10. PanelMate generates another read when more than 10 unused PLC words are
encountered.
19-12
PanelMate Series
19.8.2 Modicon 584, 884 and 984 Register, Input and Coil References
The Modicon PI-Cs listed above use decimal word addresses. The PanelMate format default is BIN4. The
following list contains the memory types supported by PanelMate.
OXXXX Coils/discrete outputs 1XXXX
Discrete inputs (read only) 3XXXX
Input registers (read only) 4XXXX
Holding/output registers
Note
Bits within holding/output registers are read only.

[rr]
rr
PLC reference number of the register. The

following is the format for an input reference. [ii]
ii
PLC reference number for an input reference. The

following is the format for a coil reference. [cc]
cc
PLC reference number for a coil reference.
The following is the format for a register bit reference. [rr bb]
rr
bb

Note that leading 0's are not required.

Note
PanelMate cannot write to inputs or input registers. Therefore, all control button PLC bit references in the
PanelMate editors refer to Modicon coils.
Bit references in expressions refer to Modicon coils or inputs. All
references to words refer to Modicon registers.
The Modicon PLC models 584, 884 and 984 allow up to 25 contiguous words per single read. The maximum
number of unused words is 10. PanelMate generates another read when more than 10 unused PLC
words are encountered.
PanelMate Series
19-13
Examples
Word References
Reference
[40010]
Description
Output register 40010
[30001]
Input register 30001

Bit References
19-14
Reference
[25]
Description
Coil 25
[10009]
Discrete input 10009
[40098 16]
Bit 16 of output register 40098
PanelMate Series
Chapter 20. Reliance AutoMate PI-Cs
20.1 Introduction
PanelMate can be used with any of the programmable controllers in the current Reliance AutoMate
family using the Reliance driver. (PanelMate does not support the earlier AutoMate 35 PLC.)
The driver takes responsibility for communications to the programmable controller, generating the
protocol necessary to request information from, and send information to the PLC. No ladder logic is
required in the PLC to support the interface to PanelMate.
PanelMate supports three types of connections to Reliance PLCs:
To the R-Net using a Gateway
To the serial communications card
Direct to the PLC processor programming port
All three types of connections use the same cable type and the "node.slot" format for PanelMate's PLC
ID#.
Each PLC is addressed by a node number and a slot number. This address is entered in PanelMate as
the PLC ID# in the PLC Name and Port Table using the format "node.slot" (e.g., 22.3). The period is
required. The node and slot number to use depends on the type of connection being used to access the
PLC. This is explained in greater detail in the sections that follow. The slot number is simply the slot
in which the processor card being addressed resides. Be aware that, in an AutoMate system using a 3-slot
power supply, slot 1 is not available.
When using the CRT or Mini Programmer to configure the PLC, check for the following:
PanelMate Series
Selection:
Node #:
(This is the PLC ID#)
Max Node:
(Should always be one greater than Node #)
Configuration:
20-1
20.2 Memory
20.2 Memory
Reliance
Valid Bit Ranges
Vaid Register Ranges
Low
High
Low
High
0.00
15.7
0
1000
15
1067
20
0.00
76.17
0
2000
76
2777
30/30E
0.00
2000.00
20000.00
76.17
3777.17
21!!1.17
0
2000
20000
76
3777
27777
40
0.00
1600.00
20000.00
177.17
17677.17
157775.17
0
1600
20000
177
17677
157775
40E
0.00
20000.00
17677.17
157775.17
0
20000
17677
157775
Model
15

This table shows the maximum amount of memory available for the specific Reliance model. Your PLC
may or may not have the maximum amount of memory.

Examples of possible configurations are described and shown in the following pages.
20.3.1 Direct
The RS232 port on the PLC may be used to make a direct connection to the processor. The processor port
has a fixed baud rate of 9600. (A few AutoMate 20 PLCs have a 9600/1200 option.) The PLC node number
is set through the programming port using a programming terminal, and is stored in non-volatile
memory. Since communications is direct, the slot designation is always zero.
Example:
Processor ID# = 5
PanelMate PLC ID# = 5.0
A PanelMate connected directly to the programming port of an AutoMate 20 PLC should be deactivated before
starting up the PLC. This model PLC stops if it receives a command from the programming port in the first
few seconds after starting up. PanelMate may be deactivated by either disconnecting the cable from the
programming port or by putting the PanelMate in configuration mode.
Communications
Cable
000
00
Reliance
CI
Figure 20-1 Direct Connection
20-2
PanelMate Series
20.3.2 Serial Communications Card

A serial communication card may be placed in a rack with one or more Reliance PLC processors. The
default PLC ID# for the serial communication card on PanelMate will be in the form of "node.
slot", where the node number is the slot where the serial communication card resides, and the slot number
is the slot where the processor resides. The default baud rates on the top, middle and bottom port on
the card are 9600, 4800 and 1200, respectively. Both the node number and the baud rates on the serial
communications card can be changed by either PLC logic or by using a programming terminal.
Example:
Serial communications card in slot 2; processor in slot 1.
PanelMate's PLC ID# = 2.1
Communications
00 00
0
Cable
Serial
Comm
Card
Reliance
AutoMate PLC
Figure 20-2 Serial Card Connection

R-Net is the network used by Reliance for its PLCs. To access the network, PanelMate must have a
port connected to a Gateway. The Gateway must, in turn, be connected to an R-Net processor. Refer to the
Reliance documentation for details on these devices and their connections. PanelMate will have access
to every node in the network to which the R-Net processor is connected.
To access a particular PLC in the network, use the node number of the R-Net processor residing in the same
rack as the PLC. The node number of the R-Net processor is determined by the switch settings on the front
panel of the R-Net processor. The node number is given in hexadecimal on the front panel.
Communications R-Net
Reliance
Cable
Gateway AutoMate PLC
R-Net
Processor
R-Net Cable
Figure 20-3 R-Net Connection
PanelMate Series
20-3
20.4 Cabling
20.4 Cabling
The communication between PanelMate and Reliance AutoMate PLCs is RS232C, and has a recommended maximum cable length of 50 cable feet. You should construct a PanelMate communication
cable of the desired length for each connection. All PanelMate and Reliance AutoMate ports are
female 25-pin (DB-25S). Therefore, the connectors on the cables must be male 25-pin (DB-25P).
for Reliance AutoMate PLCs
PanelMate
(Male) DB-25P
Relianace AutoMate
(Male) DB-25P
6
8
20
Hood
Shield
Hood
Figure 20-4 RS232C Cabling for Reliance PLCs

The standard communications parameters for communicating with Reliance AutoMate PLCs are: 8
Data bits
1 Stop bit
No Parity
9600 Baud
20-4
PanelMate Series

20.6.1 Serial Communications Card
This card must be set to the correct baud rate unless you use the default value on one of the three
ports (9600, 4800, 1200). The card uses its slot number as its node number by default. Both the default baud
rate and the node number may be changed either by changing it in a program in the PLC or by means of a
programming terminal.
20.6.2 R-Net Gateway

The port parameters may be set on the Gateway using the switches located inside the module. The following
figure shows the DIP switch locations.
S3
00000001
0000000
Figure 20-5 Gateway Switch Locations

The Gateway must be connected to an R-Net Processor. This processor must be set to a unique node
number. To do this, set the node number using the rotary switches on the front panel of the processor.
Remember that the node number is entered here in hexadecimal. The upper rotary switch is used for the
high-order digit and the lower switch for the low-order digit.
PanelMate Series
20-5
Switch Position
On
Off
S i-1
S1-2
S1-3
S1-4
S1-5
Illegal
Illegal
8 Data bits*
Parity on
Parity even
Asynchronus*
Binary*
7 Data bits
Parity off*
Parity odd*
* Default value
Table 20-2 Port Configuration
Baud Rate
110
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600*
19200 (see
S2-6)
S1-6
S1-7
S1-8
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
* Default value
Table 20-3 Baud Rate Selection
Switch Position
Function
On
Off
S2-4
S2-5
S2-6
S2-7
S2-8
Receive clk
I/O Port
19200 baud
Not used
Not used
External
RS422
1937Hz**
-
Internal*
RS232*
18750Hz***
-
*
Default value
** +2.8 % *** 2.3%
Table 20-4 Port Configuration
20-6
PanelMate Series

Note
where
plcnam, The 6-character (or less) name of the designated PLC, as defmed in the PLC and
Port Parameters Table, followed by a comma. Consult chapter 9, Defining
omitted, the default PLC name is assumed. (The default PLC is defined in
the PLC and Port Parameters Table.) This field is optional.
for specific Reliance PLCs.
Signed, 16-bit integer where the number can range from -32768 to 32767; the high
order bit is the sign.
U16
U32*
BCD3
BCD4
9999.
BCD6*
BCD8*
PanelMate Series
20-7
BINS
BIN4
BIN8*
range allowed.
scale values in PanelMate so that the operator enters and reads negative numbers, but a positive
integer will be read from or written to the PLC.

required:
[plcnam,bit]
Note
where
The 6-character (or less) name of the designated PLC, as defined in the
plcnam, PLC and Port Parameters Table, followed by a comma. Consult chapter 9, Defining
the PLC Names and Port Parameters Editor.) This field is optional.
specific Reliance PLCs.
20-8
PanelMate Series
20.8 PLC Specific Word and Bit Reference
20.8 PLC Specific Word and Bit Reference

20.8.1 Reliance Word and Bit References
Reliance AutoMate PLCs use octal register addresses. The PanelMate format default is S16. The
following is the format for a register reference:
[rr]
rr
The following is the format for a register bit reference:
rr
bb
Note
[rr]
bb]
PLC reference number of the bit.
A period (.) must be between the register and bit reference numbers.
The table at the beginning of this chapter shows the maximum amount of memory available for the
specific Reliance model. Your PLC may or may not have the maximum amount of memory.
Examples
Word References
Description
Reference
[12]
Word 12 of Reliance Model 15
[2533]
[21333]
Word 21333 of Reliance Model 30/30E
[163]
[2051]
Word 2051 of Reliance Model 40E
Bit References
Reference
[2.3]
[42.5]
[14.6]
[4000.16]
[284.7]
PanelMate Series
Description
Word 2 bit 3 of Reliance Model 15
Word 14 bit 6 of Reliance Model 30/30E
Word 284 bit 7 of Reliance Model 40E
20-9
Chapter 21. Siemens PLCs
21.1 Introduction
Using the CP524 or CP525 communications coprocessor, PanelMate can be communicate with any of the
Siemens S5 U family of PLCs. The CP524 and CP525 communications coprocessor uses the 3964R protocol.
The CP525 has two independent serial ports. The CP524 has only one serial port. (All references to the
CP525 will include the CP524 unless otherwise noted.) The driver takes responsibility for communications to
this programmable controller, generating the protocol necessary to request information from and send
information to the PLC.
Unsolicteds are not supported and should not be used. When writiing to bit or byte addresses that do not exist ,
no errors will be generated. This section describes the basic configuration of Siemens PLCs and PanelMate.
The Siemens driver supports models S5-115U, S5-135U and S5-155U.
21.2 Memory
The following list contains the memory types supported by the Siemens driver. D
Data Block
I
Input (Read only)
Flag
Counter (Read only)
Output
Timer (Read only)
Note
Absolute, System and Extended memory areas are not supported.
There are several rack models within the Siemens S5 family of products. Each rack model can have
differenct CPUs. Each CPU model may have different memory limits. The maximum address value for
each of the supported PLC models is given in the following tables.
CPU 944
CPU 943
CPU 942
CPU 941
Data Block
256
256
256
256
Inputs
1024
1024
1024
1024
Flags
2048
2048
2048
2048
Counters
128
128
128
128
Outputs
1024
1024
1024
1024
Timers
128
128
128
128
Table 21-1 S5-115U CPU and Memory Configurations
PanelMate Series
21-1
21.2 Memory
CPU 928
(R Processor)
CPU 922
CPU 921
(S Processor)
CPU 920
(M Processor)
Data Blocks
256
256
256
256
Inputs
4096
4096
4096
4096
Flags
2048
2048
2048
Counters
256
128
128
Outputs
4096
4096
4096
Timers
256
128
128
4096
CPU 946/7
(R Processor)
CPU 922
CPU 921
(S Processor)
CPU 920
(M Processor)
Data Block
256
256
256
256
Inputs
4096
4096
4096
4096
Flags
2048
2048
2048
2048
Counters
256
128
128
Outputs
4096
4096
4096
Timers
256
128
128
4096

Note
Inputs, Outputs and Flags limits are given in bits. A - indicates that the memory area is not
supported by the CPU model.
The S5-135U and S5-155U can operate in a multiprocessor configuration using either the M, S, R
processors or CPU 928. These processors can also be used in stand-alone mode in the S5-155U. The
following is a brief description of each processor.
CPU928 This processor is designed for multiple tasks: it provides fast binary signal processing
(open-loop control) as well as fast word processing (computing and closedloop control).
M Processor
This processor is used for data processing, arithmetic and statistics.
R Processor
This processor is used mainly for fast word processing (computing and closedloop control). It can also be used for binary signal processing.
S Processor
This processor is used mainly for fast binary signal processing (open-loop
control). It can also be used for computing and closed-loop control.
21-2
PanelMate Series

The following sections describe some of the possible configurations of PanelMate with Siemens PLCs.
21.3.1 Direct Connection

Direct connection between one PanelMate and one Siemens PLC.
Communications
Cable
0
=o
0
-o
P
5
2
4
Yin
S5-115U
Panel Mate
21.3.2 Multiple Connection

The following figure shows a multiple connnection consisting of two PanelMates and a Siemens PLC.
000
00
Communications
Cable
PanelMate
C
P 5
25
S5-155U
Communications
Cable
000
00
PanelMate
Figure 21-1 Multiple Connection
PanelMate Series
21-3
21.4 Cablin
21.4 Cabling
The Siemens driver supports RS232C communications only. The following figure shows the cable
configuration between PanelMate and CP524 and CP525.
PanelMate
CP524 and CP525
(Male) 25-Pin
2
(Male) 9-Pin
233
7 ____________________ 7
Figure 21-3 PanelMate to Processor Cabling

The default communications parameters are shown below. If you intend to use any baud rate other than the
default, you must use the Siemens programmer to change it. The data bits, parity, and stop bits must be
set as shown below and cannot be changed on the Siemens PLC.
Data bits
Parity
Even
Stop bits
Note The baud rate is configurable to these settings: 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600, 300 and 110. When
using a CP525, the sum of the baud rate on the two serial ports must not exceed 19200. In all
cases, configure PanelMate's serial port to match the selected baud rate.
Note that in order for PanelMate and the Siemens PLC to communicate, the Siemens PLC must be
set to the higher priority. The Siemens SEND-ALL and RECEIVE-ALL functions must be executing
in the CPU.
21-4
PanelMate Series
21.6 Word and Bit

References
21.6 Word and Bit References 21.6.1 Word References
A single format for referencing PLC words is used throughout the PanelMate template
editors. Whenever you need to refer to a specific PLC word in any expression, the
following format is required.
Note plcnam, and #format are optional
fields where
plcnam, The 6-character (or less) name of the designated PLC, as defined in the
PLC Name and Port Parameter Table, followed by a comma.
Consult chapter 9, Defining System Parameters, for more
information regarding this name. If this name is omitted, the default
PLC name is assumed. (The default PLC is defined in the PLC
Name and Port Editor.) This field is optional.
word The actual PLC reference number of the word to be read or written, using the
addressing nomenclature of the PLC defined by the plcnam. Consult
the following sections for more information about word reference
numbers as they are used for specific Siemen PLCs.
#format The 3- or 4-character code that specifies the format to be assumed for the
data being read or written, preceded by a number sign (#). If this
format is omitted, default formats will be used.
The formats that PanelMate recognizes
are: S16
Signed, 16-bit integer where the number can range from -32768 to
32767; the high order bit is the sign.
U16
Unsigned, 16-bit integer where the number can range from 0 to
65535. S32*
Signed, 32-bit integer where the number can range from 2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647; the high order bit is the sign.
U32*
Unsigned, 32-bit integer where the number can range from 0 to
4,294,967,295. BCD3
3-digit binary-coded decimal number where the number can range
from 0 to 999.
BCD4
4-digit binary-coded decimal number where the number can range
from 0 to 9999.
BCD6*
6-digit binary-coded decimal number stored in two contiguous
BIN3
BIN4
BINS*
range allowed.

required:
[plcnam,bit]
Note
where
specific Siemen PLCs.
21-6
PanelMate Series
21.7 PLC Specific Word, Byte and Bit References

21.7.1 Siemens Word, Byte, and Bit References
The Siemens driver supports models S5-115U, S5-135U and S5-155U. These models use decimal
register addresses and bit offsets.
Note that there is a one or two-character prefix which identifies the type of variable being referenced
followed by the specific number of the variable. The following list contains the memory types by supported
the Siemens driver.
C
Counter (Read only)
Timer (Read only)
DW
Data Word Flag Word
FW
Input Word (Read only)
1W
Output Word Left Byte in
QW
Data Word Right Byte in
DL
Data Word
DR
FY
Flag Byte
IB
Input Byte
QB
Output Byte
Data Bit
Flag Bit
Input Bit
Output Bit
The prefixes are used to identify the usage of the variable to the Siemens PLC.
Word References
The following is the format for a data word memory reference.
[mddd:www]
m
Word memory type symbol (i.e., DW).
ddd
Data block number [3-255]; 3-digit maximum, leading zeroes allowed.
www
Word offset within data block [0-255]; 3-digit maximum, leading zeroes allowed.
The following is the format for a word memory reference or a register (16-bit word) reference in timer
or counter memory (read only).
[m:wwwl
m
www
PanelMate Series
Word memory type symbol (i.e, 1W, FW, QW, T, C).

Word, timer, or counter number [0-255]; 3 digit maximum, leading zeroes
allowed. (Input words are read only).
21-7
-21.7 PLC Specific Word, Byte and Bit References
Byte References
The following is the format for a data byte memory reference.
[mddd:www]
m
ddd
www
Byte memory type symbol (i.e., DL, DR).

Data block number [3-255]; 3-digit maximum, leading zeroes allowed.
Word number [0-255]; 3 digit maximum, leading zeroes allowed. (Input bytes are
read only).
The following is the format for a byte memory reference.

[m:bbb]
m
bbb
Byte memory type symbol (i.e., IB, FY, QB).

Byte number [0-255]; 3 digit maximum, leading zeroes allowed. (Input bytes are
read only).
Bit References
The following is the format for a data bit reference within a data block.
[mddd:www.t]
m
bbb
byte memory type symbol (i.e., D).

byte number [0-255]; 3 digit maximum, leading zeroes allowed.
bit number [0-7]; 1 digit maximum. The
following is the format for a bit reference within a byte.

[m:bbb.t]
m
bbb
t
21-8
byte memory type symbol (i.e., I, F, Q).

byte number [0-255]; 3 digit maximum, leading zeroes allowed. (Input bits are read
only).
bit number [0-7]; 1 digit maximum.
PanelMate Series
Since the 3964R Protocol does not support bit and byte writes, the following is a Bit/Byte Write function block
is required. It allows PanelMate to write to data word bits, output bits, flag bits, and data word bytes.
PanelMate writes directly to Data Block 230. Data Block 230 must exist in the PLC and be ten words in
length.
The Bit/Byte Write program uses flag words 200-210.
Note
ADDRESS
DESCRIPTION
COMMAND
OOOB
BIT/BYTE WRITE FUCNTION BLOCK.
000C
************************************
OOOD
000E
:C
DB 230
CALLS DATA BLOCK 230.
OOOF
0010
OUTPUT BIT WRITE ROUTINE.

******************************
0011
0012
:L
KM 00000000
0014
:L
DW 1
0015
:<=F
0016
:JC
00000000
LOAD MASK INTO ACCUM1.

GET DW1 (PANELMATE 0 BIT WRITES).
TEST TO SEE IF BIT WRITE REQUESTED.
=M001
IF BIT WRITE PRESENT .. CONTINUE
0017
ELSE JUMP OVER SUBROUTINE.
0018
0019
:T
FW 200
001A
:L
KM 00000111
001C
:AW
001 D
:T
000E
TRANSFER DATA TO FW200 (FASTER).

01111111
STRIP ALL BUT BIT # AND ADDRESS

AND MASK WITH DATA.
FW 202
TRANSFER RESULT INTO FW202.
F 210.0
RESET THE FIRST OPERATION BIT.
001 F
:A
F 200.4
CHECK FOR SET/RSET = = > INTO ROL.
0020
:DO
FW 202
LOAD BIT AND WORD ADDR OF OUTPUT.
0021
COPY ROL VALUE INTO OUTPUT BIT.
0023
:L
KH 0000
ZERO OUT DW1 IN DB230 SO ANOTHER
0025
:T
DW 1
BIT WRITE CAN BE PREFORMED.
0.0
0022
0026
0027
0028
0029
FLAG BIT WRITE ROUTINE.
002A
***************************
M00
1
002B
:L
KM 00000000
002D
:L
DW 2
002E
:<=F
PanelMate Series
00000000

GET DW2 (PANELMATE F BIT WRITES).
21-9
ADDRESS
COMMAND
DESCRIPTION
002F
:JC
= M002
0030
0031
0032
:T
FW 200
0033
:L
KM 00000111
0035
:AW
0036
:T
FW 202
TRANSFER RESULT INTO FW202.
0037
.=
F 210.0
RESET THE FIRST OPERATION BIT.
0038
:A
F 200.4
CHECK FOR SET/RSET = = > INTO ROL.
0039
:DO
FW 202
LOAD BIT AND WORD ADDR OF OUTPUT.
003A
.=
COPY ROL VALUE INTO FLAG BIT.
003C
:L
KH 0000
003E
:T
DW 2
11111111

AND MASK WITH DATA.
0.0
003B
003F
0040
0041
0042
DATA BIT WRITE ROUTINE.
0043 M002
***************************
0044
:L
KM 00000000
0046
:L
DW 3
0047
:<=F
0048
:JC
00000000

GET DW3 (PANELMATE DATA BIT WRITES).
=M003
0049
004A
21-10
004B
:T
FW 200
004C
:L
KM 00001111
004E
:AW
004F
:T
FW 202
TRANSFER RESULT INTO FW202
0050
:T
FW 206
AND FW206.
0051
:DO DW 4
G E T TH E D B # A N D
0052
:C
DB 0
CALL THE DB #.
0053
:L
FY 202
LOAD BIT AND WORD ADDR.
0054
:L
KM 00000000
0056
:>F
0057
:JC
= M004
IF SO JUMP TO M004 (LO BYTE DATA BIT)
0058
:L
KB 209
ELSE SET UP FY207'S LO DATA BIT.
0059
:T
FY 207

11111111

AND MASK WITH DATA.
00000111
LOAD THE MASK TO RETRIEVE THE BIT ADDR.

IS THE BIT ADDR BETWEEN 0-7.
PanelMate Series
ADDRESS
COMMAND
DESCRIPTION
005A
:JU = M005
JUMP OVER HI DATA BIT SETUP.
:L
KB 208
SET UP FY207'S HI DATA BIT.
:T
FY 207
005B
M004
005C
005D
M005
: L FW 202
LOAD BIT AND ADDRESS.
005E
: L KM 00000000
0060
:AW
0061
:T FW 202
TRANSFER TO FW202 FOR SPEED.
0062
:DO FW 202
SET UP FOR LW TO GET THE DATA WORD.
0063
:L DW 0
LOAD THE DATA WORD INTO ACCUM1.
0064
:T FW 208
TRANSFER THE CURRENT VALUE TO FW208.
0065
.=
F 210.0
RESET FIRST OPERATION BIT.
0066
:A
F 200.4
CHECK TO SEE IF SET OR RESET IS
0067
:DO FW 206
0068
:=
0069
: L FW 208
LOAD FW W/ BIT CHANGED
006A
:DO FW 202
AND TRANSFER IT BACK TO ITS
006B
:T DW 0
ORIGINAL DW.
006C
:C DB 230
CALL ORIGINAL DATA BLOCK.
006D
:L
006F
:T DW 3
DATA BYTE HI WRITE ROUTINE.
11111111
MASK OUT ADDRESS.
PREFORMED AND SET OR RESET THE

0.0
CORRESPONDING BIT.
KH 0000
0070
0071
0072
0073
0074
********************************
M003
0075
: L KM 00000000
0077
:L DW 6
CHECK TO SEE IF DATA BYTE HI WRITE
0078
:!=F
WRITE WAS REQUESTED CONTINUE IF YES
0079
:JC = M006
007A
:L DW 5
LOAD THE DATA BYTE ADDR.
007B
:T FW 200
TRANSFER IT TO FW200 FOR SPEED.
007C
:DO DW 6
SET UP TO CALL THE DB.
007D
:C DB 0
CALL THE DB.
007E
:L
LOAD THE WORD ADDR.
007F
:T FW 202
0080
:DO FW 202
0081
:L DW 0
0082
:L KM 00000000
PanelMate Series
00000000
FY 201
LOAD MASK.
SET UP TO LOAD THE DATA WORD.
LOAD THE DATA WORD.

11111111
MASK OUT THE HI BYTE.
21-11
ADDRESS
COMMAND
0084
:AW
0085
:L
0086
:SLW
0087
:OW
0088
:DO
FW 202
TRANSFER THE WORD BACK TO ITS
0089
:T
DW 0
ORIGINAL LOCATION.
008A
:C
DB 230
CALL BACK DB23.
0008B
:L
KH 0000
008D
:T
DW 6
DATA BYTE HI WRITE CAN BE PERFORMED.
DESCRIPTION
FY 200
LOAD THE DATA BYTE.
ROTATE IT INTO POSITION.

MERGE OLD LO AND NEW HI BYTES.
008E
008F
0090
21-12
0091
DATA BYTE LO WRITE ROUTINE.
0092 M006
*********************************
0093
:L
KM 00000000
0095
:L
DW 8
0096
:!=F
0097
:JC
= M007
0098
:L
DW 7
LOAD THE DATA BYTE ADDR.
0099
:T
FW 200
TRANSFER IT TO FW200 FOR SPEED.
009A
:DO DW 8
SET UP TO CALL THE DB.
009B
:C
DB 0
CALL THE DB.
009C
:L
FY 201
LOAD THE WORD ADDR.
009D
:T
FW 202
SET UP TO LOAD THE DATA WORD.
009E
:DO
FW 202
009F
:L
DW 0
OOAO
:L
KM 11111111
00A2
:AW
00A3
:L
00A4
:OW
00A5
:DO
FW 202
MERGE OLD HI AND NEW LO BYTES.
00A6
:T
DW 0
TRANSFER THE WORD BACK TO ITS
00A7
:C
DB 230
ORIGINAL LOCATION.
00A8
:L
KH 0000
CALL BACK DB230.
OOAA
:T
DW 8
OOAB M007
;BE
00000000
LOAD MASK.
CHECK TO SEE IF DATA BYTE LO WRITE
WRITE WAS REQUESTED CONTINUE IF YES
FY 200
LOAD THE DATA WORD.

00000000
MASK OUT THE LO BYTE.
LOAD THE DATA BYTE.

ROTATE IT INTO POSITION.
DATA BYTE LO WRITE CAN BE PREFORMED.
PanelMate Series
Examples
The following are examples of valid PLC references which may be assigned in the PanelMate expression
fields.
Word References
Reference
[C:3]
Description
Counter 3
[DW13:155]
Data block 13, word 155
[FW:4]
Flag block 4
[IW:46]
Input block 46
[QW:005]
Output block 5
[T:242]
Timer 242
Byte References
Reference
[DL12:004]
Description
Left byte in data word 4, data block 12
[DR22:192]
Right byte in data word 192, data block 22
[IB:013]
Input byte 13
[FY:251]
[QB:245]
Flag byte 15
Output byte 245
Bit References
PanelMate Series
Reference
[D:17:32.15]
Description
Data block 17, word 32, bit 15
[F:16.4]
Flag byte 16, bit 4
[1:96.4]
Input byte 96, bit 4
[Q:75.2]
Output byte 75, bit 2
21-13
Chapter 22. Square D PLCs
22.1 Introduction
PanelMate can be used with any of the Square D Sy/Max family of PLCs, using the Square D driver. The
driver takes responsibility for communications to this programmable controller, generating the protocol
necessary to request information from and send information to the PLC.
This section describes the basic configuration of Square D PLCs and PanelMate. More information on
the Square D modules can be found in the appropriate Square D Instruction Bulletin.
The Square D PLC driver supports models 100, 300, 400, 500, 600, and 700. The SY/MAX protocol must be
used for each of the above mentioned models. No special ladder logic is required in the PLC to support the
interface. Direct connection to the processor and network communications, using the Network Interface
Module (NIM), are supported. Write broadcasting is also supported by this driver.
Note
The Square D Sy/Max Model 100 requires the use of a NIM module.
The following Square D route assignments can be used: 00-199 for normal network routing, 200 to read
the NIM status, and 233-254 for network broadcasting capabilities.
22.2 Memory
The following list contains the memory types supported by the Square D driver. S
Storage register
R
Internal relay logic
External I/O
External output
External input
The maximum address range for each of the supported PLC models is given in the following table.
Model
Address Range
100
1-44 words
300
1-112 words
400
1-8000 words
500
1-2008 words
600
1-8000 words
700
1-8000 words
Table 22-1 Address Ranges
PanelMate Series
22-1

The following sections describe some of the possible configurations of PanelMate with Square D PLCs.
Network to network communication is not supported by the Eaton IDT Square D driver.
22.3.1 Direct
Direct connection between PanelMate and the processor.
0 0
0 0
0
Square D
Processor
III
Panel Mate

Note
When using a direct connection between PanelMate and the Square D processor, the minimum
baud rate for proper operation is 1200.
22.3.2 Network
The following figure shows a network consisting of two devices and a PanelMate.
NIM
0
0
0
0
0
NIM
2
0
SQRD 1
0
0
SORD 2
1
PanelMate
Figure 22-2 Network Connection
22-2
PanelMate Series
22.4 Cabling
22.4 Cabling
The Square D driver supports RS422 communications only. The following tables show the pinouts for
the processor module ports and NIM ports. These pinouts should be used for creating the communications
cables.
Pin Signal
1 RS422 TxD (-) 2
RS422 TxD (+ ) 3
RS422 RxD (-) 4
RS422 RxD (+ ) 5
+5V 6 +5V 7 Signal
GND 8 Signal GND
9 Chassis GND (shield)
Figure 22-3 Square D Processor Port Pinouts
Pin Signal
1 RS422 TxD (-) 2
RS422 TxD (+ ) 3
RS422 RxD (-) 4
RS422 RxD (+ ) 5
C T S ( + ) 6 RTS (+
) 7 CTS (-) 8 RTS (-)
9 Chassis GND (shield)
Figure 22-4 Square D NIM Port Pinouts
PanelMate Series
22-3
The following figures show the cable configuration between PanelMate and Square D modules.
PanelMate
Square D
(Male) 25-Pin
9
(Male) 9-Pin
1*
10
22
23
2*
_______________ - 4**
3**
15
17
Hood _____
Shield ____________
Hood
* Shielded twisted pair

**Shielded twisted pair
Figure 22-5 PanelMate to Processor Cabling

PanelMate
(Male) 25-Pin
Square 0
(Male) 9-Pin
9 _________________ - 1*
10
2*
22
4**
23
15
3**
5
17
6
7
8
Hood_____
Shield
Hood
* Shielded twisted pair

**Shielded twisted pair
Figure 22-6 PanelMate to NIM Cabling

The default communications parameters are shown below. If you intend to use any baud rate other
than the default with a direct connection, you must use the Square D programmer to change it. The
data bits, parity, and stop bits must be set as shown below and cannot be changed on the Square D PLC:
22-4
Baud rate
9600
Data bits
Parity
Even
Stop bits
PanelMate Series

The NIM is the only part of the network described earlier that has switches which need to be set for
proper communications. Two types of switches reside on the NIM; thumbwheel and DIP.
Note
The settings for parameters, such as baud rate, must match the parameter setting of the
PanelMate.
22.6.1 Thumbwheel Switches

The two thumbwheel switches, shown in the following figure, are used to select the module address on
the network. The module address is the same number that will be entered in the PLC Name and Port
Editor as the PLC ID#. For example, in the following figure, the PLC ID# should be 23.
The number set on the thumbwheel switches and the port number are used as the Network ID# in the
PLC Name and Port Editor. The port number is used as a prefix on the front of the number on the
thumbwheels. For example, if the thumbwheels are set to 23, the Network ID# for COM ports 0 and 1
would be 023 and 123, respectively.
DI
IVY
A1ax
NETWORK
RxB
TxB
Rxi
Txl
NET Rx ERROR
NET Tx ERROR
POWER
NETWORK
Thumbwheel \ Switches
COMM 0
INTERFACE
NUMBER
NETWORK
DEVICE
NUMBER
COMM 1
NETWORK
INTERFACE
Figure 22-7 NIM
PanelMate Series
22-5
22.6.2 DIP Switches

The NIM has three DIP switches which are mounted at the rear of the module near the card edge connector. The
three DIP switches are labeled S3, S4, and S5. These switches are used to set the network baud rate, COM port
baud rate, and mode of operation for COM ports 0 and 1.
DIP Switch S3
A special network port, on the bottom of the NIM, is used for high speed network communications. DIP switch S3
selects the network baud rate for network port. The cable length to be used determines the maximum baud rate.
The following table shows the maximum cable length for each switch selectable baud rate.
Switch Position
Max Cable
Baud Rate
Length (feet)
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
500,000
250,000
2,400
4,250
Closed
Closed
Open
Closed
125,000
9,250
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
62,500
15,000
Table 22-2 DIP Switch S3
DIP Switches S4 and S5

DIP switches S4 and S5 will allow you to select the mode of operation, baud rate, self test, and network
size for COM ports 1 and 0, respectively. The following description covers both DIP switches.
Switch position one selects whether broadcast messages on the network should be received by the COM port.
Switch Position 1
Function
Open
Disable receive broadcast
Closed
Enable receive broadcast
Table 22-3 DIP Switches S4 and S5

Note The function of this switch changes depending on the mode selected (described later). The function given
above for this switch position is for the SY/MAX mode of operation. When using a SY/MAX family
CRT in the peripheral mode, this switch should be closed.
22-6
PanelMate Series
Switch positions two and three select the mode of operation. PanelMate supports the SY/MAX mode only.
Therefore, both of these switch positions should be in the closed state. The following table shows the
possible mode selections.
Switch Position
2
Mode
Closed
Open
Closed
Closed
SY/MAX
Net to Net
Closed
Open
8881
Open
Open
Peripheral

Switch positions four, five, and six select the COM port baud rate. The following table shows the
possible baud rates.
Switch Position
4
Baud Rate
Closed
Open
Open
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
19,200
9,600
2,400
1,200
300

Switch position seven on DIP switch S4 selects either normal operation or self test. The self test mode is
used only for testing ports, RAM, and ROM on the NIM. The following table shows the possible
switch selections.
Function
Switch Position 7
Open
Normal operation
Closed
Self test

The procedure for running the self test is described in the Square D Instruction Bulletin for your NIM.
PanelMate Series
22-7
Switch position seven on DIP switch S5 sets the network size. The following table shows the possible
network size selections.
Switch Position 7
Open
Closed
Function
Network size = 100 (00-99)
Network size = 31 (00-30)

Note Reducing the network size to 31 modules will improve network access by a factor of three. Also, all
modules on a network should have the same setting for this switch position. If this switch
position on any of the modules is set to the closed state, the entire network size will be set to a
maximum of 31.

Note
where
plcnam, The 6-character (or less) name of the designated PLC, as defined in the PLC Name and
Port Parameter Table, followed by a comma. Consult chapter 9, Defining System
default PLC name is assumed. (The default PLC is defined in the PLC Name
and Port Editor.) This field is optional.
nomenclature of the PLC defined by the plcnam. Consult the following sections
for more information about word reference numbers as they are used for
specific Square D PLCs.
U16
22-8
PanelMate Series
U32*
BCD3
3-digit binary-coded decimal number where the number can range from 0
to 999.
BCD4
4-digit binary-coded decimal number where the number can range from 0
to 9999.
BCD6*
digits per register, where the number can range from 0 to 999,999. BCD8* .
8-digit binary-coded decimal number stored in two contiguous registers
BIN3
3-digit decimal
number where the number can range from 0 to 999.
BIN4
4-digit decimal
number where the number can range from 0 to 9999.
BINS*
8-digit decimal number stored as two 4-digit numbers in two contiguous the
registers where number can range from 0 to 99,999,999.
range allowed.
scale values in PanelMate so that the operator enters and reads negative numbers, but a positive integer
will be read from or written to the PLC.
PanelMate Series
22-9

required:
[plcnam,bit]
Note
where
plcnam, The 6-character (or less) name of the designated PLC, as defined in the PLC Name and
Port Parameter Table, followed by a comma. Consult chapter 9, Defining
for more information about bit reference numbers as they are used for specific
Square D PLCs.

22.8.1 Square D Sy/Max Word and Bit References
The Square D Sy/Max protocol is supported on PanelMate for models 100, 300, 400, 500, 600 and 700.
These models use decimal register addresses and bit offsets. Addresses and offsets all range from 1 to
16 (not from 0 to 15). The PanelMate format default is S16.
Note that this consists of a one-character prefix which identifies the type of variable being referenced
followed by the specific number of the variable. The following list contains the memory types supported by
the Square D driver.
S - storage register
R - internal relay logic N external I/O O - external
output I - external input
The prefixes are used to identify the usage of the variable to Square D. Each variable is uniquely
identified by its number. Therefore, the prefix may be omitted from the reference (e.g., [11] may be used
instead of [S11]).
22-10
PanelMate Series
The following is the format of a register reference. [rr]

rrPLC reference number of the register. The following is the
rr
format of a register bit reference. [rr-bb]

bb
PLC reference number of the bit position. The bit positions are numbered from 1 to
16, least significant to most significant, respectively.
PanelMate does not support writing to protected registers. If a template attempts to modify the contents of a
protected register, a communications error will result. Therefore, if an unexplainable communications error occurs,
the user is suggested to check the BEGIN FENCED REGISTERS and END FENCED REGISTERS parameters
with a Square D Programmer. All data referenced by Panel
Mate must lie between these parameters.
The supported Square D PLC models will allow a maximum of 60 contiguous words per read. The maximum
number of unused words before another read is generated is 15.
Examples
Word References
Reference
Description
[S 13]
[R 12]
Word 13 is placed in a storage register

Word 12 is internal relay logic
[N3]
[05]
Word 3 is external I/O

Word 5 is external output
[I9]
Word 9 is external input

Bit References
PanelMate Series
Reference
Description
[S32-14]
[R96-3]
Word 32 bit 14 is placed in a storage register

Word 96 bit 3 is internal relay logic
[N54-15]
Word 54 bit 15 is external I/0
[023-2]
Word 23 bit 2 is external output
[116-4]
Word 16 bit 4 is external input
22-11
Chapter 23. Texas Instruments PI-Cs
23.1 Introduction
PanelMate can be used with any of the programmable controllers in the Texas Instruments (TI) 500
Series (520, 530, 560 and 565) using the TI driver. The driver takes responsibility for communications to
the programmable controller, generating the protocol necessary to request information from, and send
information to, the PLC. The PLC simply responds to these requests and commands. No ladder logic is
required in the PLC to support the interface to PanelMate.
Connection to PLCs using the PanelMate TI driver can be accomplished by a direct connection to
the TI programming port or through a serial port on the TI Dual Communication Port Module
(DCPM).
23.2 Memory
The following memory types are supported by this driver:
X
X Discrete Image Register (bits)
Y WX
Y Discrete Image Register (bits)
WY C
WX Word Image Register WY
V DSP
Word Image Register C Discrete
DSC
Image Register (bits) V Word
DCP
Memory Drum Step Preset Drum
DCC
Step Current Memory
TCP
Drum Count Preset Memory Drum
TCC
Count Current Memory
LPV
Timer/Counter Preset Memory
LMN
Timer/Counter Current Memory
LSP
Loop Process Variable Output
LMX
Setpoint
Bias
Note
DCC memory can only be read and cannot be written to. All other memory types can be read and
written.
PanelMate Series
23-1
23.2 Memo
The following table shows the memory ranges for the supported memory types:
Memory Type
PLC Type
520
530
560
565
X (bits)
Y (bits)
1-1023
1-1023
1-8192
1-8192
1-1023
1-1023
1-8192
1-8192
WX
1-1023
1-1023
1-8192
1-8192
WY
1-1023
1-1023
1-8192
1-8192
C (bits)
1-511
1-1023
1-8192
1-8192
1-1024
1-5120
1-228352
1-228352
DSP
DSC
1-30
1-30
1-1152
1-1152
1-30
1-30
1-1152
1-1152
DCC
1-30
1-30
1-1152
1-1152
TCP
1-128
1-400
1-10240
1-10240
TCC
1-128
1-400
1-10240
1-10240
DCP
1-30
1-30
1-1152
1-1152
LPV
1-64
LMN
1-64
LSP
LMX
1-64
1-64

Note For the Drum memory type (DSP, DSC, DCP and DCC), the range represents the drum number.
For DCP memory, the range of step values is 1-16. DCP values are entered using the format
[DCPxx yy] where xx = drum number, yy = the step value.
23-2
PanelMate Series

Examples of possible configurations are described and shown in the following figures.
23.3.1 Direct
See the TI manual for your PLC to set the baud rate for the port on the CPU.
Communications
Cable
0
0
0
0
0
TI
Panel Mate
23.3.2 Direct with DCPM

Communications
Cable
PanelMate
TI
DCPM
(Dual Communication Port Module)
Figure 23-2 Connection to a DCPM
PanelMate Series
23-3
23.4 Cabling
23.4 Cabling
Communications between PanelMate and TI PLCs is RS232C and, therefore, has a recommended
maximum length of 50 cable feet.
for Texas Instruments PLCs
6
8
20
Shield
Hood -
Hood
Figure 23-3 RS232C Cabling for TI PLCs

You may also use the Texas Instruments cable used to connect the PLC to its programmer, instead of
constructing your own.

The Dual Communications Port Module (DCPM) has two RS232/423 ports which work independently and
permit simultaneous communication. PanelMate does not support RS423. RS232 must be used for
communications. The two ports are identical to the programming port on the PLC. All
communication is serial with one stop bit at all baud rates, except at 110 baud, which has two stop bits. The
ports may be configured for a baud rate ranging from 110 to 19.2K, and also for DTE or DCE mode.
Standard communication parameters for communicating with TI PLCs are shown below. These
parameters are given only as a starting point and may be changed to meet the demands of your
application.
7 Data bits 1
Stop bit Odd
Parity
9600
Baud
23-4
PanelMate Series

23.6.1 Dual Communication Port Module
Under the front access cover are two DIP switch banks. The upper DIP switch bank is for configuring port
1, while the lower DIP switch bank is for configuring port 2. The configuration switches are shown in the
following figure.
Port
Reset
Switch
Factory Test
Connection
Port 1
Configuration
Switches
Port 2
Configuration
Switches
0
Port
Figure 23-4 DIP Switch Bank Locations
Baud Rate
110
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19.2K
Switch 1
Switch 2
Switch 3
Table 23-2 Baud Rate Selection

Set switch 4 to the 1 position to select DTE mode or into the 0 position to select DCE mode. Switches 5
through 8 are not used.
PanelMate Series
23-5

[pl cnam,word #format]

Note
plcnam, and #format
are optional fields
where
plcnam, The 6-character (or less) name of the designated PLC, as defined in the PLC and
the PLC and Port Parameters Table.) This field is optional.
for specific Texas Instruments PLCs.
default formats will be used.
S16
U16
U32*
BCD3
999.
BCD4
9999.
BCD6*
BCD8*
23-6
PanelMate Series
BIN3
BIN4
BIN8*
range allowed.

required:
[plcnam, bit]
Note
where
The 6-character (or less) name of the designated PLC, as defined in the
plcnam, PLC and Port Parameters Table, followed by a comma. Consult chapter 9, Defining
for more information about word reference numbers as they are used for specific
Texas Instruments PLCs.

23.8.1 Texas Instruments Word and Bit References
Texas Instruments 520, 530, 560 and 565 PLCs use decimal word addresses. The PanelMate format
default is U16.
The following is the format for an output reference.
[y]
yy
PanelMate Series
PLC reference number of the output.
23-7
Examples
Word References
Description
Word image register 12
Word image register 18
V Word memory 22
Drum step preset 12
Word 15 of drum step current memory
Word 9 of drum count current memory
Word 4 of timer/counter preset memory
Word 19 of timer/counter current memory
Word 34 of loop process variable
Output word 43
Setpoint word 44
Bias word 61
Reference
[WX12]
[WY18]
[V22]
[DSP12]
[DSC15]
[DCC9]
[TCP4]
[TCC19]
[LPV34]
[LMN43]
[LSP44]
[LMX61]
Bit References
Reference
Description
[X520] Bit 520 of a discrete image register
[Y680] Bit 680 of a discrete image register [C7123] Bit 7123 of a discrete image
register
[DCP3016]
Step 16 of drum 30 of drum count preset memory
23-8
PanelMate Series
Chapter 24. Westinghouse Numa-Logic PI-Cs
24.1 Introduction
PanelMate may be used with any of the programmable controllers in the Westinghouse Numa-Logic
family using the Westinghouse driver. The driver takes responsibility for communications to the controller, generating the protocol necessary to request information from, and send information to, the
PLC. No ladder logic is required in the PLC to support the interface to PanelMate.
24.2 Memory
The following are the different prefixes which may be assigned to Westinghouse PLC references used in
PanelMate:
Prefix
AD
Type
Discrete Output
BD
Prefix
Type
Discrete Output
IM
LS
Discrete Output
Discrete Output
BF
Discrete Output
MB
Discrete Output
BO
Discrete Output
MR
Discrete Output
BC
Discrete Output
MV
Discrete Output
BS
Discrete Output
NL
Discrete Output
CD
Discrete Output
NR
Discrete Output
CR
Discrete Output
OG
Discrete Output
DB
Discrete Output
OR
Register Output
DC
Discrete Output
SB
Discrete Output
EQ
Discrete Output
SK
Discrete Output
GE
Discrete Output
TR
Discrete Output
HR
Holding Register
TS
Discrete Output
IG
Discrete Input
TT
Discrete Output
IR
Register Input
UC
Discrete Output
IN
Discrete Input
UI
Discrete Output
Table 24-1 Memory Types
PanelMate Series
24-1
Memory types IR, IG, OR, OG and HR all support the BP (Bit Pick) prefix to specify individual bits
within the word.
The following are the ranges for the different Westinghouse PLC models supported by PanelMate:
Memory Type
PC-700
Min
Max
PC-900
Min
Max
PC-1100
Min
Max
Discrete Inputs
Discrete Outputs
1
1
256
512
1
1
128
255
1
1
64
256
Register Inputs
32
16
Register Outputs
32
16
Holding Registers
1792
1792
1792

Note
To determine the maximum range for IC and OG memory, divide the discrete input maximum
amount by 16. The minimum is 0.
24.3.1 Direct
PanelMate can communicate with a Westinghouse PLC through a direct connection using Numa-Logic 6byte protocol. This protocol allows direct access to any part of the memory in the Westinghouse
programmable controller. The station address, Network ID number, and PLC unit number are not used.
Communications
Cable
Westinghouse
Numa-Logic PLC
1-0
24-2
PanelMate Series
24.4 Cabling
24.4 Cabling
The communication between PanelMate and the Westinghouse module is RS232C. The recommended
maximum cable length is 50 cable feet.
RS232C Communications
Westinghouse Numa-Lo
2
3
4
5
6
20
7 Hood
7
Hood
Shield
Figure 24-2 RS232C Cabling for Westinghouse PLCs

If you are using a PLC model which supports two communications channels through one 25-pin connector, a special variation of the previous cable can be made to allow access to both ports by different
devices at the same time. In this manner, both the PanelMate and another device, such as an IBM
PC used for PLC programming, could be connected to a PC-1100 simultaneously.
PanelMate Series
24-3
PanelMate Communications Cable
Connected to IBM P
C
PC-1100
4
5
6 8
68
20
7
Connected to PanelMate
7
2
14
19
13
12
22
Hood ____Shield __ Hood
Figure 24-3 Multiple Connections to PC-1100

In both the PC-700 and PC-900, the configuration of RS-232 ports is identical. The PC-700 exists in two
versions, one having a single port, another having dual ports. The PC-900 and PC-1100 have a single port.
The standard communications parameters for communicating with Westinghouse PLCs are: 8
Data bits
1 Stop bit
Odd Parity
9600 Baud
24-4
PanelMate Series

The supported Westinghouse PLCs do not have switches for changing the communications parameters. See
the appropriate Westinghouse PLC manual for more information.

[pl cnam,word #format]
Note
plcnam,
and #format are optional fields
where
Parameters, for more information regarding this name. If this name is omitted,
the default PLC name is assumed. (The default PLC is defined in the PLC
and Port Parameters Table.) This field is optional.
sections for more information about word reference numbers as they are used for
specific Westinghouse PLCs.
default formats will be used.
S16
U16
2,147,483,647; the high order bit is the sign. U32*
BCD3
BCD4
9999.
PanelMate Series
24-5
BCD6*
BCD8*
8-digit binary-coded decimal number stored in two contiguous registers
BIN3
BIN4
BIN8*
range allowed.

required:
[plcnam,bit]
Note
where
plcnam, The 6-character (or less) name of the designated PLC, as defined in the PLC and
for specific Westinghouse PLCs.
24-6
PanelMate Series

24.8.1 Westinghouse Word and Bit References
PanelMate restricts the access of variables to the maximum ranges of addresses allowed for the type of
variable on the model of processor being used. If the address is outside this maximum range, an
error is signaled to the user.
All five variable types occupy different locations in memory. It is, therefore, important that the correct
prefix be used. The letters in the prefix may be any combination of capital and small letters.
There are a number of special functions supported in PanelMate's Westinghouse driver. Each of these
has a prefix associated with it which may be substituted for one of the prefixes above.
A specific bit may be referenced within any word. There are two formats available to do this. The first
format is consistent with that generally used by PanelMate with other brands of PLCs. It consists of the
word reference, a space, and the bit offset. An example of this is [IG2 14]. The other format is based
upon the Bit Pick function built into Westinghouse PLCs. The Bit Pick prefix (BP) is entered, followed
immediately by the bit offset. Next, a slash is entered, followed by the word reference. The above
example may be redone in this format as [BP14/IG2].
There are two types of discrete points: input and output. Examples of these are IN0002 and CR0042,
respectively. Each of these accesses one point in an input group or an output group. Therefore, in addition to
referencing discrete input/output points in the manner described in the previous paragraph, input points or
output points may be referenced using INnnnn or CRnnnn. Example: [BP14/IG2] may also be expressed as
[IN0030]. Refer to Westinghouse documentation for additional instructions and information concerning
the two formats.
Also, Westinghouse provides a number of different type prefixes for the user. These prefixes do not change
the type of variable being referenced but define its usage within the program. These prefixes may also be
used on PanelMate. Example: TS0004 references the same I/O point as CR0004, but defines the usage of
the bit as Timer Seconds. PanelMate supports all prefixes known to be used at this time. Consult your
Westinghouse documentation for further information regarding the above.
Westinghouse Numa-Logic PLCs (PC-700, PC-900 and PC-1100) use decimal register addresses and bit
offsets. Addresses and offsets all start from 1 (e.g., bit offsets range from 1 to 16, not from 0 to 15). The
default data format is S16.
A typical Westinghouse holding register reference in a PanelMate expression may be [HR19]. Note that
this consists of a two-character prefix which identifies the type of variable being referenced, followed
by the specific number of the variable. There are several other types of word-length variables that are
addressed in this manner. The prefix and a brief description of each data type are given below:
IR
Input Register
OR
Output Register
IG
Input Group
OG
Output Group
HR
Holding Register
The supported Westinghouse PLC models will allow a maximum of 60 contiguous words per read. The
maximum number of unused words before another read is generated is 15.
PanelMate Series
24-7
Examples
The following are examples of valid PLC references which may be assigned in the PanelMate expression
fields.
Word References
Reference
[HR1500]
Description
Word 1500 is a holding register
[IG16]
Word 16 is a discrete input in PC-700
[IR32]
Word 32 is a register input in PC-700
[OG9]
Word 9 is a discrete output
[OR6]
Word 6 is a register output
Bit References
24-8
Reference
[IG214]
Description
Bit 14 of input group 2
[BP14/IG2]
Bit 14 of input group 2
[IN0030]
Bit 30 of the input group (same reference as [IG214] and
[CR0042]
[BP14/IG2])
Bit 42 of output group
[HR 1234 161
Bit 16 of holding register 1234
PanelMate Series
PanelMateVideo Control Panel Specifications
General Hardware Specifications

Video
14" monitor, 13" viewable
Horizontal Scan Frequency: 31.5 KHz
Refresh: 70 Hz
Dot Pitch: 0.31 mm
Electron Gun Configuration: In-line
Eight colors, plus blink
Main Processor
CPU: Motorola 68000 microprocessor Clock Frequency: 10 MHz
Environment
NEMA Class
Meets NEMA 4 and NEMA 12 when mounted
in a correspondingly rated enclosure
Stainless steel version for NEMA 4, 4X & 12 installation
Protective Front Panel
Polane enamel paint
High contrast filter
Acrylic protective window over monitor
Stainless steel option available
External Connections
Two serial ports - DTE-type, and selectable RS422 or RS232C, 110
to 19,200 Baud
Communications to PLC or host computer
Communications to Serial Printer Supports
most brands of PLCs
DIN connector for IBM-compatible configuration keyboard
8 ohm audio output
Connector: Terminal block
Fault Relay
Type: Form C contact
Rating: 2A @ 240 VAC
2A @120 VAC
2A @ 28 VDC (resistive load)
Connector: Terminal block
Ambient Temperature
Operating: 0 to 50 C
Non-operating: -20 to 700C
Mounting
Panel mount or rack mount
Voltage
110 or 220 VAC +/- 15%
Approvals
U L 508
CSA C22.2
Frequency
50 to 60 Hz
Other
-Weight: 65 pounds
Equipment Heat Output: 100 Watts (341.4 BTU/Hr)
Relative Humidity
20 to 95 percent non-condensing
Vibration
Operating: 10 to 57 Hz @ .006" Peak to Peak, 57-500 Hz @ 1 G
Noiselmmunity
Meets IEEE specification 472, 587
Power Requirements
Consumption
100 Watts
Battery Back-Up
Size AA, 3.4V
Eaton IDT
FA,T10N
Dimensional Information
NOTE: All units are in inches

Front View
Rear View
PanelAla e series
13.96
0.12
(REF)
5.22
19.00
-J
25 DA HOLE
(16 PLACES)
22 DIA. HOLE a~
(12 PLACES)
Side View
PanelMate is a registered trademark of Eaton IDT, Inc.

Polane is a registered trademark of Sherwin Williams Co.
Eaton is a trademark of and used under license from Eaton
Corporation, U.S.A.
Descriptions and availability subject to change without notice.
Copyright @ 1991 Eaton IDT, Inc. All Rights Reserved
91-0002A-422
Recommended Panel Cutouts
Eaton IDT, Inc.

173 Heatherdown Drive
P.O. Box 6166
Westerville, Ohio 43081-6166
(614) 882-3282 FAX (614) 8957111
FAD N
Appendix A. Transfer/Merge Utility
A.1 Overview
The Transfer/Merge Utility is used to Transfer configurations between a PanelMate and an IBM
computer. Once the configurations are transferred to the IBM, they can be edited file-by-file. Files
from one configuration can be merged with another configuration or a new configuration can be
created by combining files from previously created configurations.
The ability to edit and create configurations from other configuration files will save a great deal of
time for installations which require many PanelMates using similar configurations. Another benefit of
this utility is to provide an easy method for backing up configurations.
The following table shows each of the files which make up a configuration and to which of the systems in
the PanelMate series each file is applicable (each configuration may contain all or a subset of these
files.
Description
System Parameters Table
PLC Name and Port Table
I
Y
PanelMate
II
Y
III
Y
Message Library
Symbol Library
Screen Titles
Online System Labels
Graphic Character Font
Double High Character Font
Quad Character Font
Page 0 through Page 9
Page 10 through Page 15

N
Table A-1 Configuration Files
Any of these files can be used individually as the building blocks for new configurations or may be used
to replace files in existing configurations.
A.1.1 Utility Requirements

The Transfer/Merge Utility is designed to work with any DOS-based machine with an enhanced
graphics adaptor (EGA), color graphics adaptor (CGA), or a monochrome adaptor operating under
DOS version 2.0 or later. To find out which version of DOS your system is using, type the following command
at the DOS prompt followed by < Enter > .
ver
The DOS version should now appear on the. screen.
PanelMate Series
A-1
A.1 Overview
Also, 640K of memory is required. It is recommended that any terminate stay resident (TSR)
programs be removed from memory before using this utility. This will reduce the chance of running out of
memory during operation of the utility. The following table shows the configuration file size for each
PanelMate in the PanelMate Series. This table should be used to make sure that enough
disk space is available for the number of configurations you wish to upload and create.
PanelMate Series
File Size
PanelMate I
32K
PanelMate II
64K
PanelMate III
128K
Table 2-2 File Sizes
Note An amount of disk space is also required for temporary files during operation of the utility. These
files could require as much as 256K of disk space and are removed after exiting the utility.
The following extensions must be used for the configuration files.
PanelMate Series
Extension
PanelMate I configuration
PM1
PanelMate II configuration
PM2
PanelMate III configuration

PM3
Table A-3 Con(guration File Extensions
Files with any other extensions will be ignored by this utility.
A.1.2 Filenaming Conventions

The filenaming conventions for this utility are the same as for DOS filenames. Any number or letter may
be used for filenames. The filename can be up to eight characters in length. The only valid extensions
are PM1, PM2, or PM3. Files with other extensions will not be recognized by this utility.
A-2
PanelMate Series
A.2 Communication Parameters
A.1.3 Cabling
The following figure should be used if you wish to construct a cable between the PanelMate and the IBM
system.
for the Transfer/Merge Utility
PanelMate DB25P
Serial Port 1
IBM DB25S
Serial Ports
Shield
3
4
PanelMate DB25P
Serial Port 1
20
IBM DB9S
Serial Ports
7
20
7
8
5
6
Figure A-1 Cabling Diagrams

Connect one end of the communication cable to Serial Port 1 of your PanelMate and connect the other end
to a serial port on your IBM system. If you have a 2900 series PanelMate, you will need to set the port
parameters to the port labeled "1)OC" in the PLC Name and Port Editor.
A.1.4 Starting the Transfer/Merge Utility

The floppy disk shipped with the utility contains one file named pm trans.exe.
If you intend to use a hard disk to run the utility, this file must be copied to the hard disk. See your DOS
manual for directions on copying the file to the hard disk. To start the program, go to the proper
directory and type pm trans followed by < Enter > .
If you intend to use a floppy disk to run the utility, place the utility disk in the floppy drive, access the
drive and type pm trans followed by < Enter > .
Once the utility begins, press any key to view the main menu. Use the arrow and function keys to make
menu selections as you would in PanelMate.
A.2 Communication Parameters

Standard parameters for communication between PanelMate and an IBM computer are:
8 Data bits
1 Stop bit
No Parity
9600 Baud Rate
Note
PanelMate Series
Communication parameters need to be the same on both the PanelMate and the IBM system.
A-3
A.3 Menu Selections
A.3 Menu Selections

The menu selections are made by pressing a function key on the keyboard. In some instances the arrow
keys are used to position the cursor over a selection before pressing a function key. The following functions
have the same meaning throughout the utility.
Exit
This is used to either exit the current screen or selection, or to abort a current
process, such as an upload. Press < F10 > to exit.
Help This key combination will call the help page to the screen. A help page is available if the
word "Help" is visible in the upper right of the screen. Press < Alt > < F1 >
simultaneously to call a help page.
A.4 Upload Configuration from PanelMate

This menu selection will allow you to transfer the configuration files from the PanelMate Serial Port 1 to an
IBM system. The following functions are defined to the function keys after making this menu selection.
ENTER NAME
This function key will close the configuration name field once a valid name is entered. Press < F1 > to
enter a name.
DISP DIRECT
This function will display all files with PM1, PM2, and PM3 extensions in the base directory. The base
directory is the directory used for storing and retrieving all configuration files, if a path is not given. The
base directory is defined in section A.11, Edit Utility Parameters. Press < F2 > to display the base
directory.
Note This utility must be ready to receive data before beginning the transfer from PanelMate.
Therefore, enter the filename and press < Fl > in the utility and then begin the transfer from
PanelMate.
A.4.1 Configuration Name

This field will be opened and waiting for entry of a filename to which the uploaded file will be
saved. If a file with the entered filename already exists, you will be prompted as to whether or not you
wish to overwrite the existing file.
The following describes each of the fields shown on the screen after a valid filename is entered. Each
of these fields are filled automatically and cannot be edited at this point.
Bytes Received From PanelMate
This field shows the number of bytes (in hexadecimal) that have been transferred. This field updates in
increments of 256 bytes.
CONFIGURATION NAME
This field shows the filename to which the uploaded configuration will be saved.
PANELMATE
This field shows the PanelMate model (I, II, or III).
VERSION
This field shows the version number of the PanelMate uploading the configuration.
A-4
PanelMate Series
A.5 Download Configuration to PanelMate
EXPECTED FILE SIZE

This field shows the file size expected by the utility. The file size is in hexadecimal.
Communication Port
This field displays the communication port on the IBM system that will be used for transferring the
configuration.
Baud Rate
This field displays the baud rate to be used for transferring the configuration. The value in this field must
match that set for the DOC port on the PanelMate.
Parity
This field displays the parity to be used for transferring the configuration. The value in this field must
Stop Bits
This field displays the number of stop bits to be used for transferring the configuration. The value in
this field must match that set for the DOC port on the PanelMate.
A.5 Download Configuration to PanelMate

This menu selection will allow you to transfer the configuration files from the IBM system to a
PanelMate Serial Port 1. The following functions are defined to the function keys after making this
menu selection.
ENTER NAME
This function key will close the configuration name field once a valid name is entered. Press < F1 > to
enter a name.
DISP DIRECT
This function key will display all files with PM1, PM2, and PM3 extensions in the base directory. The
base directory is the directory used for storing and retrieving all configuration files, if a path is not
given. The base directory is defined in section A.11, Edit Utility Parameters. Press <F2> to display
the base directory.
Note The PanelMate must be ready to receive the configuration before beginning the transfer from the IBM
system. Therefore, press < Fl > on the PanelMate to "Load From IBM PC" and then press <
Fl > on the IBM to begin the transfer.
A.5.1 Configuration Name

This field will be opened and waiting for entry of the filename which contains the configuration to
download to PanelMate.
The following describes each of the fields shown on the screen after a valid filename is entered. Each
of these fields are filled automatically and cannot be edited at this point.
CONFIGURATION NAME
This field shows the name of the configuration file that will be transferred to PanelMate.
PANELMATE
This field shows the PanelMate model (I, II, or III).
PanelMate Series
A-5
A.6 Create New Configuration
VERSION
This field shows the version number of the PanelMate to which the configuration is being downloaded. For
example, if the PanelMate version is 2.9, this field will contain a 2.9.
BYTES TO TRANSFER
This field shows the file size (in hexadecimal) to transfer to PanelMate.
Communication Port
This field displays the communication port on the IBM system that will be used for transferring the
configuration.
Baud Rate
This field displays the baud rate to be used for transferring the configuration. The value in this field must
Parity
This field displays the parity to be used for transferring the configuration. The value in this field must
Stop Bits
This field displays the number of stop bits to be used for transferring the configuration. The value in
this field must match that set for the DOC port on the PanelMate.

This menu selection will allow you to create a new configuration, either using an existing configuration as
the base or by starting with an empty configuration.
After making this menu selection, the following prompt line will appear.
Do you want to use an existing configuration as the base for this configuration? Press Y or N.
Press <y> to create a new configuration from an existing configuration or press <n> to create a new
configuration from a blank configuration.
A.6.1 Create from Existing Configuration

If you choose to create a new configuration from an existing configuration, you will be prompted for the
name of the configuration to use as a base for the new configuration.
Using Older Firmware Versions

The merge function of this utility is available only for configurations created on PanelMates with the
X.7 or newer version of firmware. Configurations created on PanelMates with firmware versions older
than X.7 can still be backed up to an IBM but cannot be manipulated in any other way unless it is
converted to version X.7 or newer.
If you wish to create a new configuration for an X.7 or newer version of PanelMate, using an older version of
configuration, you will need to first load the older configuration (older than X.7) into a PanelMate with
X.7 or newer version of firmware. This will convert the older version of configuration and allow you to use
it to create new configurations. Once converted, the configuration can be uploaded from PanelMate
and parts of the configuration can then be merged.
A-6
PanelMate Series
A.6.2 Create from a Blank Configuration

If you chose not to use an existing configuration as a base for a new configuration, you will be prompted for
the PanelMate model, version, and name of the configuration file.
A field labeled "PanelMate Model:" will be opened. The default value for this field is "I." To change the
value in this field to either of the remaining choices (II or III), press the up or down arrow key.
Press the < F1 > to close the field.
Once the PanelMate model field is closed, a field labeled "PanelMate Version:" will appear. The
default value for this field is 9. At this time, the only entries permitted are 7, 8 and 9. The X.7 or
newer versions of PanelMate are the only versions which can have new configurations created by
merging parts of other configurations. To change the value in this field, press < Fl > to open the field,
press the up or down arrow key to make the change, then press < F1 > to close the field.
A.6.3 Build Configuration Editor

The Build Configuration Editor will appear after entering either a filename to use as a base configuration or a filename to save the new configuration (created from a blank configuration). This
editor is used to merge parts of other configurations together to create a new configuration.
If you chose to create a new configuration by using another configuration as a base, the configuration to be
used as the base will be displayed. If you chose to create a new configuration from a blank
configuration, all page fields will be blank.
If you are using a PanelMate III (version 3.9), the Build Configuration Editor will consist of two
screens. The first screen will display pages 0-14 and the second screen will display pages 15-29. The
< F7 > key will toggle between the screens. If you are using PanelMate I or PanelMate II, you will
have only one screen.
This editor contains three other editors which are described in detail later in this appendix. The three
editors are the Merge File Editor, Directory Editor, and the Message Library Editor.
MERGE
This editor is used to merge files, which make up a configuration, from one configuration to another new
configuration. This editor is discussed in detail in section A.12, Merge File Editor. Press < F1 > to enter
the Merge File Editor.
DIR EDITOR
This editor is used to manipulate the pages in the configuration. Press < F2 > to enter the Directory
Editor. The following are the operations that can be accomplished with this editor.
Swap pages
Move pages to blank pages
Copy pages to blank pages
Delete pages
Display the amount of free memory
Change the title of the page
This editor is discussed in detail in section A.13, Directory Editor.
MESSAGE LIB
This editor is used to change the message and its attributes, add, and delete messages in the message
library. Press < F3 > to enter the Message Library Editor. This editor is discussed in detail in section
A.14, Message Library Editor.
PanelMate Series
A-7
A.7 Edit Existing Configuration
DELETE FILE
This menu selection will allow you to delete a configuration file. The file can be any one of the pages or the other
files, such as system parameters.
To delete a file:
1. Press < F5 > and position the cursor on the field you wish to delete.
2. Press < F1 > to select the field, then press < y > to confirm the deletion.
The file will then be deleted and the asterisk (*) will be removed, showing that the file is empty. You can now
continue deleting files by pressing < F1 > to select the file and < y > to confirm it. Press < F10 > to exit back to
the Build Configuration Editor main screen.
If you are using a PanelMate III (version 3.9), this menu selection will consist of two screens. The first screen will
display pages 0-14 and the second screen will display pages 15-29. The < F7 > key will toggle between the
screens. If you are using PanelMate I or PanelMate II, you will have only one screen.
LAST STATUS
This menu selection will allow you to view the file status of the configuration. Press <F8> to display the last
status of the current configuration.
This screen shows whether or not the non-page files have been modified. If any of these files have been modified,
the field labeled "Last Status" will contain USER MODIFIED. This field will contain ORIGINAL for any of the files
which have not been modified.
This screen also shows if any of the pages have been copied from other configurations. If any have been copied
from other configurations, the field labeled "Last Status" will contain the following.
COPIED - filename (PXX)
Where filename is the filename of the configuration from which the page was copied and XX is the number of the
page that was copied. The last status field will contain the following for any pages which were originally in the
configuration.
ORIGINAL - (PXX)
Where XX is the page number. This field will be blank for any pages which are not configured.
SAVE
This menu selection will allow you to save the configuration and continue working. Press < F9 > to save the
current configuration.
EXIT
This menu selection will allow you to exit the Build Configuration Editor with the option to save the current
configuration.

This menu selection will allow you to edit existing configurations.
The Build Configuration Editor will appear after entering a filename to edit. The configuration will then be
displayed.
This editor contains three other editors which are described in detail later in this appendix. The three editors are
the Merge File Editor, Directory Editor, and the Message Library Editor.
MERGE
This editor is used to merge files, from one configuration, to another configuration. This editor is
discussed in detail in section A.12, Merge File Editor. Press < Fl > to enter the Merge File Editor.
A-8
PanelMate Series
DIR EDITOR
This editor is used to manipulate the pages in the configuration. Press < F2 > to enter the Directory
Editor. The following are the operations that can be accomplished with this editor.
Swap pages
Move pages to blank pages
Copy pages to blank pages
Delete pages
Display the amount of free memory
Change the title of the page
This editor is discussed in detail in section A.13, Directory Editor.
MESSAGE LIB
This editor is used to change the message and its attributes, add, and delete messages in the message
library. Press < F3 > to enter the Message Library Editor. This editor is discussed in detail in the in
section A.14, Message Library Editor.
DELETE FILE
This menu selection will allow you to delete a configuration file. The file can be a page or one of the
other files, such as system parameters.
To delete a file:
1. Press < F5 > and position the cursor on the field you wish to delete.
2. Press < F1 > to select the field, then press < y > to confirm the deletion.
The file will then be deleted and the asterisk (*) will be removed, showing that the file is empty. You
can now continue deleting files by pressing < F1 > to select the file and < y > to confirm it. Press <
F10 > to exit back to the Build Configuration Editor main screen.
LAST STATUS
This menu selection will allow you to view the file status of the configuration. Press < F8 > to display the
last status of the current configuration.
This screen shows whether or not the non-page files have been modified. If any of these files have been
modified, the field labeled "Last Status" will contain USER MODIFIED. This field will contain
ORIGINAL for any of the files which have not been modified.
This screen also shows if any of the pages have been copied from other configurations. If any have been
copied from other configurations, the field labeled "Last Status" will contain the following.
Where filename is the filename of the configuration from which the page was copied and XX is the
number of the page that was copied. The last status field will contain the following for any pages which
were originally in the configuration.
ORIGINAL - (PXX)
SAVE
This menu selection will allow you to save the configuration and continue working. Press <F9> to
save the current configuration.
EXIT
This menu selection will allow you to exit the Build Configuration Editor with the option to save the
current configuration.
PanelMate Series
A-9
A.8 Display Configuration
A.8 Display Configuration

This menu selection will allow you to view any of the configurations. After making this menu selection, you
will be prompted for the filename of the configuration. Enter the filename plus the extension and press
< F1 > to close the field.
This screen shows the names of each part of the configuration and the size in bytes each requires. To
view another configuration:
1. Press any key. A prompt will appear asking if you wish to view another configuration or not. 2. Press <
n > to exit to the main menu. Press < y > to continue viewing configurations.
3. After pressing < y >, you will once again be prompted for the filename. Enter the filename
followed by < F1 > to display the configuration and begin at step 1 again.
The Display Configuration Editor shows only configured pages. If you are using a PanelMate III
(version 3.9) and you have more than 15 configured pages, the Display Configuration Editor will consist of
two screens. The first screen will display pages 0-14 and the second screen will display pages 15-29.
The < F7 > key will toggle between the screens. If you are using a PanelMate I, PanelMate II, or a
PanelMate III (version 3.9 - with 15 or less configured pages), you will have only one screen.
Note
Only configurations created from X.7 or newer PanelMates can be displayed.
A.9 Rename Configuration

This menu selection will allow you to rename the file under which a configuration is saved. To
rename the configuration:
1. Enter the filename, plus extension, to be renamed and press < F1 >.
2. Enter the new filename, without extension, and press < F1 >. The file is then renamed. Press
< n > to exit to the main menu. To rename another file, press < y > and begin at
step 1 again.
Note
Any configuration can be renamed as long as it has the proper file extension (PM1, PM2, or
PM3).
A.10 Delete Configuration

This menu selection will allow you to delete a configuration.
To delete a configuration:
1. Enter the filename and extension of the configuration to be deleted followed by < F1 >.
2. Press < y > to confirm the deletion. To delete another configuration, press < y > and begin
at step 1 again.
A-10
PanelMate Series
A.11 Edit Utility Parameters

This menu selection will display all of the current parameters for the Transfer/Merge Utility. The
communication parameters defined for the utility must match those of the PanelMate.
When exiting the Utility Parameters Editor, a file named pmatesys.cnf is created and stored in the same
directory as the pm trans.exe file. This file is used to set the parameters. If the pmatesys.cnf file does
not exist, the utility parameters will be set to the default values. The default parameters are as follows.
Note
Data bits
Stop bit
None
Parity
9600
Baud
The following configuration is not recommended: 7 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, 19.2K baud.
A.11.1 EDIT
This function is used to open any of the fields to make changes. Once open, a field can be edited
using standard text editing methods available on PanelMate. Press < Fl > to open a field. The base
directory default is the same directory where the pin trans.exe file resides.
A.11.2 Base Directory

The base directory is the directory where the utility will look for and store the configurations. To
edit this field:
1. Position the cursor on this field and press < Fl > .
2. Use standard PanelMate text editing methods to change the base directory. 3.
Press < F1 > to close the field.
A.11.3 Temporary Directory

The temporary directory is used for storing temporary files that the utility needs. The files are deleted
automatically when leaving the utility.
To edit this field:
2. Use standard PanelMate text editing methods to change the temporary directory. 3.
Press < F1 > to close the field.
A.11.4 Communication Port

This field shows the port on the IBM system that is to be used for transferring configurations. To
edit this field:
2. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the choices (1-4). 3.
Press < Fl > to close the field.
PanelMate Series
A-11
A.11.5 Baud Rate

This field shows the baud rate to be used during communications with PanelMate. The baud rate
selected for the IBM system must match that of the PanelMate.
To edit this field:
2. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the choices (110-19200). 3.
A.11.6 Parity
This field shows the parity to be used during communications with PanelMate. The parity selected for
the IBM system must match that of the PanelMate.
To edit this field:
2. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the choices (NONE, ODD, EVEN). 3.
A.11.7 Data Bits

This field shows the number of data bits to be used during communications with PanelMate. The
number of data bits selected for the IBM system must match that of the PanelMate.
To edit this field:
2. Use the up and down arrow keys to toggle the choices (7, 8). 3.
A.11.8 Stop Bits

This field shows the number of stop bits to be used during communications with PanelMate. The
number of stop bits selected for the IBM system must match that of the PanelMate.
To edit this field:
2. Use the up and down arrow keys toggle the choices (1, 2). 3.
A-12
PanelMate Series
A.12 Merge File Editor

This editor will allow you to merge parts of other configuration files which have been transferred to
the IBM system. This editor resides within the Build Configuration Editor.
After pressing the < F1 > key, you will be prompted for the filename of the configuration you wish
to use to merge the current configuration. If this file is not in the base directory, you can include a
path with the filename. After entering the filename and pressing < F1 > to close the field, a
screen showing this configuration file will appear. This screen shows only files that contain
information. For example, if page 8 is not configured, if will not be listed in this screen.
The Merge File Editor shows only configured pages. If you are using a PanelMate III (version 3.9)
and you have more than 15 configured pages, the Merge File Editor will consist of two screens. The
first screen will display pages 0-14 and the second screen will display pages 15-29. The < F7 > key will
toggle between the screens. If you are using a PanelMate I, PanelMate II, or a PanelMate III (version
3.9 - with 15 or less configured pages), you will have only one screen.
A.12.1 Copying an Individual File

A file is selected by using the arrow keys to highlight the desired field and then press < F1 >.
Pages
To copy a page:
1. The field labeled "Select page number to copy to:" displays the number of the page to which
this page is to be copied. The up arrow and down arrow keys are used to increment or
decrement the page number. Once the desired page is selected, close the field by pressing
the < F1 > key and the file will be transferred. If you attempt to copy a page to a position
that already contains information, a message will appear notifying you of this and will ask if you
want that position to be overwritten with the currently selected page.
2. A prompt will appear asking if you want to overwrite this file. Press <y> to overwrite the
file or < n > to cancel the copy and deselect the file.
System Parameters
To copy the system parameters:
1. Position the cursor on the System Parameters field. 2.
Press < Fl > .
3. Press < y > to overwrite the system parameters or < n > to exit without overwriting the file.
PLC Name and Port
To copy the PLC name and port tables:

1. Position the cursor on the PLC Name and Port field.
2. Press < F1 >.
3. Press < y > to overwrite the PLC Name and Port Parameters or < n > to exit without
overwriting the file.
PanelMate Series
A-13
Message Library
The message library in the current configuration can be either completely overwritten or only sections may be
overwritten. When merging (overwriting) sections or blocks of messages, you will be prompted for the beginning
and ending message numbers, which describe the size of the block of the messages, to merge to the current
configuration. Then you will be prompted for the message number of the current configuration to which the
block of messages will begin to be copied.
For example, if you entered a beginning message number of 10 and an ending message number of 22 and 60 for
the beginning number in the current configuration, messages 10 through 22 would overwrite messages 60
through 72 in the current configuration.
To copy the message library:
1. Position the cursor on the Message Library field.
2. Press < F1 > . Now you may press either < y > or < n >. If you press < y >, the entire message library
will be overwritten. If you press < n >, another prompt will appear. Steps 3 through 6 should be
followed if you have pressed < n >.
3. Press < y > to merge the message libraries or < n > to abort.
4. Enter the message number for the merging to begin and press < F1 >. 5.
Enter the message number for the merging to end and press < F1 >.
6. Enter the message number, in the current configuration message library, for the merging to begin
and press < F1 >.
The range of messages from the second configuration will be copied, beginning at the mes
sage entered in this step, to the current configuration.
Page Titles
To copy the page titles:
1. Position the cursor on the Page Titles field.
2. Press < F1 >.
3. Press < y > to overwrite the page titles or < n > to exit without overwriting the file.
System Labels
To copy the system labels:
1. Position the cursor on the System Labels field. 2.
Press < Fl > .
3. Press < y > to overwrite the system labels or < n > to exit without overwriting the file.
Symbol Library
To copy the page titles:
1. Position the cursor on the Page Titles field.
2. Press < Fl > .
3. Press < y > to overwrite the entire symbol library in the current configuration. Press < n > and
another prompt will appear. This prompt will again allow you to overwrite the entire symbol
library by pressing < y > or copy only symbols which have a unique name; that is, the symbols with
names that match those in the current configuration will not be copied, but all others will be
copied.
A-14
PanelMate Series
Graphic Font
To copy the graphic font:
1. Position the cursor on the Graphic Font field.
2. Press < Fl >.
3. Press <y> to overwrite the graphic font or <n> to exit without overwriting the file.
Double High Font

To copy the double high font:
1. Position the cursor on the Double High Font field. 2.
Press < Fl >.
3. Press <y> to overwrite the double high font or <n> to exit without overwriting the file.
Quad Font
To copy the quad font:
1. Position the cursor on the Quad Font field.
2. Press < Fl >.
3. Press < y > to overwrite the quad font or < n > to exit without overwriting the file.
A.12.2 DISP CONFIG

This menu selection will display the current configuration (the configuration being built or edited).
All of the configured pages and the amount of remaining memory will be shown. The < F7 > key will
allow you to view the file status of the configuration.
The file last status screen shows whether or not the non-page files have been modified. If any of these files
have been modified, the field labeled "Last Status" will contain USER MODIFIED. This field will contain
ORIGINAL for any of the files which have not been modified.
This screen also shows if any of the pages have been copied from other configurations. If any have been
copied from other configurations, the field labeled "Last Status" will contain the following.
Where filename is the filename of the configuration from which the page was copied and XX is the
number of the page that was copied. The last status field will contain the following for any pages which
were originally in the configuration.
ORIGINAL - (PXX)
PanelMate Series
A-15
A.13 Directory Editor
A.13 Directory Editor

The Directory Editor is used to swap, move, copy, rename, and delete pages from the directory of
pages.
To swap, move, or copy pages, the cursor must be on the page number. The page name can be
edited by selecting the page title. The following sections describe how to manipulate pages in the
directory.
If you are using a PanelMate III (version 3.9), the Directory Editor will consist of two screens. The first
screen will display pages 0-14 and the second screen will display pages 15-29. The < F7 > key will
toggle between the screens. If you are using PanelMate I or PanelMate II, you will have only one
screen.
A.13.1 SELCT TITLE

This menu selection will allow you to select a page title to edit. The
the page title.
<F1>
function key is used to select
To edit a page title:

1. Position the cursor on the desired page title and press < F1 >.
2. The field will open and a flashing square cursor will appear. The page title can then be
edited, using standard PanelMate text editing methods.
3. Press < F1 > to close the field.
A.13.2 SWAP PAGES

This menu selection will allow you to exchange the position of two pages in the directory. A blank page
cannot be swapped. Also, the page number must be highlighted, not the page title, to complete the swap.
To swap two pages:
1. Position the cursor on the page number of the first page and press < F2 >.
2. Position the cursor on the other page and press <F2>. The two pages, including page titles,
will then swap positions in the directory.
A.13.3 MOVE PAGE

This menu selection will allow you to move a page to an empty position in the directory. Pages which have
been configured will have an asterisk (*) next to the page number.
To move a page:
1. Position the cursor on the page number to be moved and press < F3 >.
2. Move the cursor to an empty position in the directory and press < F3 >. The page, including
page title, will then be moved to the new position in the directory.
A.13.4 COPY PAGE

This menu selection will allow you to make a copy of a page in the directory and place the copy into
any empty position in the directory. Pages which have been configured will have an asterisk (*) next to
the page number.
To copy a page:
1. Position the cursor on the page number to be copied and press <F4>.
2. Move the cursor to an empty position in the directory and press < F4 >. The page, including
page title, will be copied to the selected position.
A-16
PanelMate Series
A.14 Message Library Editor
A.13.5 DELETE
This menu selection can be used to delete either the page title or the entire page and all contents
from the directory.
Delete Entire Page

To delete an entire page:
1.
Position the cursor on the page number of the page you wish to delete and press < F5 >
twice.
2.
Press <y> to confirm the deletion of the page. The page title and all other configuration
information for the page will be deleted.
Delete Page Title

To delete only a page title:
1.
Position the cursor on the page title that you wish to delete and press < F5 > twice. The page
title will be deleted but the all other page information will remain intact. The asterisk (*) will
also remain next to the page number to signify that the page has been configured.
A.13.6 MEMORY FREE

This menu selection will display the amount of configuration (battery-backed SRAM) memory that is left.
To display the amount of configuration memory remaining: 1.
Press < F6 >.
A.13.7 MORE
This menu selection will allow you to edit pages 15 through 29 and is available for PanelMate III only.
To edit pages 15 through 29 (PanelMate III only): 1.
Press <F7>.
A.13.8 EXIT
This menu selection will allow you to exit the Directory Editor. The screen titles will be saved automatically.

The Message Library Editor is used to edit and create messages in the message library. All of the
attributes can also be changed through this editor.
PanelMate Series
A-17
A.14.1 SELECT
This menu selection will allow you to select a message or a message attribute field for editing. Once
selected, the field can be edited.
Msg#
This field shows the number of the message in the list.
To change this field:
1. Position the cursor on the field and press < F1 > to open the field.
2. Enter another message number followed by < F1 > to close the field. The message list will then
restart at that number. This is one method for scrolling through the list.
For example, if at the top of the list, message 1 is currently displayed and you type 5 (with the field
open) followed by < Fl > , the list will renumber with the fifth message in the first position in the list.
FG
This field shows the abbreviation of the foreground color. To
change this field:
1. Position the cursor on the field and press < Fl > .
2. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the selections for the color. When the
desired color abbreviation appears, press < Fl > to close the field.
BG
This field shows the abbreviation of the background color.
2. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the selections for the color. When the
desired color abbreviation appears, press < Fl > to close the field.
B
This field shows if blink has been selected for the message. The field will display a <y> if blink
is turned on and an < n > if blink is turned off. If blink is turned on, the color of the background will
alternate between the background color and black.
2. Use the up and down arrow keys to toggle between < y > and < n >.
Message Text
This field shows the text of the message, which has a maximum length of 65 characters. To change
this field:
1. Position the cursor over the field and press < F1 >.
2. Use the standard PanelMate text editing methods to edit the text and press < F1 > to close
the field.
Note
A-18
Messages may contain carriage returns. The carriage return character is denoted by the
quarter-note character.
PanelMate Series
Char Size
This field shows the character font type to be used for the message. To
change this field:
2. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the font selections. When the desired font
type appears in the field, press < Fl > to close the field.
Destn
This field shows the destination of the message. The message can be displayed on the screen, printer, or
both the screen and the printer.
2. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the destination selections. When the
desired destination appears in the field, press < Fl > to close the field.
A.14.2 PREV MESS

This menu selection will allow you to view the previous 15 messages. To
view the previous 15 messages: 1. Press < F3 >.
A.14.3 NEXT MESS

This menu selection will allow you to edit the next 15 messages. To view
the next 15 messages:
1. Press < F4 >.
A.14.4 MEMORY FREE

This menu selection will display the amount of configuration (battery-backed SRAM) memory that is
left.
To display the amount of configuration memory remaining: 1.
Press < F6 >.
A.14.5 SAVE
This menu selection will allow you to save the message library and continue working. To
save the configuration:
1. Press < F9 >.
A.14.6 EXIT
This menu selection will allow you to exit the Message Library Editor. The message library will be saved
automatically.
PanelMate Series
A-19
Appendix B. Detailed Specifications
B.1 Communications to PLCs

B.1.1 Master Mode
Rate
Selectable; 300 to 19,200 baud
Protocol
PLC brand-specific
B.2 Communications to PLCs or Host Computer

B.2.1 Slave Mode
Rate
Protocol
Eaton IDT generic protocol
Interface
PLC BASIC module or host computer serial port
B.3 Communications to Serial Printers

Rate

All serial ports are DTE-type, and selectable RS422 or RS232C
B.4 Fault Relay

Type
1 Form C contact
Rating
2A at 240 VAC, 2A at 120 VAC, 2A at 28 VDC (resistive load)
Connector
Terminal block
B.5 Main Processor

CPU
Clock Frequency
PanelMate Series
Motorola 68000 microprocessor

10 MHz
B-1
B.6 Monitor
B.6 Monitor
Horizontal Scan
Frequency
Refresh
Dot Pitch
Electron Gun
Configuration
B.7 Environment
31.5 KHz
70 Hz 0.41
mm
In-line
Temperature
0-50C, operating ambient temperature 10-70C, storage temperature
Humidity
20-95% noncondensing
NEMA 4 or NEMA 12 when properly mounted in a correspondingly
rated enclosure
NEMA Class
Will operate at 5-10 Hz with .2 inch amplitude and 10-200 Hz at 1G
Vibration
Designed to meet IEEE specification 472
Noise Immunity
B.8 Power Requirements

Voltage Frequency
110 or 220 VAC with up to 15% fluctuation 50 to
Consumption
60 Hz
Battery Back-Up
100 Watts Size

AA, 3.4V
B.9 Configuration Keyboard Communications

IBM Personal Computer-compatible
Format
C
DIN connector to dedicated port on Main Video Unit
B.10 Other
B-2
Weight
60 pounds
Equipment Heat
Output
100 watts
PanelMate Series
Appendix C. Demonstration Page Program
The following Generic Protocol program will update the demonstration display shipped with your
PaneIMate.
10
20
**************************************
REM
REM
PM2DEMO.BAS
30 REM
**************************************
40 REM initialize ports, define variables
50 OPEN "com1:9600,n,8,1,RS" AS #1
60 DIM TA(15):REM
values in a frame
70 DIM DA(15):REM
register values
80 DIM R(15):REM
frame values from PanelMate
90 REM main program

100 N=1:REM
initial register values flag
110 ID=O:REM
PLC ID#
120 CLS
130 PRINT "***************************************.'
140 PRINT "**
150 PRINT "**
**
PanelMate Generic Protocol
160 PRINT "**

170 PRINT "***************************************
**
**
180 PRINT
190 PRINT
200 PRINT "
A) Run Generic Demo
210 PRINT "
(Type 'M' while program is"
220 PRINT
running to return to MENU)"
230 PRINT
240 PRINT "
Q) Quit Program
250 PRINT
260 PRINT
270 PRINT "
Select a menu item
280 K$=INKEY$
290 IF K$ ="a" OR K$ ="A" THEN GOTO 330:REM send FRAME/operator input
PanelMate Series
C-1
C. Example Generic Protocol Program
300 IF K$ ="q" OR K$ ="Q" THEN SYSTEM:REM
return to Main Menu
310 IF K$ ="" THEN GOTO 280

320 REM*******************************************
330 REM send FRAME to PanelMate & request operator input 340
K$=INKEY$
350 IF K$ ="M" OR K$ ="m" THEN CLS:GOTO 100 360 CLS
370 REM *******************************************
380 REM host sends data and requests input from operator 390
TA(0) = 132
400 REM set up data for sending to host
410 REM read data from host into task block
420 IF N>1 THEN GOTO 480:REM skip after sending initial values 430
TA(2)=3: REM
register #1 initial value 440 PRINT
450 TA(3)=45:REM
register #2 initial value
460 PRINT
470 N=N+1
480 TA(1)=1: REM
first register to be sent
490 TL=6:REM
number of values in task block
500 REM *********rr**rr******r+r**r******rr******r

510 REM send frame,use to send a generic frame with the contents
520 REM stored at TAO. frame contains TL numbers.
530 BC=ID:REM
initial BCC value based on PLC ID#
540 LC =0: REM
initial counter for number of items in FRAME
550 PRINT "
> > > > > received from Panel Mate < < < < < ",,,,,;
560 PRINT #1,":";ID;: PRINT,,":"; ID;

570 IF LC> =TL THEN GOTO 650
575 REM ramp register 3 value to register 4 value
580 IF TA(4)>TA(5) THEN TA(4)=TA(4)-1:TA(3)=1:REM set bit 1 reg. 2 590 IF
TA(4)<TA(5) THEN TA(4)=TA(4)+1:TA(3)=2:REM set bit 2 reg. 2 600 IF
TA(4)=TA(5) THEN TA(3)=O:REM clear bits reg. 2 610 BC+TA(LC)+BC:REM bcc
algorithm 620 PRINT #1,",";TA(LC);:PRINT ",";TA(LC); 630 LC = LC + 1
640 GOTO 570
650 BC=-BC
660 PRINT #1,",";BC;";";:PRINT ",";BC;";";

670 PRINT "< < < < <sent to PanelMate> > > > >"
680 REM ****************************************** 690
REM interpret received frames
700 REM read in a frame storing the data in TAO. Frame is TL numbers long 710
TL=O:REM
set array length to 0
720 F= 1:REM
found ID# flag
730 BC =0: REM
initialize BCC
740 REM ****************************************** 750

REM read-in 1 char
760 CH$=INPUT$(1,#1): CH=ASC(CH$) 770
PRINT CH$;
780 IF CH< >58 THEN GOTO 740:REM 58=":" ascii 790
REM*******************************************
800 REM read in 1 number terminated by
or ";". returns with
810 REM the number in NM

820 NM=O:NG=1
830 NG=1: REM
number is positive (-1 for negative) 840
REM ******************************************
850 REM read in 1 char
860 CH$=INPUT$(1,#1): CH=ASC(CH$) 870
PRINT CH$;
880 IF CH=45 THEN NG=-NG:GOTO 840:REM 45="-" ascii
890 IF (CH>57)OR(CH<48) THEN GOTO 920:REM 57="9",48="0" ascii number received? 900
NM=(NM*10)+CH-48:REM convert ascii char to decimal value 910 GOTO 840
920 NM=NM*NG
930 IF (CH< >44)AND(CH< >59) THEN GOTO 790:REM 44=",",59=";" ascii (next item in 940 REM: or
end of standard frame format) 950 BC=BC+NM
960 IF F=1 THEN F=O:GOTO 790:REM
skip over ID#
970 R(TL)=NM
980 TL=TL+1
990 IF CH< >59 THEN GOTO 790:REM 59=":" ascii (beginning of standard frame format)
C-448PanelMate Series
PanelMate Series
1000 TL=TL-1
1010 IF BC>0 THEN BC=BC-65536!:GOTO 1010:REM
non-zero is error 1020
IF BC=O THEN GOTO 1050:REM send and calculated bcc add together 1030 PRINT
"check sum error"
1040 TL=0
1050 K$=INKEY$
1060 IF K$="M" OR K$="m" THEN CLS:GOTO 100
1070 REM *******************************w*******w*
1080 IF R(0)=64 THEN GOTO 380:REM
R(0)=task code
no info
1090 REM ***************************www*****ww****

1100 IF R(0)< >65 THEN GOTO 1160:REM
R(0)=task code
get value
1110 DA(R(2)) = R(3): REM
R(2)=addr8ss,R(3)=register value
1120 AD = R(2)
1130 TA(AD + 1) = R(3)
1140 GOTO 380:REM
TA(1) = address,TA(2) = valuel,TA(3) = value2
1150 REM ***** ***** *****************************
1160 IF R(0)< >67 THEN GOTO 1230:REM
R(0)=task code
1170 IF R(4)=0 THEN GOTO 1200:REM
R(4)=value
get bit
1180 DA(R(2))=DA(R(2)) OR (2^(R(3)-1 )):REM R(2) =address,R(3) =bit

1190 GOTO 1220
1200 DA(R(2))=DA(R(2)) AND ((2^(R(3)-1)) XOR &HFFFF) 1210
AD =DA(R(2))
1220 TA(1) = R(2):TA(AD + 2) = DA(R(2)): REM
1230 GOTO 380
TA(1) = address,TA(2) = value
writes bit
Index
A
Acceleratl/On Interface, 2-22 -23, 15-1
Cabling, 15-7
Communication Parameters, 15-8
Diagnostic Indicators, 15-8
Installation, 2-22 Introduction, 222, 15-1 Possible Configurations,
15-1 -6 Word and Bit References,
15-8 -9
Ack (Acknowledge Required), 5-5, 5-10
Active block transfer, 9-10
Direct, 9-10 Group, 910 Rack, 9-10 Size, 9-11
Slot, 9-10
Alarm Acknowledgment, 6-4
Alarm Scan Delay, 9-8
Alarm Summary Page, 11-7
Alarms, 9-12, 11-6, 11-13
Alarms, view or acknowledge, 11-7
Allen-Bradley, 14-1
1770-KF2 Series A, 1770-KF2 Series B, 14-16
1770-KF2 Series B, 14-18
1771-KA, 1771-KA2, 1413
1771-KC, 1771-KD, 14-16
1771-KE, 1771-KF, 14-15
1771-KG, 14-17 1775-KA,
14-14,14-17 1785-KA, 14-14
1785-KE, 14-18
Communications Parameters, 14-12
PLC Bit References, 14-20, 15-10
Switch Settings, 14-13 -18 Word
References, 14-19
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Modules for Direct Connection, 14-17
Modules for PanelMate Connections, 14-11
Modules for PanelMate to DH Communication, 14-15
PanelMate Series
Modules for PanelMate to DH + Connection, 14-18

Modules for PLC Data Highway Connection, 14-13
Multiple Data Highway Connections, 14-3
Alm (Alarm), 5-5,5-10
Assembly and Installation, 2-1
Assembly for Desktop Configuration, 2-4 -7
Audio Feedback Kit, 2-13
Connecting a Printer to PanelMate, 2-11 -12
Fault Relay, 2-13
Installation Guidelines, 2-3
Installation in an Industrial Enclosure, 2-8 -10
Panel Mount Adaptor Kit, 2-15 -17 Rack Mount
Adaptor Kit, 2-18 -20
Remote Connection for Configuration Keyboard, 2-21
Selection Keyboard Shelf, 2-13 -14 Unpacking, 2-1 -2
Assembly for Desktop Configuration, 2-4 -7
Check System Health, 2-7
Clear Memory, 2-6
Configuration Keyboard to Main Video Unit, 2-5
Connect Power, 2-5
Monitor Adjustments, 2-7
Place the Main Video Unit on a Desktop, 2-5
Set the Real-Time Clock, 2-7
Audio Feedback Kit, 2-13
Audio Output, 9-11
Automatic Cancel Inactivity Period, 9-15
B
B (Blink), 5-3, 5-5, 5-9, 5-11, 6-6, 6-11, 7-6, 8-3 -4,
8-10 -11
Bar Colors, 7-9
Bar Elements, functions of, 7-9 -12
Bar and Erase Colors, 7-9 Bar
Direction, 7-9 Bar Height and
Width, 7-9
Control Button Definition Table, 7-13
Control Indicator Display, 7-12
Index
Control Indicator Position, 7-12
Block Check Calculation, 18-13 Block
Control Type, 7-11 Deadband
Transfer Discusssions, 15-17 Block
Range, 7-11 Device Name, 7-10
Transfers
Edit Existing Elements, 7-13
Examples, 15-15
Exit the Bar Element Editor, 7-13

High Alarm Expression, 7-10 Low
Alarm Expression, 7-10 Maximum
Char Size (Character Size), 8-4, 8-11
Calibration, 7-10 Minimum
Character Editor, 4-8 -10
Calibration, 7-10 Numeric Control
Copy Character, 4-9
Definition, 7-12 Value Expression, 7-
Edit, 4-9 Help, 4-10
10
Restore, 4-10 Save
Bar Template and Bar Element Editors, 7-1

Bar Element Editor form, 7-14 Bar
Font, 4-10 Select Font,

4-9 Show Fonts, 4-10
Template Editor form, 7-8 Editing
Character Size, 5-2, 6-2
Existing Templates, 7-6 Functions of
Check System Health, 2-7 -8, 10-7 -8
Bar Elements, 7-9 -12 Functions of
Communication Errors, 11-11 -12
Bar Templates, 7-1 -6
Conditional Expression, 5-3,5-9
Gathering Information for Configuration, 7-7 -8, 7-
Configuration Keyboard, problems, 13-2
13 -14
Configuration Keyboard, remote connection, 2-21
Bar Templates, functions of, 7-1 -6 Alarm
Configuration Mode, 1-6
Acknowledgment, 7-5 Control Button
Configuration Mode, entering, 3-1
Definition Table, 7-6 Control Type, 7-5
Configuration Mode, special features, 1-7
Deadband Range, 7-4 Defining Bar
Configurations, Allen-Bradley, 14-1 -10
Templates, 7-1 Device Name, 7-2 High
Multiple Connections to a Single PanelMate, 14-4
Alarm Expression, 7-4 Low Alarm
Multiple Data Highway Connections, 14-3 PLC-5,
Expression, 7-4 Maximum Calibration,
14-8
7-2 Minimum Calibration, 7-3 Numeric
Configurations, Eaton, 16-3
Control Definition, 7-5 Template Size,
Direct, 16-3 Multiple, 16-
7-2 Units, 7-2
Value 1 Expression, 7-3

Battery Status, 10-9
Battery Test, tone relay, 10-8
Baud Rate, 9-5
BCC/Bit#, 9-6
BG (Background), 5-3, 5-5, 5-9, 5-11, 6-6, 6-11, 7-6, 8-3 4,8-10 -11
Binary-Based Formats, 8-15
Configurations, General Electric, 17-3

Direct, 17-3
Multidrop, 17-3
Configurations, Modicon PLCs, 19-1 -2
Direct, 19-1
Multiple PLCs on a Single Modbus, 19-2
Configurations, Reliance, 20-2 -3
Direct, 20-2
Serial Communications Card, 20-3
Configurations, Siemens, 21-3
Direct, 21-3 Multiple, 21-3
11
PanelMate Series
Index
Configurations, Square D PLCs, 22-2

Direct, 22-2
Decimal Places, 6-2

Decimal-Based Formats, 8-13
Network, 22-2
Default Control Button Labels, 11-5
Configurations, TI PLCs, 23-3
Default PLC Name, 9-7
Direct, 23-3 Direct with
Define System Parameters, 9-11 -18
DCPM, 23-3
Defining Online Labels and System Parameters, 9-1
Configurations, Westinghouse PLCs, 24-2

Cabling, 24-3
Desktop Configuration, assembly, 2-4 -7

Destn (Destination), 8-4, 8-11
Device Name, 5-2,6-2
Direct, 24-2
Directory Editor, 3-1
PLC Bit References, 24-6

Switch Settings, 24-5
Word References, 24-5 Configuring
Pages, before you start, 3-1 Configuring,
Before You Start Configuring Pages, 3-1

Entering the Configuration Mode, 3-1
Functions of the Directory Editor, 3-2 -4
Directory Editor, functions of, 3-2 -4
Example Page, 4-19 Connect Power to 110V
Access the Page Editor, 3-3 Check
AC Power, 2-10 Connect Printer to
Available Memory, 3-4 Copy and
PanelMate, 2-11 -12
Entire Page, 3-4 Delete an Entire
Parallel Printer Interface, 2-11
Page, 3-4 Edit Existing Titles, 3-3
Serial Printer Interface, 2-12
Place Titles on Pages, 3-3
Connect TouchPanel to Main Video Unit, 2-9

Control Button Bit References, initialize all, 11-3
Control Button Definition Table, 5-5, 6-6
B (Blink), 7-13
BG (Background), 7-13
Reordering Pages, 3-4 Return to

the Main Menu, 3-4
Directory, call, 11-5
Display Template and Message Element Editors Display
Template and Message Element form, 8-17 Display
Control Label, 7-13
Template Editor form, 8-6 -7 Display Templates,
FG (Foreground), 7-13
functions of, 8-1 -4 Gathering Information for
PLC Bit Reference, 7-13
Configuration, 8-5 -7, 8-15-17
Control Button Labels, default, 11-5
Message Element Editor form," 8-16
Control Button Reset Delay, 15-13
Message Element, functions of, 8-8 -14
Control Indicator, 5-10

Control Label, 5-6, 5-11, 6-6,6-11, 7-6, 8-3,8-10
Control Type, 6-5
Cursor Direction Selection, 4-16
Display Templates, functions of, 8-1 -4

Control Button Definition Table, 8-3'
Defining Display Templates, 8-1 Editing
Existing Templates, 8L5''
Cursor Movement, 4-16 Cursor
Exiting the Display Template Editor, 8-5
Moves, 1-7 Cursors, 1-7
Message Expression, 8-2 Message Library,
8-4 Template Type, 8-2

Test Message, 8-3
Data Bits, 9-4
Documentation, 10-1
Data Highway/Data Highway Plus Applications
Documentation, print, 10-2
Unsolicited Write Message, 15-18 Deadband

Range, 6-4
Decimal Place Destinations, 8-13
PanelMate Series
ill
Index
PLC Bit References, 17-15
Switch Settings, 17-8 -13 Word
Eaton, 16-1
References, 17-14
Bit References, 16-9

Cabling, 16-4
General Electric Series 6 and Series 6 Plus
CCM2,17-10
Switch Settings, 16-5 -7
CCM3, 17-11 I/O

CCM, 17-11
Word References, 16-8

Edit Parameters, 4-8
Generic Protocol, 18-1
Editing Existing Templates, 7-6 Elect
Checking the Communication Link, 18-15
(Electrical), 9-5 Element Origin, 5-10
Communications Using Task Blocks, 18-20
Element Selection, 4-16 Element, add
Example program, C-1 Hardware Interface,
to page, 4-7 Element, delete, 4-8
18-1
Element, edit existing, 4-7 Enclosure,
Implement Generic Protocol Frames, 18-18
install PanelMate in, 2-8 Erase Colors,
Method of Operation, 18-2 PanelMate
7-9 Errors, 1-7
Configuration, 18-3 -4 PLC Name and Port
Errors, Communication, 11-11 -12
Editor, 18-15
Errors, System, 11-9 -10 Example
Generic Protocol Driver Development, 18-16 -22

Connect Serial Cable, 18-17 Establish
Page, 4-16 -19

Configuring Example Page, 4-19
Communication Link, 18-16
Exploring the Example Page, 4-17
Select Generic Protocol on PanelMate, 18-16

Simulate Generic Protocol on Host, 18-17
Generic Protocol Format, 18-5 -14
F
Fault Relay, 2-13, 9-12, 11-8
Block Check Calculation, 18-13
Fault Relay, energize the, 11-3
Frames, 18-5
FG (Foreground), 5-3, 5-5, 5-9, 5-11, 6-6, 6-11, 7-6, 8-3 -4,
Task Blocks, 18-6
8-10 -11
Task Codes, 18-7
Field Colors, 1-7
Generic Protocol, format, 9-5
Font Direction Selection, 4-16
Graphic Elements, functions of, 5-8 -10
Fonts, redefine, 9-12
Fonts, show, 4-15
Device Name, 5-8 Editing Existing
Formatting Types, 8-14
Elements, 5-11
Function Keys, 1-7
Exit the Graphic Element Editor, 5-11

Symbol Definition Table, 5-8
Graphics Mode, 1-10
General Electric, 17-1
Graphics Mode, page editing, 4-7
Bit Writes With Ladder Logic, 17-18, 17-23 Bit

Writes Without Ladder Logic, 17-17,17-23
Cabling, 17-4 -7
CCM2,17-5
Hardware, 1-5
Hardware Maintenance, 12-1
Helpful Hints for Getting Started

Cursor Moves, 1-7
Cursors, 1-7
Field Colors, 1-7
PanelMate Series
Index
Function Keys, 1-7

Improving Operator Performance, 1-13
Special Features of Configuration Mode, 1-7
High Alarm Expression, 6-3
Host Display Window, 9-13
I/O Referencing
Active Block Transfer, 15-11
Monitor Block Transfer, 15-12
Monitored I/0,15-10
ID#, 9-6
Immediate Automatic Page Change, 9-13
Indicator Template and Graphic Element Editor, 5-1
Functions of Graphic Elements, 5-8 -10 Functions
of Indicator Template, 5-1 -5 Gathering Information
for Configuration, 5-6 -7, 5-11-12
Graphic Element Editor, 5-12
Indicator Template Editor, 5-7
Indicator Templates, functions of, 5-1 -5
Defining Indicator Templates, 5-1
Editing Existing Templates, 5-6
Exit the Indicator Template Editor, 5-61
Industrial Enclosure, installation in, 2-8 -10
Input Value Expression, 6-5, 7-5
Install PanelMate in Enclosure, 2-8
Installation Guidelines, 2-3
Environmental Considerations, 2-3
Wiring Considerations, 2-4
Installation in an Industrial Enclosure, 2-8 -10
Check System Health, 2-8
Connect Power, 2-10
Connect TouchPanel to Main Video Unit, 2-9
Install PanelMate in Enclosure, 2-~:;.
Load PanelMate with your System Configuration, 2-8
Turn Keyswitch to Run Mode and Plug in Cables, 2-10
Installation of Acceleratl/On Board, 2-22
Installation of Dual Serial Board, 2-24 -25
Installation, assembly, 2-1
Introduction to PanelMate
Configuration Mode, 1-6
Graphics Mode, 1-10
PanelMate Series
Hardware, 1-5
PanelMate Overview and Benefits, 1-1 -2
Product Description, 1-3 -15
Run Mode, 1-11
Template Mode, 1-8
ISA Symbols, 4-7
L
Labels, 9-19 -22
Labels, change online, 9-20
Labels, startup online, 9-20
Load PanelMate with Your System Configuration, 2-8

Low Alarm Expression, 6-4
M
Maintenance, 12-1 Manual,
how to use, 1-1 Manual,
organization, 1-2 Memory,
10-1
Memory transfer using EPROM reader cartridge, 10-4
Memory Transfers using a BackPac, 10-3 Memory
Transfers using EPROM, 10-5 Memory Transfers using
the IBM PC, 10-6 Memory, Allen-Bradley PLCs, 14-1
Memory, clear, 2-6,10-9
Memory, Eaton PLCs, 16-1 -2
Memory, General Electric PLCs, 17-1 -2
Memory, Modicon PLCs
Memory, 19-1
Memory, Reliance PLCs, 20-2
Memory, Siemens, 21-1 -2
Memory, Square D PLCs, 22-1
Memory, Texas Instruments PLCs, 23-1 -2
Memory, transfer, 10-2 -6 Memory,
Westinghouse PLCs, 24-1 Message Element,
functions of, 8-8 -14
Clock and Calendar Access, 8-15
Direction, 8-8
Editing Existing Elements, 8-15
Exit the Message Element Editor, 8-15,
Index
Configuring a PanelMate, 4-1

Example Page, 4-16 -19
Graphics Mode, 4-6 -8
Page Layout, 4-2
Parameters Editing Functions, 4-15
Symbol Editor, 4-11 -13
Template Mode, 4-3 -5
Window Mode, 4-14
Page Editor in Graphics Mode, 4-6 -8
Graphics Mode Page Editing, 4-7
Global Messages, 8-9

Message Expression, 8-9
Message Length; 8-8
Message Library, 840
Register References within Messages, 8-11
Test Message, 8-9
Message Scan Delay, 9-8
Message Text, 8-4, 8-11
Model, PLC, 9-7
Modicon, 19-1
484 PLC/J474 Modbus Communication Interface, 19-7

884 Modbus Ports, 19-4
ISA Symbol Set, 4-7

Overview, 4-6
984 and 584 Modbus Ports, 19-4

Cabling, 19-3
Micro 84/J375 Modbus Adapter, 19-5
PLC Bit Reference, 19-11
Modicon PLC adapters, 19-2
Monitor Adjustments, 2-7, 12-2
Monitor, problems, 13-1
Msg# (Message Number), 8-4, 8-10
-Page Editor in Template Mode, 4-3 -5

Access the Graphics Mode, 4-6
Add a Page, 4-3
Check Available Memory, 4-5
Copy Templates, 4-4
Copy Templates from Another Page, 4-5
Delete Templates, 4-5
Edit a Template Definition, 4-4
Exit the Page Editor, 4-6
Move Templates, 4-4
Save a Page, 4-5
Page Editor, exit, 4-8

Page Number, startup, 9-14
Page, Alarm Summary, 11-7
Page, call a new, 11-5
Page, PLC Selection, 11-5
Page, save, 4-8
Panel Mount Adaptor Kit, 2-15 -17
PanelMate II/III Online Operation, 11-13 -14
PanelMate, introduction, 1-1
,'Parameters Editing, 4-15
Parameters Editing Functions
Direct Editing Functions, 4-15
Parameters Editing, 4.15
Parameters, edit, 4-8
Parity, 9-4
Network ID#, 9-4

Numeric Control Definition, 6-5
Input Value Expression, 7-12
Target Word Address, 7-12
Online Labels, 9-20.

Online Operation, PanelMate II, 11-13 -14
Operator Input, 9-11, 11-6
Operator Performance, improving, 1-13
Operators, 5-4
Origin Cell, identify element's, 4-8
Overview and Benefits, PanelMate, 1-1-2
PLC Bit Reference, 5-6, 5-11, 6-6, 6-11, 7-6, 8-3, 8-10
P
Page Change Register, 9-17
Page Editor, 4-1
Character Editor, 4-9 -10
vi
,i
PLC Name and Port Editor, 18-15

PLC Name and Port Parameters, 9-2 -8
PLC Name Table, 9-6`
,'PLC Name, default, 9-7
PanelMate Series
Index
PLC Page Selection, 11-5

Port, 9-7

Remote Alarm Acknowledge Bit, 9-16
Port Parameter Table, 9-2
Remote Connection for Configuration Keybo*d, 2'41.:
PowerUp Diagnostics, 10-9
Remote Enable Fault Relay Bit, 9-17

Remote I/O Configuration, 9-9 -10
Printer, connect to PanelMate, 2-11 -12
, f , .:`.
Active Block Transfer Table, 9-10
Printer, parallel interface, 2-11

Printer, serial interface, 2-12
Active Rack Table, 9-9

Remote I/O Network Applications
Product Description, 1-3 -15
Active Racks, 15-13 Block

R
Rack Mount Adaptor Kit, 2-18 -20
Transfers, 15-14
Remote Silence Alarm Horn Bit, 9-16
Reset Clock Bit, 9-18 Retry Delay,
Readout Elements, functions of, 6-8 -10
9-14
Run Mode, 1-11
Character Size, 6-8
Run Mode Operations, 11-3=-8

Run Mode, enter, 11-3

Control Type, 6-10
Run Mode, power-up sequenc6 11-1-2

Run Mode, test, 11-3
Deadband Range, 6-9
Direction, 6-8
Editing Existing Elements, 6-11
Exit the Readout Template Editor,
High Alarm Expression, 6-9
Low Alarm Expression, 6-9
Scan Delay, alarm, 9-8

Scan Delay, message, 9-8
641
Scan Delay, screen, 9-8
il
Screen Blanking Inactivity Period, 9-15

`Screen Scan Delay, 9-8 Siemens, 21-1
Numeric Control Definition, 6-1.0,

Readout Length, 6-8
Value Expression, 6-8
Cabling, 21-4
Readout Template and
Communications Parameters, 21-4 .
Readout
Element Editors
6-6-7,6-11
PLC Bit References, 21-6 -
Functions of Readout Elements, 6-8 -10
Functions of Readout Templates, 6-1 -5
Word, byte, and bit references, 21-7
Readout Element Editor form 6-12 . ;

Readout Template Editor form, 6-7
Readout Templates, functions of6;1,,5;
Special Features of Configuration Mode 1

Specifications, B-1';
Square D, 22-1
Defining Readout Templates,,6 11
Cabling, 22-3
Editing Existing Templates, 6-6
Exit the Readout Template Editor, 6-6
DIP Switches, 22-6
Real-Time Clock, setting the, 2-7
Switch Settings, 22-5 -7 Thumbwheel
Register References Within Messages, 8-1.1
Switches, 22-5
Reliance AutoMate, 20-1

Cabling, 20-4
Communications Parameters, 20-4 _
PanelMate Series
-, . 'I. iPLC Bit
References, 22-10,'

JUI
!';Stop Bits, 9-4 )J

(Symbol, 5-9
vii
Index
Symbol Editor; 48, 41143

System Confgur.4tion, load, 11-3
System Configuration, load with your, 2-8
Sys em Errors, 11-9 -10
System Health Utilities, 10-1
System He pith. t;:aieck, 2-'7 ~-8,.i0.-7 -8
("'Dr9 -22 ".System
Cvervie vl, 11-4
Systefii-Par4 ixzet ~5; define, :.9-1, 9-11.18 S'istpm Utilities M nu, 9.1; 1.0-1
Cabluag,;,23-4
CoFs~iri ti&catzons-Parameters,.23-4
Dual Qom atna>ation Port Module, 23-5
PLC Bit Ri~ferences, 23-7 Switeh.Settings,
23-5 Word R:efeie lees -23-6 e a;id t 7 =
set, 9-14
'Tow** e1.She<.f 2-13 -14
1 ouch? uel problems 1263
Tram*,* Nlemore: Utility,= accessing, 10.3
Transfer/Merge Utr1ity A-1
Trouibfesltac ti ,g Guide, 13-1
Type, "9
Typographical Co ventions, 1-2
Target Word Address 6 - 1

Task Blinks, 18-6 Task: Codes
18-7
132:- Ho,i,SenOs Data/ zargt is Operator Inpu
18^t .
133 -- Host Requests, Operator Inp~L t from .PM.,
.18-8 134`- host Re bests PM Re-Transmit Last Vrame,
18=9
4 -'HGs ends Data to PanelMate, 18-8
S Host'RetTests Current P896-from Pa fielMaie,
18 8
M &finds Standard Ackplbwle gment to Host,
18 Sends
-rU Double-Precision Value to Host, 18e 6 - It!i
c_
11
67 - PM Sends Control Button Input to Host, 18-11 68
- Host Transmits Data thru PM to Printer, 18-12 69 Host Transmits Message to Display Window, 18-12
70 - Erase Section of Host Display Window, 18-13
PM Sends Single-Precision Value to Host, 18-10
Template Definition Table, 5-2
Template Label, 5-3
Template Mode, 1-8,4-8
Template Size, 5-2, 6-2
Test in Run Mode, 11-3
Test, battery, tone relay, 10-8
Test, Configuration Keyboard, 10-8
Test, display, 10-7
Tests, ,Membrane Keypads, 10-8
Texas Instruments, 23-1
Vill
,Jnits 6-2
Unpackiit -1-2
Use, 9-3
Using Basic Command Set with the i'CC~-`5; 14-10
Accessing Daia, 14-1,!?;, Cone=.ux ati~i; Entries,
1-.4-10 Controatiq.S Datz,141,10 P >C-5
Configurations.-114 -10
'
Using PLC Com m And- et
I/O Format, 14-23
Using PLC-5 Command Set, 14-8
Accessing Data, 14-9
Configuration Entries, 14-9
Controlling Data, 14-9 General
Format, 14-22 PL .-5
Configurations, 14-8 Status
Format, 14-24
V

W
Westinghouse Numa-Logic, 24-1
Window Mode, 4-8,4-14
PanelMate Series

PM I II III Manual

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

PM I II III Manual

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

OBS0LETE

Printed in the USA

Eaton IDT, Inc., 1992

Enhancements .......................................................................................................................... 1-3

Configuration Mode ............................................................................................................... 1-6

Special Features of Configuration Mode ............................................................................. 1-7

Template Mode ....................................................................................................................... 1-8

Improving Operator Performance .......................................................................................... 1-13

Chapter 2. Assembly and Installation .............................................................................................. 2-1

Installation Guidelines ................................................................................................................................2-3

Wiring Considerations ............................................................................................................. 2-4

Assembly for Desktop Configuration .......................................................................................................2-4

Configuration Keyboard to Main Video Unit ...................................................................... 2-5

Connect Power ......................................................................................................................... 2-5

Check System Health ............................................................................................................. 2-7

Set the Real-Time Clock ......................................................................................................... 2-7

Installation in an Industrial Enclosure ...................................................................................................... 2-8

Check System Health ................................................................................................................ 2-8

Load PanelMate with Your System Configuration ............................................................. 2-8

Install PanelMate in Enclosure ............................................................................................... 2-8

Connect TouchPanel to Main Video Unit ............................................................................ 2-9

Connect Power ........................................................................................................................... 2-10

Connect Printer to PanelMate ................................................................................................................... 2-11

Parallel Printer Interface ......................................................................................................... 2-11

Serial Printer Interface ............................................................................................................ 2-12

Fault Relay ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-13

2.7 Audio Feedback Kit ............................................................................................................................................ 2-13

TouchPanelShelf .......................................................................................................................................... 2-13

2.9 Panel Mount Adaptor Kit ..................................................................................................................................2-15

2.13 Dual Serial Port Board ....................................................................................................................................2-24

Chapter 3. Directory Editor ............................................................................................................... -1

Before You Start Configuring Pages .........................................................................................................3-1

3.2 Entering the Configuration Mode ...................................................................................................................3-1

Functions of the Directory Editor ..............................................................................................................3-2

Place Titles on Pages ...............................................................................................................3-3

Access the Page Editor ............................................................................................................3-3

Edit Existing Titles .................................................................................................................... 3-3

Reordering Pages .....................................................................................................................3-4

Delete an Entire Page ..............................................................................................................3-4

Copy an Entire Page ................................................................................................................3-4

Check Available Memory ........................................................................................................3-4

Return to the Main Menu ........................................................................................................3-4

Chapter 4. Page Editor .................................................................................................................... 4-1

Configuring PanelMate ...............................................................................................................................4-1

4.2 Page Layout ..........................................................................................................................................................42

Add a Template ........................................................................................................................4-3

Edit a Template Definition ..................................................................................................... 4-4

Move Templates ........................................................................................................................4-4

Copy Templates ........................................................................................................................44

Delete Templates ...................................................................................................................... 4-5

Copy Templates from Another Page ..................................................................................... 4-5

Save a Page ................................................................................................................................ 4-5

Check Available Memory ........................................................................................................ 4-5

Access the Graphics Mode .................................................................................................... 4-6

Exit the Page Editor ................................................................................................................. 4-6

4.4 Page Editor in Graphics Mode ........................................................................................................................ 4-6

Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 4-6

ISA Symbol Set (PanelMate II/III) ....................................................................................... 47

Graphics Mode Page Editing ................................................................................................. 4-7

Character Editor ........................................................................................................................................... 49

Edit ......................................................................................................................... 4-9

Copy Character ...................................................................................................... 4-9

Help ....................................................................................................................... 4-10